Installation and

Configuration Guide

Version: 10.5
10.5, October 2016
Copyright © 2016 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved.
If you have not executed a written or electronic agreement with MicroStrategy or any authorized MicroStrategy distributor (any such agreement, a
"Separate Agreement"), the following terms apply:
This software and documentation are the proprietary and confidential information of MicroStrategy Incorporated and may not be provided to any other person. Copyright ©
2001-2016 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved.
THIS SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR LIMITED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER MICROSTRATEGY
INCORPORATED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE AND
NONINFRINGMENT, QUALITY OR ACCURACY. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT MICROSTRATEGY, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED
WITH THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
In no event will MicroStrategy, Incorporated. or any other person involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Software be liable to you on account of any claim
for damage, including any lost profits, lost savings, or other special, incidental, consequential, or exemplary damages, including but not limited to any damages assessed against
or paid by you to any third party, arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, even if MicroStrategy, Inc. or any such
other person or entity has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for the claim by any other party. In addition, MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved in
the creation, production, or distribution of the Software shall not be liable for any claim by you or any other party for damages arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or
performance of such Software and Documentation, based upon principles of contract warranty, negligence, strict liability for the negligence of indemnity or contribution, the
failure of any remedy to achieve its essential purpose, or otherwise. The entire liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. and your exclusive remedy, shall not exceed, at the option of
MicroStrategy, Inc., either a full refund of the price paid, or replacement of the Software. No oral or written information given out expands the liability of MicroStrategy, Inc.
beyond that specified in the above limitation of liability. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above
limitation may not apply to you.
The information contained in this manual (the Documentation) and the Software are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by MicroStrategy, Inc. MicroStrategy, Inc. reserves
the right to make periodic modifications to the Software or the Documentation without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision. Copying, duplicating, selling, or
otherwise distributing any part of the Software or Documentation without prior written consent of an authorized representative of MicroStrategy, Inc. are prohibited. U.S.
Government Restricted Rights. It is acknowledged that the Software and Documentation were developed at private expense, that no part is public domain, and that the
Software and Documentation are Commercial Computer Software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to
them. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFAR 252.227-7013 et. seq. or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Contractor is MicroStrategy, Incorporated., 1850 Towers Crescent Plaza, Tysons Corner, VA 22182. Rights are reserved under copyright laws of the United States with respect to
unpublished portions of the Software.
The following terms and notices apply regardless of whether you have executed a Separate Agreement:
Trademark Information
The following are either trademarks or registered trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries:
MicroStrategy, MicroStrategy 10, MicroStrategy 10 Secure Enterprise, MicroStrategy 9, MicroStrategy 9s, MicroStrategy Analytics, MicroStrategy Analytics Platform, MicroStrategy
Desktop, MicroStrategy Operations Manager, MicroStrategy Analytics Enterprise, MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise, MicroStrategy Web,
MicroStrategy Mobile, MicroStrategy Server, MicroStrategy Parallel Relational In-Memory Engine (MicroStrategy PRIME), MicroStrategy MultiSource, MicroStrategy OLAP
Services, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal, MicroStrategy Distribution Services, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy
Transaction Services, MicroStrategy Visual Insight, MicroStrategy Web Reporter, MicroStrategy Web Analyst, MicroStrategy Office, MicroStrategy Data Mining Services,
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, MicroStrategy Health Center, MicroStrategy Analyst, MicroStrategy Developer, MicroStrategy Web Professional, MicroStrategy Architect,
MicroStrategy SDK, MicroStrategy Command Manager, MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager, MicroStrategy Object Manager, MicroStrategy Integrity Manager, MicroStrategy
System Manager, MicroStrategy Analytics App, MicroStrategy Mobile App, MicroStrategy Tech Support App, MicroStrategy Mobile App Platform, MicroStrategy Cloud,
MicroStrategy R Integration, Usher, MicroStrategy Usher, Usher Badge, Usher Security, Usher Security Server, Usher Mobile, Usher Analytics, Usher Network Manager, Usher
Professional, MicroStrategy Services, MicroStrategy Professional Services, MicroStrategy Consulting, MicroStrategy Customer Services, MicroStrategy Education, MicroStrategy
University, MicroStrategy Managed Services, BI QuickStrike, Mobile QuickStrike, Transaction Services QuickStrike Perennial Education Pass, MicroStrategy Web Based Training
(WBT), MicroStrategy World, Best in Business Intelligence, Pixel Perfect, Global Delivery Center, Direct Connect, Enterprise Grade Security For Every Business, Build Your Own
Business Apps, Code-Free, Welcome to Ideal, The World’s Most Comprehensive Analytics Platform, The World’s Most Comprehensive Analytics Platform. Period.
Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Specifications subject to change without notice. MicroStrategy is not responsible for errors or omissions. MicroStrategy makes no warranties or commitments concerning the
availability of future products or versions that may be planned or under development.
Patent Information
This product is patented. One or more of the following patents may apply to the product sold herein: U.S. Patent Nos. 6,154,766, 6,173,310, 6,260,050, 6,263,051, 6,269,393,
6,279,033, 6,567,796, 6,587,547, 6,606,596, 6,658,093, 6,658,432, 6,662,195, 6,671,715, 6,691,100, 6,694,316, 6,697,808, 6,704,723, 6,741,980, 6,765,997, 6,768,788,
6,772,137, 6,788,768, 6,798,867, 6,801,910, 6,820,073, 6,829,334, 6,836,537, 6,850,603, 6,859,798, 6,873,693, 6,885,734, 6,940,953, 6,964,012, 6,977,992, 6,996,568,
6,996,569, 7,003,512, 7,010,518, 7,016,480, 7,020,251, 7,039,165, 7,082,422, 7,113,474, 7,113,993, 7,127,403, 7,174,349, 7,181,417, 7,194,457, 7,197,461, 7,228,303, 7,260,577,
7,266,181, 7,272,212, 7,302,639, 7,324,942, 7,330,847, 7,340,040, 7,356,758, 7,356,840, 7,415,438, 7,428,302, 7,430,562, 7,440,898, 7,486,780, 7,509,671, 7,516,181, 7,559,048,
7,574,376, 7,617,201, 7,725,811, 7,801,967, 7,836,178, 7,861,161, 7,861,253, 7,881,443, 7,925,616, 7,945,584, 7,970,782, 8,005,870, 8,035,382, 8,051,168, 8,051,369, 8,094,788,
8,130,918, 8,296,287, 8,321,411, 8,452,755, 8,521,733, 8,522,192, 8,577,902, 8,606,813, 8,607,138, 8,645,313, 8,761,659, 8,775,807, 8,782,083, 8,812,490, 8,832,588, 8,943,044,
8,943,187. 8,958,537, 8,966,597, 8,983,440, 8,984,274, 8,984,288, 8,995,628, 9,027,099, 9,027,105, 9,037, 577, 9,038,152, 9,076,006, 9,086,837, 9,116,954, 9,124,630,
9,154,303, 9,154,486, 9,160,727, 9,166,986, 9,171,073, 9,172,699, 9,173,101, 9,183, 317, 9,195,814, 9,208,213, 9,208,444, 9,262,481, 9,264,415, 9,264,480, 9,269,358, 9,275,127,
9,292,571, 9,300,646, 9,311,683 9,313,206, 9,330,174, 9,338,157, 9,361,392, 9,378,386, 9,386,416, 9,391,782, 9,397,838, 9,397,980, 9,405,804, 9,413,710, and 9,413,794. Other
patent applications are pending.
Third Party Software
Various MicroStrategy products contain the copyrighted technology or software of third parties ("Third Party Software"). Your use of MicroStrategy products is subject to all
applicable terms and conditions associated with any such Third Party Software.
CONTENTS
Book Overview and Additional Resources 1
About this book 1
1. Planning Your Installation 1
Upgrade considerations 1
MicroStrategy products and components 1
Installation prerequisites 18
Installation considerations 35
Certificates used during Usher Installation and Configuration 35
Methods of installation 44
Licensing information 47
Installation and configuration checklists 48
2. Installing MicroStrategy on Windows 51
Installation procedure 52
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 76
3. Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux 77
Installation procedures on UNIX and Linux 77
Usher Security Installation and Configuration 100
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 117
4. Activating Your Installation 118
Request an Activation Code 118
Activate your installation 120
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 121
Server Activation FAQ 121

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. i

Installation and Configuration Guide

5. Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server 128

Communicating with databases 128
Initial MicroStrategy configuration 137
Connecting to a data warehouse and other repositories 171
Creating a project 185
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 185
6. Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations
Manager 186
Deploying with IIS (Windows) 187
General steps to deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications 190
Deploying with WebLogic and Apache (Solaris) 194
Deploying with WebSphere and IBM HTTP Server (AIX) 208
Deploying with Oracle Glassfish Server (Solaris) 218
Deploying with Tomcat (Windows) 226
Deploying with Tomcat (Linux) 232
Deploying with SAP NetWeaver (Windows) 237
Deploying with Oracle 10g (Windows) 241
Deploying with JBoss (Windows) 244
Administering your MicroStrategy Web deployment 249
Using absolute paths to share configuration files 251
Configuring third-party data sources for importing data 251
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 253
7. Setting Up Documents and HTML Documents 254
Prerequisites 254
Executing documents and HTML documents in UNIX/Linux 255
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 260
8. Automated Installation on Windows 261
Installation log file 262
Methods of installation 262
Installing and configuring with a response.ini file 263
Silent installation 311
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 316
9. Automated Installation on UNIX and Linux 317
Silent installation 317
Configuring MicroStrategy in command line mode 337

ii © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 338

10. Deploying OEM Applications 339
Creating DSNs for OEM environments 340
Configuring a MicroStrategy installation 341
Designing a project and reporting environment 341
Customizing MicroStrategy Web 342
Deploying a MicroStrategy OEM application 342
Tuning an OEM deployment 347
Updating OEM applications 348
Troubleshooting support for MicroStrategy OEM applications 349
11. Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools 350
Creating a DSN for a data source 350
Testing ODBC connectivity 351
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini file 353
Configuring and controlling Intelligence Server 367
Supporting reserved words and characters 371
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 372
12. Adding or Removing MicroStrategy Components 373
Adding or removing MicroStrategy components on Windows 373
Re-installing MicroStrategy components on Windows 374
Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on Windows 376
Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on UNIX and Linux 377
Connecting to Databases and Data Sources 380
Creating DSNs for specific data sources 380
Creating database connections in Web 414
Configuring ODBC parameters with odbc.ini 416
Installing the MicroStrategy Hadoop Gateway 417
Installing the Hadoop Gateway 417
Troubleshooting 422
Reviewing general installation errors 422
Graph and document support of non-Western European fonts 422
Server port number errors 423
DSN connection errors 423
Metadata and other repository creation errors 424

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. iii

Installation and Configuration Guide

Permission errors 425

Glossary 426
Index 463

iv © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

Book Overview and Additional
Resources
The MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide provides comprehensive
information on how to install and configure MicroStrategy software, as well as basic
maintenance guidelines. This guide gets you started using the UNIX, Linux, and Windows
versions of the MicroStrategy platform.
For UNIX and Linux installations, this guide assumes a basic understanding of how to
use UNIX and Linux either from a UNIX/Linux server or by using a viewer on a PC.
For tasks that require advanced system administration commands, this document
assumes you are either familiar with those commands or can contact your system
administrator.
The main chapters of this guide follow the recommended progression of steps to install
and configure MicroStrategy. Refer to Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation for
important installation prerequisites before you begin installing MicroStrategy.

For details on how to progress through the remaining chapters of this guide, see
the section Installation and configuration checklists, page 48 of Chapter 1,
Planning Your Installation.

The appendixes contain the following additional reference information, which you may
require depending on your specific needs:
• Connecting to Databases and Data Sources provides details and steps to configure
ODBC and DSNs for your data warehouse connections.
• Troubleshooting provides various troubleshooting steps and techniques to take in
certain installation and configuration scenarios.

About this book

The chapters in this book provide information about:
• All MicroStrategy components
• Installation and configuration procedures

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 1

Installation and Configuration Guide

• System tuning considerations

• Troubleshooting and maintenance guidelines

The sample documents and images in this guide, as well as some example steps,
were created with dates that may no longer be available in the MicroStrategy
Tutorial project. If you are re-creating an example, replace the year(s) shown in
this guide with the most recent year(s) available in the software.

How to find business scenarios and examples

Within this guide, many of the concepts discussed are accompanied by business scenarios
or other descriptive examples. Many of the examples use the MicroStrategy Tutorial,
which is MicroStrategy’s sample warehouse and project. Information about the
MicroStrategy Tutorial, which is included as part of the MicroStrategy Analytics
Modules, can be found in the Basic Reporting Guide.
Other examples in this book may use the Human Resources Analytics Module project,
which includes a set of sample reports and dashboards, and the objects use to build those
reports and dashboards.
Detailed examples of advanced reporting functionality can be found in the Advanced
Reporting Guide.

What’s new in this guide

Each release of the Installation and Configuration Guide is updated to reflect the
installation requirements of the associated version of the MicroStrategy product suite.
The sections below document the additional improvements to the documentation for
recent releases.

MicroStrategy 10.5
• On Linux environments, MicroStrategy now includes Messaging Services. This offers
a fast and scalable message broker for distributed deployments. For new installations,
the Messaging Services is enabled out-of-the-box by default. For upgrades to the 10.5
Feature Release, Messaging Services needs to be configured in conjunction with the
existing Intelligence Server(s). For more information, see MicroStrategy Messaging
Services.
• MicroStrategy has added support for various drivers. For more information, see the
MicroStrategy 10.5 Readme.

MicroStrategy 10.4
• When installing a new instance of the MicroStrategy Platform using the Express
installation option, you can perform the install by a silent installation, enabling the
installation inside custom applications or other installations.

2 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Installation prerequisites and other important information has been updated to

reflect MicroStrategy 10.4. For complete information, see the MicroStrategy 10.4
Readme.

MicroStrategy 10.3
• You can install the entire MicroStrategy Enterprise Platform on one Windows server
using Express Installation, significantly reducing the time for end-to-end installation
and configuration. For steps, see Performing a MicroStrategy Express installation.
• Installation prerequisites and other important information has been updated to
reflect MicroStrategy 10.3. For complete information, see the MicroStrategy 10.3
Readme.

MicroStrategy 10.2
• MicroStrategy 10.2 offers a streamlined Linux installation process for Usher Security
and Usher Analytics. The pre-installation and post-installation steps have been
updated to reflect important changes to the installation process. For detailed Usher
Security installation steps, see Usher Security Installation and Configuration.

MicroStrategy 10
• MicroStrategy Operations Manager is a web-based administrative tool that allows you
to view and monitor all of your MicroStrategy environments in one place. For steps
on deploying Operations Manager, see Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web,
Mobile Server, and Operations Manager.
• You can use MicroStrategy Web to import data from various data sources. Some data
sources require you to configure a secure connection between your third-party data
source and MicroStrategy Web, as described in Configuring third-party data sources
for importing data, page 251.
• To define a new database connection directly from Web for users to import data
from a data source into MicroStrategy, see Creating database connections in Web,
page 414.

MicroStrategy 9.5.1
• You can install MicroStrategy Usher on a Linux machine. For steps to install Usher
and the Analytics Platform, see Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux.

MicroStrategy 9.5 (MicroStrategy 9s)

• MicroStrategy 9.5 integrates the MicroStrategy Analytics Platform with
MicroStrategy Usher. MicroStrategy Usher is a mobile identity platform for
enterprise security. Usher enables users to electronically validate their identity using

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 3

Installation and Configuration Guide

the Usher app and mobile badge on their smartphone, instead of entering a
password, displaying a physical ID card, or using a physical key.
MicroStrategy 9.5 supports Usher as a primary authentication method for logging
into a project through MicroStrategy Mobile and MicroStrategy Web. Using QR code
generation in MicroStrategy, users can scan the code with Usher on their
smartphones and gain access to the MicroStrategy project.
Usher is also supported for two-factor authentication in Web.
MicroStrategy 9.5 also provides support for biometric security, location-based access
restrictions, and time-based access restrictions.
To configure your MicroStrategy 9.5 installation, see the help page for
MicroStrategy 9.5.

MicroStrategy Analytics Enterprise

• The name of MicroStrategy Desktop has been changed to MicroStrategy Developer.

MicroStrategy 9.4
• Installation prerequisites and other important information has been updated to
reflect MicroStrategy 9.4. This information is provided in Chapter 1, Planning Your
Installation.
• Information on configuring the MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Impala Wire
Protocol is provided in MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Impala Wire Protocol for
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page 386.

Prerequisites
Before working with this document, you should be familiar with:
• The nature and structure of the data to use for your business intelligence application
• Your system’s configuration, including details such as hardware configuration,
installed applications, available memory, and so on
• If installing on UNIX or Linux, the basics of the UNIX or Linux operating system

Who should use this guide

This document is designed for system administrators who install, configure, and
maintain MicroStrategy software on the UNIX, Linux, or Windows operating systems.
This document discusses how to perform automated and silent installations. Automated
and silent installations require advanced techniques such as creating and running
response.ini files. Therefore, automated and silent installations should be handled by
system administrators with full knowledge of the environment and the desired
MicroStrategy installation.

4 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Resources

Documentation
MicroStrategy provides both manuals and online help; these two information sources
provide different types of information, as described below:
• Manuals: In general, MicroStrategy manuals provide:
▫ Introductory information and concepts
▫ Examples and images
▫ Checklists and high-level procedures to get started
The steps to access the manuals are described in Accessing manuals and other
documentation sources, page 10.
Most of these manuals are also available printed in a bound, soft cover format. To
purchase printed manuals, contact your MicroStrategy Account Executive with a
purchase order number.
• Help: In general, MicroStrategy help provides:
▫ Detailed steps to perform procedures
▫ Descriptions of each option on every software screen

Translations
Due to translation time, manuals in languages other than English may contain
information that is one or more releases behind. You can see the version number on the
title page of each manual.

Finding information
You can search all MicroStrategy books and Help for a word or phrase, with a simple
Google™ search at http://www.google.com. For example, type “MicroStrategy derived
metric” or “MicroStrategy logical table” into a Google search. As described above, books
typically describe general concepts and examples; Help typically provides detailed steps
and screen options. To limit your search to MicroStrategy books, on Google’s main page
you can click More, then select Books.

Additional formats
MicroStrategy manuals are available as electronic publications, downloadable on the
Apple iBookstore or Google Play, and can be read on your iOS or Android device
respectively. To download a book, search for the book’s title in the iBookstore or Google

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 5

Installation and Configuration Guide

Play respectively. To view a list of manuals that are currently available, scan the following
QR codes using your device’s camera:
For iOS devices, scan the following QR code:

For Android devices, scan the following QR code:

For new MicroStrategy releases, it may take several days for the latest manuals to
be available on the iBookstore or Google Play.

Manuals for MicroStrategy overview and evaluation

• Introduction to MicroStrategy: Evaluation Guide
Instructions for installing, configuring, and using the MicroStrategy Evaluation
Edition of the software. This guide also includes a detailed, step-by-step evaluation
process of MicroStrategy features, where you perform reporting with the
MicroStrategy Tutorial project and its sample business data.
• MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition Quick Start Guide
Overview of the installation and evaluation process, and additional resources.

Resources for Security

• Usher Help
Steps to setup your Usher Security network, and control access to logical and
physical resources.

6 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Manuals for query, reporting, and analysis

• MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide
Information to install and configure MicroStrategy products on Windows, UNIX,
Linux, and HP platforms, as well as basic maintenance guidelines.
• MicroStrategy Upgrade Guide
Instructions to upgrade existing MicroStrategy products.
• MicroStrategy Project Design Guide
Information to create and modify MicroStrategy projects, and understand facts,
attributes, hierarchies, transformations, advanced schemas, and project
optimization.
• MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide
Instructions to get started with MicroStrategy Developer and MicroStrategy Web,
and how to analyze data in a report. Includes the basics for creating reports, metrics,
filters, and prompts.
• MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide: Enhancing Your Business
Intelligence Application
• MicroStrategy Operations Manager
Instructions for managing, monitoring, and setting alerts for all of your
MicroStrategy systems from one console. This guide also includes instructions for
setting up and using Enterprise Manager to analyze your MicroStrategy system usage.
Instructions for advanced topics in the MicroStrategy system, building on
information in the Basic Reporting Guide. Topics include reports, Freeform SQL
reports, Query Builder reports, filters, metrics, Data Mining Services, custom groups,
consolidations, and prompts.
• MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide: Creating
Boardroom Quality Documents
Instructions to design and create Report Services documents, building on
information in the Document and Dashboard Analysis Guide. It is organized to help
guide you through creating a new document, from creating the document itself, to
adding objects to the new document, and formatting the document and its objects.
• MicroStrategy Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide: Creating
Interactive Dashboards for your Data
Instructions for designing and creating MicroStrategy Report Services dashboards, a
type of document that is optimized for viewing online and for user interactivity. It
builds on the basic concepts about documents presented in the MicroStrategy
Report Services Document Creation Guide.
• MicroStrategy In-memory Analytics Guide

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 7

Installation and Configuration Guide

Information to use MicroStrategy OLAP Services features, including Intelligent

Cubes, derived metrics, derived elements, dynamic aggregation, view filters, and
dynamic sourcing.
• MicroStrategy Office User Guide
Instructions for using MicroStrategy Office to work with MicroStrategy reports and
documents in Microsoft® Excel, PowerPoint, and Word, to analyze, format, and
distribute business data.
• MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide: Analyzing Data with
MicroStrategy Mobile
Information and instructions for using MicroStrategy Mobile to view and analyze
data, and perform other business tasks with MicroStrategy reports and documents
on a mobile device.
• MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide: A Platform for
Mobile Intelligence
Information and instructions to install and configure MicroStrategy Mobile, as well
as instructions for a designer working in MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy
Web to create effective reports and documents for use with MicroStrategy Mobile.
• MicroStrategy System Administration Guide: Tuning, Monitoring, and
Troubleshooting your MicroStrategy Business Intelligence System
Concepts and high-level steps to implement, deploy, maintain, tune, and
troubleshoot a MicroStrategy business intelligence system.
• MicroStrategy Supplemental Reference for System Administration: VLDB
Properties, Internationalization, User Privileges, and other Supplemental
Information for Administrators
Information and instructions for MicroStrategy administrative tasks such as
configuring VLDB properties and defining data and metadata internationalization,
and reference material for other administrative tasks.
• MicroStrategy Functions Reference
Function syntax and formula components; instructions to use functions in metrics,
filters, attribute forms; examples of functions in business scenarios.
• MicroStrategy MDX Cube Reporting Guide
Information to integrate MicroStrategy with MDX cube sources. You can integrate
data from MDX cube sources into your MicroStrategy projects and applications.

Manuals for Analytics Modules

• Manual for the Human Resources Analytics Module
• Human Resources Analytics Module Reference

8 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Software Development Kits

• MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL)
Information to understand the MicroStrategy SDK, including details about
architecture, object models, customization scenarios, code samples, and so on.
• MicroStrategy Web SDK

The Web SDK is available in the MicroStrategy Developer Library, which is

part of the MicroStrategy SDK

Documentation for MicroStrategy Portlets

• Enterprise Portal Integration Help
Information to help you implement and deploy MicroStrategy BI within your
enterprise portal, including instructions for installing and configuring out-of-the-box
MicroStrategy Portlets for several major enterprise portal servers.
This resource can be accessed from the MicroStrategy Product Manuals page, as
described in Accessing manuals and other documentation sources, page 10.

Documentation for MicroStrategy GIS Connectors

• GIS Integration Help
Information to help you integrate MicroStrategy with Geospatial Information
Systems (GIS), including specific examples for integrating with various third-party
mapping services.
This resource can be accessed from the MicroStrategy Product Manuals page, as
described in Accessing manuals and other documentation sources, page 10.

Help
Each MicroStrategy product includes an integrated help system to complement the
various interfaces of the product as well as the tasks that can be accomplished using the
product.
Some of the MicroStrategy help systems require a web browser to be viewed. For
supported web browsers, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
MicroStrategy provides several ways to access help:
• Help button: Use the Help button or ? (question mark) icon on most software
windows to see help for that window.
• Help menu: From the Help menu or link at the top of any screen, select
MicroStrategy Help to see the table of contents, the Search field, and the index for
the help system.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 9

Installation and Configuration Guide

• F1 key: Press F1 to see context-sensitive help that describes each option in the
software window you are currently viewing.

For MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Administrator, and MicroStrategy

Mobile Server, pressing the F1 key opens the context-sensitive help for the
web browser you are using to access these MicroStrategy interfaces. Use the
Help menu or ? (question mark) icon to access help for these MicroStrategy
interfaces.

Accessing manuals and other documentation sources

The manuals are available from https://microstrategyhelp.atlassian.net, as well as from
the machine where MicroStrategy was installed.

Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to view these manuals. If you do not have
Acrobat Reader installed on your computer, you can download it from
http://get.adobe.com/reader/.

The best place for all users to begin is with the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide.
To access the installed manuals and other documentation sources, see the following
procedures:
• To access documentation resources from any location, page 10
• To access documentation resources on Windows, page 10
• To access documentation resources on UNIX and Linux , page 11

To access documentation resources from any location

1 Visit https://microstrategyhelp.atlassian.net/.

To access documentation resources on Windows

1 From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs (or All Programs),
MicroStrategy Documentation, then Product Manuals. A page opens in your
browser showing a list of available manuals in PDF format and other documentation
sources.
2 Click the link for the desired manual or other documentation source.
3 If you click the link for the Narrowcast Services SDK Guide, a File Download dialog
box opens. This documentation resource must be downloaded. Select Open this
file from its current location, and click OK.

If bookmarks are not visible on the left side of an Acrobat (PDF) manual, from the
View menu click Bookmarks and Page. This step varies slightly depending on
your version of Adobe Acrobat Reader.

10 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To access documentation resources on UNIX and Linux

1 Within your UNIX or Linux machine, navigate to the directory where you installed
MicroStrategy. The default location is /opt/MicroStrategy, or
$HOME/MicroStrategy/install if you do not have write access to
/opt/MicroStrategy.
2 From the MicroStrategy installation directory, open the Help folder.
3 Open the Product_Manuals.htm file in a web browser. A page opens in your
browser showing a list of available manuals in PDF format and other documentation
sources.
4 Click the link for the desired manual or other documentation source.
5 If you click the link for the Narrowcast Services SDK Guide, a File Download dialog
box opens. This documentation resource must be downloaded. Select Open this
file from its current location, and click OK.

If bookmarks are not visible on the left side of an Acrobat (PDF) manual, from the
View menu click Bookmarks and Page. This step varies slightly depending on
your version of Adobe Acrobat Reader.

Documentation standards
MicroStrategy online help and PDF manuals (available both online and in printed
format) use standards to help you identify certain types of content. The following table
lists these standards.

These standards may differ depending on the language of this manual; some
languages have rules that supersede the table below.

Type Indicates

bold • Button names, check boxes, options, lists, and menus that are the focus of actions or
part of a list of such GUI elements and their definitions
Example: Click Select Warehouse .
italic • Names of other product manuals and documentation resources
• When part of a command syntax, indicates variable information to be replaced by the
user
Example: The aggregation level is the level of calculation for the metric.
Example: Type copy c:\filename d:\foldername\filename

Courier • Calculations
font • Code samples
• Registry keys

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 11

Installation and Configuration Guide

Type Indicates

• Path and file names

• URLs
• Messages displayed in the screen
• Text to be entered by the user

Example: Sum(revenue)/number of months.

Example: Type cmdmgr -f scriptfile.scp and press Enter.

+ A keyboard command that calls for the use of more than one key (for example,
SHIFT+F1).
A note icon indicates helpful information for specific situations.

A warning icon alerts you to important information such as potential security risks;
these should be read before continuing.

Education
MicroStrategy Education Services provides a comprehensive curriculum and highly
skilled education consultants. Many customers and partners from over 800 different
organizations have benefited from MicroStrategy instruction.
Courses that can help you prepare for using this manual or that address some of the
information in this manual include:
• MicroStrategy Developer: Reporting Essentials
• MicroStrategy Web: Report Analysis
• MicroStrategy Web: Report Design
For a detailed description of education offerings and course curriculums, visit
www.microstrategy.com/Education.

12 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 1
PLANNING YOUR
INSTALLATION
MicroStrategy business intelligence tools help organizations to monitor, report, and
analyze all of their enterprise data. MicroStrategy helps you make decisions based upon
the data within your organization’s enterprise data warehouses and other business data
sources.
An overview of the different MicroStrategy components and products is provided so that
you can decide what you need to install. This includes details on supported functionality
and describes important installation prerequisites that should be considered before you
start installing MicroStrategy products.

The MicroStrategy products that you can install depend on your MicroStrategy
license. Contact your MicroStrategy account executive with MicroStrategy
licensing questions.

You can begin determining your installation and configuration plan by reviewing the
following topics:

Upgrade considerations
If you have earlier versions of MicroStrategy products installed and want to upgrade
them, refer to the Upgrade Guide.The upgrade procedures on Windows, UNIX, and
Linux are covered in this guide. It is recommended that you read this guide before
deciding to upgrade an existing metadata.

MicroStrategy products and components

MicroStrategy has a range of products and components that you can install on different
operating systems. Depending on the type of setup that you have, you can install various
combinations of MicroStrategy components. The components described in this section
offer a complete set of tools for creating, deploying, supporting, and maintaining your
business intelligence applications.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 1

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy components and their subcomponents are described in relation to how

the components are grouped together during the installation routine, as well as how they
fit into MicroStrategy’s product offerings.

MicroStrategy Web
MicroStrategy Web is used by most business user roles. It offers an intuitive user
interface instantly accessible from all major web browsers with no installation required.
Business consumers can use Web to consume and interact with published scorecards,
dashboards and reports. Power users benefit from extensive capabilities to create, design
and modify analytics to be used by the business user community. Analysts will enjoy the
all-inclusive set of self-service data discovery capabilities to blend data, explore visually
and share insights.
The Web product also provides a plug-in for the Microsoft Office productivity suite that
allows any user to inject analytics into business documents created in PowerPoint, Excel
or Word, enabling these documents to contain the most up-to-date business data.

MicroStrategy Web components

MicroStrategy implements Web using the .NET and JAVA technologies. This allows
MicroStrategy Web to be deployed on Windows, UNIX, and Linux environments. For
information on how to deploy MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET) and MicroStrategy Web
(JSP), see Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations
Manager.
MicroStrategy Web provides users with a highly interactive environment and a low-
maintenance interface for reporting and analysis. Using the MicroStrategy Web
interface, users can access, analyze, and share corporate data through any Web browser
on any operating system. MicroStrategy Web provides ad hoc querying, industry-leading
analysis, quick deployment, and rapid customization, making it even easier for users to
make informed business decisions.
For steps to use the MicroStrategy Web reporting environment, refer to the online help
in the MicroStrategy Web interface.
For information about configuring and tuning MicroStrategy Web, refer to the System
Administration Guide.

MicroStrategy Web versions

MicroStrategy Web is available in the following versions:
• Web Reporter: Business users are able to view all types of reports and scorecards and
also personalize reports, print, drill, sort, export, choose between grid or graph
format, and schedule or immediately send reports via email or to a file server or a
printer.
• Web Analyst: This version provides all the functionality of Web Reporter plus the
ability to drill anywhere, edit totals, pivot reports, add or remove fields from reports,
create derived metrics, and create reports or ad hoc queries.

2 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Web Professional: This full-featured version provides all the functionality of Web
Analyst plus the ability to design scorecards, dashboards, and operational reports in
design mode or WYSIWYG view mode. Web Professional users have advanced
formatting capabilities as well as the ability to perform calculations across multiple
data sources.

MicroStrategy Portlets
Though different portal products typically require different integration approaches, you
can integrate MicroStrategy content and functionality into your portal using one of the
out-of-the-box MicroStrategy Portlets. Each out-of-the-box MicroStrategy Portlet
provides a full complement of portlet features that are not found in any single portal
server product, and combines the most useful features of the portlet mechanisms
currently available. These portlets are designed to take advantage of the storage and
repository mechanisms of its particular portal product, without requiring users to make
any adjustments or changes when implementing portlets within a portal.
MicroStrategy Portlets can embed folders, reports, documents, user History Lists, and a
search page into the portals through easy-to-configure screens. The portlets provide the
full range of OLAP manipulations such as sort, pivot, add subtotals, export, and add new
calculations, as well as design functionalities such as changing the report display between
grids and graphs, and toggling thresholds.
In portal environments, users are commonly already logged in and authenticated with
the portal. This authentication can also be used to provide access to MicroStrategy Web
within the portal without having to re-enter their login information. This process is
known as single sign-on. Out-of-the-box MicroStrategy Portlets automatically include
support for single sign-on.
For steps to install and configure out-of-the-box MicroStrategy Portlets for several major
enterprise portal servers, see the Enterprise Portal Integration Help. This resource can
be accessed from the MicroStrategy Product Manuals page, as described in Accessing
manuals and other documentation sources, page xxiii.

MicroStrategy GIS Connectors

MicroStrategy Geospatial Information System (GIS) Connectors let you integrate with
ESRI to create sophisticated GIS applications. GIS lets business users visualize data in
forms such as maps, globes, reports, and charts so that they can identify and analyze
relationships, patterns, and trends in their data.
For information on how to install and configure the MicroStrategy GIS Connectors, see
the GIS Integration Help. This resource can be accessed from the MicroStrategy Product
Manuals page, as described in Accessing manuals and other documentation sources,
page xxiii.

MicroStrategy Office
MicroStrategy Office lets every Microsoft Office user run, edit, and format any
MicroStrategy report directly from within Microsoft applications such as Excel,
PowerPoint, and Word. MicroStrategy Office is designed using Microsoft .NET

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 3

Installation and Configuration Guide

technology and accesses the MicroStrategy business intelligence platform using XML and
MicroStrategy Web Services.
MicroStrategy Office gives business users open and straightforward access to the full
functionality of the MicroStrategy platform from familiar Microsoft Office applications.
MicroStrategy Office serves as a Microsoft add-in, with MicroStrategy functionality
exposed as a single toolbar in Microsoft Office applications.
To learn how to use MicroStrategy Office, refer to the MicroStrategy Office User Guide
and MicroStrategy Office online help.

MicroStrategy Office requires that MicroStrategy Web Services is also installed. For
information on Web Services, see MicroStrategy Web Services (ASP.NET) and
Web Services (J2EE), page 5.

Allowing users to install MicroStrategy Office from a network location

You can allow users to install MicroStrategy Office from a network location, as described
in the procedure below.

To allow users to install MicroStrategy Office from a network location

1 Insert the MicroStrategy installation disk into the disk drive and close the
MicroStrategy Main Menu window that opens automatically.
2 Browse to the Installations folder on the MicroStrategy installation disk.
3 Copy the Office folder and paste it to a network location of your choice.

To ensure that ASP.NET Framework and Web Services Enhancements (WSE)

Runtime are installed on users’ machines when they install MicroStrategy
Office, copy the Utilities folder to the network location so that it is on the
same folder level as the Office folder. The WSE Runtime is installed only if
it is not already installed on the user’s machine.

4 Share the network location with any users who need to install MicroStrategy Office.
5 Notify MicroStrategy Office users to run either MicroStrategyOffice.msi or
MicroStrategyOffice64.msi from within the Office folder to install
MicroStrategy Office. These .msi files are for installing MicroStrategy Office on 32-
bit and 64-bit versions of Microsoft Office, respectively. These users will need
Microsoft Windows Installer 4.5 on their machine to install MicroStrategy Office.

In addition to allowing users to install MicroStrategy Office from a network

location, you can also use the MicroStrategyOffice.msi or
MicroStrategyOffice64.msi files to perform a silent installation of
MicroStrategy Office (see Silent installation of MicroStrategy Office, page
314).

4 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Web Services (ASP.NET) and Web Services (J2EE)

MicroStrategy Web Services (ASP.NET) and Web Services (J2EE) are two options to
support the use of MicroStrategy Office.
• MicroStrategy Web Services (ASP.NET) is an easy-to-deploy service. You can deploy
the ASP.NET version using Microsoft IIS on a Windows environment.
• MicroStrategy Web Services (J2EE) provides a servlet-based version of MicroStrategy
Web Services that is compatible with a UNIX, Linux, or Windows environment.
To support alternative ways to access the MicroStrategy business intelligence platform
using the latest web services technologies such as ASP.NET, JNI, Java and Web
protocols, such as Apache Axis, refer to the MicroStrategy SDK, page 14 and the
accompanying MSDL.
For information on deploying MicroStrategy Web Services ASP.NET and J2EE versions,
refer to the MicroStrategy Office User Guide.

MicroStrategy Mobile
MicroStrategy Mobile is an interactive interface of the MicroStrategy BI platform that
lets mobile business users harness the analytical power of MicroStrategy through the use
of their mobile devices. It’s the easiest, fastest, and most affordable way to mobilize
analytics, and information-rich apps to an increasingly mobile and 24 x 7 workforce.
MicroStrategy Mobile and the MicroStrategy Mobile Server provide MicroStrategy
reporting and analysis capabilities on Apple iOS and Android devices. MicroStrategy uses
the intuitive interfaces of these mobile devices to let users explore information using
touch and smart gestures. MicroStrategy Mobile Business Intelligence applications can
support workflows that lead users through data to decisions.
MicroStrategy Mobile also provides application developers a new way to develop and
deploy Mobile applications that is faster, easier, and more maintainable than using
traditional Integrated Development Environments. MicroStrategy Mobile offers the
following benefits:
• Reduces the time to develop new Mobile applications: MicroStrategy’s
Mobile application platform includes the infrastructure needed to support each new
Mobile application, so that application developers only need to focus on creating the
user experience and not on the back-end infrastructure.
• Easy for non-developers to create professional Mobile applications:
MicroStrategy’s Mobile applications do not require any coding. Using MicroStrategy's
Mobile application platform, Mobile applications are assembled in a point-and-click
fashion. Application designers can choose from an array of finely-designed displays
and controls that are optimized for mobile devices.
• Easy for companies to rapidly deploy Mobile application updates:
MicroStrategy’s Mobile application platform uses an on-demand form of application
deployment called “in-stream” deployment. As soon as new or updated applications
are ready, they are instantly available to Mobile users directly from MicroStrategy’s
Mobile application platform.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 5

Installation and Configuration Guide

• One design for all devices: MicroStrategy Mobile’s ability to render the same
application across different mobile device operating systems means less development
time, less application management, and quicker support for a heterogeneous
deployment of mobile devices.
To learn more about MicroStrategy Mobile, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Design and
Administration Guide and the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.
For information on how to deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server (ASP.NET) and
MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), see Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web,
Mobile Server, and Operations Manager.

MicroStrategy Server
MicroStrategy Server benefits all user roles. The fully featured server infrastructure is the
backbone of any MicroStrategy implementation and offers all the core platform services,
which include:
• 64-bit server infrastructure to scale to big data volumes and a large number of users.
• Ability to connect to and join data from multiple data sources.
• In-memory acceleration of analytical processing for instantaneous response.
• Processing of all analytic styles from self-service data discovery to beautiful,
immersive information apps to the industry’s broadest spectrum of advanced
analytics.
• Proactive distribution of personalized reports and alerts.
• Ability to embed actionable intelligence in analytical applications.
In addition to all the features above, the Server product includes highly useful
monitoring and automation tools for organizations to effectively and efficiently manage
their deployments.

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server delivers world-class monitoring, reporting, and analysis
on a single integrated platform, offering next generation BI capabilities for the full range
of BI applications. MicroStrategy Intelligence Server is the architectural foundation of
the MicroStrategy platform. It performs the following critical tasks for the MicroStrategy
BI platform:
• Runs queries, performs calculations, and formats reports
• Significantly improves user-perceived query performance
• Efficiently manages thousands of end-user requests (jobs)
• Serves as a central point for the MicroStrategy metadata
Intelligence Server also provides a library of over 150 different sophisticated
mathematical and statistical functions, which can be added to. See the Functions
Reference for details about these functions.

6 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

All other products in the platform work in conjunction with Intelligence Server and
benefit from its broad functionality.
The subcomponents of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server are as follows:
• MicroStrategy OLAP Services, page 7.
• MicroStrategy Report Services, page 7.
• MicroStrategy Distribution Services, page 8.
• MicroStrategy Transaction Services, page 9.
• MultiSource Option, page 9.
• Clustering Option, which allows you to cluster a group of Intelligence Server
machines (up to four Intelligence Server machines) to take advantage of the many
benefits available in a clustered environment.
For information on clustering Intelligence Servers, see the System Administration
Guide.

MicroStrategy OLAP Services

MicroStrategy OLAP Services uses the concept of Intelligent Cube, an in-memory version
of a report that can be manipulated by the Analytical Engine. MicroStrategy Developer,
MicroStrategy Web, and MicroStrategy Office users can slice and dice data in reports
within the Intelligent Cubes without having to re-execute SQL against the data
warehouse.

For information on OLAP Services, see the In-memory Analytics Guide.

MicroStrategy Report Services

MicroStrategy Report Services is the enterprise reporting engine of the MicroStrategy
business intelligence platform. A MicroStrategy Report Services document contains
objects representing data coming from one or more reports, as well as positioning and

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 7

Installation and Configuration Guide

formatting information. It is used to format data from multiple reports in a single display
of presentation quality.

For information on Report Services, see the Document Creation Guide and the
Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.

MicroStrategy Distribution Services

MicroStrategy Distribution Services provides high-volume, automated distribution of
reports, documents, dashboards, and business performance alerts via email, file servers,
FTP servers, and networked printers.

8 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Transaction Services

MicroStrategy Transaction Services lets you embed write-back functionality into reports
and dashboards for the purposes of decision-making or initiating a transaction. These
transactions can include one-click approvals and denials, notes for tracking and directing
business activity, and write-back to data sources in real time.
Users of MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone, and MicroStrategy
Mobile for iPad can employ these transaction capabilities from reports, dashboards, and
MicroStrategy Mobile applications.

MultiSource Option
With MultiSource Option, you can connect a project to multiple relational data sources.
This allows you to integrate all your information from various databases and other
relational data sources into a single MicroStrategy project for reporting and analysis
purpose. All data sources included using the MultiSource Option are integrated as part of
the same relational schema for a project.

For information on using MultiSource Option, see the Project Design Guide.

MicroStrategy Command Manager

MicroStrategy Command Manager is an application designed to simplify and automate
administration tasks, such as add, delete, or update enterprise-level data associated with

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 9

Installation and Configuration Guide

large numbers of users and user groups. Additionally, Command Manager allows you to
manage various configuration settings within the MicroStrategy platform.

For information on using Command Manager, see the System Administration Guide.

MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager

MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager provides insights about governing and tuning all areas
of your MicroStrategy environment. With Enterprise Manager, you can see a variety of
Intelligence Server usage statistics. The statistics shown in predefined reports displayed
by Enterprise Manager can help you make scheduling decisions, analyze bottlenecks, and
tune performance.

For information on using Enterprise Manager, see the Operations Manager Guide.

10 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy System Manager

MicroStrategy System Manager lets you define multiple configurations for your
MicroStrategy environment that can be executed in a single workflow. This provides the
ability to deploy various configurations to as many systems as required. You can deploy
these configurations using a standard interface, an interactive command line process, or
a completely silent configuration process.
System Manager lets you create a workflow visually, allowing you to see the step-by-step
process that leads the workflow from one configuration to the next. This visual approach
to creating a workflow can help you to notice opportunities to troubleshoot and error
check configurations as part of a workflow.
For information on using MicroStrategy System Manager to configure and deploy your
MicroStrategy environments, see the System Administration Guide.

MicroStrategy Operations Manager

MicroStrategy Operations Manager is a web-based administrative tool that allows you to
view and monitor all your MicroStrategy environments in one place by pulling
information from the MicroStrategy Health Center system in each of your environments.
For information on using Operations Manager, see the Operations Manager Guide.

MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server

MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server proactively distributes personalized information to
employees, business partners, and customers through a variety of devices, including
mobile phones, email, and Web pages. The distribution of personalized messages and
targeted offers is triggered according to predefined schedules and exception criteria,
delivering information in a timely and convenient manner. Narrowcast Server also
provides a self-subscription portal, easing administrative responsibilities and empowering
information consumers to choose the information they receive. Narrowcast Server can
draw information from relational or non-relational sources.
Subscriptions can also be supported through Intelligence Server with the introduction of
Distribution Services. For information on Distribution Services, see MicroStrategy
Distribution Services, page 8.
For information on Narrowcast Server subcomponents, see the MicroStrategy
Narrowcast Server Installation and Configuration Guide.

SequeLink ODBC Socket Server

SequeLink is a complete, end-to-end solution for configuring and managing data access
across virtually any number of data stores, operating systems, and deployment options.
SequeLink ODBC Socket Server is required to support MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server.
It can also be used to access Microsoft Access databases and Microsoft Excel files stored
on a Windows machine from an Intelligence Server hosted on a UNIX or Linux machine
(see MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for SequeLink, page 390).

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 11

Installation and Configuration Guide

The SequeLink ODBC Socket Server that is provided with a MicroStrategy installation is
for exclusive use with the MicroStrategy Product Suite. You are not licensed to use this
product with any application other than MicroStrategy products. You can contact
Progress® DataDirect® to purchase the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server for use with
non-MicroStrategy products.

MicroStrategy Architect
MicroStrategy Architect is designed to meet the needs of application architects and
developers. It includes all the schema development, change management, and modeling
tools that enable architects to manage the full development life cycle of MicroStrategy
applications. The Architect product allows IT organizations to flexibly share and
distribute roles and responsibilities for development, testing, promotions, and migrations
during the application lifestyle, leading to vast improvements in organizational efficiency.

MicroStrategy Developer
MicroStrategy Developer provides analytical features designed to facilitate and perform
the deployment of reports. It governs application objects such as reports, filters, and
metrics.
Developer also enables you to create application objects. The application objects are built
on the schema objects that are created in MicroStrategy Architect. These application
objects are used to analyze and provide insight into relevant data. The following sections
provide a brief description of the subcomponents for these products.
The subcomponents of MicroStrategy Developer include:
• MicroStrategy Analyst is a simplified version of MicroStrategy Developer, providing
the basic interactive reporting functionality required by managers.
• MicroStrategy Developer is a full-featured version for power analysts and application
developers. With a full range of analytical functionality, a rich library of functions,
and intelligent workflow, Developer is well suited for power users.
• MicroStrategy Architect provides project designer functionality such as attribute,
fact, hierarchy, and project creation and modification. Architect contains the
following subcomponents:
▫ MicroStrategy Architect, page 13.
▫ MicroStrategy Function Plug-in Wizard is an add-in to the Microsoft Visual C++
compiler, which comes with a standard MicroStrategy installation. It allows you
to create a C++ project, with which you can implement your own custom
MicroStrategy function plug-in. The option to install this component is enabled
only if Microsoft Visual C++ version 2005 (8.0) or version 2010 (10.0) is present
on the system where the installation is being performed.
Customers interested in deploying analytics from the R programming language
into MicroStrategy can do so using the R Integration Pack, available separately
from the CodePlex open source community web site. For more information, go
to http://www.codeplex.com and search for the RIntegrationPack project
(current as of March 1, 2013).

12 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• MicroStrategy Server Administrator is a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

administrative console that provides functionality such as system monitoring, cache
management, and user and group management.

When installing MicroStrategy Developer, your license key must be licensed

for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server to install and access MicroStrategy
Server Administrator.

For information on various options present in Developer to create and run reports, see
the Basic Reporting Guide. After you are familiar with basic Developer concepts, see the
Advanced Reporting Guide for information on advanced Developer functionality.

MicroStrategy Architect
MicroStrategy includes a project design tool known as Architect. Architect allows you to
define all the required components of your project from a centralized interface. Architect
also provides a visual representation of your project as you create it, which helps to
provide an intuitive workflow.
For information on using Architect to design a project in MicroStrategy, see the Project
Design Guide.

MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

MicroStrategy Integrity Manager is an automated report comparison tool. Report SQL,
report data, and graphs can be executed and compared in Integrity Manager to help
customers verify change success. In addition, the report comparison output can be
analyzed at the report level in MicroStrategy Integrity Manager, and as HTML and XML
summary files that are generated to provide easily distributed results to other users.

To learn more about MicroStrategy Integrity Manager, see the System Administration
Guide.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 13

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Object Manager

MicroStrategy Object Manager provides complete life cycle management capabilities for
MicroStrategy environments. Using Object Manager, you can copy objects within a
project or across related projects.

For information on using Object Manager, see the System Administration Guide.

MicroStrategy SDK
The MicroStrategy SDK is a collection of programming tools, utilities, documentation,
and libraries of functions or classes that are designed to allow users to customize and
extend MicroStrategy products and to integrate them within other applications. The
programming tools provided by the MicroStrategy SDK—including programming
instructions, points of access, and guidelines for developers—allow programmers to
enhance the operation of their software by customizing and embedding the robust
functionality of the MicroStrategy BI platform.
The MicroStrategy SDK and MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) are not included
in the MicroStrategy installation. You can download the MicroStrategy SDK from the
MicroStrategy support site https://resource.microstrategy.com/msdz/default.asp. You
can also access the MicroStrategy Developer Library from the MicroStrategy support site.

14 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

The MicroStrategy SDK provides access to the entire MicroStrategy platform and
includes all of the services and utilities required for building a robust, feature-filled
business intelligence-enabled application. The MicroStrategy SDK is made up of the
following components:
• The MicroStrategy SDK includes the following individual SDKs, which are described
in detail in the MicroStrategy Developer Library:
▫ Web SDK
▫ Visualization SDK
▫ Mobile SDK
▫ Web Services SDK
▫ Narrowcast Server SDK
▫ Intelligence Server SDK
▫ MicroStrategy Office SDK
• Each of the individual SDKs listed above is made up of some of or all the following
components:
▫ A comprehensive set of APIs that includes:
— COM-based client-server API
— XML-based Web API with support for Java/COM
— Web Services API
— Narrowcast Server API

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 15

Installation and Configuration Guide

The set of MicroStrategy APIs provides support for a variety of development

environments, including Java, C++, VB, XML, and standard Web and client-server
technologies
▫ A complete set of SDK documentation for all the MicroStrategy products that
includes:
— Reference guides such as Javadocs for the APIs.
— The MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL), which provides all the
information required to understand and use the MicroStrategy SDK
▫ A variety of development tools that include:
— Source code and sample application code for typical customization tasks
— Development tools and production-ready utilities that reduce code creation
and maintenance and help you build customized applications
— Specialized development tools, such as the Portal Integration Kit and the
Web Services Development Kit
— Features for packaging your application, including embedded (silent)
installation, project mover for project maintenance and upgrade, and
schema services to upgrade the metadata

MicroStrategy sample projects

MicroStrategy provides a set of packaged analytic components built using the
MicroStrategy platform. These include the Human Resources Analysis Module and the
MicroStrategy Tutorial.

Human Resources Analysis Module

The Human Resources Analysis Module contains sample dashboards and reports, as well
as the reporting objects that can be used to create typical Human Resources reports. The
Human Resources Analysis Module Reference is a guide that provides sample usages and
descriptions for each of the module’s dashboards and reports and the supporting objects
that define them.
The Human Resources Analysis Module can be mapped to a different warehouse or used
as a starter kit to develop custom applications. The module consists of a MicroStrategy
project in a metadata, a reference guide, and a default data model.

MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting

MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting is a sample MicroStrategy project with a warehouse,
and a set of demonstration dashboards, reports, and other objects, designed to illustrate
the platform's rich functionality. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting metadata is
provided as part of the MicroStrategy Analytics Modules metadata.
The theme of the Tutorial project is a retail store that sells electronics, books, movies,
and music. The key features include:

16 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Five hierarchies: Customer, Geography, Products, Promotions, and Time. Each

hierarchy can be viewed graphically through MicroStrategy Developer and
MicroStrategy Web (through documents).
• A large number of customers and items purchased.
• Five reporting areas: Human Resources, Inventory, Financial, Product Sales, and
Supplier.
• Options to create reports from MicroStrategy Web or Developer focusing on a
particular analysis area, such as Customer, Inventory, Time, Products, Category,
Employee, or Call Center.
For more information on the Tutorial project, refer to the Project Design Guide.

MicroStrategy Health Center

MicroStrategy Health Center can help you diagnose and fix problems in your
MicroStrategy system. It detects known problems and provides an immediate solution.
In cases where Health Center cannot fix a problem immediately, it enables you to bundle
relevant log files into a diagnostic package and transmit this package to MicroStrategy
Technical Support for review and troubleshooting.

Health Center is provided with a MicroStrategy installation.

For information on using Health Center to diagnose and fix problems in your
MicroStrategy environment, see the Project Design Guide.

MicroStrategy Usher
MicroStrategy Usher is a mobile security platform designed to provide security for
business processes and applications across an enterprise. It replaces traditional forms of
enterprise security such as ID cards, passwords, and physical keys with a mobile badge
on a user’s smartphone. Users with the Usher Security mobile app and badge can

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 17

Installation and Configuration Guide

electronically validate their identity without plastic ID cards, log in to online applications
without entering a password, open locked doors without keys, and so on.
Depending on your license key, you can choose to install:
• Usher Security Server: Server system that synchronizes identities with
enterprise identity management systems of record, and presents those identities to
Usher clients for authentication.
• Usher Network Manager: Administrative console that allows you to manage your
network of users, configure access to Usher-enabled systems and resources, and
distribute digital badges and keys.
• Usher Analytics: Reporting functionality to analyze and visualize the activity of
users in your Usher network to gain insights into your enterprise security.
• Usher Professional: Mobile app and server system that allows your users to view
the activity of nearby users in their Usher network.
Each user downloads Usher Security to their mobile device. Usher Security is a mobile
app that allows users to validate their identities or to access Usher-enabled systems and
resources.
For installation instructions, refer to the Usher Security Installation and Configuration.

Installation prerequisites
Before you install MicroStrategy, you must have the following:
• MicroStrategy installation files.
• Before you begin upgrading any MicroStrategy systems, contact your MicroStrategy
account executive to obtain a new license key for the version of software you are
installing. To install MicroStrategy products, you must first obtain a license key
specific to the version of MicroStrategy software you intend to install.
• License key from MicroStrategy.
• You can access the installation files by asking your system administrator to share the
files on a network location.
• You can reduce the amount of data that has to be downloaded for an installation by
excluding some of the installation files in the Installations/DataFiles folder.
During installation, the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard then lists which of these
files are required for your MicroStrategy installation. You can use this technique to
provide only the files required to complete a MicroStrategy installation, which can
then be used to reduce the amount of data packaged and downloaded for other
MicroStrategy installations in your organization. For steps to use this technique to
create custom installation packages, see Creating custom installation packages, page
46.
• Installation location for your MicroStrategy products
To install MicroStrategy, you must have the following permissions and privileges:

18 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Windows:
• You must log on to your machine using a domain account with Windows
administrative privileges for the domain or target machine.
• The user installing MicroStrategy needs write permissions in the installation
directory to complete the installation; otherwise the installation fails.

UNIX and Linux:

• You need root access permissions for installation if you have purchased the CPU-
based MicroStrategy license.
• You need root access permissions to install Usher components.
Apart from the information provided above, review the following sections before you
start the installation:
• Recommended installation location and example deployments, page 19
• Hardware requirements and recommendations, page 22
• Software requirements and recommendations, page 29

Recommended installation location and example

deployments
There are a countless number of possible arrangements for all the products available on
the MicroStrategy platform, and what you decide to do depends largely on your
installation environment and requirements. In general, though, the following
recommendations are usually true for a typical business intelligence system:
• Intelligence Server should be installed on its own dedicated server machine.
• MicroStrategy Web should be installed on its own dedicated Web server machine.
• The rest of the products can be installed in varying combinations depending on who
intends to use them and on what machines.

These are just suggestions to help you get started. Read the rest of this chapter for
more detailed guidelines.

The following sections provide basic examples of differently sized production

deployments with MicroStrategy products. The examples are generalized and do not
include all of the MicroStrategy products. You can use these examples to help plan how
to deploy MicroStrategy products.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 19

Installation and Configuration Guide

Small production deployment

20 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Medium production deployment

Large production deployment

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 21

Installation and Configuration Guide

Hardware requirements and recommendations

MicroStrategy acknowledges that variables, such as CPU speed, CPU type, operating
system version, service upgrades, file space, and physical and swap memory, are factors
that play an important role in making your deployment of MicroStrategy a successful
one. This section lists the hardware requirements and recommendations for Windows,
UNIX, and Linux platforms.

The following information is intended to give you general guidance on hardware

requirements to support the MicroStrategy product suite. Determining the
necessary hardware requirements to support MicroStrategy is dependent on many
factors including the complexity of your MicroStrategy environment, the
deployment strategy of MicroStrategy features, user community requirements,
expected peak usage requirements, and response time expectations. Factors such as
these must be considered to determine the hardware requirements for your
MicroStrategy production environment.

For more details and exact information regarding supported and certified operating
system versions for a MicroStrategy release, see the MicroStrategy Readme or contact
Technical Support.
For UNIX and Linux systems, several system settings can affect the performance of
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal. These settings do not need to be set before a
MicroStrategy installation. For more information on these settings and their
recommended values, see Recommended system settings for UNIX and Linux, page 43.

System hardware requirements and recommendations for Windows

The following table shows the recommended and minimum hardware requirements for
MicroStrategy products. The information provided is intended to give you general
guidance on hardware requirements to support the MicroStrategy product suite.
Determining the necessary hardware requirements to support MicroStrategy is
dependent on many factors including but not limited to the complexity of your
MicroStrategy environment, the deployment strategy of MicroStrategy features, user
community requirements, expected peak usage requirements, and response time
expectations. Factors such as these must be considered to determine the hardware
requirements for your MicroStrategy production environment.

22 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Be aware of the following:

• MicroStrategy installs a set of common files that are shared when
installing multiple MicroStrategy products on the same machine. With
a typical installation setup type, these files are installed on the C: drive.
In addition to the storage requirements listed for the products in the
table below, you should estimate an additional 2 GB of storage space
for the common files that are shared amongst all products. While this
estimate is conservatively high, planning for this additional space helps
to ensure a successful installation.
• The storage requirements listed in the table below for Intelligence
Server and Narrowcast Server include additional space than is required
for the initial installation. This additional space is to support the
creation of the various files that these products require throughout
their use in a MicroStrategy environment. Additional space may be
required depending on the use of Intelligence Server and Narrowcast
Server in your MicroStrategy environment.
• Intelligence Server is licensed based on CPU number and clock speed.
Thus, Intelligence Server can only be installed on machines with a
maximum clock speed that equals the licensed clock speed. If you try to
install the product on a machine faster than what is licensed,
installation fails. See the System Administration Guide for more
information about licensing.

MicroStrategy Product Processor Memory Storage

MicroStrategy System Manager x86 or x64 2 GB 0.5 GB

compatible
MicroStrategy Command Manager x86 or x64 2 GB 0.25 GB
compatible
MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager x64 compatible 1 GB 0.25 GB
MicroStrategy Object Manager x86 or x64 1 GB 0.25 GB
compatible
MicroStrategy Developer products x86 or x64 2 GB or higher 0.25 GB
compatible

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 23

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Product Processor Memory Storage

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server x64 compatible 4 GB or higher Three times

Universal the amount
Using 4 GB of of RAM
RAM is a available to
minimum level of Intelligence
support for the Server. For
MicroStrategy example, an
Product Suite, Intelligence
which does not Server that is
take into account provided 4
the performance GB of RAM
of a production requires 12
system. GB of hard
Performance drive space.
testing has
shown that 64
GB or more of
RAM should be
available to allow
MicroStrategy
Intelligence
Server Universal
to fully support
and take
advantage of the
complete feature
set of the
MicroStrategy
Product Suite,
while obtaining
system-wide high
performance.
This level of
system resources
allows
MicroStrategy
Intelligence
Server Universal
to fully use
performance-
improving
technologies
such as
MicroStrategy
OLAP Services,
and to support
optimal
performance for
MicroStrategy
Report Services
documents and
dashboards and
the other
features of the
MicroStrategy

24 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Product Processor Memory Storage

Product Suite.
MicroStrategy Integrity Manager x64 compatible 2 GB or higher 0.25 GB
MicroStrategy Office x86 or x64 2 GB 0.5 GB
compatible
MicroStrategy Mobile Server The MicroStrategy Mobile Server hardware requirements
are the same as those for MicroStrategy Web Server
hardware requirements.
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server x86 or x64 4 GB 4 GB
compatible
MicroStrategy SDK The SDK is not included in the MicroStrategy installation
and can instead be downloaded from the MicroStrategy
support site.

MicroStrategy Analytics Modules Not applicable Not applicable 0.5 GB

MicroStrategy Web: Web Client x86 or x64 2 GB or higher MicroStrategy
compatible Web can be
accessed
from a third-
party web
browser,
which means
there are no
additional
storage
requirements.
MicroStrategy Web: Web Server x64 compatible 4 GB or higher 0.5 GB

System hardware requirements and recommendations on UNIX/Linux

The following information is intended to give you general guidance on hardware
requirements to support the MicroStrategy product suite. Determining the necessary
hardware requirements to support MicroStrategy is dependent on many factors including
but not limited to the complexity of your MicroStrategy environment, the deployment
strategy of MicroStrategy features, user community requirements, expected peak usage
requirements, and response time expectations. Factors such as these must be considered
to determine the hardware requirements for your MicroStrategy production
environment.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 25

Installation and Configuration Guide

Be aware of the following:

• The storage recommendations listed in the table below provide an
estimate for installing and supporting each MicroStrategy product on a
separate machine. For information on the total size of a MicroStrategy
installation when installing all MicroStrategy products on the same
machine, see Storage requirements for all MicroStrategy products on
UNIX/Linux, page 28.
• A successful configuration of Intelligence Server Universal depends on
a valid combination of an operating system and a CPU architecture.
For example, Intelligence Server Universal is certified to run on a
machine with a Oracle Solaris operating system compatible with a
SPARC CPU architecture. Valid operating system and CPU architecture
combinations for Intelligence Server Universal are listed in the table
below.
• The storage requirements listed in the table below for Intelligence
Server include additional space than is required for the initial
installation. This additional space is to support the creation of the
various files that these products require throughout their use in a
MicroStrategy environment. Additional space may be required
depending on the use of Intelligence Server in your MicroStrategy
environment.

MicroStrategy Product Processor Memory Storage

Recommendation

MicroStrategy System Manager Oracle Solaris: 2 GB or higher • 4 GB on IBM

SPARC platforms AIX

IBM AIX: IBM • 3GB on

other UNIX
POWER operating
Architecture systems
Red Hat and SUSE
Linux: x86-64
compatible
MicroStrategy Command Oracle Solaris: 2 GB or higher • 4 GB on IBM
Manager SPARC platforms AIX

IBM AIX: IBM • 3 GB on

other UNIX
POWER operating
Architecture systems
Red Hat and SUSE
Linux: x86-64
compatible
MicroStrategy Intelligence Oracle Solaris: 4 GB or higher Three times
Server SPARC platforms the amount of
Using 4 GB of RAM is a RAM available
to Intelligence
Server. For

26 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Product Processor Memory Storage

Recommendation

minimum level of support example, an

for the MicroStrategy Intelligence
Product Suite, which does Server that is
not take into account the provided 4 GB
performance of a of RAM
production system. requires 12 GB
Performance testing has of hard drive
shown that 64 GB or more space.
of RAM should be
available to allow
IBM AIX: IBM MicroStrategy Intelligence
POWER Server Universal to fully
Architecture support and take
advantage of the complete
feature set of the
MicroStrategy Product
Suite, while obtaining
system-wide high
performance. This level of
system resources allows
MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server Universal to fully
Red Hat and SUSE use performance-
Linux: x86-64 improving technologies
compatible such as MicroStrategy
OLAP Services, and to
support optimal
performance for
MicroStrategy Report
Services documents and
dashboards and the other
features of the
MicroStrategy Product
Suite.
MicroStrategy Integrity Manager Oracle Solaris: 2 GB or higher • 4 GB on IBM
SPARC platforms AIX

IBM AIX: IBM • 3 GB on

other UNIX
POWER operating
Architecture systems
Red Hat and SUSE
Linux: x86-64
compatible
MicroStrategy Web Services for Oracle Solaris: 2 GB or higher • 4 GB on IBM
Office SPARC platforms AIX

IBM AIX: IBM • 3 GB on

other UNIX
POWER operating
Architecture systems
Red Hat and SUSE
Linux: x86-64

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 27

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Product Processor Memory Storage

Recommendation

compatible
MicroStrategy Mobile Server The MicroStrategy Mobile Server hardware requirements are the
same as those for MicroStrategy Web Server hardware
requirements.
MicroStrategy SDK The SDK is not included in the MicroStrategy installation and can
instead be downloaded from the MicroStrategy support site.
MicroStrategy Web: Web Server Oracle Solaris: 4 GB or higher • 4 GB on IBM
SPARC platforms AIX

IBM AIX: IBM • 3 GB on

other UNIX
POWER operating
Architecture systems
Red Hat and SUSE
Linux: x86-64
compatible
MicroStrategy Web: Web Client Oracle Solaris: 2 GB or higher MicroStrategy
SPARC platforms Web can be
accessed from
IBM AIX: IBM a third-party
POWER web browser,
Architecture which means
there are no
Red Hat and SUSE additional
Linux: x86-64 storage
compatible requirements.

Storage requirements for all MicroStrategy products on UNIX/Linux

The storage recommendations listed in System hardware requirements and
recommendations on UNIX/Linux, page 25 provide the storage recommendations for
the MicroStrategy products if they are installed individually on separate machines. The
table below lists a conservative estimate of the total file size if you install all
MicroStrategy products on the same machine, which can then share a set of common
files:

Operating System Total Installation Size for All Products

AIX 7.5 GB
Solaris 8 GB
Linux 8 GB

Temporary directory requirements for installation

In addition to the space requirements listed in System hardware requirements and
recommendations on UNIX/Linux, page 25, you also need free space in the temporary

28 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

directory. The default location of the temporary directory is:

• Solaris: /var/tmp
• AIX and Linux: /tmp
If the space in the default temporary directory is inadequate, you can use the tempdir
command line option to change the location of the temporary directory. This directory
must already exist and it must be specified using its absolute path, for example:
./setup.sh –tempdir /home/user/tmp

If you change the location of the temporary directory, free space is still required in
the default location of the temporary directory to launch the MicroStrategy
installation routine.

MicroStrategy Mobile hardware requirements for mobile devices

The tables below list the MicroStrategy Mobile client application hardware requirements
for various mobile devices. To verify updated requirement information, see the
MicroStrategy Readme.

Flash memory

Requirement Minimum Recommended

Flash memory 32 MB 64 MB

Android devices
Devices with OS minimum 4.x and certain GPUs are certified. Refer to the third-party
documentation for your Android device vendor to determine the Graphics Processing
Unit (GPU) for your device. To see the latest list of devices, see the MicroStrategy
Readme

Software requirements and recommendations

See the MicroStrategy Readme for the specific software requirements and
recommendations for MicroStrategy products on the Windows, UNIX, and Linux
platforms.

Intelligence Server Universal software requirements on UNIX/Linux

For the exact information such as version numbers and space requirements, see the
MicroStrategy Readme.
MicroStrategy Integrity Manager for UNIX and Linux platforms has the same
requirements as Intelligence Server Universal. Therefore, you can use the information in

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 29

Installation and Configuration Guide

this section for Intelligence Server Universal and Integrity Manager requirements on
UNIX and Linux platforms.
The following MicroStrategy products require an X-windows-enabled environment on all
UNIX and Linux platforms:
• GUI-based MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
• Diagnostics and Performance Logging tool
• Service Manager
The following requirements also apply to all UNIX and Linux platforms:
• A Web browser (for example, Firefox) is required for viewing the MicroStrategy
Readmes and online help.
• Windows Services for UNIX (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-
us/interopmigration/bb380242.aspx) or Samba (http://www.samba.org) is
required for HTML document support. Samba 3.0 is required for the support of
HTML documents with alphanumeric names.
The requirements listed below describe general requirements as well as requirements
specific to the UNIX and Linux platforms:
• Configuring shared memory resources, page 31
• Oracle Solaris, page 32
• , page 32
• Red Hat and SUSE Linux, page 32

Be aware of the following before reviewing the sections listed above:

• The operating systems listed are deemed supported or certified to
reflect the level of internal testing that each configuration was exposed
to for the current release. MicroStrategy recommends using certified
configurations over the supported configurations.
• MicroStrategy certifies and supports operating systems that are
compatible with a set of CPU chipsets, referred to as CPU
architectures, that are binary-compatible. MicroStrategy tests on at
least one of the CPU chipsets within a set of binary-compatible CPU
architectures for purposes of certifying and supporting operating
systems with MicroStrategy products. A valid CPU architecture is
provided in parentheses () to clarify the operating system software
certified or supported for Intelligence Server Universal.
• All UNIX and Linux operating systems are 64-bit.
• For information on LDAP Servers certified and supported for LDAP
authentication with various Intelligence Server machine environments,
see the MicroStrategy Readme.

30 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring shared memory resources

To improve the performance of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal for large
scale production applications, Intelligence Server Universal can be configured to use
shared memory resources. To support this configuration, you must ensure that your
Intelligence Server Universal host machine uses values greater than or equal to the
resource limits described below.
During installation (on the System Requirements page, see Installing with the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, page 81), you have the following options:
• Exit the MicroStrategy setup wizard to do the required system changes
(Recommended): Select this option to cancel the installation and make the
required system resource limit changes to support shared memory resources. This
option is recommended for production environments. Information on the
recommended resource limits is provided below.
• Allow the setup to reconfigure MicroStrategy to use Pipe as the Default
IPC Mechanism: Select this option to disable the use of shared memory resources
for Intelligence Server Universal, and instead use the pipe mechanism. Disabling the
ability to use shared memory resources can decrease the performance of your
MicroStrategy applications; therefore, this is not recommended for production
environments.
• Keep Shared Memory as the Default IPC Mechanism. (MicroStrategy
may not work properly): Select this option to keep your system resource limits
set at their current values to support shared memory resources. While this allows you
to continue installation with the current system resource limits, Intelligence Server
may not function properly after installation. If you plan to use shared memory
resources for enhanced performance of your production environments, you should
select the first option to exit the installation and make the required system changes.
The tables below provide recommended values for various system resource limits on
UNIX and Linux.

Modifying the system resource limits listed below can affect system-wide behavior
and therefore, steps to modify these values are not given. You should refer to your
UNIX and Linux documentation and contact your system administrator to modify
these settings.

Shared memory settings on UNIX and Linux operating systems that may require
modification to support Intelligence Server execution are listed in the table below:

Setting Description Recommended Value

Name

shmmni Maximum number of shared memory 4096

identifiers at any given time.

shmseg Maximum number of segments per 2048

process.
Note: This setting does not exist on Solaris,
AIX, or Linux operating systems.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 31

Installation and Configuration Guide

Semaphores are used to synchronize shared memory communications. The names of the
settings that control semaphores differ between operating systems as listed in the tables
below:

Setting Name on Solaris and Description Recommended Value

AIX

semmni Maximum number of system wide semaphore 4096

sets.

semmns Maximum number of semaphores in the system. 4096

Setting Name on Description Recommended Value

Linux

semmsl Maximum number of semaphores in a semaphore set. 250

semmns Maximum number of semaphores in the system. 32000

semopm Maximum number of operations in a simple semaphore 32

call.

semmni Maximum number of semaphore sets. 4096

Oracle Solaris
For Oracle Solaris requirements, see the System Requirements in the MicroStrategy
Readme

IBM AIX
For IBM AIX requirements, see the System Requirements in the MicroStrategy Readme

Red Hat and SUSE Linux

For Red Hat Enterprise and SUSE Linux requirements, see the System Requirements in
the MicroStrategy Readme
Supporting Intelligence Server Universal memory allocation on
Linux
MicroStrategy recommends that the Linux kernel setting vm.max_map_count be
defined as 5,242,880 bytes. This allows Intelligence Server Universal to utilize system
memory resources. If a lower value is used, Intelligence Server Universal may not be able
to use all available system resources. This can cause some Intelligence Server Universal
actions to fail due to lack of system resources, which could be completed if the additional
system resources were made available by increasing the value for this kernel setting.

32 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

For information on this setting, including how to modify its value, refer to your third-
party Linux operating system documentation.

MicroStrategy Web JSP software requirements and recommendations

To confirm the latest requirement information, see the MicroStrategy Readme. For
specific patches, filesets, technology level, and other requirements for UNIX and Linux
operating systems, see Intelligence Server Universal software requirements on
UNIX/Linux, page 29.

Web server software

For information on the exact version numbers, see the MicroStrategy Readme.

MicroStrategy Web Services J2EE software requirements and

recommendations
To confirm the latest requirement information, see the MicroStrategy Readme.

MicroStrategy SDK software requirements and recommendations for

JSP environments
The table below lists the JDK, JRE, and JVM requirements for the MicroStrategy SDK
customizations for JSP environments. For complete MicroStrategy SDK software
requirements, including ASP.NET environment requirements, see the MicroStrategy
Readme.

MicroStrategy System Manager software requirements on UNIX/Linux

For System Manager operating system requirements on Windows platforms, see the
MicroStrategy Readme.

MicroStrategy Command Manager software requirements on

UNIX/Linux
For Command Manager operating system requirements on Windows platforms, see the
MicroStrategy Readme.

MicroStrategy Mobile software requirements for mobile devices

The tables below list the MicroStrategy Mobile client application software requirements
for iPhone, iPod Touch, and iPad devices. To verify updated requirement information,
see the MicroStrategy Readme.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 33

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Mobile Server software requirements

The sections below list the MicroStrategy Mobile Server software requirements.

Mobile Server deployment requirements

• Mobile Server ASP.NET can be deployed using the same requirements listed for
MicroStrategy Web (see the MicroStrategy Readme).
• Mobile Server JSP can be deployed using the same requirements listed for
MicroStrategy Web Universal (see MicroStrategy Web JSP software requirements
and recommendations, page 33).

Web browsers for Mobile Server

For web browsers that are supported, refer to the MicroStrategy Readme.

Supporting IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x as a web server for MicroStrategy Web
or Mobile Server
If you plan to use IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x as the web server for MicroStrategy Web or
Mobile Server, you must ensure that some IIS options are enabled. The procedure below
describes how to enable the options that are required to support IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x as a
web server for MicroStrategy Web or Mobile Server.

To support IIS 7.0.x or 7.5.x as a web server for MicroStrategy Web or

Mobile Server

The third-party products discussed below are manufactured by vendors

independent of MicroStrategy, and the steps to configure these products is subject
to change. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to configure
IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x.

1 On a Windows machine, open the Control Panel.

2 Double-click Programs and Features.
3 Click the Turn Windows features on or off task. The Windows Features dialog
box opens.
4 Expand Internet Information Services, and select the following options:
a Expand Web Management Tools and select:
• IIS Management Console
• IIS Management Scripts and Tools
• IIS Management Service

34 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

b Expand World Wide Web Services, then expand Application

Development Features, and select:
• .NET Extensibility
• ASP.NET
• ISAPI Extensions
• ISAPI Filters
c Within World Wide Web Services, expand Common Http Features, and
select:
• Default Document
• Static Content
d Expand Security, and select:
• Request Filtering
• Windows Authentication
5 Click OK to save your changes.

Installation considerations
The following section contains guidelines and considerations you must keep in mind
during MicroStrategy installation.

Certificates used during Usher Installation and

Configuration
Name Example file path When to use What the certificate is used for
Usher Server /certs/f1_usherservercert.crt Usher SSL Certificate used by the Tomcat
SSL/HTTPS Installation, instance hosting the Usher Server
Certificate step 12: field
1

Usher Server /certs/f2_usherservercert.key Usher Private key for the SSL Certificate used
SSL/HTTPS Installation, by the Tomcat instance hosting the
Certificate step 12: field Usher Server
private key 2

Usher Server /certs/f3_usherserverbundle.pem Usher Certificate store that includes all the
Certificate Installation, CA certificates that the Usher Server
Trust Bundle step 12: field will trust. File of concatenated PEM-
3 encoded CA Certificates for Client
Auth.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 35

Installation and Configuration Guide

Name Example file path When to use What the certificate is used for
Usher Server /certs/f9_ Setting up Certificate that will be used by the
Signing ushersigningcertificate.crt Network Usher Server to sign any Certificate
Certificate Manager: Signing Request (Directory Agent,
Authority providing Usher Security apps, Usher SDK-based
Certificate company applications, VPN Agents, etc.). It is
information, used by Usher internally only.
step 4

Usher Server /certs/f10_ Setting up Key for the Usher Signing Certificate
Signing ushersigningcertificate.key Network
Certificate Manager:
Authority providing
Certificate company
private key information,
step 4

Usher SAML /certs/f11_ Setting up SAML Certificate that the Usher Server
Certificate ushersamlcertificate.crt Network will use to sign SAML Requests
Manager:
providing
company
information,
step 4

Usher SAML /certs/f11_ Setting up Private key for the SAML Certificate
Certificate ushersamlcertificate.key Network that the Usher Server will use to sign
Private Key Manager: SAML Requests
providing
company
information,
step 4

Usher Agent /certs/f13_ Synchronizing SSL Client Certificate the Usher

Certificate usherdirectoryagentcertificate.crt users from Directory Agent will use to
Active authenticate itself with the Usher
Directory, Server and the Usher Gateway Server.
step 7 It is signed by the Usher Signing
Certificate through the Agent setup
process on Network Manager.

Usher Agent /certs/f14_ Synchronizing Private key for the Usher Agent
Certificate usherdirectoryagentcertificate.key users from Certificate
Private Key Active
Directory,
step 8

System sizing guidelines

The following topics describe sizing guidelines to consider when you initially set up
MicroStrategy with your system. You should periodically reevaluate the system and
update it based on actual system performance and use.

This section describes only the most basic guidelines. For detailed information
refer to the System Administration Guide.

36 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Number of users
The number of users can be measured in the following ways:
• Total users: Users that are registered in the system. For example, if a corporate
website is available to be viewed by 950 individuals, the site has 950 total users.
• Active users: Users that are logged into the system. If a site is available to be viewed
by 950 total users and 30 of them are logged in to the site, there are 30 active users.
• Concurrent users: Users that have jobs being processed by a server (MicroStrategy
Web, Intelligence Server, and so on) at the same time. For example, a site is available
to 950 total users, and 30 people are logged in. Of 30 active users, 10 have jobs being
processed by the server simultaneously; hence there are 10 concurrent users.
Of these measures, the number of concurrent users is important to consider. Your
system must support the maximum number of concurrent users you expect at any given
time.

Report complexity
The more complex a report, the more Intelligence Server resources are required. In this
context, a “complex” report is one that requires a lot of analytical processing. While
reports with long, complicated SQL are certainly complex in nature, they do not
necessarily require additional Intelligence Server resources to execute. It is the analytical
processing in a report that creates additional stress on an Intelligence Server.
Since analytically complex reports create a heavier load on the Intelligence Server than
simpler reports, you should have a general idea of what the average report complexity is
for your system. Knowing this can help you decide on a caching strategy. For example,
you may decide to pre-cache complex reports and determine the processing power your
Intelligence Server needs.

The database server processes the SQL that Intelligence Server generates, so
reports with extremely complex SQL can place additional stress on the database
server. You should take this into account when sizing your database server
machine.

Ad hoc reports versus caches

Report caches store the results of previously executed reports. If a client (MicroStrategy
Web, Developer, and so on) requests a report that is cached, Intelligence Server simply
returns the cached report results to the client. For any ad hoc reports that are not
cached, Intelligence Server must go through the entire report execution cycle before it
can return the results. For this reason, report caching allows better response time while
minimizing the load on the Intelligence Server.
The benefits of caching are more apparent for complex reports than for simple reports.
While caching a complex report may significantly improve execution time, a report cache
for a simple report may not make much difference in this regard.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 37

Installation and Configuration Guide

Therefore, the more complex the ad hoc reporting is in your system, the greater the
overall load on the Intelligence Server. Be sure to take this into account when sizing your
Intelligence Server machine.

The process for element browsing is similar to ad hoc reporting. Element browsing
takes place when you navigate through hierarchies of attribute elements, for
example, viewing the list of months in the year attribute. By default, caching is
enabled for element browsing. In addition, you can limit the number of elements
to be retrieved at a time.

Report Services document

Report Services documents utilize MicroStrategy objects to run complex and
sophisticated reports. The datasets available to a document determine its content. Each
dataset represents a report and its component objects, such as attributes, metrics, custom
groups, and consolidations. When a dataset is available to a document, the entire report
or any component object from that dataset can be included in the document output.
When creating a document, refer to the following guidelines to avoid an increase in the
Intelligence Server execution time and the overall CPU usage:
• The datasets should be few in number, but large in size.
• The number of grids in the output document should be less in number. Consolidate
the data to fit into fewer grids in the output document, where possible.
• Use of complex elements, such as consolidations, custom groups, and smart metrics
can increase the Intelligence Server usage, especially if arithmetic operators are used
in element definitions.
• Use Custom formatting only when required.

OLAP Services
OLAP Services store reports as Intelligent Cubes in the physical memory of the
Intelligence Server. When these Intelligent Cubes are cached in memory, report
manipulations, such as adding derived metrics and derived elements, formatting, and
drilling within the Intelligent Cube, take considerably less time. This is the case because
the new SQL is not run against the database.
OLAP Services provide enhanced report manipulation functionality at the cost of
Intelligence Server resources, as the cubes are stored in the memory of the Intelligence
Server. Consider the following factors to determine the size of the Intelligent Cubes:
• Intelligence Server resources
• Expected response time
• User concurrency
You must monitor Intelligence Server CPU utilization and memory usage closely as
OLAP Services might have an impact on the performance of the platform, particularly
the memory and report response time. For information on OLAP Services, see the In-

38 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

memory Analytics Guide. Additional performance tuning best practices for OLAP
Services are provided in the System Administration Guide.

Additional considerations
Numerous factors can affect system performance, most of them related to system
specifics, which makes them difficult to predict. Listed below are items you might want
to consider when determining the requirements for your system:
• Developer versus MicroStrategy Web usage—MicroStrategy products are designed
with the assumption that the majority of users access the system through
MicroStrategy Web while a smaller percentage use the Developer products.
• Statistics logging—Statistics logging is very useful for analyzing and further refining
the system configuration based on actual usage. However, logging all statistics all the
time can create a noticeable increase in system response time. For this reason, you
might choose to log only a subset of the statistics generated or only log statistics
periodically.
• Backup frequency—Caches can be stored in memory and on disk. When you enable
backup, you allow the Intelligence Server to write all cache files to disk. If the backup
frequency is set to the default of zero, backup files are written to disk as soon as they
are created. However, writing all cache files to disk all the time can cause a
noticeable reduction in system performance.
Set the backup frequency to a value that minimizes disk writes and optimizes
memory usage for your system.
• Ratio of MicroStrategy Web servers to Intelligence Servers—In a typical system you
should have a 1:1 ratio of Intelligence Servers to MicroStrategy Web servers. This
ensures that resources on both sides are optimized. However, you might find it useful
to add Intelligence Servers or MicroStrategy Web servers depending on your
particular requirements.
• Report Styles—MicroStrategy Web provides a set of different XSL report styles. These
styles provide an easy way for you to customize how reports look. Due to the varying
complexity of these styles, some might require more processing than others.

MicroStrategy Professional Services for high performance

MicroStrategy Professional Services has identified five primary levers customers can use
to get dramatically faster performance:
• Employ in-memory Business Intelligence
• Design high performance dashboards
• Optimize query efficiency
• Implement effective caching strategies
• Configure MicroStrategy for high performance

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 39

Installation and Configuration Guide

In just one week, MicroStrategy Professional Services, will conduct a thorough

examination of your Business Intelligence implementation, providing you with actionable
recommendations on these five key areas to improve overall performance. The
MicroStrategy Performance Analysis service delivers:
• Performance optimization roadmap: A customized report with prioritized
recommendations to achieve performance goals.
• System configuration: Optimum configuration setting recommendations to
achieve efficient use of resources across different MicroStrategy products.
• Performance monitoring plan: A set of performance related metrics to
proactively monitor and identify performance opportunities.
To learn how MicroStrategy Professional Services can help you assess and prioritize your
performance opportunities with a Performance Analysis, see
http://www.microstrategy.com/services-support/overview.

Common questions about sizing

The sections below provide brief explanations to common sizing questions. For detailed
information on tuning your MicroStrategy environment, see the Tuning your System for
Best Performance chapter in the System Administration Guide. The sections below also
provide other additional resources.

Why should I increase the processor speed of Intelligence Server?

Increasing the processor speed of Intelligence Server enhances performance and reduces
execution time for all analytical tasks and for requests from the Extensible Markup
Language (XML) and Component Object Model (COM) application programming
interfaces (APIs). If you see that the machine or machines are running consistently at a
high capacity, for example, greater than 80%, it may be a sign that a faster processor
would improve the system’s capacity.
For more detailed information on tuning your processors for your MicroStrategy
environment, see the section Managing system resources in the System Administration
Guide.

Why should I add more processors to Intelligence Server?

Adding more processors to the Intelligence Server allows for a better load distribution
among the processors. This provides an overall performance gain. If you notice that the
processor is running consistently at a high capacity, for example, greater than 80%,
consider increasing the number of processors.
For more detailed information on tuning your processors for your MicroStrategy
environment, see the section Managing system resources in the System Administration
Guide.

40 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Why should I increase memory on the machine that hosts Intelligence Server?
If the physical disk is utilized too much on a machine hosting Intelligence Server, it can
indicate that there is a bottleneck in the system’s performance. To monitor this on a
Windows machine, use the Windows Performance Monitor for the object PhysicalDisk
and the counter % Disk Time. If you see that the counter is greater than 80% on
average, it may indicate that there is not enough memory on the machine.
For more detailed information on tuning your machine’s memory for your MicroStrategy
environment, see the section Managing system resources in the System Administration
Guide.

What would more network bandwidth do for me?

You can tell whether or not your network is negatively impacting your system’s
performance by monitoring how much of your network’s capacity is being used. To
monitor this on a Windows machine, use the Windows Performance Monitor for the
object Network Interface, and the watch the counter Total bytes/sec as a percent
of your network’s bandwidth. If it is consistently greater than 60% (for example), it may
indicate that the network is negatively affecting the system’s performance.
For very large result sets, increasing network bandwidth reduces bottlenecks created by
network congestion. The result is larger data flow and faster query response time.
For more detailed information on tuning your network for your MicroStrategy
environment, see the section How the network can affect performance in the System
Administration Guide.

How many CPUs can a user fully utilize?

One user can fully utilize up to one CPU, regardless of the number of CPUs available in
the server. The load is split across multiple CPUs in multi-processor servers.
For more detailed information on how licensing can affect the utilization of CPUs, see
the System Administration Guide.

What is the advantage of using hyper-threading for a dual processor?

The advantage of using hyper-threading with a dual processor is that it decreases the
overall CPU usage. The use of hyper-threading is recommended if you have a large
number of users.

What is the disadvantage of using hyper-threading for a dual processor?

The disadvantage of using hyper-threading is that it increases the Intelligence Server
execution time slightly. Therefore, for faster processing, the use of hyper-threading is not
recommended.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 41

Installation and Configuration Guide

What is the largest Intelligent Cube size that I can store in an Intelligence
Server?
Intelligent Cubes must be stored in Intelligence Server memory for reports to access
their data. While this can improve performance of these reports, loading too much data
onto Intelligence Server memory can have a negative impact on Intelligence Server’s
ability to process jobs. For this reason, it is important to govern how much Intelligent
Cube data can be stored on the Intelligence Server.
For information on governing Intelligent Cube memory usage, loading, and storage, see
the System Administration Guide.

International support
The following table lists the language selection possibilities for different installation
cases.

Installation Result

Fresh installation on a system in The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard prompts you to select the
which MicroStrategy application language from the drop-down list.
has never been installed before
The user language in the product interface is the language that
you select during installation.
Once the product is installed, the Online Help is displayed in the
same language that the user selects in the language prompt of
the installation routine.
Repair or maintenance installation All subsequent executions of the installation routine are
on a system on which MicroStrategy displayed in the language that you selected the first time you
application has been installed installed the product on the system.
before
The user language in the product interface is also the language
that you selected the first time you installed the product on the
system.
Completely uninstalling all the If you uninstall all the products and install either the same
MicroStrategy products and version or a higher version again, the MicroStrategy Installation
installing the same version or a Wizard prompts you to select the language from the drop-down
newer version list.
Note: Even if you select a language from the language prompt
in the installation routine, it has no effect on the default
language of the product interfaces.

During installation, the installation Online Help is displayed in English only.

MicroStrategy Web and Intelligence Server

compatibility
You must ensure the versions of MicroStrategy Web and Intelligence Server are
compatible. For example, MicroStrategy Web 8.0.2 can only connect to Intelligence

42 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Server 8.0.0 or later. For a complete list of compatible MicroStrategy Web and
Intelligence Server versions, refer to the MicroStrategy Readme.

Refer to the MicroStrategy General Information Readme for the complete

MicroStrategy platform compatibility and interoperability specification. In
addition, you can contact MicroStrategy Technical Support for the latest
information and updates.

Certified ODBC drivers for MicroStrategy Intelligence

Server
MicroStrategy certifies ODBC drivers for Windows, Solaris, AIX, HP-UX, and Redhat or
SUSE Linux for Intelligence Server and different DBMS types. MicroStrategy-branded
ODBC drivers are installed with the MicroStrategy products.
• For a complete list of certified and supported configurations with exact version
numbers, refer to the certified and supported configurations listed in the
MicroStrategy Readme.

Recommended system settings for UNIX and Linux

UNIX and Linux systems allow processes and applications to run in a virtual
environment. This means that each process, depending on its owner and the settings for
certain environment variables, are run using a distinct set of properties that affect how
much memory the process can use, how many CPU seconds it can use, what thread
model it can use, how many files it can open, and so on.
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal installs on UNIX and Linux systems with the
required environment variables set to ensure that the server’s jobs are processed
correctly. However, as mentioned above, some settings are related to the user who starts
the process (also known as the owner of the process) and other settings can only be set
by the system administrator. Some of these settings may also have limits enforced for
reasons unrelated to supporting MicroStrategy.
The table below lists MicroStrategy’s recommendations for system settings that can
affect the behavior of Intelligence Server Universal.

Modifying the system settings listed below can affect system-wide behavior and
therefore, steps to modify these values are not given. You should refer to your
UNIX and Linux documentation and contact your system administrator to modify
these settings.

Setting Name Description Recommended Value

ulimit name (limit
name)

cputime Maximum Unlimited.

(time) CPU seconds
per process.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 43

Installation and Configuration Guide

Setting Name Description Recommended Value

ulimit name (limit
name)

filesize Maximum Unlimited, or as large as the file system allows. Your system
(file) size for a administrator may enforce limits on the maximum size of files
single file. for reasons unrelated to MicroStrategy. This value must be at
least as large as the maximum size for core dump files
(coredumpsize).

AIX machines use a default filesize limit of 2 GB. To

support copying the MicroStrategy installation file to an AIX
machine, you may need to increase the filesize limit to
be larger than the size of the MicroStrategy installation file.

datasize Maximum Unlimited, or as large as the system virtual memory allows. Your
(data) heap size per system's virtual memory constraints affect the data size you can
process. set for a process’s heap size. The value should be the same as
the maximum size for core dump files (coredumpsize).

stacksize Maximum 200 MB.

(stack) stack size
per process.

coredumpsize Maximum Set this value to the same value as the maximum heap size per
(coredump) size for a process (datasize). If core dump files are created that are
single core larger than this value, the files are corrupted and unusable.
dump file.

memoryuse Maximum Unlimited, or as large as the physical memory of your system

(memory) size of allows.
physical
memory
allotted per
process.

vmemoryuse Maximum Unlimited, or as large as your system virtual memory allows.

(vmemory) size of virtual
memory
allowed per
process.

descriptors Maximum 8192.

(nofiles) number of
file
descriptors
(open files)
per process.

Methods of installation
The methods of MicroStrategy installation are:

44 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Graphical user interface

The GUI mode presents a user interface for each page in the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard. You click the mouse to place the cursor on the desired object, then proceed as
appropriate to complete the task. The following navigational buttons are also displayed:
• Next: Click to proceed to the next page.
• Back: Click to return to the previous page.
• Cancel: Click to cancel the installation and close the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard.
• Finish (only on the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete page): Click to
complete the setup and close the wizard.

Command line
In command line mode, you type the appropriate information at the prompt and press
ENTER. Instructions are included on each page of the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard.
In some cases, you are asked to make a selection by pressing 1 or 2, and ENTER. You
then press 0 and ENTER to continue.
Defaults appear next to each prompt and are enclosed in square brackets, for example,
[1]. Press ENTER to use the default, or type a different response to the prompt to
override the default.
In addition, on the command line wizard pages, the following options are available:
• Press 1 and then press ENTER to proceed to the next page.
• Press 2 and then press ENTER to return to the previous page.
• Press 3 and then press ENTER to cancel the installation and close the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard.
• On the last page, which is MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete, press 3 and
then press ENTER to complete the setup and close the wizard.
For information on command line installation, refer to Chapter 3, Installing
MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux.

Silent installation
A silent, or unattended, installation is one that presents no graphical user interface
(GUI). Silent installations are useful for system administrators who do not want users to
run the installation themselves. It allows you to automate the installation, so it can be
called from a script and executed without user interaction.
For information on silent installation, refer to Silent installation, page 311 in Chapter 8,
Automated Installation on Windows and Silent installation, page 317 in Chapter 9,
Automated Installation on UNIX and Linux.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 45

Installation and Configuration Guide

Creating custom installation packages

You can reduce the amount of data that has to be downloaded for an installation by
providing only the files required to complete a MicroStrategy installation. This technique
can then be used to reduce the amount of data packaged and downloaded for other
MicroStrategy installations within your organization.
The steps below show you how to create these custom installation packages.

If you are performing a MicroStrategy hotfix installation, you must include all of
the files provided as part of the hotfix installation in their default location. This
means that you cannot use the steps provided below to create a custom
MicroStrategy hotfix installation package.

To create a custom MicroStrategy installation package

1 Retrieve the MicroStrategy installation files from the installation disk or the
MicroStrategy download site. Save these files to a folder. Contact your MicroStrategy
sales representative to determine the location and login credentials for the
MicroStrategy download site.
2 Within the location where you saved the MicroStrategy installation files, browse to
the DataFiles folder.
3 You can determine the required installation files in the following ways:
• For Windows installations, you can use the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard to
determine the required files, as described in To determine the required
installation files for Windows installations, page 47.
• For UNIX and Linux installations, the table below lists which installation files
are required for each MicroStrategy component. Once you determine the
required installation files, you can include them in your custom installation as
described in To specify the location of the installation files, page 47 below.

Installation File MicroStrategy Components That Require The Installation File

mstr1.tzp All MicroStrategy components and products

mstr3.tzp MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal and all of its components

mstr4.tzp MicroStrategy Web Universal, including Web Analyst, Web Reporter, and Web
Professional

mstr5.tzp MicroStrategy Web Services for Office

mstr6.tzp MicroStrategy Command Manager

mstr7.tzp MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

mstr8.tzp MicroStrategy System Manager

46 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Installation File MicroStrategy Components That Require The Installation File

mstr9.tzp MicroStrategy Mobile Client

mstr10.tzp MicroStrategy Mobile Server

mstr11.tzp MicroStrategy Portlets, which is a component of MicroStrategy Web Universal

mstr12.tzp MicroStrategy GIS Connectors, which is a component of MicroStrategy Web Universal

mstr13.tzp All MicroStrategy components and products

To determine the required installation files for Windows installations

4 Move all of the compressed .zip files within this folder to a different folder
location.
5 Use the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard to begin a MicroStrategy installation. For
steps to locate and use the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, see Chapter 2,
Installing MicroStrategy on Windows.
6 Complete the steps up to and including the step to select the MicroStrategy
components to be installed.
7 After selecting the MicroStrategy components to be installed and clicking Next, a
message is displayed that lists the required installation files. Store all of these files in
a location that can be accessed by the machine that will use the custom installation
package.
8 Click Cancel to close the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard.

To specify the location of the installation files

9 When performing the installation, you can specify the location of these files as
follows:
• For Windows installations, you can specify the location of these files using a
response.ini file, as described in Installation Files, page 277.
• For UNIX installations, you can specify the location of these files using an
options.txt file, as described in Providing installation files for smaller
installations, page 335.

Licensing information
If you have installed the Evaluation version of MicroStrategy, you cannot use its license
key with a Generally Available (GA) license key in the same environment. Hence, the
Evaluation version of MicroStrategy cannot be used for your production environment.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 47

Installation and Configuration Guide

Types of licenses
Refer to your MicroStrategy contract and any accompanying contract documentation for
descriptions of the different MicroStrategy license types.
If you receive access to Usher functionality as part of MicroStrategy analytics software
products, either by purchasing licenses to such software products or receiving such
software products as part of a maintenance upgrade, your use of such Usher functionality
is restricted to use solely for the purpose of authentication in conjunction with
MicroStrategy analytics software products.

Installation and configuration checklists

This guide provides information on how to install and configure MicroStrategy products
on Windows, UNIX, and Linux. To help you navigate through this guide, the following
sections in this chapter list the chapters that you should refer to depending on the
platform on which you are installing MicroStrategy products. Each list also provides a
brief overview of each chapter. It is recommended that you read this section before
performing an installation. You can use the tables as checklists of installation and
configuration tasks to be completed.

The appendixes in this guide are not listed in the checklists below. The checklists
only cover the main steps to install and configure MicroStrategy products. The
appendixes in this guide contain important configuration details that are useful
throughout the life cycle of your MicroStrategy installation.

Installing and configuring MicroStrategy on Windows

If you are installing MicroStrategy on Windows, you should refer to the following
chapters sequentially.

You can use the Complete column on the left to check off each high-level step as
you complete it.

Complete Chapter and Installation Task

Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation: Review this chapter for important installation
prerequisites and considerations.

48 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Complete Chapter and Installation Task

Chapter 2, Installing MicroStrategy on Windows: This chapter describes the procedures for
installing the MicroStrategy products necessary to run your business intelligence
application in a Windows environment.
Or
Chapter 8, Automated Installation on Windows: As an alternative to the regular
installation, you can perform a fully automated and unattended installation including
customization routines available with the product. This chapter describes different types of
unattended and automated installations and provides steps to perform these installations
on Windows.
Additionally, Chapter 10, Deploying OEM Applications explains the common workflow for
deploying the MicroStrategy platform as an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
application.
Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation: After installing MicroStrategy products, you have 30
days to activate your software installation. If you have not activated your software after 30
days, some MicroStrategy features may become unavailable until you complete the
software activation.
Chapter 5, Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server : After installing and activating
MicroStrategy products, you must use the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard to configure
the MicroStrategy metadata repository, statistics tables, history list tables, Intelligence
Server, and project sources. This chapter describes the steps used to configure an installed
MicroStrategy suite of products using the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard.
Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations Manager : You
can deploy your project to your user community using MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal.
This chapter provides information on how to deploy and configure MicroStrategy Web or
Web Universal on Windows, UNIX, and Linux platforms with various Web and application
servers.
You can deploy your project with either MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal. MicroStrategy
Web Universal is platform-independent, whereas MicroStrategy Web can be installed only
on Windows.
Chapter 12, Adding or Removing MicroStrategy Components: This chapter describes the
steps to add and remove MicroStrategy components on Windows, as well as other
operating systems. For Windows platforms, refer to the following sections:
• Adding or removing MicroStrategy components on Windows, page 373.
• Re-installing MicroStrategy components on Windows, page 374.
• Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on Windows, page 376.

Installing and configuring MicroStrategy on UNIX and

Linux
If you are installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux operating systems, you should
refer to the following chapters sequentially.

You can use the Complete column on the left to check off each high-level step as
you complete it.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 49

Installation and Configuration Guide

Complete Chapter and Installation Task

Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation: Review this chapter for important installation
prerequisites and considerations.
Chapter 3, Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux: This chapter describes the
procedures for installing the MicroStrategy products necessary to run your business
intelligence application on a UNIX and Linux environment.
Or
Chapter 9, Automated Installation on UNIX and Linux: As an alternative, you can perform a
fully automated and unattended installation without using the graphical user interface. This
chapter describes different types of unattended and automated installations and steps to
perform these installations on UNIX.
Or
Usher Security Installation and Configuration: This chapter describes the full procedures
for installing Usher Security in conjunction with other MicroStrategy products.
Additionally, Chapter 10, Deploying OEM Applications explains the common workflow for
deploying the MicroStrategy platform as an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
application.
Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation: After installing MicroStrategy products, you have 30
days to activate your software installation. If you have not activated your software after
these 30 days have passed, some MicroStrategy features may become unavailable until
you complete the software activation.
Chapter 5, Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server : After installing and activating
MicroStrategy products, you must use the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard to configure
the MicroStrategy metadata repository, statistics tables, history list tables, Intelligence
Server, and project sources. This chapter addresses the processes necessary to configure
an installed MicroStrategy suite of products using the Configuration Wizard. If no project
sources are defined, then the Configuration Wizard opens.
Or
Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools: MicroStrategy tools
are provided in command line mode on UNIX and Linux so that you can perform various
configuration tasks through the operating system console. This enables you to perform your
required configurations even if you do not have access to the MicroStrategy interface.
Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations Manager : You
can deploy your project to your user community using MicroStrategy Web Universal. This
chapter provides information on how to deploy and configure MicroStrategy Web and Web
Universal on Windows, UNIX, and Linux platforms with various Web and application
servers.
You can deploy your project with either MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal. MicroStrategy
Web Universal is platform-independent, whereas MicroStrategy Web can be installed only
on Windows.
Chapter 7, Setting Up Documents and HTML Documents: This chapter explains the setup
required for the Intelligence Server to create and execute HTML documents and
documents. It also describes the steps to create this setup, which are only necessary on a
UNIX or Linux environment.
Chapter 12, Adding or Removing MicroStrategy Components: This chapter describes the
steps to add and remove MicroStrategy components on all supported operating systems.
For UNIX and Linux platforms, refer to the following section:
• Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on UNIX and Linux, page 377

50 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 2
INSTALLING MICROSTRATEGY
ON WINDOWS
This chapter describes the procedures for installing the MicroStrategy products that are
necessary to run your business intelligence application on a Windows environment.
Before installing MicroStrategy products, you should refer to Chapter 1, Planning Your
Installation for important pre-installation information.
Some MicroStrategy products are available in two versions, as described below.
• Windows only: The Windows only versions, labeled as MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server, MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET), and so on, are compatible only with a
Windows platform. With these versions, MicroStrategy Web can be deployed quickly
and easily using MicroStrategy’s Internet Information Services (IIS) Web Server. The
drawback is that IIS is the only Web server that can be used to deploy the Windows
only version of MicroStrategy Web.
• Universal (platform independent): The universal versions, labeled as
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal, MicroStrategy Web (JSP), and so on,
are compatible with Windows as well as UNIX/Linux platforms. Installing the
universal versions on Windows lets you deploy MicroStrategy Web Universal with
different application and Web server combinations. For example, instead of using IIS
to deploy MicroStrategy Web Universal, you can use Apache Tomcat, Oracle 10g, and
so on.

If you have used the Evaluation Edition of the MicroStrategy platform, you may
have installed most of these products already. However, additional considerations
are important when you are setting up a production business intelligence system as
opposed to running the evaluation software. You should read this chapter carefully,
even if you already have a working system from your Evaluation Edition.

This chapter has the following sections:

• Installation procedure, page 52
• Configuring your MicroStrategy installation, page 76
If you are installing MicroStrategy on UNIX or Linux, refer to Installation procedures on
UNIX and Linux, page 77 in Chapter 3, Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 51

Installation and Configuration Guide

Additionally, Chapter 10, Deploying OEM Applications explains the common workflow
for deploying the MicroStrategy platform as an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
application.

Installation procedure
The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard provides steps to guide you through installing one
or more MicroStrategy products in a Windows environment. The following sections can
assist you in installing MicroStrategy products:
• Installing with the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, page 52
• Installation verification, page 67
There are a number of installation alternatives and procedures to support your
MicroStrategy installation documented in this guide, including the following:
• For information on installation prerequisites, see Installation prerequisites, page 18
in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation.
• For information about advanced installation functionality, such as installing in an
SMS environment or using installation response files, see Chapter 8, Automated
Installation on Windows.
• For information about installing and deploying MicroStrategy Web Universal with
other Web and application servers, see Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web,
Mobile Server, and Operations Manager.
• For information about deploying MicroStrategy Web Services ASP.NET and J2EE,
see the MicroStrategy Office User Guide.
• For information about installation prerequisites and procedures for Usher Security,
see Usher Security Installation and Configuration.

Note the following:

l If you have not uninstalled previous versions of MicroStrategy products, you
are prompted to overwrite them. Click Yes to ensure that all products are
installed properly. To retain the existing Tutorial metadata repository and
warehouse, rename it or move it to another location before you start the
installation process.
l Although MicroStrategy supports Windows Terminal Services, using
Windows Terminal Services is not recommended for installation. It can
affect the functionality of some MicroStrategy components.

Installing with the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard

To install MicroStrategy products, you must log on to your machine using a domain
account with Windows administrative privileges for the domain or target machine. The
domain must include your database servers.
To exit the installation process at any time, click Cancel.

52 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites are in addition to those listed in Installation prerequisites,
page 18:
• Usher Security requires a secure web server, contact your IT
administrator for assistance. The following items are needed to
successfully configure and access Usher Security services:
▫ An SSL Certificate Authority Root certificate and Intermediate certificates,
appended into a (.pem) file. You need to obtain this from a third-party signing
authority, such as Verisign or Thawte. Contact your IT administrator for
assistance.
▫ A HTTPS/SSL server certificate (.crt) file, and the matching key (.key) file,
which matches your Fully Qualified Domain Name.
▫ Connectivity information to a SMTP Server, and the port and credentials to
allow the Usher server to send invitation emails.
▫ Your Windows computer hostname has been changed to a Fully Qualified
Domain Name, and registered in the Domain Name System (DNS).

To access the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard

1 Log on to the machine where you are installing one or more MicroStrategy products.
2 Exit all Windows applications before beginning the installation process.
3 Download the files from the MicroStrategy download site. Locate and run the
Setup.exe file. Be aware of the following:
• Contact your MicroStrategy sales representative to determine the location and
login credentials for the MicroStrategy download site.
• You need to extract the downloaded files to locate the Setup.exe file. When
extracting the files, ensure that the extraction software maintains the folder
structure of the compressed files. Most extraction software maintains the folder
structure by default, but if you use WinRAR, ensure that you select the Extract
full paths option.
• To review an alternative, guided introduction to installing MicroStrategy
software, you can locate and run the MICROSTRATEGY.exe file. For
information on this installation alternative, see Installing with a guided
MicroStrategy introduction, page 68.
• You can reduce the amount of data that has to be downloaded for the
installation by excluding all of the .zip files, located in the
Installations/DataFiles folder, from the download. You can use this
technique to download only the files required to complete your MicroStrategy
installation, which can then also be used to reduce the amount of data packaged
and downloaded for other MicroStrategy installations. For steps to create these
custom installation packages, see Creating custom installation packages, page
46. Details on using a response.ini file to provide the location of the

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 53

Installation and Configuration Guide

installation files are provided in Chapter 8, Automated Installation on Windows

and the parameters used to specify the location of the required installation files
are described in Installation Files, page 277.
4 If this is the first time you have installed MicroStrategy, you are prompted to choose
the language for the wizard. Select the appropriate language from the drop-down list
and click OK.
The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard opens and leads you through the rest of the
installation process. The sections below describe the actions you must take for each page
in the wizard. After you enter all required information on an installation page, click
Next to proceed to the next page of the installation routine.
If any services are running for previously installed MicroStrategy products, you are
prompted to stop them. Click Yes to proceed. If you click No, you cannot install
MicroStrategy products until you stop all MicroStrategy services.

Welcome
Read the information on the welcome screen and proceed to the next step.
If you opened the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard through the Microsoft Control
Panel using the Add/Remove Programs option, the wizard opens the Welcome page in
maintenance mode. For more information on modifying, repairing, or removing all or
part of your MicroStrategy installation, see Chapter 12, Adding or Removing
MicroStrategy Components.

License Agreement
Read the license agreement, and accept or decline the agreement by clicking the
appropriate button. If you decline, you cannot install MicroStrategy products.

Click Print to print a copy of the license agreement for your records.

Customer Information
Enter the following customer information:
• First Name
• Last Name
• Email Address
• License Key

Licensed users can contact Technical Support to obtain a license key.

54 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Install Options
Select one of the following install options:
• To easily install the entire platform on a single node environment, click Express.
After installing the complete platform, you will have MicroStrategy Analytics,
Mobility, and Security installed on your Windows server, as well as the required
third-party software libraries.
For steps to use the Express installation, see Performing a MicroStrategy Express
installation.
• To install on an environment with multiple servers, or to select which MicroStrategy
products to install, click Custom, and continue with the Installation Wizard.

Choose Destination Location

Browse to the locations where the MicroStrategy products and MicroStrategy common
files are to be installed:
• MicroStrategy Destination Folder: Browse to and select the location where
MicroStrategy products are installed. This is where executable files and other support
files are installed for your licensed MicroStrategy products.
While this setting determines the default root directory for the MicroStrategy
products you install, you can change the destination of an individual product later as
part of selecting which MicroStrategy products to install.
You can choose the directory for a product only if that product is not already
installed on the server machine. Otherwise, the product can only be installed in the
same directory in which it already exists.
• MicroStrategy Common Files Destination Folder: Browse to and select the
location where MicroStrategy common files are installed. These files are required to
support a MicroStrategy installation.

Select Features
You can select both the MicroStrategy products to install and their final location.

Once you have selected all required MicroStrategy products and defined the proper
installation locations, if you are prompted to stop your MicroStrategy Web server,
click Yes. If you click No, you cannot continue with the installation until you stop
your MicroStrategy Web server.

Installing MicroStrategy products

Select the check box next to a MicroStrategy product to include that product in the
installation. Alternatively, you can clear a check box to uninstall or exclude a
MicroStrategy product from the installation.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 55

Installation and Configuration Guide

The installation pages you see after this step depend on the products you selected to
install. These instructions describe all possible pages to support all products of the
MicroStrategy Product Suite. You do not have to install all of these products on the same
machine. In fact, this is strongly discouraged in a production environment. For basic
guidelines about product deployments, see Recommended installation location and
example deployments, page 19 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation.

Depending on your license key, you can install the Universal (platform
independent) version of some of the products listed below.

• MicroStrategy Intelligence Server (see MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 6)

▫ MicroStrategy Intelligence Server subcomponents such as MicroStrategy OLAP
Services, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy Distribution Services,
MicroStrategy Transaction Services, MicroStrategy MultiSource Option, and
MicroStrategy Clustering Option.
• MicroStrategy Web (see MicroStrategy Web components, page 2)
▫ MicroStrategy Portlets (see MicroStrategy Portlets, page 3)
▫ MicroStrategy GIS Connectors (see MicroStrategy GIS Connectors, page 3)
• MicroStrategy Operations Manager (see Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web,
Mobile Server, and Operations Manager)
• MicroStrategy Office (see MicroStrategy Office, page 3)
▫ MicroStrategy Web Services for Office (see MicroStrategy Web Services
(ASP.NET) and Web Services (J2EE), page 5)

If you are a MicroStrategy Web administrator, you can allow Web users to
install MicroStrategy Office by making an ‘Install MicroStrategy Office’ link
available in MicroStrategy Web. When a user chooses to install MicroStrategy
Office, MicroStrategy Office is installed as a stand-alone product on his or her
machine. MicroStrategy Office can be installed even if no other MicroStrategy
products are available on his or her machine. For steps to enable users to
install MicroStrategy Office from Web, see Enabling users to install
MicroStrategy Office from Web, page 249 of Chapter 6, Deploying
MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations Manager.

• MicroStrategy Mobile (see MicroStrategy Mobile, page 5)

• MicroStrategy Developer Products (see MicroStrategy Developer, page 12)
• MicroStrategy Object Manager (see MicroStrategy Object Manager, page 14)
• MicroStrategy Command Manager (see MicroStrategy Command Manager, page 9)
• MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager (see MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager, page
10)
• MicroStrategy Integrity Manager (see MicroStrategy Integrity Manager, page 13)
• MicroStrategy System Manager (see MicroStrategy System Manager, page 11)
• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server (see MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, page 11)

56 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• MicroStrategy Analytics Modules (see MicroStrategy sample projects, page 16)

• Usher Security (see Usher Help)

This also includes MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting (see MicroStrategy

Tutorial Reporting, page 16)

• Other components:
▫ SequeLink ODBC Socket Server is required to support MicroStrategy Narrowcast
Server. It can also be used to access Microsoft Access databases and Microsoft
Excel files stored on a Windows machine from an Intelligence Server hosted on
a UNIX or Linux machine (see MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for SequeLink,
page 390).

The SequeLink ODBC Socket Server that is provided with a MicroStrategy

installation is for exclusive use with the MicroStrategy Product Suite. You
are not licensed to use this product with any application other than
MicroStrategy products.

▫ The MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider is required to connect to IBM Cognos

TM1 data sources. It can also be used to connect to Microsoft Analysis Services
data sources. For information on connecting to these MDX Cube data sources,
see the MDX Cube Reporting Guide.

The MicroStrategy SDK and MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) are not
included in the MicroStrategy installation. You can download the MicroStrategy
SDK from the MicroStrategy support site
https://resource.microstrategy.com/msdz/default.asp. You can also access the
MicroStrategy Developer Library from the MicroStrategy support site.

Many of the platform components have subcomponents. If you expand the different
MicroStrategy products, you can select the appropriate check boxes to specify the
subcomponents to install. For information on MicroStrategy components and
subcomponents, see MicroStrategy products and components, page 1 in Chapter 1,
Planning Your Installation.

Defining the installation location for MicroStrategy products and sub-

components
You can select MicroStrategy products and their sub-components to define their
installation locations. When you select a MicroStrategy product or sub-component, the
Destination Folder area near the bottom of the interface displays the current
installation folder for the product. Click Browse to select a different installation folder.
If you select a MicroStrategy product or sub-component and the Browse button is not
accessible, this means that the installation location cannot be changed. For example, if
you select MicroStrategy Office you cannot define an installation location. However, if
you expand this product, you can define the installation location for its subcomponents.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 57

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Setup and Choose data files location

You see the MicroStrategy Setup dialog box and the Choose data files location page only
if some of the files, required to install the MicroStrategy components you have selected
for installation, are not available. If you are using this technique to reduce the amount of
data that has to be downloaded for the installation, it is recommended that you do the
following:
• Review the files listed in the MicroStrategy Setup dialog box, and make a note of all
the required files. These files need to be provided as part of the installation for the
MicroStrategy components you selected using the Select Features page of the
installation (see Select Features, page 55).
• Provide the location of the installation files using a response.ini file. This lets
you access the installation files stored on a folder or stored at a URL and accessed
using HTTP or HTTPS. Details on using a response.ini file as part of an
installation are provided in Chapter 8, Automated Installation on Windows and the
parameters used to specify the location of the required installation files are described
in Installation Files, page 277.
If the files required for the installation are stored in a folder, you can instead click
Change on this Choose data files location page to navigate to and select the folder
that stores the installation files. If all the required installation files are provided in
the folder you select, you can click Next to continue the MicroStrategy installation.

Usher Configuration
You see this page if you have selected to install Usher. If you do not have all the
information and want to configure Usher later, click Skip to proceed with the
installation.
• SSL Certificate Authority Certificate: The file that contains the trusted Root
CA, Intermediate Root CA bundle (.pem). It must be the complete certificate chain
for your SSL Server Certificate that you obtained from your IT Administrator.
• SSL Server Certificate: The server certificate (.crt) file for your Windows server.
• SSL Server Certificate Key: The key for your SSL server certificate (.key) file.
• SSL Certificate Authority Key File Password: If your CA-signed certificate
has a password, create a text file containing this password and enter the text file
location.
• SMTP Server: Your company's SMTP server, followed by the port number in the
next box.
• SMTP Authentication: If your server is password protected, then enter the
username and password for the server.
• Email Sender Address: The email address that is authorized to send emails from
your SMTP server, and will be used to send badge invitations for your Usher
network.

58 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Host Name: Enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name you are using, for example,
yourFQDN.com.

MicroStrategy Health Center Setting

MicroStrategy Health Center can help you prevent, diagnose and fix problems in your
MicroStrategy system. It detects known problems and provides an immediate solution to
many of them. Health Center can email a system administrator if it encounters a
problem with the system. In cases where Health Center cannot fix a problem
immediately, it enables you to bundle relevant system information, such as log files, into
a diagnostic package and transmit the package to MicroStrategy Technical Support for
review and troubleshooting.
As part of a MicroStrategy installation, you can designate this machine as a Health
Agent. After you complete the MicroStrategy installation, you can further define this
machine as a Master Health Agent through the use of the MicroStrategy Configuration
Wizard.
To define the machine as a Health Agent, provide the following information:
• Port: Type the port number to use to connect to the Health Agent machine. The
default port is 44440.
• Access Code: Type the access code that must be provided by Health Center to
access this Health Agent. If you leave this field blank, no access code is required to
access this Health Agent.
• Do not set the service account: Select this check box to use the local system
account as the Health Center service account. If you clear the check box to set a
different Health Center service account, enter the following information:
▫ Login: A Windows login of the form Domain\User with full administrative
privileges under which to run the Health Center service.

The user account used to run Health Center must have full administrator
privileges for the local machine. If the administrator default privileges
have been modified for the user account, connection errors can occur.

▫ Password: A valid password for the Windows login entered in the Login field.
▫ Confirmation: Retype the password to confirm that it is correct.

MicroStrategy Health Center Configuration

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Operations Manager. Specify
the following configuration information to define the machine as a the Master Health
Agent, which is responsible for most of the Health Center operations, such as scheduling
system checks and transmitting diagnostics packages to MicroStrategy Technical
Support:
• Repository Path: Click ... (the Browse button) to navigate to the location to store
the Health Center repository. The repository contains configuration information

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 59

Installation and Configuration Guide

about the Health Center system, such as the list of machines on the network and the
MicroStrategy products they have installed, and also the destination for all exported
diagnostics packages.
• Customer Experience Improvement Program: You can choose to enroll the
installation in the Customer Experience Improvement Program:
▫ Join program: Select this option to enroll the installation in the Customer
Experience Improvement Program. Once enrolled, Health Center transmits
anonymous data about your system to MicroStrategy. No report data or prompt
answers are collected or transmitted. All information sent to MicroStrategy as a
result of this program is stored in the Census subfolder of the Health Center
Repository.
▫ I do not want to participate right now: Select this option to opt out of the
Customer Experience Improvement Program.

Server Activation
If you install one or more MicroStrategy Server products, you can request an Activation
Code to activate your MicroStrategy Server products upon completion of the installation
process. The next few pages of the installation process guide you in providing the
information you must submit to MicroStrategy to request an Activation Code.
MicroStrategy Server products include:
• MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
• MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal
• MicroStrategy Mobile Server
• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Delivery Engine

Welcome
Read the information on the Welcome screen and click Next to proceed to the next step.

Server Information
Specify information about your Intelligence Server installation. Enter the following
characteristics:
• Name: Distinguishes the name of this Intelligence Server installation from any
other Intelligence Server installations in your company
• Location: Physical location of the machine on which Intelligence Server is installed
• Use: Description of how Intelligence Server is used

Click Privacy Statement to view the MicroStrategy Privacy Statement.

60 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Installer Information
Specify contact information of the person installing the software. After your installation
is complete an email containing the Activation Code is sent to the email address you
confirm in this software activation step. Enter the following installer information:
• Specify whether you are an employee of the licensed company or installing on behalf
of the licensed company.
• For descriptions of what information to include in the other text fields, press F1 to
view the MicroStrategy online help.

Note the following:

• Select the check box at the bottom of the page to receive notifications
about product updates, events, and special offers from MicroStrategy.
• Click Privacy Statement to view the MicroStrategy Privacy
Statement.

Contact Information
You see this page if you indicated that you are not an employee of the company licensed
to use this software, and are installing the software on behalf of that company.
Specify contact information for the employee licensed to use the software. After your
installation is complete an email containing the Activation Code is sent to the email
address you confirm in this software activation step. For descriptions of what
information to include in the text fields, press F1 to view the MicroStrategy online help.

Note the following:

• Select the check box at the bottom of the page if you want to receive
notifications about product updates, events, and special offers from
MicroStrategy.
• Click Privacy Statement to view the MicroStrategy Privacy
Statement.

Request Activation Code

This page includes options to request an Activation Code now or at a later time. This page
provides the following options:
• Select Yes, I want to request an Activation Code and click Next to request an
Activation Code. The Activation Code is sent to the email addresses specified in the
Installer Information and Contact Information pages. This email is sent upon
completion of the installation process.
• Select No, I will request the Activation Code at a later time and click Next
to request an Activation Code at a later time.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 61

Installation and Configuration Guide

If you choose to request an Activation Code at a later time, a message is displayed

that instructs you how to request an Activation Code after the installation procedure
is completed. For more instructions on requesting an Activation Code at a later time,
see Request an Activation Code, page 118 in Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.
You have a grace period of 30 calendar days to activate your installation. If you do not
complete the activation before the grace period expires, your MicroStrategy products stop
functioning until you activate your installation. If you wait to activate your installation,
you receive periodic reminders.
Once your installation is complete and you request an Activation Code, an email is sent
to the email addresses you specified in the Installer Information and Contact
Information pages of the software activation procedure. The email provides instructions
on how to use the requested Activation Code to activate your software. To activate your
installation, you can also use the steps given in Activate your installation, page 120 in
Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.
When the Activation Code request process is finished, you are prompted to either view
the MicroStrategy Readme or go directly to the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
Complete page. Click Yes to read the MicroStrategy Readme or No to go to the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete page.

CPU License Information

You see this page only if both of the following statements are true:
• You are installing MicroStrategy Intelligence Server on a multi-processor machine.
• Your license is based on CPU and allows for more than one CPU.
Specify the number of CPUs that Intelligence Server is licensed to use.

MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET) Setting

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET) and only if
you do not have a previous version of MicroStrategy Web installed.
Specify the Internet Information Services (IIS) virtual directory to be created for
MicroStrategy Web pages. The default is MicroStrategy. In IIS, a virtual directory is
the home location for a set of Web pages that the Web server hosts.

62 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Note the following:

• If you have a previous version of MicroStrategy Web installed on the
machine, the new version you install uses the same virtual directory
the previous version is using. Therefore, you are not prompted to
specify the name of the virtual directory.
• The name provided for a virtual directory must be unique. You cannot
use the same name as the default for other MicroStrategy products.
• MicroStrategy automatically configures the MicroStrategy Web virtual
directory to run with the version of .NET Framework that it requires.

MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET) CPU Affinity Setting

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET) and if the
MicroStrategy Web installation detects that the license key entered is a CPU-based
license. This page is not displayed on single-processor machines.
Specify the number of CPUs that MicroStrategy Web is licensed to use on the machine.
You can specify only the number of CPUs that are allowed by the license. If
MicroStrategy Web is installed on more than one machine, the total number of CPUs
should not exceed the maximum number of CPUs specified by the license. For machines
that support hyper threading technology, the CPU counts correspond to physical CPUs,
not logical CPUs.

To allow the setting to take effect, the installation stops IIS. After IIS has been
restarted, the MicroStrategy Web application uses the specified number of CPUs.

For more information on the MicroStrategy Web CPU affinity feature, refer to the
System Administration Guide.

MicroStrategy Mobile Server (ASP.NET) Setting

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Mobile Server (ASP.NET)
and only if you do not have a previous version of MicroStrategy Mobile Server installed.
Specify the Internet Information Services (IIS) virtual directory to be created for
MicroStrategy Mobile Server. The default is MicroStrategyMobile. The virtual
directory is part of the URL used to access the interactive reporting and analysis
applications deployed on this machine via Mobile Server.
Mobile Server can be deployed using the same techniques used to deploy MicroStrategy
Web and Web Universal, as described in Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server,
and Operations Manager, page 186. For additional configurations required to deploy
Mobile Server, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 63

Installation and Configuration Guide

Note the following:

• If you have a previous version of MicroStrategy Mobile Server installed
on the machine, the new version you install uses the same virtual
directory the previous version is using. Therefore, you are not
prompted to specify the name of the virtual directory.
• The name provided for a virtual directory must be unique. You cannot
use the same name as the default for other MicroStrategy products.
• MicroStrategy automatically configures the MicroStrategy Mobile
Server virtual directory to run with the version of .NET Framework
that it requires.

MicroStrategy Operations Manager (ASP.NET) Setting

You see this page only if you chose to install MicroStrategy Operations Manager
(ASP.NET) and only if you do not have a previous version of MicroStrategy Operations
Manager installed.
Specify the Internet Information Services (IIS) virtual directory to be created for
MicroStrategy Operations Manager. The default is MicroStrategyOM. The virtual
directory is part of the URL used to access Operation Manager's administration console.
Operations Manager can be deployed using the same techniques used to deploy
MicroStrategy Web, as described in Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and
Operations Manager, page 186.

Note the following:

• If you have a previous version of MicroStrategy Operations Manager
installed on the machine, the new one that you install will use the
same virtual directory that the previous version is using. Therefore, you
are not prompted to specify the name of the virtual directory.
• The name provided for a virtual directory must be unique. You cannot
use the same name as the default for other MicroStrategy products.

MicroStrategy Subscription Portal Setting

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Subscription Portal, which is
a component of Narrowcast Server, and only if you do not have a previous version of
Subscription Portal installed.
Specify the name of the IIS virtual directory to be created for MicroStrategy Subscription
Portal pages. The default is NarrowcastServer. In IIS, a virtual directory is the home
location for a set of Web pages that the Web server hosts.

64 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Subscription Portal offers you the ability to subscribe to and view Narrowcast
Server services, service descriptions, and their most recent modification dates on
the Web. For complete information about Subscription Portal and other
components of Narrowcast Server, refer to the MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server
documentation.

The name provided for a virtual directory must be unique. You cannot use the
same name as the default for other MicroStrategy products.

MicroStrategy Web Services Setting

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Web Services, which is
required to run MicroStrategy Office, and only if you do not have a previous version of
Web Services installed.
Specify the IIS virtual directory to be created for MicroStrategy Web Services pages. The
default is MicroStrategyWS. In IIS, a virtual directory is the home location for a set of
Web pages that the Web server hosts.

The name provided for a virtual directory must be unique. You cannot use the
same name as the default for other MicroStrategy products.

For information about deploying MicroStrategy Web Services ASP.NET and J2EE, see
the MicroStrategy Office User Guide.

MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider Setting

You see this page only if you choose to install the MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider and
if you do not have a previous version installed.
Specify the virtual directory to be created for the MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider. The
default is MicroStrategyMDX. This virtual directory is used as part of the URL to
connect to TM1 data sources or Microsoft Analysis Services data sources for integration
with MicroStrategy. For information on connecting to these MDX cube data sources, see
the MDX Cube Reporting Guide.

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Setting

You see this page if you choose to install MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, and if you do
not have a previous version of Intelligence Server installed.
Select the check box to use the local system account as the Intelligence Server service
account. If you clear the check box to set a different Intelligence Server service account,
enter the following information:
• Login: A Windows login of the form Domain\User with full administrative
privileges under which to run the Intelligence Server service

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 65

Installation and Configuration Guide

The user account used to run Intelligence Server must have full administrator
privileges for the local machine. If the administrator default privileges have
been modified for the user account, connection errors can occur. For
example, if the user account is denied access to the DSN accessed by
Intelligence Server, Intelligence Server connection fails.

• Password: A valid password for the Windows login entered in the Login box
• Confirmation: Retype the password to confirm it is correct

If the password you supply changes, you must reconfigure the Windows service to
use the new password. Otherwise, Intelligence Server connections fail when the
connection attempts to authenticate the login and password.

MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Setting

You see this page if you choose to install MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, and if you do
not have a previous version of Narrowcast Server installed.
Select the check box to bypass the creation of a Narrowcast Server service account.
It is recommended you create the Narrowcast Server service account. Clear the check
box, and enter the following information:
• Login: A Windows login of the form Domain\User with administrative privileges
under which to run the Narrowcast Server service
• Password: A valid password for the Windows login entered in the Login box
• Confirmation: Retype the password to confirm that it is correct

If you change the password for this account, you must reconfigure the Narrowcast
Server Windows services to use the new password.

Refer to the MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Installation and Configuration Guide

for additional details about this setting.

MicroStrategy Office URL Setting

You see this page if you choose to install MicroStrategy Office, and if you do not have a
previous version of MicroStrategy Office installed.
Specify the URL for MicroStrategy Web Services. The MicroStrategy Office client
requires the MicroStrategy Web Services URL to access MicroStrategy projects. The URL
depends on the name of the IIS virtual directory that you specified on the MicroStrategy
Web Services page. To review the step in which the MicroStrategy Web Services page was
specified, see MicroStrategy Web Services Setting, page 65.
Assuming that you kept the default value on the MicroStrategy Web Services page and
you are installing on the same Web server machine that is hosting MicroStrategy Web,
you should use the default URL provided:
http://localhost/MicroStrategyWS/MSTRWS.asmx

66 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Office Configuration

You see this page if you choose to install MicroStrategy Office and if you do not have a
previous version of MicroStrategy Office installed.
Select the check boxes to enable MicroStrategy Office for the associated Microsoft
applications. You can configure MicroStrategy Office to integrate with Microsoft Excel,
PowerPoint, and Word. The MicroStrategy Office toolbar is added to the Microsoft
Office applications that you select.

Start Copying Files

This page displays the following information about your installation:
• Products that will be installed or updated
• Target directories in which the products are installed
• Name of the Windows Start menu program folder
• Virtual directories for MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET), Narrowcast Server
Subscription Portal, and Web Services
• URL for MicroStrategy Web Services
• Service accounts for MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server and Intelligence Server
• Location of the installation log file
• License details
Click Install to continue with the installation process, which can take several minutes
depending on your computer’s hardware configuration.

Click Print to print a copy of this information for your records.

MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete

If the option to restart your machine appears, select Yes I want to restart my
computer now to ensure that the installation process finishes correctly. This is the
recommended procedure, but you can also choose to continue without restarting.
Click Finish to complete the installation.
If you encounter errors while installing MicroStrategy, refer to Appendix ,
Troubleshooting.

Installation verification
During the installation routine, the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard gathers and
records information about your system and your installation selections. You can verify
installation setup information through the installation log file (install.log), located
by default in:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 67

Installation and Configuration Guide

• 32-bit Windows environments:

C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy.
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy.
The installation log file includes the following information:
• Installation date
• Target directories
• Program folder name
• Operating system identification
• Hardware specifications
• Selected installation options
• Registry paths
• List of registered files

The installation log file can be helpful if you encounter errors during the
installation process. For example, the log can tell you if a registry key or path was
not added or if a critical file was not registered successfully.

Installing with a guided MicroStrategy introduction

The installation procedure provided in this chapter assumes that you use the
Setup.exe file to install MicroStrategy software. As an alternative, a guided
introduction to MicroStrategy software and the installation process is also provided. This
introduction is provided as an Adobe Flash visualization.
To use this Flash visualization, you must locate and run the file MICROSTRATEGY.exe,
which is available in the MicroStrategy install media or the files downloaded from the
MicroStrategy download site. You can then use the Flash visualization to review
documentation on MicroStrategy software, as well as begin the installation process.

If you provide the MicroStrategy installation files on a network location, you must
map a network drive for users to access the MICROSTRATEGY.exe file. If users
run this file without locating it through the use of a mapped network drive, the
links to open various product manuals will not function properly.

To continue with the installation procedure, see Welcome, page 54.

Performing a MicroStrategy Express installation

The Express option installs MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise Platform with all the
features of Analytics, Mobility, and Usher Security. This guide describes the Express
Install option, which installs the entire platform on a single machine.
The MicroStrategy Express option installation is specifically designed for deployments of
up to 15-20 concurrent users with the recommended hardware specifications. This

68 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

makes it an ideal solution for a development environment, or for evaluating the

MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise Platform capabilities.
You need to provide some information for the Analytics and Usher Security
configuration.
After installing the complete Platform, you will have MicroStrategy Analytics, Mobility,
and Usher Security installed on your Windows server, as well as the required Third-party
software libraries. For a complete list of all MicroStrategy components, see What you
are installing.

Prerequisites
• System requirements:
▫ You have a 64-bit Windows Server: 2008R2, 2012, or 2012R2.
— Windows 7 (64-bit) and Windows 10 (64-bit) are supported for demo
purposes.
— .Net Framework 4.
— You have Windows administrative privileges.
— All components are installed on the local C:\ drive, which requires 12 GB of
disk space.
— To successfully complete the installation process, your server must not have
any MicroStrategy components installed.
▫ 8 GB of RAM.
▫ Multi-core 64bit processor.
▫ The Usher Security app successfully installed on your iPhone or Android phone.
Download the app from the App Store for your iPhone or Google Play for your
Android.
• MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise software requirements:
▫ Download and extract the MicroStrategy installation package from the
MicroStrategy Download Site at
https://download.microstrategy.com/. In the extracted files, locate
MicroStrategy.exe or Setup.exe.
▫ Your MicroStrategy software license key is for 64-bit servers. To request a license
key, go to the license key generator in the MicroStrategy Download Site at
https://software.microstrategy.com, contact your MicroStrategy
Representative or contact MicroStrategy Technical Support at
[email protected].
▫ After installation, a MicroStrategy Landing page containing links to the main
MicroStrategy Platform services is displayed. The page requires JavaScript to be
enabled to execute inside a web browser. Contact your IT administrator for
assistance.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 69

Installation and Configuration Guide

▫ If Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) is present on the machine, the

Express installation includes Subscription Portal and the MDX Cube Provider. If
IIS is not present, these two components are not installed.
• Connectivity requirements:
▫ Your Windows computer must be accessible through a Fully Qualified Domain
Name.
▫ Your mobile device must be able to connect to your Windows server. If not, you
are not able to retrieve your badges from the Usher Security mobile app, or
download your dashboards from the MicroStrategy Mobile client.
▫ The MicroStrategy services listed in Ports and connectivity information must be
able to communicate.
▫ Usher Security requires an SSL web server. If you are not familiar
with these elements, contact your IT administrator for assistance.
The following items are needed to successfully configure and access
Usher Security:
— An SSL Certificate Authority Root certificate and Intermediate certificates,
appended into a (.pem) file. You need to obtain this from a third-party
signing authority, such as Verisign or Thawte. Contact your IT administrator
for assistance.
— An HTTPS/SSL server certificate (.crt) file, and the matching key (.key) file.
These must match the Fully Qualified Domain Name of your Usher Security
web services server.
— Certificate paths provided during installation must not be changed since the
Usher server depends on the certificates to operate.
— To allow the Usher Server to send invitation emails, provide the connectivity
information for the email (SMTP) Server, including the port and credentials.

70 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To start the Express installation

1 Log in to the Windows server as a user with administrator privileges.

2 In the installation folder, locate and run the MicroStrategy.exe. Alternatively, you
can locate and run the Setup.exe. Accept the license agreement and continue.
3 On the Customer Information page, complete the following fields, which are used to
create the administrator's Usher Security badge:
• First Name: The first name of the Usher Security administrator.
• Last Name: The last name of the Usher Security administrator.
• Email address: The email address of the Usher Security administrator. This is
the email address where you will receive the badge invitation for your Usher
Security network.
• License Key: The license key for your installation.This key is required to install
the MicroStrategy Platform on a 64-bit Windows server. If you do not have this
license key, contact to your MicroStrategy Representative or
[email protected].
4 Click Next.
5 On the Install Options page, select Express, and click Next.
6 To configure Usher, provide the following information. If you do not have this
information, contact your IT Administrator.
• CA Certificate chain: The file that contains the trusted Root CA, Intermediate
Root CA bundle (.pem). It must be the complete certificate chain for your SSL
Server Certificate that you obtained from your IT Administrator. The path must
be specified in an absolute format such as C:\folder\example.pem.
• SSL Server Certificate: The server certificate (.crt) file for your Windows
server, specified using an absolute path.
• SSL Server Certificate Key: The key for your SSL server certificate (.key)
file, specified using an absolute path.
• (Optional) SSL Certificate Key Password File: If your CA-signed
certificate has a password, create a text file containing this password and enter
the text file location, using an absolute path.
• Email (SMTP Server) Server: Your company's SMTP server, followed by
the port number in the next box.
• Authentication (optional): If your server is password protected, then enter
the username and password for the server.
• Email Sender Address: The email address that is authorized to send emails
from your SMTP server, and will be used to send badge invitations for your
Usher Security network.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 71

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Host Name: Type the Fully Qualified Domain Name of your Windows server,
for example, webserver.acme-corporation.net.

If you do not have all the required information and want to manually
configure Usher Security later, click Skip and refer to the Usher Security
Documentation. The subsequent steps assume you have entered all the
information required to set up Usher Security.

7 Click Next.
8 The MicroStrategy Express installation relies on MySQL open source components
that are not provided by MicroStrategy. You can choose to provide the necessary
MySQL components by following the instructions given in the installer or authorize
the installer to download MySQL components on your behalf by clicking Next. You
can review the terms of the GPL license v2.0 at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/gpl-2.0.html.
9 You have now entered all the information required to proceed. To change settings,
click Back.
10 Click Install to begin installing MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise. Installation takes
approximately 20 minutes with the recommended hardware.
11 Once the platform has been installed, a restart is required to configure the new
software and services. It is recommended that you restart your machine now by
clicking Finish. The MicroStrategy software is not functional until after a restart.
12 After your machine has restarted, log in with your administrative account. Platform
configuration automatically begins. This can take up to 30 minutes with the
recommended hardware.
• On Windows 7, 2008, 2012, and 2012R2, it is normal to experience a black
screen, for up to 15 minutes, before a progress bar is displayed.
• On Windows 10, the operating system loads as normal, while the configuration
continues in the background. Wait for the progress bar to display before
resuming normal operations.
• A progress bar displays while the post-configuration steps are processed.
• You will receive two emails with instructions to retrieve your Usher Security
badges during this time period.
13 When the installation is complete, your default browser automatically opens the
MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise launch page.
• If the launch page does not display, use the shortcut on the desktop.
After your MicroStrategy installation is complete, you have 30 days to activate your
installation. Before you activate your installation you must request an Activation
Code from MicroStrategy. You can complete this request when you install
MicroStrategy with the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard or after the installation
using MicroStrategy License Manager. For steps, see Activating Your Installation.

72 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

By default, your machine's timezone is change to Coordinated Universal Time

(UTC).

To log in to Network Manager with your Usher Security app

1 You should have received two badge invitation emails for your Usher Security
network.
• Usher Security Network: This badge can be used to change the
configuration for your Usher Server from Network Manager.
• MicroStrategy Administrator: This badge is used to log in to Network
Manager and manage your MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise system (add users,
connect to Active Directory, and so on).
2 From your mobile device:
a Download the Usher Security application for your iOS or Android device.
b Opening one email at a time, click each email's invitation link to download each
badge for your Usher Security network. Be sure that your mobile device is
connected to the same network as your SMTP server.
3 On the landing page, click Network Manager.
4 Tap the QR scanner in your Usher app, and then scan the QR code. When prompted,
select your Usher Network Manager badge.
5 From Network Manager, you can add users, and logical/physical resources.

To log in to MicroStrategy Tutorial

1 You can log into Tutorial by scanning a QR code with your Usher Security mobile
app. To scan the QR code, tap the QR scanner and scan the code.

If you did not configure Usher Security, you must log in using the
MicroStrategy Administrator credentials, as described below:

a Click Credentials below the QR code.

b Type Administrator for the username and keep the password empty.
c Click to log in.
2 After logging in, you can explore the capabilities of MicroStrategy by following the
guided tutorials or exploring on your own, and creating your own dashboards.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 73

Installation and Configuration Guide

To log in to the MicroStrategy Web Administration page, the MicroStrategy

Mobile Administration page, or the MySQL database server
During the configuration process, the MicroStrategy Express Installer randomly
generated a password for the MySQL Database Server, the MicroStrategy Web
Administration page, and the MicroStrategy Mobile Administration page. The username
and password for all three are the same.
• Username: mstr
• Password: The password can be found in the following file on the server where
MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise was installed: 
C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\express_
password.txt
Note the username and password, and store them securely. It is recommended to delete
the express_password.txt file after the password is stored securely. This password
cannot be recovered if it is lost.

Supporting Information

What you are installing

MicroStrategy Analytics and Mobility
• MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
• MicroStrategy Web Server
• MicroStrategy Mobile Server
• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server
• MicroStrategy Tutorial
• MicroStrategy Developer
• MicroStrategy Administration Tools
Usher Security
• Usher Server
• Usher Gateway Server
• Usher Network Manager
• Usher Analytics
• Usher Professional

74 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Third-party software libraries

The MicroStrategy Express installation requires a number of third-party software
libraries to configure Usher Security. For the Analytics Platform, MySQL is required to
successfully run projects and reports.
In addition to the MicroStrategy software, the following software libraries are installed
during the Express install process:
• Apache Tomcat 8.0
• Apache Kafka 2.11
• Apache HTTP Server 2.4
• Java SE Runtime Environment 8
• PHP 7.0
• memcached 1.4
• Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable 2010
• Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable 2013
• Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable 2015
• Logback 1.1
• OpenSSL 1.0.2e
• MySQL 5.6
• MySQL ODBC 5.3
• MySQL JDBC 5.1
• MySQL Connector/Python 2.1
• Python 2.7
• XOM 1.2

Ports and connectivity information

The MicroStrategy Express installation configures the following services on the specified
ports. It also sets inbound Windows firewall rules to permit traffic on the specific ports.
During an uninstall, the ports are closed on the Windows firewall.
• Tomcat: 8080
• Network Manager: 443
• Usher Server 1-way: 1443
• Usher Server 2-way: 2443
• Gateway Server: 9501

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 75

Installation and Configuration Guide

• MySQL: 3306
• Intelligence Server: 34952

Certificate information
In addition to the certificates provided during installation, an Usher Signing CA is
generated to support all PKI signing operations of the Usher Server, as well as a SAML
Certificate used in all SAML transactions at the time of configuration. These certificates
have an expiration of one year from the time of installation and are located in the
c:\program files (x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\Certificates
folder. The keys for the certificates can be found in the c:\program files
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\Keys folder. To reconfigure this
certificate, see the Usher Server documentation.

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard steps to install MicroStrategy
products, you can set up and configure your installation. To help guide the rest of your
installation and configuration steps, refer to the section Installing and configuring
MicroStrategy on Windows, page 48 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation, for an
installation and configuration checklist.

Note the following:

• The next chapter in the installation and configuration checklist and in
this guide covers software activation steps with MicroStrategy. These
steps should be done before or soon after the Configuration Wizard
tasks mentioned below. For more information, refer to Chapter 4,
Activating Your Installation.
• After restarting your machine to complete an initial MicroStrategy
installation, the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard opens. The
Configuration Wizard allows you to configure your MicroStrategy
production environment. For more information, refer to Chapter 5,
Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server.

76 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 3
INSTALLING MICROSTRATEGY
ON UNIX AND LINUX
This chapter describes the procedure for installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux
platforms. The installation procedure described in this chapter refer to installing
MicroStrategy on Solaris, AIX, HP-UX, RedHat, and SUSE. This chapter covers the
following sections:

Before installing MicroStrategy products, you should refer to Chapter 1, Planning Your
Installation for important pre-installation information.
If you are installing MicroStrategy on Windows, refer to Chapter 2, Installing
MicroStrategy on Windows.
Additionally, Chapter 10, Deploying OEM Applications explains the common workflow
for deploying the MicroStrategy platform as an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
application.
For supporting installation information, refer to Installing MicroStrategy on Windows.

Installation procedures on UNIX and Linux

This section describes installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux. The MicroStrategy
products that you can install on UNIX and Linux environments are:
• MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
• MicroStrategy Web
• MicroStrategy Portlets
• MicroStrategy GIS Connectors
• MicroStrategy Web Services for Office
• MicroStrategy Mobile
• MicroStrategy Command Manager
• MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 77

Installation and Configuration Guide

• MicroStrategy Messaging Services

• MicroStrategy System Manager
• Usher Security Services
▫ Usher Security Server
▫ Usher Network Manager
• Usher Analytics
• Usher Professional

The MicroStrategy SDK and MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) are not
included in the MicroStrategy installation. You can download the MicroStrategy
SDK from the MicroStrategy support site
https://resource.microstrategy.com/msdz/default.asp. You can also access the
MicroStrategy Developer Library from the MicroStrategy support site.

For more information about these products, see MicroStrategy products and
components, page 1.
It is recommended that you install MicroStrategy products as the root user.

78 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Be aware of the following:

• If you are installing MicroStrategy products with a CPU-based license,
you must be logged in as the root user; otherwise an error message is
displayed and the installation fails.
• If you want a non-root user to be the administrator of the server, you
must manually change the ownership after running the installation.
Intelligence Server operation is dependent on root user privileges and
permissions. Therefore, changing the ownership of Intelligence Server
to a non-root user is not a certified or recommended practice.
• Only a user with root permissions can register MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server as a service. If the Intelligence Server is registered
as an application during installation, the root user can register the
server as a service after running the installation. For more information
on running Intelligence Server as a service, see the System
Administration Guide.
• Only a user with root permissions can install Usher components.
• During installation, the user account for Intelligence Server is tested to
verify that it can successfully support the use of common system tools
for the operating system. If you change the user account for
Intelligence Server, you must verify that this user account can use and
access common system tools for the operating system.
• Script files within HOME_PATH/env and other configuration files
within HOME_PATH (see Choose Destination Location for information
on this MicroStrategy directory) are overwritten anytime a new
MicroStrategy product is installed on a machine. Backup copies of the
previous file are also created during the installation. These backup
copies can be used to update the new versions of the script and
configuration files to include any prior modifications.
For example, Intelligence Server is installed on a machine. Then a
week later Command Manager is installed on the same machine.
During this installation of Command Manager, script files such as
ODBC.sh are overwritten and a backup copy of each of these files is
created before installing Command Manager.

Prerequisites
To install MicroStrategy Usher, complete the prerequisites detailed in Usher installation
prerequisites.
• If you are installing Usher Security Network Manager, you must create a database to
manage Usher identities.
• If you are installing Usher Analytics, you must create a database to store Usher
activity data.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 79

Installation and Configuration Guide

Different methods of installation

MicroStrategy products can be installed on UNIX and Linux, either in graphical user
interface (GUI) mode or in command line mode, using the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard. In both cases, the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard runs, displaying the same
pages and requesting the same information. The main differences are in how you provide
the information and navigate through the wizard.

Using GUI mode

The GUI (graphical user interface) mode presents a user interface for each page in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard. The following navigational buttons are displayed:
• Next: Proceed to the next page
• Back: Return to the previous page
• Cancel: Cancel the installation and close the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
• Finish: Complete the setup and close the wizard

Using silent mode

You can perform a fully automated and unattended installation within the MicroStrategy
platform when you do not have access to a UNIX or Linux graphical user interface. This
also lets you perform an installation on other machines.
For information on how to perform a silent installation on a UNIX or Linux
environment, see Chapter 9, Automated Installation on UNIX and Linux.

Using command line mode

In command line mode, you type the appropriate information at the prompt and press
ENTER. Instructions are included for each page of the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard.
In some cases, you are asked to make a selection by pressing 1 or 2, followed by pressing
ENTER. You then press 0 and ENTER to continue.
Defaults appear next to each prompt and are enclosed in square brackets, for example,
[1]. Press ENTER to use the default, or type a different response to the prompt to override
the default.
In addition, on the command line wizard pages, the following options are available:
• Press 1 and then press ENTER to proceed to the next page.
• Press 2 and then press ENTER to return to the previous page.
• Press 3 and then press ENTER to cancel the installation and close the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard.

80 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• On the last page, which is MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete, press 3 and
then press ENTER to complete the setup and close the wizard.

Installing with the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard

To install MicroStrategy products, you must log on to your machine using a valid UNIX
or Linux account. For ease of management and maintenance, it is recommended that
you create a dedicated user account.

Note the following:

• You need root access permissions for installation if you have purchased
the CPU-based MicroStrategy license.
• If you want to enable additional error and troubleshooting issue logging
for the MicroStrategy installation routine, contact MicroStrategy
Technical Support.

To exit the installation process at any time, click Cancel.

To access the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard

1 Log on to the machine on which you are installing one or more MicroStrategy
products.
2 Browse to the MicroStrategy Installation folder. Depending on your UNIX or Linux
environment, browse to one of the following folders:
• Solaris: QueryReportingAnalysis_SunOS
• AIX: QueryReportingAnalysis_AIX
• HP-UX: QueryReportingAnalysis_HP-UX
• Linux: QueryReportingAnalysis_Linux

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 81

Installation and Configuration Guide

Note the following:

• You can access the installation files by asking your system
administrator to share the files on a network location. There are
different installation files for installing MicroStrategy products on
different platforms; Windows, Solaris, AIX, HP-UX, and Linux.
• You can reduce the amount of data that has to be downloaded for the
installation by excluding all of the .tzp files located in the
DataFiles folder. You can use this technique to download only the
files required to complete your MicroStrategy installation, which can
then also be used to reduce the amount of data packaged and
downloaded for other MicroStrategy installations. For steps to create
these custom installation packages, see Creating custom installation
packages, page 46. Details on using a options.txt file to provide
the location of the installation files are provided in Chapter 9,
Automated Installation on UNIX and Linux and the parameters used
to specify the location of the required installation files are described in
Providing installation files for smaller installations, page 335.

3 Type one of the following commands, depending on the installation mode you chose:
• To run the wizard in GUI mode:
./setup.sh
• To run the wizard in command line mode:
./setup.sh -console
• To run the wizard in silent mode:
./setup.sh -silent -options options.txt
For information on performing a silent installation with an options.txt file, see
Completing a silent installation, page 317.
4 The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard opens and leads you through the rest of the
installation process. The following sections describe the actions you need to take for
each page in the wizard.

Note the following:

• To complete the installation, you must have write permissions in the
installation directory; otherwise the installation fails.
• After you enter all required information on an installation page, click
Next, or press 1 and then press ENTER, to proceed to the next page of
the installation routine.
• At any time during the setup, you can click Cancel, or press 3 and
then press ENTER, to quit the installation.

82 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Language Setup
Specify the language to be used for the MicroStrategy installation and proceed to the next
step.

Welcome
Read the information on the welcome screen and proceed to the next step.

MicroStrategy Installation Selection

This page is displayed only if there are installations of MicroStrategy software already
present on the current machine. The steps provided here assume that you are either
installing for the first time or creating a new installation.
You can support multiple installations of MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux machines.
Additionally, you can also modify, repair, and upgrade existing MicroStrategy
installations. This page provides the following installation options to support these
scenarios:
• Create a new installation: Select this option to create a new installation of
MicroStrategy on the machine. If an installation of MicroStrategy is already present
on the machine, you can select this option to install a completely separate copy of
MicroStrategy on the machine.
• Use an existing installation: If an installation of MicroStrategy is already
present on the machine, you can select this option to perform various installation
configurations. Select the installation you want to modify from the drop-down list,
and then select one of the following installation configurations. The installation
configuration options that are available depend on the type of installation that is
being performed:
▫ Modify: Select this option to add new program components or to remove
currently installed components. If you want to remove all MicroStrategy
components, use the Uninstall option described below. The remaining pages are
the same as for a first-time installation, although some pages may be skipped if
they are not required as part of the installation modification.
▫ Repair: Select this option to re-install program components if you have
problems with previously installed components. Your program components are
returned to their original installation state. As part of a repair installation, you
can also designate this machine as a Health Agent.
▫ Uninstall: Select this option to uninstall all MicroStrategy components.
▫ Upgrade: Select this option to upgrade all MicroStrategy components to the
version you are installing. This option is only available if the version you are
installing is a more recent version of MicroStrategy than the current installation.
Only the MicroStrategy components currently installed are upgraded, you cannot
install or uninstall MicroStrategy components as part of an upgrade. For best

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 83

Installation and Configuration Guide

practices and steps to upgrade your MicroStrategy installation, see the Upgrade
Guide.
▫ Remove hotfix: Select this option to uninstall a MicroStrategy hotfix
installation.

License Agreement
Read the license agreement, and select to accept or decline the agreement. If you choose
to decline, you cannot install MicroStrategy products.

Customer Information
Enter the following customer information:
• User
• Company
• License Key

To request a license key, go to the license key generator in the MicroStrategy

Download Site at https://software.microstrategy.com, contact
your MicroStrategy Representative or contact MicroStrategy Technical
Support at [email protected].

Choose Destination Location

Specify the locations where the MicroStrategy products and MicroStrategy common files
are to be installed: 
• MicroStrategy Home Directory: Specify the location where the MicroStrategy
configuration files and application launchers are to be installed, according to the
following guidelines:
▫ The default location is /var/opt/MicroStrategy, or
$HOME/MicroStrategy if you do not have write access to
/var/opt/MicroStrategy.
▫ Do not install the MicroStrategy configuration files directly to your UNIX or
Linux Home Directory ($HOME). To ensure that the required permissions can be
defined for the MicroStrategy configuration files, you must install these files
within a separate directory. For example, the default path of
$HOME/MicroStrategy uses the MicroStrategy directory within $HOME
to ensure permissions on these files are defined correctly.
▫ The path specified for the home directory is referred to as HOME_PATH in this
guide.
▫ Do not change the names of folders within the HOME_PATH after installing
Intelligence Server.

84 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

▫ When including paths during a MicroStrategy installation, include absolute paths

rather than relative paths.
• MicroStrategy Install Directory: Specify the location where the MicroStrategy
products are to be installed, according to the following guidelines:
▫ The default location is /opt/MicroStrategy, or
$HOME/MicroStrategy/install if you do not have write access to
/opt/MicroStrategy.
▫ The path specified for the install directory is referred to as INSTALL_PATH in
this guide.
▫ Do not change the names of folders within the INSTALL_PATH after installing
Intelligence Server.
▫ When including paths during a MicroStrategy installation, include absolute paths
rather than relative paths.
• MicroStrategy Log Directory: Specify the location where the MicroStrategy
application logs are to be created, according to the following guidelines:
▫ The default location is /var/log/MicroStrategy, or
$HOME/MicroStrategy/log if you do not have write access to
/var/log/MicroStrategy.
▫ The path specified for the log directory is referred to as LOG_PATH in this
guide.
▫ When including paths during a MicroStrategy installation, include absolute paths
rather than relative paths.

Select Components
Select the check box of a MicroStrategy product to include that product in the
installation. Alternatively, you can clear a check box to uninstall or exclude a
MicroStrategy product from the installation.
The installation pages you see after this step depend on the products you choose to
install. These instructions describe all possible pages.

If you are installing MicroStrategy Usher Analytics or Usher Mobile, components

of MicroStrategy Analytics Enterprise are also installed. To install Usher Mobile,
you must also install Usher Analytics.

Many of the platform components have subcomponents. If you expand the different
MicroStrategy products, you can select the appropriate check boxes to specify the
subcomponents to install. For information on MicroStrategy components and
subcomponents, see MicroStrategy products and components, page 1 in Chapter 1,
Planning Your Installation.

You can see only MicroStrategy products that are available with your license key.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 85

Installation and Configuration Guide

Destination Folder
You can select MicroStrategy products and their subcomponents to define their
installation locations. When you select a MicroStrategy product or subcomponent, the
Destination Folder area near the bottom of the interface displays the current installation
folder for the product. Click Browse to select a different installation folder.
If you select a MicroStrategy product or subcomponent and the Browse button is not
accessible, this means that the installation location cannot be changed. For example, if
you select MicroStrategy Mobile you cannot define an installation location. However, if
you expand this product, you can define the installation location for its subcomponents.

Missing Installation Files

You see the Missing Installation Files message only if some of the files, required to install
the MicroStrategy components you have selected for installation, are not available. If you
are downloading only a subset of the installation files to reduce the amount of data that
has to be downloaded for the installation, it is recommended that you do the following:
• Determine the files required for the MicroStrategy components you are installing. A
list of installation file requirements is provided in the table below:

Installation File MicroStrategy Components That Require The Installation File

mstr1.tzp All MicroStrategy components and products

mstr3.tzp MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal and all of its components

mstr4.tzp MicroStrategy Web Universal, including Web Analyst, Web Reporter, and
Web Professional

mstr5.tzp MicroStrategy Web Services for Office

mstr6.tzp MicroStrategy Command Manager

mstr7.tzp MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

mstr8.tzp MicroStrategy System Manager

mstr9.tzp MicroStrategy Mobile Client

mstr10.tzp MicroStrategy Mobile Server

mstr11.tzp MicroStrategy Portlets, which is a component of MicroStrategy Web

Universal

mstr12.tzp MicroStrategy GIS Connectors, which is a component of MicroStrategy Web

Universal

mstr13.tzp All MicroStrategy components and products

86 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Installation File MicroStrategy Components That Require The Installation File

mstr15.tzp MicroStrategy Usher Server

mstr16.tzp MicroStrategy Usher Network Manager

mstr17.tzp MicroStrategy Usher Analytics

mstr18.tzp MicroStrategy Usher Mobile

• Provide the location of the installation files using an options.txt file. This lets
you access the installation files stored on a folder or stored at a URL and accessed
using HTTP or HTTPS. Details on using an options.txt file as part of an
installation are provided in Chapter 9, Automated Installation on UNIX and Linux
and the parameters used to specify the location of the required installation files are
described in Providing installation files for smaller installations, page 335.
If the files required for the installation are stored in a folder, you can instead click
Browse to navigate to and select the folder that stores the installation files. If all the
required installation files are provided in the folder you select, you can click Enter to
continue the MicroStrategy installation.

Missing Requirements
This page is displayed only if there are system requirements that are not met to install
the MicroStrategy products you selected. Review the list of requirements to determine if
you can proceed with the installation, or if the installation must be cancelled.
If you are installing MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal on Linux, you may see a
warning about the value for the Linux kernel setting vm.max_map_count. For
information on this setting and MicroStrategy’s recommendation on its value, see
Supporting Intelligence Server Universal memory allocation on Linux, page 32.
To improve the performance of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal for large
scale production applications, Intelligence Server Universal can be configured to use
shared memory resources. If a semaphore configuration warning is displayed, some
system resource limits are not configured to fully support the use of shared memory
resources. To support this configuration, cancel the installation and refer to the limit
recommendations provided in Configuring shared memory resources, page 31.

System Requirements
This page is displayed only if the machine you are installing Intelligence Server Universal
on does not use the recommended system resource limits to support the use of shared
memory resources. It is recommended that you exit the installation and configure these
system settings to support shared memory resources. For information on this
requirement and the options available to complete the installation, see Configuring
shared memory resources, page 31.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 87

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Health Center Configuration

MicroStrategy Health Center can help you prevent, diagnose and fix problems in your
MicroStrategy system. It detects known problems and provides an immediate solution to
many of them. Health Center can email a system administrator if it encounters a
problem with the system. In cases where Health Center cannot fix a problem
immediately, it enables you to bundle relevant system information, such as log files, into
a diagnostic package and transmit the package to MicroStrategy Technical Support for
review and troubleshooting.
As part of a MicroStrategy installation, you can designate this machine as a Health
Agent. After you complete the MicroStrategy installation, you can further define this
machine as a Master Health Agent through the use of the MicroStrategy Configuration
Wizard. For information on configuring and using Health Center, refer to the System
Administration Guide.
To define the machine as a Health Agent, provide the following information:
• Port: Type the port number to use to connect to the Master Health Agent machine.
The default port is 44440.
• Access Code: Type the access code that must be provided by Health Center to
access this Health Agent. If you leave this field blank, no access code is required to
access this Health Agent.
• UNIX Daemon: Select this check box to configure this Health Agent as a daemon,
so that the Health Agent process is constantly running in the background. This
requires you to configure the Health Agent using an account that has root access
privileges to the machine. If you do not have root access to the machine, clear this
check box. This configures the Health Agent as an application. In this case, be
careful not to stop the Health Agent process, so that the machine can remain part of
the Health Center system at all times.

MicroStrategy Health Center Master Health Agent Configuration

You see this page only if you choose to install MicroStrategy Operations Manager. Specify
the following configuration information to define the machine as a the Master Health
Agent, which is responsible for most of the Health Center operations, such as scheduling
system checks and transmitting diagnostics packages to MicroStrategy Technical
Support:
• Repository Path: Click ... (the Browse button) to navigate to the location to store
the Health Center repository. The repository contains configuration information
about the Health Center system, such as the list of machines on the network and the
MicroStrategy products they have installed, and also the destination for all exported
diagnostics packages.
• Customer Experience Improvement Program: You can choose to enroll the
installation in the Customer Experience Improvement Program:
▫ Join program: Select this option to enroll the installation in the Customer
Experience Improvement Program. Once enrolled, Health Center transmits

88 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

anonymous data about your system to MicroStrategy. No report data or prompt

answers are collected or transmitted. All information sent to MicroStrategy as a
result of this program is stored in the Census subfolder of the Health Center
Repository.
▫ I do not want to participate right now: Select this option to opt out of the
Customer Experience Improvement Program.

CPU License Information

This page is displayed only if the Intelligence Server Universal license has a CPU number
limitation.
Specify the number of CPUs that Intelligence Server Universal is licensed to use.

Software Activation
If you have installed one or more MicroStrategy server products, you can request an
Activation Code to activate your MicroStrategy server products upon completion of the
installation process. The next few pages of the installation process guide you in providing
the information you must submit to MicroStrategy to request an Activation Code.
MicroStrategy server products include:
• MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
• MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal
• MicroStrategy Mobile Server

Welcome
Read the information on the welcome screen and proceed to the next step.

Server Information
Specify information about your MicroStrategy server installation. Enter the following
characteristics:
• Name: Distinguishes the name of this MicroStrategy server product installation
from any other MicroStrategy server product installations in your company.
• Location: Physical location of the machine on which MicroStrategy server products
are installed.
• Use: Description of how the server is used.

Click Privacy Statement to view the MicroStrategy Privacy Statement.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 89

Installation and Configuration Guide

Installer Information
Specify contact information of the person installing the software. After your installation
is complete an email containing the Activation Code is sent to the email address you
confirm in this software activation step. Enter the following installer information:
• Specify whether you are an employee of the licensed company or installing on behalf
of the licensed company.
• Enter the necessary data into all text fields. Make sure the email address you enter is
correct. This email address is the recipient of the Activation Code.

Note the following:

• Select the check box at the bottom of the page to receive notifications
about product updates, events, and special offers from MicroStrategy.
• Click Privacy Statement to view the MicroStrategy Privacy
Statement.

Contact Information
You see this page if you indicated that you are not an employee of the company licensed
to use this software, and are installing the software on behalf of that company.
Specify contact information for the employee license to use the software. Enter the
necessary data into all text fields. Make sure the email address you enter is correct. After
your installation is complete an email containing the Activation Code is sent to the email
address you confirm in this software activation step.

Note the following:

• Select the check box at the bottom of the page to receive notifications
about product updates, events, and special offers from MicroStrategy.
• Click Privacy Statement to view the MicroStrategy Privacy
Statement.

Request Activation Code

This page includes options to request an Activation Code now or at a later time. This page
provides the following options:
• Select Yes, I want to request an Activation Code and click Next to request an
Activation Code. The Activation Code is sent to the email addresses supplied in the
Installer Information and Contact Information pages.
• Select No, I will request the Activation Code at a later time and click Next
to request an Activation Code at a later time.

90 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

If you choose to request an Activation Code at a later time, a message is displayed

that instructs you how to request an Activation Code after the installation procedure
is completed. For more instructions on requesting an Activation Code at a later time,
see Request an Activation Code, page 118 in Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.
You have a grace period of 30 calendar days to activate your installation. If you do not
complete the activation before the grace period expires, your MicroStrategy product stops
functioning until you activate it. If you wait to activate your installation, you receive
periodic reminders.
Once you request an Activation Code, an email is sent to the email addresses you specify
in the Installer Information and Contact Information pages of the software activation
procedure. The email provides instructions on how to use the requested Activation Code
to activate your software. To activate your installation, you can also use the steps given in
Activate your installation, page 120 in Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.

Usher Security Server Settings: Step 1

You see the Usher Security Server Settings page if you are installing Usher Security
Server. Usher Security Server installs a database which is a system of record for
individual Usher identities. Use this page to provide the configuration parameters for the
Usher Security Server to communicate with the database.
Specify the location of the Tomcat Directory. The Installation Wizard validates that
the directory exists and contains the correct version of Tomcat, and also that you can
write to the webapps subfolder. The installation of Usher Server includes a ROOT.war
file. You can use this .war file to deploy your Usher Server on your Tomcat web
application server.
Define the database connection information for the database that will store the Usher
Security Server database, using the following settings:
• Server: The IP address for the machine that hosts the database.
• Port: The port number for the database connection. The default port is 3306.
• User Name: The account name for the database user that administers the database.
• Password: The password for the database user specified above.
• Server Database Instance: The name of the Usher Security Server database.
• Log Database Instance: The name of the database that stores log information for
the Usher Security Server.
To test the database connection, click the Test button. The Installation Wizard validates
that:
• A connection can be made using the provided server, port, user and password
information.
• If the server and log instances exist, the instances are either empty or can be
dropped.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 91

Installation and Configuration Guide

• If the server and log instances do not exist, that the provided user has the correct
privileges to create the instances.
• The provided user has the correct privileges to create tables.

Usher Security Server Settings: Step 2 for ports and certificates

You see the Usher Security Server Settings page if you are installing Usher Security
Server. This page allows you to set up a trust relationship for Usher Security Server using
the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI).
Define Usher Security Server’s HTTPS port using the following settings:
• Server (one-way SSL) authentication only: The default port is 443.
• Client and Server (two-way SSL) mutual authentication: The default port
is 1443.
Provide the location of Usher Security Server’s certificate files using the following
settings:
• Public Key SSL Certificate File: The SSL certificate is used to encrypt the data
and enforce authentication. The file contains the certification part of the signed
certificate, as well as its public key, in a crt format. By default, the path is USHER_
SERVER_INSTALL_PATH/usherApps/shardIDM/conf/Server_ca.crt.
• Private Key File: The key file is used to decrypt the data and enforce
authentication. The file contains the key part of the signed certificate in a key
format. By default, the path is USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_
PATH/usherApps/shardIDM/conf/Server_ca.key.
• SSL Certificate Chain: The SSL certificate chain is the list of Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL) certificates, from the root certificate to the end user certificate, issued by
a certificate authority (CA). The file contains the information in a pem format. By
default, the path is USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_
PATH/usherApps/shardIDM/conf/Server_ca.pem.
The USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_PATH is INSTALL_PATH/Usher/UsherServer
where INSTALL_PATH is the path specified for the install directory.

Usher Security Server Settings: Step 3 for Gateways

You see the Usher Security Server Settings page if you are installing Usher Security
Server. This page allows you to set up a trust relationship for the Agent Gateway using
the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI).
The Agent Gateway is a component on Usher Security Server that is used for
synchronizing your Usher users from Microsoft Active Directory. The Agent Gateway:
• Establishes a trusted relationship between Usher Security Server and the Usher
Agent for Microsoft Active Directory, which is the application that communicates
between your Active Directory server and Usher Security Server.
• Manages communication between the Usher Agent and Usher Security Server.

92 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Communicates the Usher Agent’s status to Usher Security Server.

Provide the Agent Gateway (one-way SSL) Authentication Only Port (the
default is 9501), and then provide the location of the Agent Gateway’s certificate files
using the following settings:
• Gateway SSL Certificate File: The SSL certificate is used to encrypt the data and
enforce authentication. The file contains the certification part of the signed
certificate in a crt format. By default, the path is USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_
PATH/usherApps/shardGateway/conf/Gateway_ca.crt.
• Gateway SSL Key File: The SSL key file is used to decrypt the data and enforce
authentication. The file contains the key part of the signed certificate in a key
format. By default, the path is USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_
PATH/usherApps/shardGateway/conf/Gateway_ca.key.
• Gateway SSL Certificate Chain: The SSL certificate chain is the list of Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) certificates, from the root certificate to the end user certificate,
issued by a certificate authority (CA). The file contains the information in a pem
format. By default, the path is USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_
PATH/usherApps/shardGateway/conf/Gateway_ca.pem.
The USHER_SERVER_INSTALL_PATH is INSTALL_PATH/Usher/UsherServer
where INSTALL_PATH is the path specified for the install directory.

Usher Network Manager Settings

You see the Usher Network Manager Settings page if you are installing Usher Network
Manager.
Specify the location of the Apache Directory. The Installation Wizard validates that
the directory exists and contains the conf and conf.d folders, and also that you can
write to the conf.d subfolder.
Specify a valid Apache User to use to access the Apache directory.
Usher Network Manager installs a database to manage Usher identities. You can choose
to use the same database connection as Usher Security Server, or define the database
connection using the following settings:
• Server: The IP address for the machine that hosts the database.
• Port: The port number to use to connect to the Usher Network Manager machine.
The default port is 3306.
• User Name: The account name for the database user that administers the database.
• Password: The password for the database user specified above.
• Database Instance: The name of the database instance.
To test the database connection, click the Test button.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 93

Installation and Configuration Guide

By default, Usher Network Manager is configured as an HTTP connection. For a more

secure connection, it is strongly recommended that you configure it as an HTTPS
connection. For steps, see your third-party Apache documentation.

Usher Analytics Settings

You see the Usher Analytics Settings page if you are installing Usher Analytics. Usher
Analytics installs a database to store Usher activity data. Use this page to provide the
configuration parameters for the Usher Security Server to communicate with the Usher
Analytics database.
You can choose to use the same database connection as Usher Security Server, or define
the database connection using the following settings:
• Server: The IP address for the machine that hosts the database.
• Port: The port number to use to connect to the Usher Analytics machine.
• User Name: The account name for the database user that administers the database.
• Password: The password for the database user specified above.
The Usher Analytics database needs to be on the same MySQL instance as the Usher
Security Server database.
To test the database connection, click the Test button.

Start Installer Operation

This page provides a description of what configurations are to be completed. If you chose
to install, repair, or upgrade MicroStrategy components, this includes listing locations in
which the products will be installed (target directories), the location of the installation
log file, and license details. If you chose to uninstall MicroStrategy components, this
includes a listing of the components to be uninstalled.
When you proceed from this step, the installation process begins, which can take several
minutes depending on your computer’s hardware configuration.

MicroStrategy Install Wizard Complete

When the MicroStrategy installation has completed, you can select the following:
• Run Usher Configuration. Available if Usher Network Manager was installed.
• View the MicroStrategy Readme for the latest updates.
• Run MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard, which allows you to configure your
MicroStrategy production environment. For more information, see Chapter 5,
Configuring and Connecting Intelligence Server.
Click Finish to complete the installation.

94 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Unique post-installation configurations

MicroStrategy supports many different UNIX and Linux environments with various
system configurations. There are a few cases in which you must perform some manual
configurations to support the use of MicroStrategy on your system.
• Migrating Intelligence Server from Windows to UNIX or Linux, page 95
• Create links for Intelligence Server startup in SUSE Linux, page 95
• Supporting fonts for documents, exported reports, and graphs, page 95

Migrating Intelligence Server from Windows to UNIX or Linux

If you are installing MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal on UNIX or Linux and
previously had Intelligence Server installed on a Windows platform, it is strongly
recommended you modify certain system tuning settings. These memory and cache
settings govern and can optimize the performance of Intelligence Server Universal and
MicroStrategy projects in your 64-bit UNIX or Linux environment. For more
information on these system tuning steps, see the After the Upgrade chapter of the
Upgrade Guide.

Create links for Intelligence Server startup in SUSE Linux

If you are installing Intelligence Server on a SUSE Linux environment, you must
manually create links for some system files. If you do not create these links, Intelligence
Server cannot start correctly.

You need root permissions to access the files and create the necessary links
described in this section.

To manually create links for Intelligence Server startup

1 In a console window, browse to the system folder usr/lib64.

2 In a console window, create the link of libssl.so.4 to libssl.so.0.9.7 with
the following command:
ln libssl.so.0.9.7 libssl.so.4
3 In a console window, create the link of libcrypto.so.4 to
libcrypto.so.0.9.7 with the following command:
ln libcrypto.so.0.9.7 libcrypto.so.4

Supporting fonts for documents, exported reports, and graphs

When Intelligence Server is running on a UNIX or Linux platform, all fonts are
converted to the Courier New font for:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 95

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Reports exported to PDF format

• Report Services documents
• Graphs contained in HTML documents
• Graphs displayed in MicroStrategy Web
This occurs because the fonts required by the PDF component are missing from UNIX
and Linux machines running Intelligence Server.

MicroStrategy cannot package these fonts with Intelligence Server due to licensing
restrictions.

For steps to support fonts such as Microsoft True Type fonts for the MicroStrategy
features listed above, see Setup for executing Report Services documents, page 259.

Verifying installation
During the installation routine, the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard gathers and
records information about your system and your installation selections. You can verify
the setup information through the installation log file (install.log).
By default, the log file is located in INSTALL_PATH where, INSTALL_PATH is the
directory you specified as the install directory in the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard.
The log file includes information about the following:
• Installation date
• Target directory
• Operating system identification
• Selected installation options
• Selected licensing details

This log file can be helpful if you encounter errors during the installation process.
The log file records the reasons due to which the errors occurred.

Directory structure
The following table describes the directories in which MicroStrategy files are installed.

PATH/Directory Contents

HOME_PATH Configuration files that can be modified after installation.

HOME_PATH/env Scripts to set up the proper environment for the MicroStrategy

applications. If additional products are installed on the same
machine at a later time, backups of the original scripts are saved
here.

96 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

PATH/Directory Contents

HOME_PATH/bin Scripts to launch the MicroStrategy applications.

INSTALL_PATH Files that are not supposed to change after the installation is
complete.

INSTALL_ MicroStrategy Command Manager files. This is the default directory

PATH/CommandManager for Command Manager but another location can be selected
during installation.

INSTALL_PATH/Help Documentation and Help for MicroStrategy products.

INSTALL_ MicroStrategy Portlet files. This is the default directory for the
PATH/GISConnectors Portlets but another location can be selected during installation.

INSTALL_PATH/ Intelligence Server-specific binary files.

IntelligenceServer/bin

INSTALL_PATH/Mobile MicroStrategy Mobile and Mobile Server JSP files. This is the
default directory for Mobile but another location can be selected
during installation.

INSTALL_ Support files (fonts) for the PDF generation feature of Intelligence
PATH/PDFGeneratorFiles Server.

INSTALL_ MicroStrategy Readme for this release of MicroStrategy products.

PATH/ReleaseNotes

INSTALL_PATH/Portlets MicroStrategy Portlet files. This is the default directory for the
Portlets but another location can be selected during installation.

INSTALL_ MicroStrategy System Manager files. This is the default directory for
PATH System Manager but another location can be selected during
installation.
/SystemManager
INSTALL_PATH/Usher MicroStrategy Usher files.

INSTALL_ MicroStrategy Web Services deployment path.

PATH/WebServicesJ2EE

INSTALL_ MicroStrategy Web Universal deployment path.

PATH/WebUniversal

INSTALL_PATH/_jvm The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to be used by the Java

applications. It provides the requirements for executing a Java
application, a Java Virtual Machine, core classes, and supporting
files.

INSTALL_PATH/_uninst Launch files for uninstalling MicroStrategy Universal.

INSTALL_PATH/bin 64-bit binary files.

INSTALL_PATH/bin32 32-bit binary files.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 97

Installation and Configuration Guide

PATH/Directory Contents

INSTALL_PATH/help Online help files.

INSTALL_PATH/jar Java libraries.

INSTALL_PATH/lib 64-bit binary libraries.

INSTALL_PATH/lib32 32-bit binary libraries.

INSTALL_PATH/locale ODBC support messages.

LOG_PATH MicroStrategy application log files, which includes Intelligence

Server log files.

MicroStrategy Messaging Services

Messaging Services is a component that is coupled with the Intelligence Server during
installations and upgrades for Linux environments. For new installations, Messaging
Services is configured out-of-the-box and runs automatically after the installation is
completed. If you are upgrading to the 10.5 Feature release, Messaging Services requires
post-upgrade configuration for the Zookeeper server, Kafka server, and Consumer
services.
All logging happens through Messaging Services and is now placed in the log/DSSError
file.
For steps on installing and configuring Messaging Services, see the following steps.

Prerequisites
• For new installations, you must be installing on a Unix/Linux environment.
• For upgrades, you must have a Unix/Linux environment.
• To configure Messaging Services, Command Manager is needed.

Installing Messaging Services as part of a new installation

1 To install Messaging Services, check the box labeled MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server on the Select Components page. By default, Messaging Services is installed
whenever Intelligence Server is selected for installation.
2 Complete the installation. For instructions about installing on Unix /Linux
environments, see the Installation and Configuration Guide.
3 Once the your installation is complete, Messaging Services is running by default and
the Intelligence Server is logging through Messaging Services.

98 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To use Intelligence Server for logging

You can elect to disable Messaging Services and use the Intelligence Server for logging.
To disable, refer to the Command Manager Script table for the correct script to stop
MicroStrategy Messaging Services.
If you want to use Messaging Services at any point in time after disabling it, you need to
restart the Messaging Services to begin logging. Refer to the Command Manager Script
table for more information

Configuring Messaging Services after upgrading

By default, MicroStrategy Messaging Services are installed along with the Intelligence
server upgrade.
Once you have completed the upgrade process, you need to start MicroStrategy
Messaging Services. If not, the Intelligence Server continues to write logs to the original
log file. For information about the correct Command Manager script, refer to the
MicroStrategy Messaging Services Script table.

Command Manager Scripts for MicroStrategy Messaging Services

To start Messaging Services To stop Messaging Services

ALTER SERVER CONFIGURATION ALTER SERVER CONFIGURATION

ENABLEMESSAGINGSERVICES TRUE ENABLEMESSAGINGSERVICES
CONFIGUREMESSAGINGSERVICES FALSE

MicroStrategy Messaging Services for clustered environments

If you have clustered your Intelligence Servers and want to use a separate machine to run
MicroStrategy Messaging Services after upgrading, complete the following steps.
1 Locate the consumer file on your Intelligence Server:
<Installationpath>/MicroStrategy/_jre/bin/java -jar
KafKaConsumer.jar
2 You need to change the following:
• The log folder where you intend to store the log files
• If you don't want to use the default Kafka server connection, you can input 'Y'
and specify your information.
• MicroStrategy Messaging Services machine IP address and server port

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 99

Installation and Configuration Guide

Usher Security Installation and Configuration

The steps below show you how to install and configure MicroStrategy Usher Security on
Linux. You can install Usher Security as part of the MicroStrategy platform. If you chose
to only install Usher Security, be aware that certain MicroStrategy components are
required for Usher Analytics and Usher Professional. These are installed in the
background. If you are upgrading your existing MicroStrategy Usher products, refer to
the Upgrade Guide. For all Usher-related Help, see the Usher Online Help.

Overview of Usher installation and configuration

process
The high-level steps to install and configure Usher are listed below:
1 Gather the information to create a certificate signing request. To install
MicroStrategy Usher, you need to obtain a series of trusted CA-signed certificates.
Contact your security administrator to complete this process. Refer to Installation
considerations for more information.
2 Ensure that the prerequisites are complete. See Usher installation prerequisites.
3 Complete the pre-installation steps to configure your Linux system to allow MySQL
and to grant privileges to each product. For steps, see:
a To configure Linux for Usher Security
b To set up Apache on your Linux machine
c To set up your timezone
d To set up your Fully Qualified Domain Name
e To open ports in your firewall
f To install memcache
g To download and set up Java Developer Kit
h To download and set up Apache Tomcat version
i To download and set up PHP
j To install and set up MySQL
k To grant privileges to your MicroStrategy products in MySQL
4 Install MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise Linux. For steps, see To install Usher
Security.
5 Deploy the Usher Server and complete configuring Usher Server and Network
Manager. For steps, see:
a To deploy your Usher Server
b To enable https for Usher Network Manager

100 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

c To set up Usher Network Manager

d To set up your Usher Gateway Server

Usher installation prerequisites

• You have previously obtained the MicroStrategy installation package.
• You have obtained either an universal installation key or an Usher installation key.
• You are using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6, or a similar flavor, as your operating
system. To find your Linux version, run the following command: cat /etc/*-
release.
• You have Linux root user permission to complete the pre-installation steps.
• You have Apache HTTP 2.2.x on your Linux system.
• You need to install Oracle Java Developer 1.7.x.
• You need to install Tomcat 8.x and the supporting libraries.
• You need to install PHP 5.4.x and the supporting libraries.
• You need admin access to MySQL 5.7.x
• You can supply a Google key for Usher Analytics. This key is used to configure
Google Geocoding in Usher Analytics.
• If you are configuring Usher Analytics and Usher Professional after installing Usher
Security, you need to install Python 2.7.

MicroStrategy Usher Security pre-installation steps

Do not save files in your \root\ folder path during installation, because doing so
will not allow you to successfully install Usher Security.

To successfully install Usher Security, your Linux systems need to be configured to allow
PHP to connect to MySQL and grant privileges to each product.

To configure Linux for Usher Security

1 Disable SELinux by navigating to:

/SELinuxinstallpath/selinux/config. Once in the configuration file,
change:
▫ SELINUX=enforcingto SELINUX=disabled.
2 Check to ensure that SELinux has been disabled:
▫ sestatus
3 Restart your system to make the changes permanent.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 101

Installation and Configuration Guide

To set up Apache on your Linux machine

If you are using Red Hat Linux, Apache has already been installed as part of the system.
If you are using another version of Linux, you need to install Apache.
You need Apache version 2.2.x. To check the version of Apache that you have installed,
enter the following command: > httpd -v.
• If you don't have Apache already installed on your system, enter yum install
httpd to install, then enter the following command to start the service:
> service httpd start
Ensure that you have installed version 2.2.x by checking the version number of
Apache by entering: > httpd -v.

To set up your timezone

Set your system timezone to GMT localtime for use with the Usher Server.
1 Enter the following commands:
• > cd /etc
• > rm localtime
• > ln -s /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT localtime

To set up your Fully Qualified Domain Name

The steps below require you to work with your IT department to change your Linux
hostname. You are also required to obtain a trusted vendor CA-signed certificate, as well
as generate a self-signed certificate. Refer to your company's IT policies for this section.
1 Contact your IT department to learn about your company's policy on Fully Qualified
Domain Names (FQDN).
2 Have your Linux hostname changed to a FQDN per your company's policy. Then
have your new FQDN and IP address mapped.
3 Following the direction of your IT department, obtain a CA-signed certificate from a
trusted vendor.
You may be asked for a certificate request that contains your company's information.
If so, follow the steps below:
a Create a certificate request (*.csr) and private key (*.key) and provide this to
your vendor in the form requested.
b Provide your company's information to your certificate vendor. This information
is incorporated into your certificate request.

102 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

4 Upon receiving your certificate from the third-party vendor, create a *.pem by
combining your certificate (*crt) and private key (*.key). If you are installing on
UNIX, enter the following command:
> cat intermediate.crt server.crt server.key > server.pem
5 To complete a successful Usher Security installation, you need to create a self-signed
certificate. To do this, generate a certificate (*.crt) and a private key (*.key). If you
are installing on UNIX, enter the following command:
> openssl req -new -newkey rsa:2048 -days 365 -nodes -x509 -
keyout self.key -out self.crt

To open ports in your firewall

To allow Usher Security to connect with the Usher Server, you need to open ports in
your system's firewall. Contact your IT department for specific instructions. It is
recommended to use the default SSL port of 443.

To install memcache

You need memcache to install Usher Security. This allows the database tables that you
create to be saved in the memory. After installing memcache, you need to configure the
modules for Usher Security.
1 You can install memcache by using either yum or rpm. Select a method and enter the
corresponding commands:
• For yum, use the following command: > yum install memcached php-
pecl-memcache.
• For rpm, use the following command: > rpm -i memcached-x.x.x-
x.el6.x86_64.
2 Configure memcache by changing the following in your memcache file:

vi /etc/sysconfig/memcached
PORT="11211"
USER="memcached"
MAXCONN="1024"
CACHESIZE="64"
OPTIONS=""

3 Restart memcache by entering: > service memcached start.

4 Verify that the server is running by checking on the status.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 103

Installation and Configuration Guide

To download and set up Java Developer Kit

MicroStrategy supports Oracle Java SE Development Kit 7. Other versions of Java

Developer Kit (JDK) may not have required components for the MicroStrategy platform.
1 Check to see if your have a version of Java DK already installed. Run the following
command:
update-alternatives --config java
2 Create a directory on your local computer where you want to install the JDK.
3 Navigate to
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/jdk7-
downloads-1880260.html, and select the correct 7u79 download version for
your OS.
4 Click to download both the tar.gz file and .rpm file, and place them in your Java
directory.
5 Click to start the installation process and follow the prompts.
6 Verify that the JDK was successfully installed. Enter the following commands:
• > which java
• > java -version.

To download and set up Apache Tomcat version

To verify whether Tomcat is already installed, run the following command:

echo $CATALINA_HOME, which gives you the location of your Tomcat
installation path.

Navigate to http://tomcat.apache.org/download-80.cgi, and under Core in

Binary Distributions, click to download the tar.gz file.
Click to install and follow the installation prompts, noting the location of the download
location for Tomcat. Next, you must install third-party libraries into your Tomcat
directory, and note the location of the libraries. Open each of the following websites and
follow the prompts for installation:
1 Go to http://www.xom.nu and click to download the complete tar.gz file.
Install the file in your Tomcat library.
2 Go to http://logback.qos.ch/dist/ and click to download both the 1.1.2
tar.gz core and classic files. Install the files in your Tomcat library.
3 Go to https://jcifs.samba.org/ and click download the 1.3.17.jar file.
Install the file in your Tomcat library.
4 Go to https://sourceforge.net/projects/wsdl4j/ and click to download
the wsdl4j 1.6.2.jar file. Install the file in your Tomcat library.

104 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

5 Go to http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/connector/j/ and click to

download the connector/j 5.1.xxtar.gz file. Install the file in your Tomcat
library.
6 Verify Tomcat to ensure that it was installed as expected.
a Start Tomcat by entering: > cd /(tomcat8)/bin.
b Enter: > ./startup.sh to display the Tomcat browser.
c In the browser window, enter:  http://localhost:8080, which is the
default port for Tomcat.

To download and set up PHP

You may encounter problems while setting up PHP on UNIX. For help
troubleshooting error messages, refer to your IT department and third-party
reference material for more information.

Prior to downloading the installation file, you must configure your system by installing
prerequisites. These are required to successfully build PHP for MicroStrategy products.
1 First, use your subcription manager to enable SCL:
▫ subscription-manager repos --enable rhel-server-rhscl-
6-eus-rpms
2 Enter the following yum installation commands to install php 5.4 and modules:
▫ yum install php54 php54-php php54-php-gd php54-php-
mbstring
3 You must also install the updates database module for MySQL. To do this, enter:
▫ yum install php54-php-mysqlnd
Next, disable the loading of php 2.3 Apache:
▫ mv /etc/httpd/conf.d/php.conf
/etc/httpd/conf.d/php.conf.old
4 Restart Apache to make the changes:
▫ service httpd restart
5 After the installation is complete, you need to enable mod_rewrite. To do this, enter
/InstallPath/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf to modify the file. The
parameters are as follows:
<Directory "/var/www/html">
Options FollowSymLinks
AllowOverride All
</Directory>

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 105

Installation and Configuration Guide

6 Verify that the required PHP modules have been installed correctly.

a Enter the following commands:
▫ >php -v to check the version of PHP.
▫ > php -m to check the modules installed:
— curl
— zlib
— openssl
— gd
— mbstring
— mysql
— pdo-mysql
— zip
— PDO
— exit
▫ > php -r 'print_r(gd_info());' to verify the GD version and
JPEG support.
b Add /etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf by executing the following commands:
▫ LoadModule php5_module modules/libphp5.so
▫ AddType application/x-httpd-php .php
c Create test.php in /var/www/html by entering the following commands:
▫ <?php
▫ phpinfo();
▫ ?>
d Restart the service to complete the changes.
e In your local browser, navigate to http://localhost/test.php. You
should see the PHP landing page, which signals that the verification is complete.

To install and set up MySQL

To successfully install Usher Security, you need to create a MySQL user and grant access
to each MicroStrategy product. MicroStrategy supports MySQL Community Server
version 5.6.23 and above. If you already have MySQL installed on your system, you still
need to install the MySQL Yum Repository.

106 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To check the version of MySQL, connect to the MySQL command client, and
run the following command:

SHOW VARIABLES LIKE "%version%";
1 In a web browser, open https://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql. From
the drop-down list, select the correct platform of MySQL Community Server for your
system. Find your OS version, and click to download the RPM file.
2 Navigate to http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/repo/yum/, and click to
download the correct RPM package for your system.
3 Open a command window and begin the installation by entering the following
commands:
• For MySQL yum repository, enter: > yum localinstall mysql-
community-release-el6-5.noarch.rpm.
• For MySQL Community Server, enter: > yum install mysql-community-
server.
• For MySQL JDBC connector, enter: > yum install mysql-connector-
java.
After installation, you need to set the classpath for the JDBC connector, which
depends on the type of shell you are running:
▫ For bourne-compatible shells, enter: > export
CLASSPATH=/home/user/mysql-connector-java-5.1.34-
bin.jar:$CLASSPATH.
▫ For C shell, enter: > setenv CLASSPATH /home/suer/mysql-
connector-java-5.1.34-bin.jar:$CLASSPATH.
• For MySQL ODBC connector, enter: > yum install mysql-connector-
odbc.
• For MySQL python library, enter: > yum install mysql-python.
• For MysQL PDO extension, enter: > yum install with-pdo-mysql.
4 Enter: > mysql_tzinfo_to_sql /usr/share/zoneinfo | mysql -
h127.0.0.1 -P3306 -uroot -p mysql to install the convert_tz functions.
• If an error message displays that the function is unable to load, check to see that
the function has been properly installed. To do this, enter the following
command: > select convert_tz (current_timestamp,
'utc','est. If the file is timestamped, then it is installed.
5 To complete the installation process, restart MySQL.Enter:
service mysqld start
6 Set the root password for MySQL.
a Enter the following command: > mysql_secure_installation.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 107

Installation and Configuration Guide

b Enter: > mysql -u root -p, followed by a password of your choice. Be sure
to note the password, as this is needed in later steps.
7 Create the MySQL user account that you will use to grant privileges to the
MicroStrategy products that you want to install.
a Enter: > GRANT ALL.
b To create the mstr user, enter: > create user
'username'@'localhost' identified by 'username';.
c To grant the mstr user access, enter: > grant all on abcd to
'username'@'localhost';, where abcd is the name of your local
environment.
8 If you are using Usher Analytics to examine the data collected on your Usher
Security server, you need to install crontab for MySQL.
a Check that this directory exists: > /usr/bin/mysql_tzinfo_to_sql
/usr/share/zoneinfo | /usr/bin/mysql -h127.0.0.1 -P3306 -
umstr -p mysql.
b Begin the installation by entering: > yum install crontab*.
c After the installation is complete, restart crontab by entering: service crond
start.

To grant privileges to your MicroStrategy products in MySQL

You need to grant required privileges to the MySQL user. For each MicroStrategy
product you plan to install, you need to grant access to make changes to the database.
For example, if you are installing MicroStrategy Usher Security, MicroStrategy Web, and
MicroStrategy Developer, then you need to grant MySQL access to each product.
1 In a command window, open MySQL.
2 Select a username to use, and type the following command:
create userYourUsername@localhost identified by
YourUsername;.
Replace the italicized variables with the user name that you selected and your local
environment name.
3 In MySQL workbench, on your local environment, click the management tab, then
navigate to Users and Privileges.
4 Click to add an account.
5 In the login name field, type your user name.
6 Select standard as the method of authentication.
7 Type your password in the password field, and then confirm your password. (This is
the password that you created in the previous steps.)
8 Click Apply.

108 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

9 Click Administrative Roles and select the applicable roles for the product(s) that
you are installing.
10 Click to grant access to the required privileges. The privileges shown below must be
granted for each MicroStrategy product you install:
• ALTER
• ALTER ROUTINE
• ALTER VIEW
• CREATE
• CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES
• CREATE VIEW
• DELETE
• DROP
• EVENT
• EXECUTE ROUTINE
• GRANT OPTION
• INDEX
• INSERT
• LOCK TABLES
• SELECT
• SHOW VIEW
• SUPER
• UPDATE
For example, if you are installing MicroStrategy Web and MicroStrategy Usher
Security, each privilege must be manually granted to each of the products.

For Usher Security, if you want network admin users to be able to create new
user accounts on your network, click CREATE USER for that role.

Installing MicroStrategy Usher Security

After completing all the pre-installation steps, you can begin the installation for
MicroStrategy Secure Enterprise Linux.

To install Usher Security

1 Download MicroStrategy 10.2 Secure Enterprise Platform installation for Linux.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 109

Installation and Configuration Guide

2 Extract the downloaded file by running the following command:

tar -xvf filename.tar.gz
Running this command extracts the file in the current directory.
3 Run the setup.sh file.
4 When prompted, select new installation. Click to accept the license agreement.
5 Enter your license key. If you are using a universal key, all MicroStrategy products
available for installation are displayed. If you are using an Usher key, only the Usher
Security products are installed. Click Next.

When using an Usher key for installation, the MicroStrategy platform is

installed in the background. These products are required for you to use Usher
and Usher Analytics properly.

6 For the Home, Install, and Log directories, it is recommended to use the default
directory locations. Click Next.
7 Select the MicroStrategy products to install, then click Next.
8 Click to browse to your Tomcat location. You can find the location of your Tomcat
directory by running the following command:
echo $CATALINA_HOME
9 In the Database Connection fields, provide your MySQL connection information:
• Server: Your server IP Address
• Port: Your MySQL port (default port number is 3306).
• User: Your MySQL username.
• Password: Your password (if you set one to be required for MySQL user).
• Server DB Instance: Leave the default value (usher_server).
• Log DB Instance: Leave the default value (usher_server_log).
10 Click Next to test your connection. To continue, you must have a successful
connection.
11 In the SSL ports, set the default for your one-way and two-way ports:
• The default for a one-way port is 443.
• The default for a two-way port is 1443.
Record the port numbers, as they are needed for future steps.
12 Click to upload your CA-signed security certificate files (.crt). These signed
certificates were signed by an external certificate authority, like Verisign and Thawte.
• SSL Certificate file: Your .crt file
• Private key file: Your .key file

110 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• SSL Certificate Chain file: Your .pem file

13 Click Next.
14 Note the value provided for Agent Gateway port, as this value is needed for future
steps.
15 By default, the Use the same SSL certificate as Usher Server check box is
selected. If you want to use a different set of signed security certificates, click to
browse and select the new security certificates.
16 Click Next.
17 In the Apache Directory field, keep the default value.
18 Unless you previously modified your Apache user and user group, keep the default
value.
19 For Database Connection, you can use the same connection as your Usher server
by selecting the check box. To use a different database instead, provide the required
MySQL connection information.
20 Click Next, which verifies the Apache directory and MySQL.
21 For Usher Analytics, you can use the same MySQL database as before by selecting
the check box. To use a different database instead, provide the required MySQL
information. Click Next.
22 For the MicroStrategy Health Center Repository Path, you must specify a
path (for example, /opt/hc, to continue.
23 Click Next until you reach the installation summary page, then click to install.
24 After the installation page, select the check box to launch the Usher Configuration
tool.
25 If you have installed other MicroStrategy products with a universal key, select the
check box to run the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard.
26 Click Finish.
27 After the installation process is completed, Usher Configuration tool is automatically
launched. You must first deploy your Usher server before using the Configuration
tool is receive the key for your MicroStrategy server.

Usher post-installation steps

After you have installed Usher Server and Network Manager, you need to deploy the
Usher Server and complete the configuration of Usher Server and Network Manager.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 111

Installation and Configuration Guide

To deploy your Usher Server

1 In a command window, navigate to the installation location of Usher Server:

> cd
/installationpath/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardIDM/bin
2 Start Tomcat by entering the following command:
> ./tomcat.sh start
After starting Tomcat, the ROOT.war folder should be extracted automatically under:
<serverpath>/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardIDM/webapps

If Tomcat does not start, refer to the catalina.out log located at

<serverpath>/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardIDM/logs to
view details of the problem.

3 Copy the logback classic 1.1.2 jar file from your Tomcat directory to your Usher
server root. To do this, enter the following command:
> cp /<localdirectory>/apache-tomcat-8.0.26/lib/logback-
classic-1.1.2.jar
/<
serverpath
>/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardIDM/webapps/ROOT/WEB-
INF/lib
4 Copy the CA-signed certification over to your Usher server root, and rename the
certification to saml2.crt. To do this, enter the following one-linecommand:
>cp /<serverpath>/<certificatename
>/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardIDM/webapps/files/saml2.cr
t
5 Restart your Usher server to make the changes permanent. To do this, enter the
following commands:
• > cd
/<serverpath>/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardIDM/bin
• > ./tomcat.sh restart
6 Check to see that your Usher server has restarted. In a web browser, type the
following: 
https://FQDN:1-way port
where
• FQDN is your domain name

112 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• 1-way port is your SSL one-way port number (443 is the default one-way port
number)
An example is https://yourdomainname:443.
7 Once your Usher server has been deployed, navigate back to your Usher
Configuration tool. Fill out the required fields with your company information to
receive the activation key for your MicroStrategy server.

To enable https for Usher Network Manager

Enabling https for Usher Network Manager is optional. If you elect to enable https, then
you must also enable SELinux.

To enable SELinux
1 Open the SELinux config file:
2 vi /etc/selinux/config
Replace disabled
3 SELINUX=disabled -> SELINUX=enforcing,
4 Restart SELinux to make the changes.

To enable https
1 Install ssl_module by entering the following command:
> yum install mod_ssl
2 Check to see that the module was enabled during the installation:
> httpd -M | grep ssl_module
3 For Network Manager to communicate with your Tomcat port, you need to change
the ssl port. To do this, enter the following command:
> vim /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf
4 Change your port numbers from ssl port to Tomcat. For example, listen 443 becomes
listen 9443.
5 The Network Manager configuration file needs to be edited in order to wrap with the
virtual host. Enter the edit command:
> vim /etc/httpd/conf.d/manager.usher.com.conf
6 Refer to the following parameters to determine what values to change:
<VirtualHost *:9443>
SSLEngine on

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 113

Installation and Configuration Guide

SSLCertificateKeyFile /opt/usher/ssl/server.key #change this

SSLCertificateFile /opt/usher/ssl/self.crt #change this
SSLCAChainCertificateFile /opt/usher/ssl/server.crt #change this
SetEnvIf User-Agent ".*MSIE.*" nokeepalive ssl-unclean-
shutdown
Alias /networkmanager
/opt/MicroStrategy/Usher/UsherNetworkManager/networkmanager
#change this
<Directory
/opt/MicroStrategy/Usher/UsherNetworkManager/networkmanager >
#change this
AllowOverride All
</Directory>
</VirtualHost>

To set up Usher Network Manager

Prerequisites
You need the following to complete the Usher configuration:
• The SSL port numbers from your MicroStrategy installation steps.
• Your self-signed certificate.
• The key for your self-signed certificate.
• Your trusted vendor CA-signed certificate.
• You have a SMTP server
• If you plan to use Usher Network Manager with Google Maps, your Google Maps
API key.
• The Usher Security application for your smartphone has been downloaded.
1 Open your Usher Network Manager page by typing the following in a browser
window:
http://yourFQDN:443/networkmanager/managesystem
If you have enabled https, your URL should be as follows:
 https://yourFQDN:443/networkmanager/managesystem
2 Enter your one-way port server URL, making sure you use your FQDN (for example,
https://FQDN:443), and click Enter.

114 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

If you enter an IP Address instead of your FQDN, you will not be able to
proceed.

3 In the License Key field, provide your installation key (universal or Usher), and
click Log In.
4 Fill out the following fields with your company information:
• Security Server Host: Your auto-populated FQDN and one-way port number.
This value cannot be edited.
• System Name: Your system name.
• Usher File Directory: Keep the default value.
• SSL Certificate Authority Certificate: Your trusted vendor CA-signed
.crt.
• SSL Certificate Authority Key: The key for the trusted vendor CA-signed
certificate.
• SSL Certificate Authority Key Password: If you have a password for your
key, select the Required check box, and then enter your password. If you did
not assign a password, leave this field blank.
• AES Key: Your encryption key generated during the Usher Server installation.
Keep the default value.
• SAML Certificate: Your self-signed .crt certificate that was generated using
Openssl.
• SAML Key: Your self-signed *key that was generated using Openssl.
• SMTP Server: Your company’s SMTP server.
• Port: Your company’s SMTP server port.
• SMTP Authentication: If your server is password protected, select the
Required check box. Enter your username and password in the corresponding
fields.
• Email Sender Address:The email address that you are using to send the
badge invitations for your Usher network.
• Security Server Host: The address of your two-way SSL server (default port is
1443). For example, yourFQDN:1443.com. For the Security Server Host,
https:// is not needed.
• Gateway Host: Keep the default URL and enter your Agent Gateway port value
(default value is 9501). For example, yourFQDN:950.com For reference, see To
install Usher Security. For the Gateway Host, https://is not needed.
• Gateway Load Balancer: Keep the default URL and enter your Agent
Gateway port value to match the values for Gateway Host.
• Google Maps API Key: If you are using Google Maps for your Usher
Network, enter the third-party key.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 115

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Memcache: No node is required for the Usher configuration.

• iPad Configuration Link: If you have already set up Usher Professional,
enter your iPad URL link.
• iPhone Configuration Link: If you have already set up Usher Professional,
enter your iPhone URL link.

If you do not set the SMTP server and port, the Usher server cannot send
emails

5 Click Next.
6 Fill in the following fields:
• Network Manager Host: Your FQDN URL. Keep the default value.
• Network Manager Path: Keep the default value.
• Security Server Host: Your security server address.
• Network Creation: If you do not want your Usher users to create their own
network on your Usher server, select the Require Authentication check box.
• MicroStrategy Managed Instance: If your system is housed in Amazon
Web Service, select the Restrict LDAP Configuration check box.
• Plugin Host Server: Keep the default value.
• Google Client ID: If you have a business Google Drive account, enter your
Google ID number.
• Google Client Secret: If you want to import users from your Google Drive
account, enter their information.
• Salesforce Client ID: If you have an executive Salesforce account for your
company, enter your Salesforce ID Number.
• Salesforce Client Secret: If you want to import users from your Salesforce
account, enter their information.
7 To save your changes and complete the configuration, click Done.
8 Click to create an Usher Admin.
9 To upload a photo for your Admin account, click to select a file. Supported image
formats are .png, .jpeg, and .jpg.
10 Enter your first and last names in the correct fields.
11 In the Email Address field, type the email address to associate with your Usher
Admin account.
12 Click Create. Usher sends an email invitation to the email address that you
provided.
13 Open the email in your smartphone, then click Get My Badge, which opens the
Usher Security application.

116 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

14 In a web browser, navigate to http://yourFQDN/networkmanager, and scan

the QR code displayed.
15 After you log in, you can create the security network and add users. See the Usher
Online Help for detailed steps about how to finish setting up your Usher Network
Manager. After you have successfully created an Usher Administration account, you
must deploy the Gateway Server before creating new Security Networks.

To set up your Usher Gateway Server

After you have configured Usher Server and Network Manager, you can deploy the
Gateway. These steps must be completed in Linux, not a Windows environment.

Prerequisite
Append your self-signed certificate to the CA-signed .pem file. This allows you to
properly set up the Usher Gateway. For steps, see To set up your Fully Qualified Domain
Name.
1 In a command window, navigate to the Usher Server Gateway using the following:
cd
/<installpath>/Usher/UsherServer/usherApps/shardGateway/bin
2 Start Tomcat:
> ./tomcat.sh start
This deploys the gateway.war file.
3 Check to confirm that the gateway was deployed successfully. In a browser window,
type the following command:
https://yourFQDN:yourgatewayportnumber/gateway/test/. For
example, https://yourFQDN:9501/gateway/test.
4 You can conduct a message push test to verify that the gateway has started. Type a
phrase in the Message field, and click Send to test.
To set up Active Directory with your Usher Network, configure Usher Analytics,
configure your MicroStrategy Mobile Server, and other Usher Network Manager help,
refer to the Usher Help.

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the steps to install MicroStrategy products, you can set up and
configure your installation. To help guide the rest of your installation and configuration
steps, refer to the section Installing and configuring MicroStrategy on UNIX and
Linux, page 49 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation, for an installation and
configuration checklist.
To configure the Usher components, refer to the Usher Help.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 117

 4
ACTIVATING YOUR
INSTALLATION
After your MicroStrategy installation is complete, you have 30 days to activate your
installation. Before you activate your installation you must request an Activation Code
from MicroStrategy. You can complete this request when you install MicroStrategy with
the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard or after the installation using MicroStrategy
License Manager.
This chapter describes the following procedures:
• Request an Activation Code, page 118
• Activate your installation, page 120
For answers to commonly asked questions about server activation, see Server Activation
FAQ, page 121.

Request an Activation Code

You can request an Activation Code by supplying MicroStrategy with important
information related to your installation. The information you provide helps
MicroStrategy understand how you plan to use MicroStrategy software. With this
information MicroStrategy can provide better information and technical support for your
software configuration.
On Windows, MicroStrategy products can be activated only in graphics user interface
(GUI) mode, using License Manager.
MicroStrategy products can be activated on UNIX and Linux, either in GUI mode or in
command line mode, using License Manager. In both cases, License Manager runs and
requests the same information. The main differences are in how you provide the
information and navigate through the Activation Code request steps.

Request an Activation Code with License Manager

If you requested an Activation Code during installation you can skip this procedure and
activate your installation by following the instructions in the next procedure, Activate

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 118

Installation and Configuration Guide

your software installation, page 120.

1 Open MicroStrategy License Manager:
• Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then MicroStrategy
Tools, and then select License Manager. License Manager opens.
• UNIX/Linux: License Manager can be run in GUI mode or command line
mode.
— GUI: In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where
HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the home directory during
installation. Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrlicmgr, then press
ENTER. The MicroStrategy License Manager opens in GUI mode.
— Command line: In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_
PATH where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the home
directory during installation. Browse to the folder bin and type
./mstrlicmgr -console, then press ENTER. The MicroStrategy
License Manager opens in command line mode.

The steps to request an Activation Code in command line mode of License

Manager vary from the steps below. Refer to the License Manager command
line prompts to guide you through the steps to request an Activation Code. For
more information specific to requesting an Activation Code for your
installation in command line mode, refer to MicroStrategy Tech Note
TN13550.

2 Select the License Administration tab. Under Server Activation select the
Activate Server Installation option and click Next to continue to the next page.
3 Select the Generate Activation File and Request Activation Code option and
click Next to continue to the next page.
4 Enter the characteristics of your server installation and click Next to continue to the
next page.
5 Enter the contact information for the person who installed the software. Make sure
to correctly select whether you are an employee of the licensed company or installing
the software on the licensed company’s behalf.
• If you select that you are an employee of the licensed company, click Next to
continue to the next page. Once you complete the following step, the Activation
Code is sent to the email address given; therefore it is important that the email
address is valid and entered correctly.
• If you select that you are not an employee of the licensed company, a contact
information page is displayed after you click Next. Enter the contact
information for the licensed company. Click Next to continue to the next page.
Once you complete the following step, the Activation Code is sent to the email
address given; therefore it is important that the email address is valid and
entered correctly.
6 Select Yes, I want to request an Activation Code now and click Next.

119 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

An email containing the Activation Code is sent to the email address or addresses you
confirmed in the steps above.

Activate your installation

After you have requested an Activation Code, MicroStrategy sends an email to the
addresses provided in the request. This email contains the Activation Code that is
necessary to complete the activation of your installation.

Activate your software installation

This procedure assumes that you have requested an Activation Code and received an
email from MicroStrategy containing the Activation Code.
1 Open MicroStrategy License Manager:
• Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then MicroStrategy
Tools, and then select License Manager. License Manager opens.
• UNIX/Linux: License Manager can be run in GUI mode or command line
mode.
— GUI: In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where
HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the home directory during
installation. Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrlicmgr, then press
ENTER. The MicroStrategy License Manager opens in GUI mode.
— Command line: In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_
PATH where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the home
directory during installation. Browse to the folder bin and type
./mstrlicmgr -console, then press ENTER. The MicroStrategy
License Manager opens in command line mode.

The steps to activate your installation in command line mode of License

Manager vary from the steps below. Refer to the License Manager command
line prompts to guide you through the steps to activate your installation. For
more information specific to activating your installation in command line
mode, refer to MicroStrategy Tech Note TN13550.

2 Select the License Administration tab. Under Server Activation select the
Activate Server Installation option and click Next to continue to the next page.

The step above is not necessary for License Manager in command line mode.

3 Select the Server Activation using Activation Code option and enter your
Activation Code in the text field. Click Next to activate your software installation.
4 A verification message is displayed, click OK to close it.
You must restart your Intelligence Server for the activation status to update. You must
also restart your Web server for the activation status to update in MicroStrategy Web.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 120

Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the steps to activate your installation, you can continue your setup and
configuration. To help guide the rest of your installation and configuration steps, refer to
the section Installation and configuration checklists, page 48 in Chapter 1, Planning
Your Installation, for installation and configuration checklists.

Server Activation FAQ

What is MicroStrategy Server Activation?
MicroStrategy Server Activation is a licensing technology that ensures that installations
of MicroStrategy server products are authentic and have been legitimately licensed.
Server Activation registers each Server Installation with MicroStrategy and locks the
installation to a specific machine.

Why is Server Activation necessary?

Server Activation provides benefits to both MicroStrategy and its customers:
• It ensures that the software products being used are authentic.
• It helps customers in identifying software installations to prevent over-installation.
• It improves customer service by maintaining a register of the hardware
configurations used by our customers.

Does MicroStrategy adhere to Software Activation

common practices?
Yes. Extensive research was performed on software activation and it was found that the
Business Software Alliance (www.bsa.org) provides the most comprehensive
information. MicroStrategy has closely followed these best practices.

Which products require activation?

All MicroStrategy modular and non-modular server products require server activation,
including:
• Intelligence Server, Intelligence Server Module, Clustering Option, Report Services,
Report Services Option, OLAP Services, OLAP Services Option, Distribution Services,
MultiSource Option
• Web, Web Universal, Web Reporter Module, Web Analyst Option, Web Professional
Option, Web Universal option
• Mobile Server
• Narrowcast Server Delivery Engine

121 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

If more than one server product is installed on the

same machine, does each server product need to be
activated and deactivated separately?
No. All MicroStrategy server products installed on a single machine are grouped as a
Server Installation and will be activated and deactivated as a group.

Which customers are required to activate

MicroStrategy server products?
All customers who install MicroStrategy server products will need to activate their Server
Installations.

Is a new CD Key needed to install products on different

machines?
No, Server Activation has no impact on CD Keys. The latest CD Key sent by
MicroStrategy can be used to install products on many machines just as before. The only
difference now, is that each installation on a different machine will need a different
Activation Code to activate the installation. Server Activation is independent of the CD
Keys.

Is Server Activation required for both Named-user and

CPU based licenses?
Yes. Server Activation is required for both Named-user and CPU based licenses. Server
Activation is designed to track software installations regardless of licensing model. Server
Activation does not manage or limit the number of servers on which server software is
installed.

Does Server Activation aggregate the total number of

licenses installed and prevent over-installation of
products?
No. Server Activation and the licensing models are independent. However, using Server
Activation information available at https://licensing.microstrategy.com,
organizations can monitor the number of installations. Deactivating Server Installations
that are not being used will ensure this information is up-to-date.

Does Server Activation apply to Evaluation Editions?

Yes. The Evaluation Edition must be activated within 7 days of installation.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 122

Installation and Configuration Guide

What is the procedure for activating Server

Installations?
Installing, modifying or upgrading MicroStrategy Server Installations will automatically
generate an Activation XML file that contains information about the installation. This
XML file, called the “Activation File” is uploaded to MicroStrategy either automatically by
the installation routine or through License Manager; or by manually uploading the
Activation File through a web browser via a secure web site,
https://licensing.microstrategy.com. MicroStrategy then creates a machine-
specific Activation Code which is emailed to the installer and to the MicroStrategy Tech
Support liaisons. The Activation Code must be manually entered into License Manager
on the target Server Installation.

Can the Server Installation be automatically activated

after automatically requesting an activation code?
No, the Activation Code is sent to the installer and to the MicroStrategy Tech Support
contacts by email. Upon receiving the activation code, the Server Installation needs to be
manually activated by entering the activation code using License Manager. For manual
activations, the Activation Code can be copied from the Activation website, and pasted
into License Manager.

What information is sent to MicroStrategy in the

Activation XML File?
The following information is sent to the Activation XML File:
• Installation Information:
▫ Installation timestamp
▫ Activation ID (if the installation has previously been activated)
▫ Contract information
▫ CD Key used in installation
▫ Installer contact details – name, address, email
▫ Company contact details – name, address, email
▫ Server Installation information – name, location, use
• Hardware information:
▫ Unique Hardware Identifier
▫ CPU Information – type, bit-size, clock speed, total quantity
▫ Physical Memory installed
• Operating System information:
▫ Type, version, bit-size, page/swap size

123 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

▫ Locale
▫ Additional information – 4GT mode and hyperthreading in Windows, LPAR ID,
number of pooled CPUs, SMT used in AIX
• MicroStrategy information:
▫ Install Type – new/modify/upgrade
▫ Products and version installed
▫ Number of CPUs allocated for CPU licenses
• Database information:
▫ Metadata database and ODBC driver
▫ Data warehouse database and ODBC driver

Is the information sent to MicroStrategy secure?

Yes. The Activation XML file is sent to MicroStrategy in the following ways:
• Automatically during installation or through License Manager. This information is
encrypted using a RIPEMD-160 algorithm before being sent to MicroStrategy.
• Manually in the https://licensing.microstrategy.com website.
Communication with this website is conducted through Secure Socket Layer once
the user has been authenticated.

Can I change the information in the Activation XML

file?
The content of this file is secured with a digital signature. Contact MicroStrategy
Technical Support if the content is incorrect.

What is used to lock the server to a machine?

A unique hardware identifier for each machine is used to lock an installation to that
machine. Any changes to these identifiers will require reactivation of the Server
Installation:
• Windows: An identifier generated from a one-way hash of the network interface
card MAC address
• AIX: Machine ID
• Solaris: Host ID
• RedHat Linux: An identifier generated from a one-way hash of the network interface
card MAC address
• HP-UX: Exposes a unique Machine ID that can be obtained from the Operating
System command line, using the following command:
getconf CS_MACHINE_IDENT

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 124

Installation and Configuration Guide

Is there a grace period from the time server products

are installed to when it can be activated?
Yes. There is a 30 calendar day grace period from installation (7 days for Evaluation
Edition) before a server installation must be activated.

What happens if the Server Installations are not

activated?
If a server installation has not been activated within 30 calendar days (7 days for
Evaluation Edition), the server products will not be able to be restarted.

Should the installations be automatically or manually

activated and deactivated?
It is preferable to automatically send the activation information to MicroStrategy, either
during installation or using License Manager. This is an easy process that should take less
than one minute to complete, and ensures that the correct information is sent to
MicroStrategy.

What should be done if requesting an Activation Code

fails during installation?
Firstly, allow the installation to complete. The Activation Code request should then be
attempted using License Manager. If this does not work, activate the Server Installation
manually by visiting the Activation website at
https://licensing.microstrategy.com.

What should be done if automatic request for an

Activation Code does not work at all?
The Server Installation should be manually activated using License Manager on a
machine that has access to the Web. The Activation XML file should be copied from the
Server Installation that requires activation to this computer. If this does not work,
contact MicroStrategy Technical Support.

Can the Activation Code be used on a different

machine?
No. The Activation Code contains the unique identifier for a specific machine and can
only be used on that machine. The server products will not be activated if the incorrect
Activation Code is used.

125 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

What if the Server installation has to be moved to

another machine?
If the Server Installation needs to be moved to another machine, uninstall the
MicroStrategy products or deactivate the Server Installation from License Manager.
Notify MicroStrategy that Server Installation has been deactivated. This keeps your active
server inventory up to date as shown to you on
https://licensing.microstrategy.com.

What if the server machine has a catastrophic failure

and cannot be deactivated automatically or manually?
If a machine has a catastrophic failure and the server products cannot be uninstalled or
deactivated, contact MicroStrategy Technical Support to update the status of this Server.

If there is more than one server product installed on a

machine and one is removed, does the Server
Installation need to be deactivated?
Upon removal of a server product, all remaining server products are automatically
deactivated. The remaining server product(s) need to be reactivated to reflect the new
product configuration on that machine. For example, if a machine contains
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server and MicroStrategy Web, and MicroStrategy Narrowcast
Server is removed, MicroStrategy Web will be automatically deactivated. MicroStrategy
Web will need to be reactivated.

What information can be monitored on the website?

When registered Technical Support liaisons log into the MicroStrategy Activation
website, they can display a list of all Server Installations. This report lists each Server
Installation along with the following information for reference:
• Installation ID
• Activation Status
• Contract ID
• Operating System
• Machine CPUs
• Last Update Type
• Last Updated by
• Last Update Date
• Products installed
• Activation and deactivation history

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 126

Installation and Configuration Guide

The Installation ID is a unique identifier for Server Installations. This ID is provided

along with the Activation Code in the email received when requesting activation.

Does Server Activation apply to MicroStrategy Suite?

Yes. The MicroStrategy Suite must be activated within 30 days of installation.

127 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 5
CONFIGURING AND
CONNECTING INTELLIGENCE
SERVER
After installing MicroStrategy, you must complete a few configuration tasks. This chapter
addresses the processes used to configure the databases you intend to use in your
business intelligence system, as well as an installed MicroStrategy suite of products.

The MicroStrategy platform includes a Tutorial project, which is a sample data

warehouse and a demonstration project you can use to learn about the various
features that MicroStrategy offers. It is ready to be used and requires no additional
configuration tasks. If you want to set up a new system using your own data, you
must read this chapter and perform the tasks it describes.

This chapter includes the following information:

If you are configuring MicroStrategy on a UNIX or Linux machine that does not have a
GUI, you can perform configuration tasks with command line tools. For steps to perform
configuration tasks using command line tools in UNIX and Linux, see Chapter 11,
Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools.

Communicating with databases

Establishing communication between MicroStrategy and your databases or other data
sources is an essential first step in configuring MicroStrategy products for reporting and
analysis of your data. This section explains how MicroStrategy communicates with
various data sources and the steps required to set up this communication.
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) is a standard database access method. ODBC
enables a single application to access database data, regardless of the database
management system (DBMS) that stores the data. A DBMS is a collection of programs
that enables you to store, modify, and extract information from a database.
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, when used in a three- or four-tier configuration, is the
application that uses ODBC to access a DBMS. ODBC drivers translate MicroStrategy

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 128

Installation and Configuration Guide

Intelligence Server requests into commands that the DBMS understands. MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server connects to several databases (at a minimum, the data warehouse and
the metadata repository) to do its work.
Users of MicroStrategy Web can also connect to data sources using database
connections. A database connection supports connecting to data sources through the use
of DSNs, as well as through DSNless connections, to import and integrate data into
MicroStrategy. For steps to create database connections in MicroStrategy Web, see
Creating database connections in Web, page 414.
This section describes the ODBC standard for connecting to databases and creating data
source names (DSNs) for the ODBC drivers that are bundled with the MicroStrategy
applications.
The diagram below illustrates the three-tier metadata and data warehouse connectivity
used in the MicroStrategy system.

The diagram shown above illustrates projects that connect to only one data source.
However, MicroStrategy allows connection to multiple data sources in the following
ways:
• With MicroStrategy MultiSource Option, a MicroStrategy project can connect to
multiple relational data sources. For information on MultiSource Option, see the
Project Design Guide.

129 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• You can integrate MDX cube sources such as SAP BW, Microsoft Analysis Services,
and Hyperion Essbase with your MicroStrategy projects. For information on
integrating these MDX cubes sources into MicroStrategy, see the MDX Cube
Reporting Guide.
This section provides information and instructions on the following tasks:

Setting up ODBC
The following information assists you in setting up ODBC between Intelligence Server
and your metadata database and data warehouse.
ODBC is a standard method of communicating with database servers. Intelligence Server
uses ODBC to connect to and communicate with all database servers in the system.
Specifically, ODBC connects to and transfers data to and from data sources within
relational databases.
ODBC permits maximum interoperability—an application can access data in diverse
DBMSs through a single framework. A client application uses a database driver and a
driver manager to make a connection to the data source. A data source, identified by a
data source name, is the database or file accessed by a driver. Data source is another term
for a logical database within a database server. A database server can contain multiple
logical databases or data sources.
When setting up your MicroStrategy environment, you must create a separate
connection to the data warehouse and metadata repository. This requirement is true
even if both databases are accessed through the same DBMS. Further description of
these two requirements is provided below:
• A data warehouse stores the data that users of the system must analyze to track and
respond to business trends, and to facilitate forecasting and planning efforts.
• Metadata is a repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data
warehouse with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of business
views, terms, and needs to the underlying database structure. Metadata can reside on
the same server as the data warehouse or on a different server. It can be stored in
different relational DBMSs.
A successful ODBC connection requires the following information:
• A data source name (DSN) is the name for a pointer used by a client application to
find and connect to a data source. A data source is the database accessed by a driver.
The information obtained through a DSN generally includes the host computer name
or IP address, instance name, and database name. However, the exact information
varies depending on the type of database server.
• An ODBC driver is a type of software that translates information between the client
application (Intelligence Server) and the database server API. For more information
on ODBC drivers and how they work with MicroStrategy, see ODBC drivers, page
131.
• A connection string stores the information required to connect to a database server.
A connection string usually includes a DSN, as well as the user ID and password
required to log in to the database server. This information varies depending on the
particular database server. For MicroStrategy environments, a connection string is

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 130

Installation and Configuration Guide

commonly provided by a database instance (see Creating a database instance, page

175).

ODBC drivers
ODBC drivers are DBMS-specific and must be installed on MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server prior to creating the ODBC connection to the warehouse and metadata databases.
MicroStrategy embeds and brands DataDirect ODBC drivers in the MicroStrategy
platform. These drivers are certified to work with MicroStrategy products.
The purpose of an ODBC driver is to translate MicroStrategy Intelligence Server requests
into commands that the DBMS understands. Users of the MicroStrategy platform can
employ the MicroStrategy-branded ODBC drivers to connect MicroStrategy products to
various DBMSs. For a list of the available ODBC drivers for Windows, Solaris, AIX, HP-
UX, and Redhat or SUSE Linux that are certified for Intelligence Server and different
DBMS types, see Certified ODBC drivers for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page
43.
See the MicroStrategy Readme file for details about supported and certified ODBC
drivers. To access the MicroStrategy Readme:
• On Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then to MicroStrategy
Documentation, and then choose ReadMe.
• On UNIX/Linux: From the UNIX/Linux File Manager, browse to INSTALL_PATH,
where INSTALL_PATH is the directory that you specified as the install directory
during installation. Double-click the ReadMe.htm file.

Note the following:

• Although it is possible to use a non-certified driver, it is strongly
recommended that you contact your database vendor to obtain a
certified driver if the selected driver is not certified as valid.
• MicroStrategy products include certified ODBC drivers for you to use.
The MicroStrategy General Information Readme lists these
MicroStrategy ODBC drivers and recommended database connection
settings for them. MicroStrategy ODBC drivers only work with
MicroStrategy products.

Default location for ODBC and driver files for Windows

MicroStrategy components require 64-bit drivers to achieve ODBC connectivity.
The ODBC driver manager and support libraries are commonly installed in the
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM or C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32 directories. Refer to your third-
party documentation for the locations of ODBC support and driver files.
The database-specific ODBC drivers are installed in the locations specified during the
installation of the drivers. MicroStrategy-branded drivers are installed in
C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy on a 64-bit
Windows environment.

131 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Default location for ODBC and driver files for UNIX and Linux
MicroStrategy components require 64-bit drivers to achieve ODBC connectivity.
The ODBC driver manager and support libraries are usually installed in the following
default directories:

Operating System Default Location for ODBC Driver Manager Libraries

Solaris INSTALL_PATH/lib

AIX INSTALL_PATH/lib

HP-UX INSTALL_PATH/lib

RedHat and SUSE Linux INSTALL_PATH/lib

The database-specific ODBC drivers are installed in the locations specified during the
installation of the drivers. MicroStrategy-branded ODBC drivers are installed in
INSTALL_PATH/lib, where INSTALL_PATH is the directory you specified as the
Install Directory in the Install Wizard.

The MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard lists only the MicroStrategy-branded

ODBC drivers. However, this guide also provides information on how to install
drivers from other vendors with MicroStrategy. For more information, see
Creating DSNs for specific data sources, page 380.

Defining DSNs
After you install an ODBC driver, you can define one or more data sources for it. The
DSN should provide a unique description of the data, for example, Payroll_Project_
Metadata or Payroll_Warehouse.
The DSN is the name for a pointer used by a client application (in this case
MicroStrategy) to find and connect to a data source. Multiple DSNs can point to the
same data source and one DSN can be used by different applications.
You can define a data source connection with a DSN by using:
• The MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard—configures connectivity to data sources by
creating a DSN that uses a MicroStrategy-branded ODBC driver (see Creating a DSN
for a data source, page 133).
• The Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator—creates a DSN for an ODBC driver
that is not MicroStrategy-branded (see Managing ODBC and data sources with
Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator, page 134).

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 132

Installation and Configuration Guide

Be aware of the following:

It is strongly recommended you use the MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard
when creating a new DSN for a MicroStrategy-branded ODBC driver. Use the
Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator only if you intend to use a driver
that is not MicroStrategy-branded.
If you create DSNs using the Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator, you
must create system DSNs. Otherwise, MicroStrategy interfaces will not
recognize them.

Creating a DSN for a data source

If a DSN does not already exist in your empty metadata repository or the repository
installed with MicroStrategy, you can add or create a new one.
The MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard is a tool designed specifically to configure
connectivity to data sources by creating a DSN that uses a MicroStrategy-branded ODBC
driver.

To create a DSN

1 If you are creating a DSN:

• On Windows, perform the following steps:
— Log in to the system as an administrator.
— From the Start menu, point to Programs, then MicroStrategy Tools,
and then select Connectivity Wizard. The Welcome page of the
Connectivity Wizard opens.
• On UNIX or Linux using the Connectivity Wizard interface, perform the
following steps:
— From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrconnectwiz, and then press
ENTER. The Welcome page of the Connectivity Wizard opens.
• On UNIX or Linux from the command line, then perform the following steps:
— From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrconnectwiz -h, and then
press ENTER.
This command displays command line operation syntax and examples for
different database platforms. Create your command based on the syntax and

133 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

examples displayed. Once you perform your command, the DSN is created
and you can skip the rest of this procedure. For detailed steps on how to use
the command line version of this tool, see Creating a DSN for a data
source, page 350 in Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy Using
Command Line Tools.
2 Click Next. A list of database drivers is displayed. The list available for Windows is
different than the list available for UNIX/Linux. For a list of the available ODBC
drivers for Windows, Solaris, AIX, HP-UX, and Redhat or SUSE Linux that are
certified for Intelligence Server and different DBMS types, see Certified ODBC
drivers for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 43.
3 Select a database driver with which to create a DSN and click Next. The Driver
Details page opens.

Only a few databases can contain metadata repositories. For details, refer to
the MicroStrategy Readme. Only DSNs created to connect to these databases
can be used to connect to metadata repositories.

4 Enter the information in the appropriate fields for connecting with the selected
database driver. The information to enter varies depending on the database platform
that you selected. For more information, see Creating DSNs for specific data
sources, page 380.
5 Click Test to verify the connection. The Test Connection dialog box opens.
6 Enter the User Name and Password to connect to the database.
7 Click Connect to test and verify the connection. If the test is performed
successfully, the connection with the database is established. If the test fails, verify
the correct connection information with your database administrator and make any
required changes to the information you provided in the previous steps.
8 Click Close, and then Finish to create the new DSN.

If you already have an existing DSN with the same name as the one you
provided, a message box appears. You have the following options:
▫ Select Yes to make sure the DSN points to the location you are
expecting. This overwrites the existing DSN.
▫ Select No to save the DSN with a different name.

9 Repeat the above steps to create as many DSNs as you require. At a minimum, create
one for your metadata and one for your warehouse.

Managing ODBC and data sources with Microsoft ODBC Data Source
Administrator
The Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator manages database drivers and data
sources on Windows. The Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator utility creates a
log with which to trace calls to data sources and to view, create, and edit DSNs. The

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 134

Installation and Configuration Guide

utility is available from Microsoft and is usually included with the purchase of an ODBC
driver.
• It is strongly recommended that you use the Connectivity Wizard when creating a
new DSN for a MicroStrategy-branded ODBC Driver. Use the Microsoft ODBC Data
Source Administrator only if you intend to use a non-MicroStrategy driver.
• If you choose to create DSNs using the Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator,
they must be system DSNs. Otherwise, MicroStrategy interfaces cannot recognize
them.

To create a DSN using the Microsoft ODBC Data Source

Administrator

1 Log in to the machine as an administrator. This gives you the ability to create a
system-wide DSN, rather than a user-specific DSN.
2 In most Windows systems you can access the ODBC Data Source Administrator from
the Control Panel. Refer to your third-party Microsoft documentation for steps to
access the ODBC Data Source Administrator tool.
3 Click the System DSN tab. A list displays all the existing system data sources and
their associated drivers.

To view all the installed ODBC drivers, click the Drivers tab.

4 Click Add. The Create New Data Source dialog box opens.
5 Select the desired driver and click Finish. A driver setup dialog box is displayed.

It is recommended that you select a MicroStrategy ODBC driver. These

drivers, whose names start with MicroStrategy, were installed when you
installed the MicroStrategy application on the computer.

6 Enter the information in the appropriate fields to create a data source for the
selected database driver.
The information to enter varies depending on the database platform that you
selected, which is discussed in Creating DSNs for specific data sources, page 380.
7 Click OK to create a new DSN.

Testing ODBC connectivity

ODBC connectivity is one of two layers of connectivity that are listed in the next table,
along with the associated connectivity testing programs. Connectivity should be tested
from the bottom up—the network layer first and then the ODBC layer.

135 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Layer Test with

ODBC driver Test ODBC

mstrtestodbc or mstrtodbcx

Network Simple Network Layer Testing Tool

TCP/IP Ping, PING.EXE, for TCP/IP

The test method described above reflects the situation when the ODBC driver and
the database network software are bundled. If they are not bundled, they must be
configured and tested separately, using database-specific tools.

Using the DB Query Tool

The MicroStrategy DB Query Tool is available in Windows, UNIX, and Linux to test and
troubleshoot connectivity to databases, create and execute SQL commands through
ODBC, and run scripts.

Prerequisites
Before you use the DB Query Tool, test the network layer with the network layer utility,
PING.EXE. Consult your operating system or network system documentation for details.

To use the DB Query Tool

1 To use the DB Query Tool:

• On Windows using the DB Query Tool interface, perform the following step:
— From the Windows Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and then choose DB Query Tool.
• On Windows from the command line, perform the following steps:
— From the Windows Start menu, select Run. The Run dialog box opens.
— In the Open drop-down list, type cmd and click OK. A command prompt
opens.
— Type todbcx.exe and press ENTER. Prompts guide you through testing
your ODBC connection from the command line and should be used in place
of the steps below. For detailed steps on how to use the command line
version of this tool, see Testing ODBC connectivity in Chapter 11,
Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools.
• On UNIX or Linux using the DB Query Tool interface, perform the following
steps:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 136

Installation and Configuration Guide

— In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_

PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrdbquerytool, then press
ENTER.
• On UNIX or Linux from the command line, perform the following steps:
— In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrtodbcx, then press ENTER.
Prompts guide you through testing your ODBC connection from the
command line and should be used in place of the steps below. For detailed
steps on how to use the command line version of this tool, see Testing
ODBC connectivity in Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy Using
Command Line Tools.
2 From the Session menu, select Open Connection, or click the Connect icon on
the toolbar. The Connect dialog box opens. The connection interface varies
depending on the destination database.
3 Select the DSN for a data source.
4 Enter the appropriate user name and password.
5 Click Connect. After your connection is opened, the connection string is displayed
in the MicroStrategy DB Query Tool at the bottom. Your cursor is inserted
automatically in the SQL Statement window.
6 In the SQL Statement window, type a SQL query such as:
select count (*) from Table
where Table is a system-defined table, such as SYSOBJECTS for Microsoft SQL
Server or a MicroStrategy-created table such as DSSMDSYSPROP in the
MicroStrategy metadata.
7 From the Queries menu, select Execute Query. A table of data from the database
is displayed in the Query Result window.
8 From the Session menu, select Close Connection to close the database
connection.
9 From the File menu, select Exit to close the MicroStrategy DB Query Tool.
The DB Query Tool includes many useful features not discussed here. Refer to the DB
Query Tool Online Help for details.

Initial MicroStrategy configuration

The MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard automates much of the configuration process,
prompting you only when critical information is required. With this tool, you can

137 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

configure the metadata repository, statistics tables and Enterprise Manager repository,
History List tables, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, and multiple project sources.
If you are configuring MicroStrategy using the Windows operating system, you must have
administrative privileges on the computer on which the Intelligence Server is installed,
so that you can define the parameters necessary to start the Intelligence Server and to
invoke server-definition objects.
You can also configure your MicroStrategy installation using the Configuration Wizard in
silent or unattended mode. This allows you to load an existing setup routine to configure
your MicroStrategy installation. For information on running the Configuration Wizard
with a response file, see Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
You can also use the Configuration Wizard to:
• Configure MicroStrategy Health Center, which can help you prevent, diagnose, and
fix problems in your MicroStrategy system. Health Center detects known problems
and provides an immediate solution to many of them. For steps on how to configure
Health Center using the Configuration Wizard, see the System Administration Guide.
• Create an Enterprise Manager project, which provides insights about governing and
tuning all areas of your MicroStrategy environment. For steps on how to create an
Enterprise Manager project, see the Operations Manager Guide.

Configuration Wizard prerequisites

Before you begin using the Configuration Wizard you should review and complete the
following requirements:
• Install the necessary MicroStrategy products. You should have at least MicroStrategy
Developer and MicroStrategy Intelligence Server installed. For information on how
to install MicroStrategy on Windows, see Chapter 2, Installing MicroStrategy on
Windows. For information on how to install MicroStrategy on other operating
systems, see Chapter 3, Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux.
• Have access to an empty database location certified to house the metadata. This
includes creating DSNs for your databases (see Communicating with databases, page
128). For a list of certified metadata platforms, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
• In a UNIX or Linux environment, the Configuration Wizard must be able to
communicate with Intelligence Server over TCP/IP network protocol. To achieve
this, the hosts file in the /etc directory must include one entry identifying the
local host in the form:
IP-address local-machine-name
For example, 123.4.5.6 FakeISmachine. Modifying the hosts file may require
an account with root privileges.
• MicroStrategy products must be configured on the machine on which they are
installed. You cannot configure them remotely.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 138

Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring MicroStrategy software

The MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard opens automatically after you install
MicroStrategy products and restart your machine.
You can configure a MicroStrategy Web and Intelligence Server (four-tier), Intelligence
Server (three-tier), or direct (two-tier) setup for MicroStrategy.
The following figure describes how to configure MicroStrategy to suit an Intelligence
Server (three-tier) environment. It also shows how the various components of the
MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard, the metadata repository, Intelligence Server, and
the project source interact with each other.

A MicroStrategy Web (four-tier) setup involves configuring a web server to communicate

between Intelligence Server and MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal. For more
information on deploying MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal, see Chapter 6,
Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations Manager.
The figure below describes how to configure MicroStrategy to suit a direct (two-tier)
environment. It also shows how the various components of the MicroStrategy
Configuration Wizard, the metadata repository and the project source interact with each
other.

139 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

It is not recommended to use a direct setup for the production environment.

The procedure below provides the high-level steps to configure MicroStrategy software
through the Configuration Wizard.

To configure MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard

1 If you are configuring MicroStrategy on:

• Windows, then perform the following step:
— From the Start menu, point to Programs, then MicroStrategy Tools,
and then choose Configuration Wizard. The Configuration Wizard
opens. Continue to the steps provided in To select a configuration task,
page 141.
• Windows from the command line, then perform the following steps:
— From the Windows Start menu, select Run. The Run dialog box opens.
— In the Open drop-down list, type cmd and click OK. A command prompt
opens.
— Type macfgwiz and press ENTER.
This command displays the command line version of the Configuration
Wizard. You can configure the connection of a data source to Intelligence
Server by creating a response file or using an existing response file. The
command line prompts guide you through configuring the connection of a
data source to Intelligence Server by creating a response file or using an
existing response file and should be used in place of the steps below. For
information on using a response file to configure MicroStrategy, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
• UNIX or Linux using the Configuration Wizard interface, then perform the
following steps:
— From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 140

Installation and Configuration Guide

— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrcfgwiz, then press ENTER. The
Configuration Wizard opens. Continue to the steps provided in To select a
configuration task, page 141.
• UNIX or Linux from the command line, then perform the following steps:
— From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrcfgwiz-editor, then press
ENTER.
This command displays the command line version of the Configuration
Wizard. You can configure the connection of a data source to Intelligence
Server by creating a response file or using an existing response file. The
command line prompts guide you through configuring the connection of a
data source to Intelligence Server by creating a response file or using an
existing response file and should be used in place of the steps below. For
information on using a response file to configure MicroStrategy, see
Configuring MicroStrategy in command line mode, page 337.

To select a configuration task

2 Choose from the following configuration tasks and then click Next to begin the
selected task.
• Create Metadata, History List and Enterprise Manager
Repositories: Runs the SQL scripts necessary to create and initialize the
metadata repository, History List tables, and Enterprise Manager statistics tables
and repositories in the database location that you select. For steps to complete
these configuration tasks, see Creating metadata, History List, and statistics
repositories, page 142.
• Configure Intelligence Server: Creates a new server definition object in the
metadata repository that you select. This setup provides Intelligence Server
(three-tier) access to all projects that are stored in the repository. This option
also allows you to use or delete an existing server definition. For steps to
complete these configuration tasks, see Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server, page 151.
• Create Enterprise Manager project: The Enterprise Manager project
provides insights about governing and tuning all areas of your MicroStrategy
environment. For steps on how to create an Enterprise Manager project, see the
Operations Manager Guide.
• Create a Project Source: A project source contains the configuration
information that each client system requires to access an existing project. It
stores the location of the metadata repository and Intelligence Server that is used
to run the project. A project source determines how MicroStrategy Developer,
Web, and other client applications access the metadata. For steps to complete
these configuration tasks, see Creating project sources, page 157.
• Upgrade existing environment to MicroStrategy Analytics
Enterprise: You can use the Configuration Wizard to upgrade your

141 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy environment and migrate various features to the new version. For
all available upgrade and migration options, see the Upgrade Guide.
• Health Center Configuration: You can use the Configuration Wizard to
configure MicroStrategy Health Center, which can help you prevent, diagnose,
and fix problems in your MicroStrategy system. Health Center detects known
problems and provides an immediate solution to many of them. For steps on
how to configure Health Center using the Configuration Wizard, see the System
Administration Guide.
The remainder of this chapter describes each configuration option in detail.
After completing these steps, an empty metadata repository is created. To learn how to
add projects to your metadata repository, see the Project Design Guide.

Creating metadata, History List, and statistics

repositories
You can create metadata, History List, and statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories
using the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. Repositories for your metadata, History
List, and statistics tables are created in the data source specified by the DSN(s) you
connect to.

It is recommended that you create the metadata, History List, and statistics
repository tables in different databases to ensure enhanced performance.

For steps to create metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, see:
• Creating a metadata repository, page 143
• Creating a History List repository, page 146
• Creating statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories to maintain and monitor
system activity, page 148
As you complete the configuration process, messages may be displayed. For details on
system messages displayed during the configuration process, see Configuration
messages, page 151.
You can choose to create metadata, History List, and statistics repositories using a
response file with the Configuration Wizard. This lets you provide users with a
configuration file to complete the configuration tasks rather than requiring users to step
through the Configuration Wizard. Creating and using a response file can be done using
the Configuration Wizard interface or a command line tool available for UNIX and
Linux. The steps to perform these two configuration options are provided in the sections
listed below:
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353 in Chapter 11,
Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 142

Installation and Configuration Guide

Required database permissions to create metadata, History List, and

statistics repositories
To create metadata, History List, and statistics repositories in a database, you need a
database user account to associate with the tables created for the repositories.
MicroStrategy recommends that the database user account used to create these
repositories is granted full permissions for the database.
If the database user account cannot be granted full permissions to the database, be aware
that this account requires Select, Insert, Update, Create, Drop, and Delete permissions.
These permissions are required for various database objects depending on the database
type you are using. For example, the following database object permissions are required
where applicable for your database type:

Database Object Type of Permissions Required

Tables Select, Insert, Update, Create, Drop, Delete

Indexes Create, Drop

Triggers Create, Drop
Functions Create, Execute
Packages Create
Procedures Create, Execute

While creating metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, the Configuration
Wizard provides an option to preview the SQL statements that will be executed.
You can review this SQL preview to have a better understanding of the tasks that
will be required as part of creating metadata, History List, and statistics
repositories.

Refer to your third-party database documentation for specific names and details on
database permissions and database objects.

Creating a metadata repository

The metadata repository is a collection of tables that contain the definitions for nearly all
MicroStrategy objects including database logins, server definitions, database instances
and connections, reports, metrics, facts, and so on. It is mandatory to have a metadata
repository to which Intelligence Server can connect.
You can create the metadata repository in the database location of your choice.
Additionally, a default configuration is created in the metadata tables. This populates the
tables with the basic data required for the MicroStrategy metadata, such as the default
project folder structure and some basic connection information.

If you are upgrading your metadata from a previous version of MicroStrategy

rather than creating a brand new metadata, see the Upgrade Guide.

143 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Prerequisites
• Before you create a metadata repository, you should ensure that you are storing it on
a certified database, ODBC driver, and operating system combination. For a list of
certified metadata repository environments, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
• A database user account to associate with the metadata tables. MicroStrategy
recommends that the database user account used to create a metadata repository is
granted full permissions for the database. If the database user account cannot be
granted full permissions to the database, refer to Required database permissions to
create metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, page 143 for additional
details on the database permissions required for this configuration.
• While metadata creation errors are rare in general, you can review a list of potential
errors in Metadata and other repository creation errors, page 424 to prepare for or
avoid specific scenarios that can cause errors.

To create a metadata repository

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Select Metadata, History List and Statistics Repository Tables, and click
Next. The Repository Configuration: Repository Types page opens.
3 Select the Metadata Tables check box and click Next. The Repository
Configuration: Metadata tables page opens.
You can also select to create a History List and a statistics repository immediately
after creating a metadata repository. If you create a History List or statistics
repository as part of the same configuration routine as creating a new metadata
repository, and the configuration is being done on a Windows environment, database
instances are automatically created for the History List and statistics repositories.
4 From the DSN drop-down list, select the DSN for your metadata repository.
If a DSN for your metadata repository does not exist, you can click New to open the
Connectivity Wizard and create a new DSN. The steps to create a new DSN with the
Connectivity Wizard are described in Creating a DSN for a data source, page 133.

Although it is possible to use the Microsoft Access database for the metadata
repository, it is not a suitable metadata repository for a production project.
You should not use Microsoft Access for anything other than a proof-of-
concept or demonstration type of application.

5 Type a User Name and Password that can connect to the data source.
The database user that you provide becomes the owner of all metadata tables and
objects. The database user is required to have the Select, Insert, and Update
permissions. Intermediate tables are created in the metadata for recursive search
queries, which requires Create and Drop permissions as well. Updating the schema
requires the Delete permission.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 144

Installation and Configuration Guide

6 After providing a valid user name and password, you can click SQL Preview to
open the SQL Preview dialog box. This dialog box provides the SQL statements that
will be executed on your data source to create the metadata tables. Click Close once
you are done reviewing the SQL statements to return to the Configuration Wizard.
If you use the advanced options to change the SQL script, you can click SQL Preview
after selecting the new script to see an updated listing of the SQL statements that will
be executed.

To specify a metadata table prefix and complete metadata repository creation

7 Click Advanced. Options to specify a table prefix and a SQL script to create
metadata tables are displayed.
8 In the Table Prefix field, you can specify a prefix to be used when metadata tables
are created in the database you select. This is an optional configuration. However,
you must use different prefixes for your metadata tables and your History List tables
if you store them in the same database.
Most databases use a prefix of two characters. However, you can supply as many
letters, numbers, underscores (_), and periods (.) as required to support your
database prefixes. To determine character limits for a prefix, refer to your third-party
database vendor documentation.
9 In the Script field, a SQL script to create metadata tables optimized for your
database is selected. If you want to select a different script, click ... to browse to and
select a customized script. For more information on the default SQL scripts, see SQL
scripts, page 150.
10 Click Next. The next configuration page that opens depends on your configuration
scenario:
• If your metadata repository does not need to be upgraded and you did not select
to create History List or statistics tables, the Summary page opens. You can
complete your configuration as described in To review and save your metadata
configuration, page 145 below.
• If your metadata repository does not need to be upgraded and you selected to
configure History List or statistics tables, you are prompted to configure these
options as described in Creating a History List repository, page 146 and
Creating statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories to maintain and
monitor system activity, page 148.
• If your metadata repository needs to be upgraded, cancel this metadata creation
process. If you continue with this process of creating metadata tables, your
current metadata will be overwritten with a brand new metadata. For
information on upgrading your metadata and suite of MicroStrategy projects,
refer to the Upgrade Guide.

To review and save your metadata configuration

11 Review the summary information.

145 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

You can click Save to save the configuration as a response (.ini) file to configure
metadata repositories on other systems or to run silent configurations at a later time.
For information on running the Configuration Wizard with a response file, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
12 Click Finish to apply the configuration and create the metadata repository. The
summary information is updated as the configurations are completed, providing a
way to track the progress of the configurations.

Creating a History List repository

A History List repository stores users’ report and document results for future use. History
Lists can be stored on file systems of a server machine. The History List tables provide an
alternative option to store History List information in a centralized database.
If you create a History List repository as part of the same configuration routine to create
a metadata repository, and the configuration is being done on a Windows environment, a
database instance is automatically created for the History List repository. If you create
the History List repository separately, you create it for an existing metadata repository, or
you create it on a UNIX or Linux environment, you must create a database instance for
the History List repository. For information on creating a database instance, see
Creating a database instance, page 175.

If you are upgrading your History List repository from a previous version of
MicroStrategy rather than creating a brand new History List repository, see the
Upgrade Guide.

Prerequisites
• Before you create a History List repository, you should ensure that you are storing it
on a certified database, ODBC driver, and operating system combination. For a list of
certified History List repository environments, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
• A database user account to associate with the History List tables. MicroStrategy
recommends that the database user account used to create History List Tables is
granted full permissions for the database. If the database user account cannot be
granted full permissions to the database, refer to Required database permissions to
create metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, page 143 for additional
details on the database permissions required for this configuration.
• The steps below are specific to creating a History List repository. If you also select to
create a metadata repository, you must first complete the steps described in Creating
a metadata repository, page 143.
• While History List creation errors are rare in general, you can review a list of
potential errors in Metadata and other repository creation errors, page 424 to
prepare for or avoid specific scenarios that may cause errors.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 146

Installation and Configuration Guide

To create a History List repository

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Select Metadata, History List and Statistics Repository Tables and click
Next. The Repository Configuration: Repository Types page opens.
3 Select the History List Tables check box and click Next. The Repository
Configuration: History List tables page opens.
4 From the DSN drop-down list, select the DSN for your History List repository.
If a DSN for your History List repository does not exist, you can select New to open
the Connectivity Wizard and create a new DSN. The steps to create a new DSN with
the Connectivity Wizard are described in Creating a DSN for a data source, page
133.
5 Type a User Name and Password that can connect to the data source.
The database user you provide becomes the owner of all History List tables and
objects. The database user is required to have the Select, Create, Insert, and Drop
permissions.
6 After providing a valid user name and password, you can click SQL Preview to
open the SQL Preview dialog box. This dialog box provides the SQL statements that
will be executed on your data source to create the History List tables. Click Close
once you are done reviewing the SQL statements to return to the Configuration
Wizard.
If you use the advanced options to change the SQL script, you can click SQL Preview
after selecting the new script to see an updated listing of the SQL statements that will
be executed.

To specify a History List table prefix and complete History List repository
creation
7 Click Advanced. Options to specify a table prefix and a SQL script to create History
List tables are displayed.
8 In the Table Prefix field, you can specify a prefix to be used when History List
tables are created in the database you select. This is an optional configuration.
However, you must use different prefixes for your metadata tables and your History
List tables if you store them in the same database.
Most databases use a prefix of two characters. However, you can supply as many
letters, numbers, underscores (_), and periods (.) as required to support your
database prefixes. To determine character limits for a prefix, refer to your third-party
database vendor documentation.
If you use a table prefix for your History List tables, you must also define this table
prefix when you create a database instance to connect to the History List tables. For

147 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

information on creating a database instance, see Creating a database instance, page

175.
9 In the Script field, a SQL script to create History List tables optimized for your
database is selected. If you want to specify a different script, click ... to browse to
and select a customized script. For more information on the default SQL scripts, see
SQL scripts, page 150.
10 Click Next. The next configuration page that opens depends on your configuration
scenario:
• If you did not select to create statistics tables, the Summary page opens. You can
complete your configuration as described in To review and save your History
List configuration, page 148 below.
• If you selected to configure statistics tables, you are prompted to configure these
options as described in Creating statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories
to maintain and monitor system activity, page 148.

To review and save your History List configuration

11 Review the summary information.
You can click Save to save the configuration as a response (.ini) file to configure
History List repositories on other systems or to run silent configurations at a later
time. For information on running the Configuration Wizard with a response file, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
12 Click Finish to apply the configuration and create the History List repository. The
summary information is updated as the configurations are completed, providing a
way to track the progress of the configurations.
Once you are finished configuring Intelligence Server and your project sources, a
database instance to connect a project to a History List repository must be created. If you
created the History List repository as part of the same configuration routine to create a
metadata repository and the configuration is being done on a Windows environment, a
database instance is automatically created for the History List repository. For
information on creating a database instance, see Creating a database instance, page 175.

Creating statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories to maintain

and monitor system activity
The statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories are collections of database tables used
to maintain and monitor system activity and performance. You can run MicroStrategy
Enterprise Manager against the statistical information to analyze and interpret the
statistics.
For a detailed description of the statistics tables used in the Enterprise Manager Statistics
database, the fields that each table contains, and the data types associated with each field
for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, refer to the Enterprise Manager Data Model and
Object Definitions chapter in the Supplemental Reference for System Administration.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 148

Installation and Configuration Guide

For details on how to configure projects to log statistics, refer to the Monitoring System
Usage chapter in the System Administration Guide.
If you create statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories as part of the same
configuration routine to create a metadata repository, and the configuration is being
done on a Windows environment, a database instance is automatically created for the
statistics repository. If you create the statistics repository separately, you create it for an
existing metadata repository, or you create it on a UNIX or Linux environment, you must
create a database instance for the statistics repository. For information on creating a
database instance, see Creating a database instance, page 175.

If you are upgrading your statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories from a
previous version of MicroStrategy rather than creating a brand new statistics
repository, see the Upgrade Guide.

Prerequisites
• Before you create statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories, you should ensure
that you are storing them on a certified database, ODBC driver, and operating system
combination. For a list of certified environments, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
• A database user account to associate with the repositories. MicroStrategy
recommends that the database user account used to create the tables is granted full
permissions for the database. If the database user account cannot be granted full
permissions to the database, refer to Required database permissions to create
metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, page 143 for additional details on
the database permissions required for this configuration.
• The steps below are specific to creating statistics and Enterprise Manager
repositories. If you also select to create a metadata repository or History List
repository, you must first complete the steps described in Creating a metadata
repository, page 143 or Creating a History List repository, page 146, respectively.
• While statistics creation errors are rare in general, you can review a list of potential
errors in Metadata and other repository creation errors, page 424 to prepare for or
avoid specific scenarios that may cause errors.

To create statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Select Metadata, History List and Statistics Repository Tables and click
Next. The Repository Configuration: Repository Types page opens.
3 Select the Statistics & Enterprise Manager Repository check box and click
Next. The Repository Configuration: Statistics & Enterprise Manager Repository
page opens.
4 From the DSN drop-down list, select the DSN for your statistics and Enterprise
Manager repositories.

149 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

If an applicable DSN does not exist, you can select New to open the Connectivity
Wizard and create a new DSN. The steps to create a new DSN with the Connectivity
Wizard are described in the section Creating a DSN for a data source, page 133.
5 Type a User Name and Password that can connect to the data source.
The database user you provide becomes the owner of all tables and objects. The
database user is required to have the Select, Create, Insert, and Drop permissions.
6 After providing a valid user name and password, you can click SQL Preview to
open the SQL Preview dialog box. This dialog box provides the SQL statements that
will be executed on your data source to create the statistics and Enterprise Manager
tables. Click Close once you are done reviewing the SQL statements to return to the
Configuration Wizard.
If you use the advanced options to change the SQL script, you can click SQL Preview
after selecting the new script to see an updated listing of the SQL statements that will
be executed.

To complete statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories creation

7 Click Advanced. Options to specify a SQL script to create statistics tables are
displayed.
8 In the Script field, a SQL script to create statistics and Enterprise Manager
repositories optimized for your database is selected. If you want to specify a different
script, click ... (the browse button) to browse to and select a customized script. For
more information on the default SQL scripts, see SQL scripts, page 150.
9 Click Next. The Summary page opens.
10 Review the summary information.
You can click Save to save the configuration as a response (.ini) file to configure
statistics repositories on other systems or to run silent configurations at a later time.
For information on running the Configuration Wizard with a response file, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
11 Click Finish to apply the configuration and create the statistics repository. The
summary information is updated as the configurations are completed, providing a
way to track the progress of the configurations.
Once you are finished configuring Intelligence Server and your project sources, a
database instance to connect a project to a statistics repository must be created. If you
created the statistics repository as part of the same configuration routine to create a
metadata repository and the configuration is being done on a Windows environment, a
database instance is automatically created for the statistics repository. For information
on creating a database instance, see Creating a database instance, page 175.

SQL scripts
MicroStrategy has database-specific SQL scripts for creating metadata, History List, and
statistics tables. The scripts for each certified database platform are shipped with the

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 150

Installation and Configuration Guide

product. The MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard automatically selects a default script

based on your ODBC driver’s database platform.
By default, all the scripts reside in the directory where you installed MicroStrategy and
are identified by the .sql extension. It is highly recommended that no edits be
performed on these scripts, except on rare occasions and only by skilled database
personnel.

Configuration messages
Depending on the selected ODBC database, different messages might be displayed
prompting you to complete the configuration successfully. Two examples are described
below:
• Metadata tables already exist at this location. Would
you like to recreate them? (This will drop all existing
information in the Metadata)
This message is displayed if the Configuration Wizard detects an existing metadata
repository in the database location you specified.

If you continue, all information in the existing metadata repository is

overwritten.

• No Metadata Tables were found at this location, do you

wish to create them now?
This message is displayed if there is no existing metadata repository and you have not
chosen to create one.

Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

You use the Configuration Wizard to create and configure a server definition for your
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. A server definition is stored in the metadata
repository, and it contains information about the configuration of Intelligence Server
such as governing settings, which projects should be loaded, which communication
protocols should be used, and so on. This definition is a required step of configuring your
Intelligence Server.

Multiple server definitions can be available, but you can install only one
Intelligence Server on one server machine and Intelligence Server uses only one
server definition at a time.

For steps to set up Intelligence Server, see To set up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server,
page 152 below.
You can choose to configure the server definition, project source names, and the
metadata and statistics repositories using a response file with the Configuration Wizard.
This lets you provide users with a configuration file to complete the configuration tasks
rather than requiring users to step through the Configuration Wizard. Creating and using
a response file can be done using the Configuration Wizard interface or a command line

151 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

tool available for UNIX and Linux. The steps to perform these two configuration options
are provided in the sections listed below:
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353 in Chapter 11,
Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools

Prerequisites
• You must run the Configuration Wizard locally on the Intelligence Server machine.
You cannot create, use, or delete server definitions remotely.

To set up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Select Configure Intelligence Server, and click Next. The Server Configuration:
Metadata Connection page opens.
3 From the DSN drop-down list, select a DSN for the data source that stores the
metadata and specify a User Name and Password. If the password to the
metadata has changed in the database, ensure that this is reflected in the password
that you provide.
You can also use the options listed below:
• New to create a new DSN (see Creating a DSN for a data source, page 133)
• Advanced if you want to specify a metadata table prefix, which is an identifier
stored in the project metadata associated with a table or tables and is used to
generate SQL

Although it is possible to use the Microsoft Access database for the metadata
repository, it is not a suitable metadata repository for a production project.
You should not use Microsoft Access for anything other than a proof-of-
concept or demonstration type of application.

4 Click Next. If a message is displayed that your metadata is not up to date with the
most recent version of MicroStrategy, you must upgrade your metadata to take
advantage of the new features available in the most recent version of MicroStrategy.
You can upgrade your MicroStrategy metadata as described in the Upgrade Guide.
5 In the Server Configuration: MicroStrategy Authentication page, specify the
MicroStrategy administrator’s User Name and Password. By default, the user
name is Administrator and it has no password. If you are setting up Intelligence
Server for the first time, use the default user name and password.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 152

Installation and Configuration Guide

For security reasons, you should change the Administrator user name and
password as soon as possible after you initially configure the system. Refer to
the System Administration Guide for details about passwords and other user
management information.

6 Click Next. The Server Configuration: Server Definitions page opens.

To create, use, or delete a server definition

7 You can create a new server definition, use an existing server definition, or delete a
current server definition. You can perform one of the following tasks:
• To create a server definition, select Create New Server Definition. When
you create a new server definition in the metadata repository of your choice, all
its parameters use the default settings. You can modify these default settings
using the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Configuration Editor. For
information on the Intelligence Server Configuration Editor, refer to the System
Administration Guide.
a In the Name field, type a name to identify the server definition.
b Select the Use as the active server definition check box to define
Intelligence Server to use the new server definition when Intelligence Server
starts.
c Click Next. The Server Configuration: Settings page opens, described in To
define the Intelligence Server port number and other settings, page 154
below.
• To use an existing server definition, select Use the selected Server
Definition as active. When you use an existing server definition different
from the current server definition, you are changing the machine’s configuration
information, which can be in an entirely different metadata with different
default settings.
a From the Existing Server Definitions pane, select a server definition to use.
b Click Next. The Server Configuration: Settings page opens, described in To
define the Intelligence Server port number and other settings, page 154
below.
• To delete an existing server definition, select Delete Selected Server
Definition. When you delete a server definition, you are deleting the server
definition object from the metadata repository, but not from the Intelligence
Server software that you installed.
a From the Existing Server Definitions pane, select a server definition to
delete.
b Click Next. The Summary page opens, described in To complete Intelligence
Server configurations, page 156 below.

153 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To define the Intelligence Server port number and other settings

8 If you select to create a server definition or use an existing server definition, you can
define the Intelligence Server port number and other settings, as described below:
• Port number: You can use the default port number or specify another port
number. The port number is how a server process identifies itself on the
machine on which it is running. If the port number is used by another process,
such as in a shared environment, specify an available port number. For
instructions on how to find an available port number, see Port number is in use,
page 423.
• Register Intelligence Server as a Service: This option is only available if
you are configuring Intelligence Server on a UNIX or Linux machine, and you
have root access and permissions to the UNIX or Linux machine that
Intelligence Server is installed on.
Select this check box to register Intelligence Server as a service.
In Windows, Intelligence Server is automatically registered as a service upon
completion of the configuration process.

Running the Configuration Wizard again and clearing this check box does not
unregister Intelligence Server as a service. To unregister Intelligence Server on
UNIX or Linux, you must stop the service, and then use the mstrctl
command line tool. The syntax is mstrctl -s IntelligenceServer
us, where IntelligenceServer is the name of a server definition. For
information on starting, stopping, and registering Intelligence Server as a
service, see the System Administration Guide.

• Projects to load at startup: This pane displays all the projects that are in the
metadata repository. You can select projects to use with the server definition that
you have chosen. The projects that you select are loaded on the server at startup.
• Start Intelligence Server when finished: Select this check box to have
Intelligence Server start once you complete this configuration.
If you use Windows NT authentication with SQL Server, you must type the
Windows NT account user name and password in the Service Manager to
successfully start Intelligence Server. For information on how to access and use
the Service Manager, see the System Administration Guide.
• Identify missing DSNs: Select this check box to verify that all DSNs, which
are used for database instances created in MicroStrategy, are locally available.
This helps to ensure that your database instances in MicroStrategy can connect
successfully to their associated data sources.
By default, this check box is cleared, which means the availability of all local
DSNs used in database instances is not verified. While this may mean that all
DSNs used in database instances are not available, it can save system resources
required for the Intelligence Server configuration process.
9 Click Next. The SSL Configuration Page opens.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 154

Installation and Configuration Guide

To encrypt the communications between Developer and Intelligence Server

10 You can enable or disable secure socket layer (SSL) protocol to encrypt the
communication between Intelligence Server and Developer:
• Configure SSL: This option specifies whether to enable Intelligence Server
and Developer to communicate using the SSL protocol. Clear this check box to
disable the use of the SSL protocol for Intelligence Server and Developer
communications.
Select this check box to enable the use of the SSL protocol for Intelligence
Server and Developer communications. Be aware that you must ensure the
following prerequisites are met to enable the SSL protocol:
▫ You must have access to the SSL certificate you created for Intelligence
Server.
▫ You must have the private key file that you created while requesting a
certificate for Intelligence Server. For information on creating a private key
and obtaining an SSL certificate, refer to the System Administration Guide.
When you select to enable the SSL protocol, you must provide the following
information:
▫ Certificate: The SSL certificate file you created for Intelligence Server.
Click ... (the browse button) to navigate to and select the certificate file.
▫ Key: The private key file you created while requesting the certificate for
Intelligence Server. Click ... (the browse button) to navigate to and select the
private key file.
▫ Password: The password that you used while creating the private key for
the SSL certificate.
▫ SSL Port: The port number to use for SSL access. By default, the port is
39321.
To enable SSL protocol communication in Developer, you must use the Project
Source Editor. For steps to complete the other tasks required to enable SSL
protocol communications, refer to the System Administration Guide.
11 Click Next. The Statistics Configuration page opens.

To specify the default statistics repository

12 You can specify the default statistics repository to use for the local Intelligence
Server, including the data source name, user name, and password, and an option to
create a new data source name. You can also enable basic statistics logging for
projects:
• Make this my default Statistics Database Instance for the local
Intelligence Server metadata: Select this check box to define which
statistics repository to use for recording statistics. If you clear this check box, a
default statistics database instance is not defined for your Intelligence Server.

155 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

When defining the default statistics repository, you must provide the following
configuration details:
▫ DSN: Select the data source name for your statistics repository.
If a DSN for your statistics repository does not exist, you can click New to
open the MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard and create a new DSN.
▫ User Name: Type the database user name for the user that can connect to
the statistics data source.
▫ Password: Type the password for the user that can connect to the
statistics data source.
▫ Enable Basic Statistics (For newly created projects and existing
projects not logging statistics): Select this check box to start logging
basic statistics for new projects and any projects that are not currently
logging statistics. You must use the Project Configuration Editor available in
MicroStrategy Developer to:
— Enable additional statistics for a project.
— Enable basic and additional statistics for a project if you cleared this
check box.
13 Click Next. The Summary page opens.

To complete Intelligence Server configurations

14 Review the summary information.
You can click Save to save the configuration as a response (.ini) file to configure
Intelligence Server on other systems or to run silent configurations at a later time.
For information on running the Configuration Wizard with a response file, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
15 Click Finish to apply the Intelligence Server configuration. The summary
information is updated as the configurations are completed, providing a way to track
the progress of the configurations.
If you created a new server definition, it is displayed in the list of existing server
definitions for that metadata.
If you assigned an existing server definition to Intelligence Server and the existing project
source uses this Intelligence Server, a related message is displayed.

Starting, stopping, and restarting the server

With a server definition defined for your Intelligence Server, you can use Service
Manager to start or stop your Intelligence Server. For steps to use Service Manager, refer
to the System Administration Guide.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 156

Installation and Configuration Guide

Creating project sources

Project sources represent a connection to a metadata database or a MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server. The project source stores the location of the metadata repository or
the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server definition that is used to run the project. Through
a project source you can create, manipulate, and administer MicroStrategy projects.
When you create a metadata repository, by default it creates a server (three-tier) project
source. You can use the Project Sources option in the MicroStrategy Configuration
Wizard if you need to create multiple project sources or a direct (two-tier) project source.
The steps to create the different types of project sources are:
• Creating a direct (two-tier) project source, page 157: Direct project sources that
connect directly to the metadata through ODBC. You cannot create a direct project
source on UNIX or Linux.
• Creating a server (three-tier) project source, page 158: Server project sources that
connect to the metadata through an Intelligence Server.
You can choose to create project sources using a response file with the Configuration
Wizard. This lets you provide users with a configuration file to complete the
configuration tasks rather than requiring users to step through the Configuration Wizard.
Creating and using a response file can be done using the Configuration Wizard interface
or a command line tool available for UNIX and Linux. The steps to perform these two
configuration options are provided in the sections listed below:
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353 in Chapter 11,
Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools

Creating a direct (two-tier) project source

A direct project source is used to connect directly to the metadata repository using
ODBC. A direct project source connection does not allow you to access MicroStrategy
Web, run Report Services documents, or use any of the other MicroStrategy features that
are provided through Intelligence Server.
You cannot create a direct project source on UNIX or Linux.

Prerequisites
• For Windows, the Project Source option is available only if the Developer product is
installed on the machine.

To create to a direct project source

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.

157 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

2 Select Project Sources, and click Next. The Project Source Creation: Name page
opens.
3 In the Project Source Name field, type a name for the project source.
4 Under Connection Type, select Direct (2-tier), and click Next. The Project
Source Creation: Metadata Location page opens.
5 From the DSN drop-down list, select a DSN for the data source that stores the
metadata and specify a User Name and Password.
You can also click New to create a new DSN (see Creating a DSN for a data source,
page 133) and click Advanced to specify a metadata table prefix if necessary.
6 Click Next. The Project Source Creation: Authentication page opens.
7 Select the authentication mode for the project source. For information on the
available authentication modes, see the Authentication modes, page 160.
8 Click Next. The Summary page opens.
9 Review the summary information.
You can click Save to save the configuration as a response (.ini) file to configure a
direct project source on other systems or to run silent configurations at a later time.
For information on running the Configuration Wizard with a response file, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
10 Click Finish to create the project source. The summary information is updated as
the configurations are completed, providing a way to track the progress of the
configurations.

Creating a server (three-tier) project source

A server (three-tier) project source is used to connect to the metadata using the
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. A server project source connection allows you to
access MicroStrategy Web, run Report Services documents, and use all of the other
MicroStrategy features that are provided through Intelligence Server.

When you create a metadata repository, by default it creates a server (three-tier)

project source.

Prerequisites
• For Windows, the Project Source option is available only if the Developer product is
installed on the machine.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 158

Installation and Configuration Guide

To create a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server (three-tier) project

source

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Select Project Sources and click Next. The Project Source Creation: Name page
opens.
3 In the Project Source Name field, type a name for the project source.
4 Under Connection Type, select MicroStrategy Intelligence Server (3-tier),
and click Next. The Project Source Creation: Metadata Location page opens.
5 In the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Machine Name drop-down list,
select the Intelligence Server to connect to.
6 In the Port Number used by MicroStrategy Intelligence Server field, type
the port number for the Intelligence Server to connect to.
The port number is how the Intelligence Server process identifies itself on the server
on which it is running. The default port number for Intelligence Server is 34952. If
you use a non-default port number, this number must be provided while connecting
through MicroStrategy Developer.
If you set up a firewall between Intelligence Server and your MicroStrategy Web
server, refer to the System Administration Guide for steps to ensure the required
ports are open to allow communication between your MicroStrategy systems.
7 Select the Connection times out after (mins) check box to define and enforce
a connection time out for inactive users connected to a project source. In the field
below, type a numerical value (in minutes) for the amount of inactivity that is
allowed before a user is automatically disconnected from a project source. If this
check box is cleared, users are not disconnected from project sources due to
inactivity.
8 Click Next. The Project Source Creation: Authentication page opens.
9 Select the authentication mode for the project source. For information on the
available authentication modes, see the Authentication modes, page 160.
10 Click Next. The Summary page opens.
11 Review the summary information.
You can click Save to save the configuration as a response (.ini) file to configure a
server project source on other systems or to run silent configurations at a later time.
For information on running the Configuration Wizard with a response file, see
Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.
12 Click Finish to create the project source. The summary information is updated as
the configurations are completed, providing a way to track the progress of the
configurations.

159 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Authentication modes
Authentication is the process through which the system identifies the user. Several
authentication modes are supported for MicroStrategy project sources. They vary
primarily by the system that verifies and accepts the login/password credentials provided
by the user.
Some authentication modes require a server project source (three-tier). Therefore, if you
are creating a direct project source (two-tier) some of the authentication options listed
below cannot be used:
• Network login ID: Windows authentication, page 160
• Login ID and password entered by the user: Standard authentication, page 160
• Guest account: Anonymous authentication, page 160
• LDAP authentication, page 161
• Login ID and password entered by the user for the warehouse: Database
authentication, page 161
• Integrated authentication, page 161
For information on the benefits of the various authentication modes and other
authentication topics, see the System Administration Guide

Network login ID: Windows authentication

To use Windows authentication, you must create users in the MicroStrategy environment
and then link them to Windows users. If you use Windows as your network operation
system and your users are already defined in the Windows directory, your users can
access the MicroStrategy application without having to enter a login ID and password.

Login ID and password entered by the user: Standard authentication

When using standard authentication, the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server is the
authentication authority. Intelligence Server verifies and accepts the login and password
provided by the user. This information is stored in the metadata repository. When a
project source is configured to use standard authentication, users must enter a valid login
ID and password combination before they can access the project source. Each user has a
unique login/password and can be identified in the MicroStrategy application uniquely.
By default, all users connect to the data warehouse using one RDBMS login ID, although
you can change this using connection mapping. For information on configuring
connection mapping, see the System Administration Guide.

Guest account: Anonymous authentication

When using anonymous authentication, users log in as Guest and do not need to provide
a password. By default, guest users can access the project, browse objects, run and
manipulate reports, but they cannot create their own objects or schedule report
executions. However, you determine what the Guest user can and cannot do by

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 160

Installation and Configuration Guide

modifying the Public user group. Guest users inherit their privileges from the Public
group; they are not part of the Everyone group.

LDAP authentication
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) authentication identifies users within a
repository of users stored in an LDAP server (such as Novell Directory Services). If you
use an LDAP directory to centrally manage users in your environment, you may want to
use LDAP authentication. Group membership can be maintained in the LDAP directory
without having to also be defined in the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. When using
LDAP authentication, LDAP users or groups are linked to users or groups in the
MicroStrategy environment.

Login ID and password entered by the user for the warehouse: Database
authentication
This mode of database authentication identifies users using a login ID and password
stored in the data warehouse database. Under this mode of authentication, a warehouse
database is associated with each project. When users log in to a project source, they are
logging in to the Intelligence Server. Use database authentication if you want the data
warehouse RDBMS to be the authority for identifying users and you do not want to
maintain user credentials in the Intelligence Server as well as the RDBMS.

Integrated authentication
Integrated authentication enables a Windows user to log in once to their Windows
machine. The user does not need to log in again separately to MicroStrategy Developer or
MicroStrategy Web. This type of authentication uses Kerberos to validate a user’s
credentials.

Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file

The Configuration Wizard walks you through the process of setting up the environment
for the MicroStrategy products installed in your system. You can also configure server
definitions, project source names, an Enterprise Manager project, and the metadata,
History List, and statistics repositories using a response file with the Configuration
Wizard. This enables you to provide a configuration file to users to complete the
configuration tasks, rather than requiring users to step through the Configuration
Wizard. This can be done to configure a MicroStrategy installation on Windows, UNIX,
and Linux.
The Configuration Wizard can also be used to perform MicroStrategy upgrades, configure
Health Center, and create an Enterprise Manager project. These tasks can also be
accomplished by using a response file:
• For steps to upgrade MicroStrategy using a response file, see the Upgrade Guide.
• For steps to configure Health Center with a response file, see the System
Administration Guide.

161 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• For steps to create an Enterprise Manager project with a response file, see the
Operations Manager Guide.

Creating a response file

It is recommended that you always create the response file through the graphical
interface of the Configuration Wizard, as described in the procedure To create a
response file, page 162 in this section. This ensures that all applicable options are
included in the response file with valid values.
However, you can also create and use a response file with the Configuration Wizard in
command line mode on UNIX and Linux machines. For steps to create and use a
response file as well as perform other configurations using command line tools in UNIX
and Linux, see the Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353 section
in Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools.

To create a response file

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Any configuration tasks you complete with the Configuration Wizard can be saved to
a response file. For steps to complete various configurations tasks with the
Configuration Wizard, see the sections listed below:
• Creating metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, page 142
• Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 151
• Creating project sources, page 157
3 Once you reach the Summary page for a configuration, click Save. The Save dialog
box opens.
4 Specify a name and location to save the response file, and click Save. You are
returned to the Summary page.
5 To also perform the configuration task, click Finish. The summary information is
updated as the configurations are completed, providing a way to track the progress of
the configurations.
Steps to use a response file to configure MicroStrategy are covered in Using a response
file to configure MicroStrategy installations, page 163 below.
You can modify a response file with a text editor to make configuration changes such as
entering different user login and password information. For information on the
parameters and options available in response files, see Response configuration
parameters and options, page 164.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 162

Installation and Configuration Guide

Using a response file to configure MicroStrategy installations

Rather than stepping through each page of the Configuration Wizard, you can configure
MicroStrategy using a response file. You have the following options to use a response file
to configure MicroStrategy:
• To use a response file with the Configuration Wizard, page 163: This covers the
standard procedure of running a response file with the Configuration Wizard
interface.
• To use a response file through the Windows command line, page 163: This covers
the procedure of running a response file from the Windows command line. This
enables users to run the file without using any graphical user interfaces.
If you are configuring a MicroStrategy installation on UNIX or Linux, you can use a
command line version of the Configuration Wizard to create and use a response file.
For steps to create and use a response file as well as perform other configurations
using command line tools in UNIX and Linux, see the Configuring MicroStrategy
with a response.ini file, page 353 section in Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy
Using Command Line Tools.
• Configuring MicroStrategy components with System Manager: You can use a
Configuration Wizard response file as part of an System Manager workflow. System
Manager lets you define multiple configurations for your MicroStrategy environment
that can be executed in a single workflow. For information on using MicroStrategy
System Manager to configure and deploy your MicroStrategy environments, see the
System Administration Guide.

To use a response file with the Configuration Wizard

1 Open the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard. To do this, see To configure

MicroStrategy through the Configuration Wizard, page 140.
2 Click Load. The Open dialog box displays.
3 Browse to the path where the response file is saved and click Open. The Summary
page opens.
4 An overview of all of the configuration tasks performed by the response file is
displayed. Review the configuration tasks and click Finish to perform the
configuration. The summary information is updated as the configurations are
completed, providing a way to track the progress of the configurations.

To use a response file through the Windows command line

The steps below are specific to configuring MicroStrategy installed on Windows. For
steps to create and use a response file as well as perform other configurations using
command line tools in UNIX and Linux, see Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy
Using Command Line Tools.
1 Type the following command in the Windows command line:
macfgwiz.exe -r “Path\response.ini”

163 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Where Path\ is the fully qualified path to the response file. For example, the
common location of a response file is:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy\RESPONSE.I
NI
2 If an error message is displayed, check the path and name you supplied for the
response file and make any required changes. Repeat the previous step to execute the
configuration.

Response configuration parameters and options

It is recommended that you always create the response file through the GUI mode of the
Configuration Wizard. However, you can also modify a response file with a text editor to
make minor changes such as entering different user login and password information.

The file must be saved with ANSI encoding.

The response file for configuring MicroStrategy is divided into three areas of
configuration, which are described in the sections below:
• Creating metadata, History List, and statistics repositories, page 164
• Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 166
• Creating and configuring project sources, page 170

Creating metadata, History List, and statistics repositories

The response file parameters within the [Repository] section define how metadata,
History List, and statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories are created. The table
below lists the available parameters and the functionality of available options for each
parameter.

Options Description

[Repositor This section configures the metadata repository and statistics tables. You can have
y] more than one [Repository] section. Additional repository sections can be
included as [Repository1], [Repository2], and so on.

Repository Defines whether a metadata, History List, and statistics repositories are configured,
= as determined by the following values:
• 1: Configures metadata, History List, and statistics repositories.
• 0: Does not configure metadata, History List, and statistics repositories.

CreateMDTa Defines whether metadata tables are created in a metadata repository, as

bles= described below:
• 1: Creates metadata tables in the metadata repository and creates a default
configuration

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 164

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

• 0: Does not create metadata tables in a metadata repository

CreateHist Defines whether a History List repository is created, as determined by the following
ListTables values:
= • 1: Creates a History List repository.
• 0: Does not create a History List repository.

CreateStat Defines whether statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories are created, as
Tables= determined by the following values:
• 1: Creates statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories.
• 0: Does not create statistics and Enterprise Manager repositories.

MetadataPa Locates the SQL scripts for creating the metadata tables. Example paths to SQL
th= scripts in different environments are listed below:
• 64-bit Windows environment: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\MD8SQL8.sql.
• UNIX/Linux: /INTELLIGENCE_SERVER_INSTALL_PATH/mdsql.sql.

HistoryLis Locates the SQL scripts for creating the History List repository. Example paths to
tPath= SQL scripts in different environments are listed below:
• 64-bit Windows environment: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\content_server_db_
Oracle.sql.
• UNIX/Linux: /INTELLIGENCE_SERVER_INSTALL_PATH/content_
server_db_Oracle.sql.

Statistics Locates the SQL scripts for creating the statistics and Enterprise Manager
Path= repositories. Example paths to SQL scripts in different environments are listed
below:
• 64-bit Windows environment: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\StatisticsEnterpriseM
anagerScripts\DDLScripts\CreateTablesScript.sql
• UNIX/Linux: /INTELLIGENCE_SERVER_INSTALL_PATH/statistics_
DB2.sql.

DSNName= Defines the Data Source Name for configuring a metadata repository in the ODBC
database.

UserName= Defines the user name to log in to the database containing the metadata
repository.

UserPwd= Defines the password to log in to the database containing the metadata repository.

165 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

DSNNameHis Defines the Data Source Name for configuring the History List repository in the
t= ODBC database.

UserNameHi Defines the user name to log in to the database for configuring the History List
st= repository.

UserPwdHis Defines the password to log in to the database for configuring the History List
t= repository.

DSNNameSta Defines the Data Source Name for configuring the statistics and Enterprise
ts= Manager repositories in the ODBC database.

UserNameSt Defines the user name to log in to the database for configuring the statistics and
ats= Enterprise Manager repositories.

UserPwdSta Defines the password to log in to the database for configuring the statistics and
ts= Enterprise Manager repositories.

EncryptPas Defines whether the password is encrypted in the response file, as determined by
sword= the following values:
• 0: The password is not encrypted in the response file, which enables you to modify
the password in the response file later using a text editor. You can then distribute the
response file to multiple users with various login and password credentials. However,
be aware that this can compromise your database security if you do not remove the
password from the response file before distributing it.
• 1: Encrypts the password in the response file, which ensures that your password is
secure. This is the default behavior.

DBName= Defines the database name to create tables in DB2 z/OS. This option should only
be used when connecting to a DB2 z/OS database.

TBName= Defines the tablespace name to be created in the database.This option should only
be used when connecting to a DB2 z/OS database.

Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

The response fileparameters within the [Server] section configures an Intelligence
Server definition. The table below lists the available parameters and the functionality of
available options for each parameter.

Options Description

[Server] In this section you can configure the Intelligence Server

definition. You can have more than one [Server]
section. Additional server sections can be included as
[Server1], [Server2], and so on.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 166

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Server= Defines whether MicroStrategy Intelligence Server is

configured, as determined by the following values:
• 1: Configures MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
• 0: Does not configure MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

Action= Defines whether a server definition is created, used, or

deleted, as determined by the following values:
• 1: Creates a new server definition
• 2: Uses an existing server definition
• 3: Deletes an existing server definition
• 4: Creates a new server definition and uses it as the
default

InstanceName= Defines the name of the Intelligence Server instance.

If you select to delete Intelligence Server instances, you
can delete multiple instances by listing multiple instance
names, separating each name with the \ character. For
example,
InstanceName=ServerInstance1\ServerInst
ance2.

ProjectsToRegister= Defines projects to be loaded when Intelligence Server is

started. You can select to load multiple projects,
separating projects by the \character. For example,
ProjectsToRegister=Project1\Project2.

ProjectsToUnRegister= Defines projects to not be loaded when Intelligence Server

is started. You can select to not load multiple projects,
separating projects by the \ character. For example,
ProjectsToUnRegister=Project1\Project2.

DSName= Defines the data source name for configuring the

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. This is the data source
that stores the metadata.

DSNUser= Defines the user name to log in to the metadata

database.

DSNPwd= Defines the password to log in to the metadata database.

167 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

EncryptPassword= Defines whether the password is encrypted in the

response file, as determined by the following values:
• 0: The password is not encrypted in the response file,
which enables you to modify the password in the response
file later using a text editor. You can then distribute the
response file to multiple users with various login and
password credentials. However, be aware that this can
compromise your database security if you do not remove
the password from the response file before distributing it.
• 1: Encrypts the password in the response file, which
ensures that your password is secure. This is the default
behavior.

DSSUser= Defines the MicroStrategy user name to log in to the

project.

DSSPwd= Defines the password for the MicroStrategy user name to

log in to the project.

MDPrefix= Defines a prefix for metadata repository tables used by

the server definition.

UseAsDefault= Defines whether the Intelligence Server definition is set as

the default server definition to use for Intelligence Server,
as determined by the following values:
• True: Defines the Intelligence Server definition as the
default server definition
• False: Does not define the Intelligence Server definition
as the default server definition

Port= Defines the port used by the Intelligence Server.

RegisterAsService= This option is only available on Intelligence Servers

running on UNIX or Linux operating systems.
Defines whether Intelligence Server is registered as a
service. Registering Intelligence Server as a service is
determined by the following values:
• 1: Registers Intelligence Server as a service. Performing
this task requires a UNIX or Linux login with root level
access and privileges.
• 0: Does not register Intelligence Server as a service.

StartServerAfter Config= Defines whether Intelligence Server is started after

applying the configuration, as determined by the following
values:
• 1: Intelligence Server is started after successfully
applying the configuration.
• 0: Intelligence Server is not started after applying the
configuration.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 168

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

ConfigureSSL= Defines whether to enable Intelligence Server and

Developer to communicate using the SSL protocol, as
determined by the following values:
• 1: Enables the use of the SSL protocol for Intelligence
Server and Developer communications.
• 0: Disables the use of the SSL protocol for Intelligence
Server and Developer communications.

SSLPort= Defines the port to use for SSL access. By default, the port
is 39321.

CertificatePath= Locates the SSL certificate file you created for Intelligence
Server. Type the full path to the SSL certificate file.

KeyPath= Locates private key file you created while requesting the
certificate for Intelligence Server. Type the full path to the
private key file.

KeyPassword= Defines the password that you used while creating the
private key for the SSL certificate.
DefaultStatisticsRep Specifies whether you can create a default statistics
database instance for the all of the projects of the local
Intelligence Server metadata, as determined by the
following values:
• 1: You can create a default statistics database instance,
using the statistics parameters listed in this table below.
• 0: A default statistics database instance is not created.

DefaultDSNNameDefaultStatist Specifies the data source name for your statistics

ics repository.
UserNameDefaultStatistics Specifies the database user name for the user that can
connect to the statistics data source.
UserPwdDefaultStatistics Specifies the password for the user that can connect to
the statistics data source.
EncryptUserPwdDefaultStatist Defines whether the statistics user password is encrypted
ics in the response file, as determined by the following
values:
• 0: The password is not encrypted in the response file,
which enables you to modify the password in the response
file later using a text editor. You can then distribute the
response file to multiple users with various login and
password credentials. However, be aware that this can
compromise your database security if you do not remove
the password from the response file before distributing it.
• 1: Encrypts the password in the response file, which
ensures that your password is secure. This is the default
behavior.

169 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

DefaultStatisticsPrefix Defines a prefix for statistics repository tables used by the

server definition.
DefaultStatisticsBasicStats Defines whether to enable basic statistics, as determined
by the following values:
• 1: Enables the logging of basic statistics for new projects
and any projects that are not now logging statistics.
• 0: Does not enable the logging of basic statistics for new
projects and any projects that are not now logging
statistics.

Creating and configuring project sources

The response file parameters within the [Client] section create and configure project
sources. The table below lists the available parameters and the functionality of available
options for each parameter.

Options Description

[Client] In this section you can configure the project source name. You can have
more than one [Client] section. Additional client sections can be
included as [Client1], [Client2], and so on.

Client= Defines whether project sources are configured, as determined by the

following values:
• 1: Configures project sources
• 0: Does not configure project sources

EncryptPassword= Defines whether the password is encrypted in the response file, as

determined by the following values:
• 0: The password is not encrypted in the response file, which enables you to
modify the password in the response file later using a text editor. You can
then distribute the response file to multiple users with various login and
password credentials. However, be aware that this can compromise your
database security if you do not remove the password from the response file
before distributing it.
• 1: Encrypts the password in the response file, which ensures that your
password is secure. This is the default behavior.

DataSource= Defines the name of the new project source to create.

ConnType= Defines the database connection type for a project source. The following
connection types are supported:
• 2: Connects a project source to the metadata using an ODBC DSN
(Windows only).
• 3: Connects a project source to the metadata through a MicroStrategy

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 170

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Intelligence Server (three-tier).

DSN= If using connection type 2 (ConnType=2), defines the name of the ODBC
database.

UserName= If using connection type 2 (ConnType=2), defines the user name to

connect to the ODBC database.

UserPwd= If using connection type 2 (ConnType=2), defines the password to log in

to the database.

ServerName= If using connection type 3 (ConnType=3), defines the name of the

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server to connect to.

Port= If using connection type 3 (ConnType=3), defines the port number for
the Intelligence Server when creating a server (three-tier) project source.
The default port number for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server is 34952.

Authentication= The following authentication modes are supported:

• 1: Standard or login ID and password entered by the user
• 2: Network login ID (Windows authentication)
• 8: Guest account (Anonymous authentication)
• 16: LDAP authentication
• 32: Database login ID and password (database authentication)
• 128: Integrated authentication
For information on the available authentication modes, see the
Authentication modes, page 160.

MDPrefix= If using connection type 2 (ConnType=2), defines a prefix for metadata

repository tables.

Timeout= Defines and enforce a connection time out for inactive users connected to
a project source. The following values are supported:
• 0: Defines that users are not disconnected from project sources due to
inactivity.
• Numerical value greater than 0: A numerical value (in minutes) greater than 0
defines the amount of inactivity that is allowed before a user is automatically
disconnected from a project source.

Connecting to a data warehouse and other

repositories
For MicroStrategy users to be able to browse attribute elements and execute reports, a
connection to a data warehouse must be created. A connection to other data sources can

171 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

also support History Lists, statistics, and including data from multiple data sources into
your MicroStrategy project.
You can perform data source connection tasks from the Project Configuration Editor,
which can be accessed by right-clicking a project and selecting Project Configuration.

The tasks described in this section require MicroStrategy Administrator privileges.

Specifying warehouse connection information

A database instance is a MicroStrategy object, created in MicroStrategy Developer by an
administrator, that represents a connection to a data source. A database instance
specifies connection information, such as the data source name, Login ID and password,
and other data source specific information.

The steps to create the required components of a database instance are provided in
the following sections: Creating a database instance, page 175, Creating a
database connection, page 178, and Creating a database login, page 182.

When a project architect creates a project, the architect assigns a database instance to
that project. A project specifies only one warehouse database instance at a time, but a
database instance can be assigned to multiple projects. Since only one data source can be
included in the project’s relational schema, all reports and documents return information
from a single data source.
If you have a license for the MultiSource Option feature, you can connect a project to
multiple warehouse database instances. There can be multiple data sources that connect
to the Warehouse Catalog for the project. Since these data source can be integrated as
part of the project’s relational schema, all reports and documents can return information
from multiple data sources. For information on accessing multiple data sources in a
project, see the Project Design Guide.
Regardless of whether you have a license for the MultiSource Option, you can also
extend a project’s access to multiple data sources through other MicroStrategy features.
Freeform SQL, Query Builder, and supporting access through MicroStrategy to other
MDX cube sources such as SAP BW, Hyperion Essbase, and Microsoft Analysis Services
allows non-project database instances to be included and used in a project along with the
warehouse database instances. For information on Freeform SQL and Query Builder, see
the Advanced Reporting Guide. For information on MDX cube sources, see the MDX
Cube Reporting Guide
These non-project database instances can allow a project to connect to the data sources
for the various features and additional data sources mentioned above, instead of
accessing the data from the project’s relational schema. For more information on the
Warehouse Catalog, see the Project Design Guide.
The database instances that you create are separated into two categories:
• SQL data warehouses database instances, page 173
• MDX cube database instances, page 174

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 172

Installation and Configuration Guide

SQL data warehouses database instances

A SQL data warehouse database instance is any database instance that connects to a
database or other data source through SQL queries. More specifically, this covers
database instances used for standard MicroStrategy reporting, Freeform SQL, Query
Builder, data marts, and any other relational data source. You can also connect to
History List and statistics tables through SQL data warehouse database instances. The
SQL data warehouse database instances are available in the Project Configuration Editor,
as shown below.

Selecting a database instance check box makes that database instance available in the
project for standard MicroStrategy reporting, data marts, Query Builder, and Freeform
SQL. If you have a license for the MultiSource Option, selecting a check box for a
database instance also makes the database instance available from the Warehouse Catalog
to be part of the project’s relational schema.

Database instances can be created as part of the Import Data feature. A database
instance used for the Import Data feature is displayed with the icon. These
database instances are created with security permissions for the user that created
them while using the Import Data feature. If you select one of these database
instances to be included as an available database instance in the project, it is
recommended that you change the security permissions to a MicroStrategy user
with administrative privileges. This includes taking ownership of the database
instance and defining an appropriate access control list. This ensures that no
changes are made to the database instance by other users, which could cause a loss
of connectivity to the data source. For information on the Import Data feature,
refer to the MicroStrategy Web online help.

The shading and color of a database instance in the list of relational database instances
reflects how the database instance is being used in the project:
• Blue text: This is the warehouse database instance, as selected from the warehouse
database instance drop-down list. There can only be one warehouse database

173 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

instance for a project, because this database instance’s data is populated in the
Warehouse Catalog to define the project’s relational schema. You cannot choose to
disable the warehouse database instance for the project without first selecting a
different warehouse database instance.
If you have a license for the MultiSource Option, the primary database instance acts
as the main source of data for a project and is used as the default database instance
for tables added to the project.
For information on the Warehouse Catalog as well as accessing multiple data sources
with the MultiSource Option, see the Project Design Guide.
• Bold text: The project contains objects that are dependent on the database
instance. You cannot choose to disable a database instance that has dependent
objects for the project.
• Normal text: The database instance is not being used in the project.
Clearing the check box of a database instance removes the database instance from the
project and deletes any unused Freeform SQL or Query Builder schemas. You can clear a
database instance from a project only if there are no dependent objects in the project for
the database instance. For more information on removing a database instance and
related Freeform SQL and Query Builder schemas from a project, refer to the System
Administration Guide.

MDX cube database instances

An MDX cube database instance is any database instance that connects to an MDX cube
source, such as SAP BW, Hyperion Essbase, or Microsoft Analysis Services. For
information on connecting to and reporting on these MDX cube sources, refer to the
MDX Cube Reporting Guide. The MDX cube database instances are available in the
Project Configuration Editor, as shown below.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 174

Installation and Configuration Guide

A database instance that has an MDX cube schema is represented with bold text. The
shading and color of a database instance in the list of relational database instances
reflects how the database instance is being used in the project:
• Bold: The project contains objects that are dependent on the database instance. You
cannot choose to disable a database instance that has dependent objects for the
project.
• Normal: The database instance is not being used in the project.
If you remove an MDX cube database instance from a project, you can delete any unused
MDX cube schema objects. You can remove database instance from a project only if
there are no dependent objects in the project for the database instance. For more
information on removing a database instance and related MDX cube managed objects
from a project, refer to the System Administration Guide.
For additional information on configuring MDX cube database instances, refer to the
MDX Cube Reporting Guide.

MDX schema loading and maintenance

You can click Schema Maintenance to perform various tasks for an MDX cube schema
that is part of your project, as described below:
• You can choose when an MDX cube schema associated with a database instance is
loaded for a project. By default, MDX cube schemas are loaded as needed when MDX
cube reports are executed. You can also choose to load MDX cube schemas when
Intelligence Server starts. For information on defining when MDX cube schemas
should be loaded, refer to the MDX Cube Reporting Guide.
• When you integrate MDX cube sources into MicroStrategy, the data is integrated as
an MDX cube schema. Once you integrate an MDX cube source into MicroStrategy,
you can exchange the database instance used to connect to the MDX cube schema
for a different database instance. This allows you to use different database instances
with different login and connection information to access an MDX cube schema. For
information on exchanging the database instance used to connect to the MDX cube
schema, refer to the MDX Cube Reporting Guide.

Creating a database instance

Database instances are created and modified in the Database Instance Manager, which
can be found by expanding Administration for a project source, then expanding
Configuration Managers. When you choose to create a new database instance, the
Database Instances Editor opens.

175 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

You can also create a new database instance using the Database Instance Wizard
that is available in the Database Instance Manager shortcut menu.

The Database Instances Editor has the following tabs:

• General—specifies the database instance name, connection type (data source
platform or applicable data source), and default database connection.

The database connection type you choose should match your data source and
determines whether the database instance is a relational or an MDX cube
database instance.

• Advanced—specifies the database name for intermediate table storage if a database

other than the warehouse is used to store intermediate tables, as well as other
options.

The Advanced tab is not available for MDX cube database instances.

• Job Prioritization—specifies the job prioritization scheme for the instance and the
number of prioritized connections.

To create a database instance

1 In MicroStrategy Developer, log in to a project source with administrative privileges.

2 Expand Administration, then expand Configuration Managers, and then
select Database Instances.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 176

Installation and Configuration Guide

3 From the File menu, point to New, and then select Database Instance. The
Database Instances Editor opens.
4 On the General tab, in the Database instance name field, type the name of the
database instance.
5 In the Database connection type drop-down list, select the data source
connection type according to the data source hosting your database.

If you have upgraded from a previous version of MicroStrategy, you can click
Upgrade to retrieve any database connection types that have been included
since the previous version of MicroStrategy that you used.

6 On the Advanced tab, you can configure various options for the database instance,
including:
• Intermediate table storage: You can specify the database name and table
name space to use when intermediate tables are created. Intermediate tables are
created to support various queries.
• Database gateway support: You can support backwards compatibility for
database gateway support from MicroStrategy version 6.x.
To enable database gateway support, select the Primary database instance
check box, and then select a primary database instance from the drop-down list.
The primary database instance is the database instance that should be used for
element browsing against the selected table and for queries that do not require
joins to other tables. For information on database gateway support, see the
Project Design Guide.
• Data mart optimization: You can support data mart optimization if the data
source for the database instance is in the same data source that contains data
marts.
To enable data mart optimization, select the This database instance is
located in the same warehouse as check box, and then select a database
instance from the drop-down list.
• Table prefix: If the tables in your data source use a table prefix, you can
include the table prefix to identify the proper collection of tables. Click Select to
select a table prefix or define a new table prefix.
• ODBC Version: You can define which ODBC version to use for the database
instance, as described below:
— Use 2.0 ODBC Calls: ODBC 2.0 was used in pre-9.0 versions of
MicroStrategy. You can use this option for backward compatibility if your
database management system does not support ODBC 3.x. This also allows
you to use extended fetch to retrieve blocks of data from the database into
memory, instead of row by row, which is included in the steps To create a
database connection, page 179.
— Use 3.x ODBC Calls: The support of ODBC 3.x is introduced in
MicroStrategy 9.0. You should use this option if your database management
system supports ODBC 3.x.

177 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

7 On the Job Prioritization tab, you can configure how jobs are prioritized for the
database instance. For information on configuring job prioritization, see the System
Administration Guide.
8 On the General tab, in the Database connection (default) pane, select the
default data source connection and click OK.
If the necessary database connection does not exist, you can create one by clicking
New. For steps to create a database connection, see Creating a database
connection, page 178 below.

Creating a database connection

A database connection specifies the DSN and database login used to access the data
source. A database instance designates one database connection as the default
connection for MicroStrategy users; however, users and groups can be mapped to other
database connections using connection mapping. For more details on connection
mapping, see User connection mapping, page 184.
You create database connections in the Database Instances Editor by clicking New on
the General tab. Any database connection created within the Database Instances Editor
is available for use across all database instances in the project source. For more
information on creating a database connection for MDX cube sources, refer to the MDX
Cube Reporting Guide.
When you choose to create a new database connection, the Database Connections dialog
box opens.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 178

Installation and Configuration Guide

The Database Connections dialog box has different options depending on the database
instance type.
• SQL data warehouse database instances
▫ General: Specifies the database connection name, the warehouse DSN, and the
default database login.
▫ Advanced: Specifies the database driver mode, driver execution mode, and other
miscellaneous warehouse connection settings.
• MDX cube database instances
▫ General: Specifies the database connection name, the default database login, and
additional connection information that you must provide. For more information
on creating a database connection for MDX cube sources, see the MDX Cube
Reporting Guide.
▫ Advanced: Specifies the connection settings, additional connection string
parameters, and connection caching settings.
• HiveThrift Connector database instances
▫ General: Specifies the database connection name, the default database login, and
additional connection information that you must provide. For more information
on defining connection information to Hadoop Hive distributions by using a
database connection, see ODBC Driver for Red Brick for UNIX/Linux, page
395.
▫ Advanced: Specifies the database driver mode, driver execution mode, and other
miscellaneous warehouse connection settings.
The steps below show you how to create a database connection for a relational database
instance. For information on creating a database connection for MDX cube sources,
refer to the MDX Cube Reporting Guide.
Prerequisites
• A database instance has been created, as described in Creating a database instance,
page 175.

To create a database connection

1 On the General tab, in the Database connection name box, type a name to
identify the database connection.
2 In the Local system ODBC data sources pane, select the data source name for
the data source.
3 On the Advanced tab, you can define various options per your requirements and
the requirements of the database you are connecting to, including:
• Database driver mode: Select one of the following database driver modes:

179 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

— Multi-process: Each connection to the warehouse database is spawned as

a separate process, identified in Windows Task Manager as M8DBMPE.exe.
If one process fails, such as when a database access thread hangs or is lost,
other processes are not affected.
— Multi-threaded: All connections to the warehouse database are
maintained inside the Intelligence Server process MSTRSVR.exe. All
connections, SQL submissions, and data retrievals from the database are
handled within this process.
MicroStrategy recommends setting all database drivers to multi-process mode.
The robustness and stability which come with multi-process mode greatly
overshadow any increased efficiency that may come with multi-threaded mode.
Problems that appear random and sporadic in multi-threaded operation can
often be resolved by switching to multi-process mode.
• Driver execution mode: Define the driver execution mode depending on the
ODBC driver being used:
— Asynchronous Connection: All statements allocated within the
connection should be able to run SQL asynchronously.
— Asynchronous Statement: For each statement, the asynchronous mode
is explicitly set.
— Synchronous: Only one statement executes at a time. This is the default
value.

Many newer ODBC drivers do not support asynchronous mode because the
driver is capable of opening a new thread and executing a new query while
simultaneously running an earlier query. The MicroStrategy Readme gives
recommendations for the driver execution mode options that can be used for
different ODBC drivers.

• Use extended fetch: Select this check box to enable Intelligence Server to
fetch blocks of data from the database into memory, instead of row-by-row. Be
aware that this functionality is only applied if the database instance is defined to
use 2.0 ODBC calls, which is included in the steps To create a database
instance, page 176.

The MicroStrategy Readme recommends settings for ODBC drivers and

whether to use the extended fetch feature.

• Use parameterized queries: Select this check box to enable Intelligence

Server to pass data to the database in blocks instead of row-by-row. For
information on how parameterized queries can improve performance in
MicroStrategy, see the Project Design Guide.
• Maximum cancel attempt time (sec): Defines the maximum amount of
time the MicroStrategy Query Engine waits for a successful attempt before it
cancels a query. Values of 0 and -1 indicate no limit.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 180

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Maximum query execution time (sec): Defines the maximum amount of

time a single pass of SQL can execute on the database. Values of 0 and -1 indicate
no limit.
• Maximum connection attempt time (sec): Defines the maximum amount
of time Intelligence Server waits to connect to the database. Values of 0 and -1
indicate no limit.
• Additional connection string parameters: Enables you to pass additional
ODBC connection parameters to the database as part of the connection string.
This is useful if you need to change ODBC defaults. Click Preview to see the
entire connection string.
• Table prefix: Defines a table prefix that specifies the schema containing the
tables to access.
• Character set encoding for Windows drivers: The options listed below
are only relevant when Intelligence Server is running on a Windows machine:
— Non UTF-8 (default): Select this option if the ODBC driver returns
information in a character encoding other than UTF-8.
— UTF-8: Select this option if the ODBC driver returns information in UTF-8
character encoding. Drivers for Teradata databases may require UTF-8
encoding.
• Character set encoding for UNIX drivers: The options listed below are
only relevant when Intelligence Server is running on a UNIX machine:
— Non UTF-8: Select this option if the ODBC driver returns information in a
character encoding other than UTF-8.
— UTF-8 (default): Select this option if the ODBC driver returns information
in UTF-8 character encoding. Drivers for Teradata databases may require
UTF-8 encoding.
• Connection Caching: Specify the caching of the database connection using
the following options:
— Connection lifetime (sec): Defines the amount of time an active
database connection can remain open and cached on Intelligence Server to
be re-used for additional jobs. You must also set the Connection idle timeout,
described below, to a value greater than zero for database connections to be
used by more than a single job. If a job requires a database connection to be
open past its connection lifetime, the job is first allowed to complete, and
then the database connection is dropped upon job completion.
If you type a value of 0, when the job associated with a database connection
is completed, the database connection is deleted and not put into a cache. If
you type a value of -1, the lifetime of a database connection is unlimited,
which means it remains on Intelligence Server memory until the database
connection is manually deleted or Intelligence Server is restarted. This can
cause the memory resources to be reserved by the database connection for a
potentially long time, and therefore it is recommended that you set finite
limits on the connection lifetime.

181 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

When defining the connection lifetime, you should determine whether the
data source for the database connection also enforces connection lifetimes.
Most databases enforce some type of limit on a connection lifetime. You
should define the connection lifetime in MicroStrategy to be less than any
limits on connection lifetimes for the data source. This is to avoid the
scenario that the data source ends the database connection before
MicroStrategy can complete the processing being done for that same
database connection.
— Connection idle timeout (sec): Defines the amount of time an inactive
connection to the database remains cached until it is terminated. You must
also set the Connection lifetime, described above, to a value greater than
zero for database connections to be used by more than a single job.
Enforcement of the connection idle timeout can cause a database
connection to be removed before it reaches its connection lifetime. You can
use this connection idle timeout to ensure that database connections do not
remain in Intelligence Server memory in an idle state for an extended
amount of time.
If you type a value of 0, when the job associated with a database connection
is completed, the database connection is deleted and not put into a cache. If
you type a value of -1, a database connection can remain idle and considered
for new jobs until the database connection lifetime is reached.
4 On the General tab, in the Default database login name pane, select the
default database login and click OK.
If the necessary database login does not exist, you can create one by clicking New.
For steps to create a database connection, see Creating a database login, page 182
below.

Creating a database login

A database login specifies the user ID and password used to access the data source. The
database login overwrites any login information stored in the DSN. A database
connection designates one database login as the default login for MicroStrategy users,
however users and groups can be mapped to other database logins using connection
mapping.

Connection mapping is explained in User connection mapping, page 184.

You create database logins in the Database Connections dialog box by clicking New on
the General tab. Any database login created within the Database Connections dialog box
is available for use across all database connections in the project source.
MicroStrategy reporting and analysis features require a general set of database login
permissions that can connect to and modify the data source and metadata, as described
below:
• For the metadata, the Select, Insert, and Update permissions are required.
Intermediate tables are created in the metadata for recursive search queries, which

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 182

Installation and Configuration Guide

requires Create and Drop permissions as well. Updating the schema requires the
Delete permission.
• For the data warehouse, the Select, Create, Insert, and Drop permissions are
required.
When you choose to create a new database login, the Database logins dialog box opens.

Prerequisites
• A database instance has been created, as described in Creating a database instance,
page 175.
• A database connection has been created, as described in Creating a database
connection, page 178.

To create a database login

1 In the Database Login field, type the name of the database login.
2 Provide the user ID and password required to access the data source, using one of
the following methods:
• Type the user ID in the Login ID field, and type the password for that user ID
in the Password field.
• Select the Use network login ID check box to connect to the data source
using the network user credentials which are also used to run Intelligence
Server. If Intelligence Server is running as a service, this is the user that is
running the mstrsvr.exe process. To determine this user, in MicroStrategy
Service Manager, select MicroStrategy Intelligence Server and click
Options. The user is listed on the Service Startup tab, in the Login field. If the
Service Account Name is defined as System Account, the Windows user
credentials are used to access the data source.
3 Click OK.

Database logins are passed to the data source any time a user executes a report or
browses attribute elements. Therefore, all database logins created in MicroStrategy
Developer must be also be created as valid logins in the data source.

183 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

User connection mapping

User connection mapping is the process of mapping MicroStrategy users to database
connections and database logins. For MicroStrategy users to execute reports, they must
be mapped to a database connection and database login.
MicroStrategy users link to database connections and logins using:
• The default database connection (and, therefore, default database login)
• Specialized maps to a database connection and/or database login (different than the
default connection and login) for either a user or user group
You can map users to connections and logins in the Project Configuration Editor or
Command Manager. For information about how connection maps are used, see the
System Administration Guide.
MicroStrategy reporting and analysis features require a general set of database login
permissions to connect to and modify the data warehouse and metadata, as described
below:
• For the metadata, the Select, Insert, and Update permissions are required.
Intermediate tables are created in the metadata for recursive search queries, which
requires Create and Drop permissions as well. Updating the schema requires the
Delete permission.
• For the data warehouse, the Select, Create, Insert, and Drop permissions are
required.
Prerequisites
• A database instance has been created, as described in Creating a database instance,
page 175.
• A database connection has been created, as described in Creating a database
connection, page 178.
• A database login has been created, as described in Creating a database login, page
182.

To create a connection map

1 In Developer, log in to a project.

2 Right-click the project and select Project Configuration. The Project
Configuration Editor opens.
3 In the Categories list, expand the Database Instances category, and then select
Connection mapping.
4 Right-click in the Database instances - Connection mapping pane, and select
New. A new connection mapping is added.
5 You can define the connection mapping by specifying the information described
below:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 184

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Database Instance: The database instance which connects to the data source
required for the connection mapping.
• User: The user or user group to apply the connection mapping to.
• Language: The language of the data accessed by the connection mapping. You
can use connection mappings to support data internationalization. For
information on supporting data internationalization with connection mappings,
see the Project Design Guide.
• Database connection: The data source to connect to.
• Database Login: The database login for the connection mapping.
6 Click OK.

Creating a project
Now you have configured Intelligence Server and are ready to create a project. There are
various ways to create a project to get your MicroStrategy project started. The different
methods to create a project are described in the Project Design Guide.

The MicroStrategy platform provides a Tutorial project, which is a sample data

warehouse and demonstration project you can use to learn about the various
features that MicroStrategy offers. It is ready to be used and requires no additional
configuration tasks. To use the MicroStrategy Tutorial, refer to the Basic Reporting
Guide for more information. To create a new project using your own data, see the
Project Design Guide.

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

To help guide the rest of your installation and configuration steps, refer to the section
Installing and configuring MicroStrategy on Windows, page 48 in Chapter 1, Planning
Your Installation, for an installation and configuration checklist.

185 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 6
DEPLOYING MICROSTRATEGY
WEB, MOBILE SERVER, AND
OPERATIONS MANAGER
This chapter describes the procedure to deploy a project to your user community using
MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations Manager. The process of deploying
the ASP.NET version of MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Mobile Server, or Operations
Manager on Windows with Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) is explained in
detail.
Steps to deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), or
MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP) in a UNIX/Linux and Windows environment
with various Web and application servers are also explained in detail. MicroStrategy Web
(JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), and Operations Manager (JSP) are platform-independent
and can be deployed using different combinations of operating systems, Web servers, and
application servers.

Web application servers are not MicroStrategy products, so detailed steps cannot
be provided for every combination of application server and operating system. This
chapter supplies instructions for a few of the most common combinations. The
procedures for different operating systems are similar, but you should refer to the
vendor-provided information and documentation for details specific to your
configuration, or contact MicroStrategy Technical Support.

MicroStrategy Web simplifies the job of deploying to large user groups because end users’
machines only need a supported browser. MicroStrategy Web can be accessed from any
supported browser because no code must be downloaded. Working as a thin client,
MicroStrategy Web provides the functionality that end users and power users require to
take full advantage of the MicroStrategy product suite.
This chapter has the following sections:
• Deploying with IIS (Windows), page 187

Deploying with IIS is the only setup given for the ASP.NET versions of
MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, and Operations Manager. The other
deployment procedures use the JSP, platform-independent versions, which
can be deployed with different Web and application servers.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 186

Installation and Configuration Guide

• General steps to deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 190

• Deploying with WebLogic and Apache (Solaris), page 194
• Deploying with WebSphere and IBM HTTP Server (AIX), page 208
• Deploying with Oracle Glassfish Server (Solaris), page 218
• Deploying with Tomcat (Windows), page 226
• Deploying with Tomcat (Linux), page 232
• Deploying with SAP NetWeaver (Windows), page 237
• Deploying with Oracle 10g (Windows), page 241
• Deploying with JBoss (Windows), page 244
• Administering your MicroStrategy Web deployment, page 249
• Using absolute paths to share configuration files
• Configuring third-party data sources for importing data
• Configuring your MicroStrategy installation, page 253

Deploying with IIS (Windows)

Microsoft IIS can be used to deploy MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Mobile Server, or
MicroStrategy Operations Manager:

Deploying MicroStrategy Web

The ASP.NET version of MicroStrategy Web can be deployed with IIS only on Windows.

Prerequisites
• For information on supporting IIS 7.x, see and Supporting IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x as a
web server for MicroStrategy Web or Mobile Server, page 34.
• You must have administrative privileges to deploy MicroStrategy Web for your
project. If this is the first time you are logging in and you have not changed the
default MicroStrategy administrative login, you can use Administrator as the login
with no password. After the first time, the user name and password should be
changed for security purposes.
• The Microsoft Windows’ Users group must have read and execute permissions to all
of the files within the MicroStrategy common files folder. This ensures that Internet
Information Services has the required permissions to host MicroStrategy Web. By
default, this folder is stored in the following directory location:
▫ 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy

187 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

▫ 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 

(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy

To connect MicroStrategy Web to your Intelligence Server

1 On the Windows Start menu, point to Programs, then to MicroStrategy Tools,

and then choose Web Administrator. The MicroStrategy Web Administrator page
opens. This is the page where you connect MicroStrategy Web to the Intelligence
Server.
2 Type the name of your Intelligence Server in the Add a server manually box on
the MicroStrategy Web Administrator page.
3 Click Connect. All projects loaded on the Intelligence Server are now available from
MicroStrategy Web. Click the Home icon to see the list of projects loaded on the
Intelligence Server you specified.
4 Send your users the URL:
http://webservername/MicroStrategy/asp/
where webservername is the name of the computer hosting your Web server. For
example, if the name of your Web server machine is Web_Srv1, then the URL your
users would use to access MicroStrategy Web would be
http://Web_Srv1/MicroStrategy/asp
You have manually connected MicroStrategy Web to the Intelligence Server.
You can also connect automatically whenever MicroStrategy Web Server or Intelligence
Server starts.

To make MicroStrategy Web connect to the Intelligence Server

automatically

1 On the MicroStrategy Web Administrator page, click Modify in the Properties

column of the Intelligence Server.
2 Select the Automatically connect to Intelligence Server when Web Server
or Intelligence Server is restarted option and click Save.

Deploying Mobile Server

The ASP.NET version of MicroStrategy Mobile Server can only be deployed with IIS only
on Windows.

Prerequisites
• For information on supporting IIS 7.x, see Supporting IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x as a web
server for MicroStrategy Web or Mobile Server, page 34.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 188

Installation and Configuration Guide

• You must have administrative privileges to deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server for
your project. If this is the first time you are logging in and you have not changed the
default MicroStrategy administrative login, you can use Administrator as the login
with no password. After the first time, the user name and password should be
changed for security purposes.
• The Users group for Microsoft Windows must have read and execute permissions to
all of the files within the MicroStrategy common files folder. This ensures that IIS
has the required permissions to host MicroStrategy Mobile Server. By default, this
folder is stored in the following directory location:
▫ 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy
▫ 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy

To connect MicroStrategy Mobile Server to your Intelligence Server

1 On the Windows Start menu, point to Programs, then to MicroStrategy Tools,

and then select Mobile Administrator. The MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Administrator page opens. This is the page where you connect MicroStrategy Mobile
Server to the Intelligence Server.
2 Type the name of your Intelligence Server in the Add a server manually box on
the MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator page.
3 Click Connect.
4 Click Mobile Configuration to configure your MicroStrategy Mobile applications
to communicate with Mobile Server and Intelligence Server. For steps on how to
define this configuration, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration
Guide.
You have manually connected MicroStrategy Mobile Server to the Intelligence Server.
You can also connect automatically whenever MicroStrategy Mobile Server or
Intelligence Server starts.

To make MicroStrategy Mobile Server connect to the Intelligence

Server automatically

1 On the MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator page, click Modify in the

Properties column of the Intelligence Server.
2 Select the Automatically connect to Intelligence Server when Mobile
Server or Intelligence Server is restarted option.
3 Click Save.

189 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Deploying Operations Manager

The ASP.NET version of MicroStrategy Operations Manager can only be deployed with
IIS only on Windows.

Prerequisites
• For information on supporting and IIS 7.x, see Supporting IIS 7.0.x or IIS 7.5.x as a
web server for MicroStrategy Web or Mobile Server, page 34.
• You must have administrative privileges to deploy MicroStrategy Operations
Manager. If this is the first time you are logging in and you have not changed the
default MicroStrategy administrative login, you can use Administrator as the login
with no password. After the first time, the user name and password should be
changed for security purposes.
• The Users group for Microsoft Windows must have read and execute permissions to
all of the files within the MicroStrategy common files folder. This ensures that IIS
has the required permissions to host MicroStrategy Operations Manager. By default,
this folder is stored in the following directory location:
▫ 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy
▫ 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy

To connect MicroStrategy Operations Manager to your Intelligence

Server

1 On the Windows Start menu, point to Programs, then to MicroStrategy Tools,

and then select Operations Manager. Operations Manager opens.
2 Click Configuration ( ) and then click Create Environment to connect to the
MicroStrategy environment that is to be monitored and managed using Operations
Manager. This includes connecting to an Intelligence Server, along with any
MicroStrategy Web Servers or Mobile Servers that are associated with the
Intelligence Server. For steps to create an environment, see the Operations
Manager Guide.

General steps to deploy MicroStrategy JSP

applications
After you have installed MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP) you can deploy and configure it for your specific environment. The
configuration and deployment steps are provided in the Web server and application
server sections in this chapter. The table below lists the general steps for all
environments.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 190

Installation and Configuration Guide

Application High-Level Deployment Steps

MicroStrategy 1 Log on to the application server by using the proper user name and password.
Web (JSP) 2 Locate the MicroStrategy.war file in the MicroStrategy Web (JSP) Deployment Directory
you specified during installation.
3 To increase the performance of the application before proceeding with the deployment, see the
Performance-based setup information section, if available, for your environment and configure as
necessary. Also, after deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP) on your machine, there may be a few
performance-based setup steps that you should complete.
4 Choose the desired deployment method and follow the deployment procedure.
5 Log on to the MicroStrategy Web Administrator Page.
6 Launch MicroStrategy Web.
7 Start working with the application.

You must perform extra configuration steps to allow graphs to support non-Western
European fonts on MicroStrategy Web (JSP) for a UNIX system. For more
information, see Graph and document support of non-Western European fonts,
page 422 of Appendix , Troubleshooting.

MicroStrategy 1 Log on to the application server by using the proper user name and password.
Mobile 2 Locate the MicroStrategyMobile.war file in the MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP)
Server (JSP) Deployment Directory you specified during installation.
3 To increase the performance of the application before proceeding with the deployment, see the
Performance-based setup information section, if available, for your environment and configure as
necessary. Also, after deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP) on your machine, there may be
a few performance-based setup steps that you should complete.
4 Choose the desired deployment method and follow the deployment procedure.
5 Log on to the MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator Page.
6 From the MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator Page, configure your MicroStrategy Mobile
applications to communicate with Mobile Server and Intelligence Server. For steps on how to
define this configuration, as well as steps to deploy and configure a certificate server for Mobile
Server, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide.
7 Start working with the application.

MicroStrategy 1 Log on to the application server by using the proper user name and password.
Operations 2 Locate the MicroStrategyOM.war file in the MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP)
Manager deployment directory you specified during installation.
(JSP)
3 Choose the desired deployment method and follow the deployment procedure.
4 Log on to the MicroStrategy Operations Manager console to connect to the MicroStrategy
environment that is to be monitored and managed using Operations Manager. For steps to create
an environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.

Locating the WAR file

The MicroStrategy JSP applications are packaged within single files for each application,
called a WAR (Web ARchive) file, following J2EE specifications. You must deploy the
WAR file to run the JSP applications in your application server environment.
The WAR files are placed in the folder you specified when installing MicroStrategy JSP
applications. The default locations are as follows:

191 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Component and WAR File Name Default WAR File Location

MicroStrategy Web (JSP) • 32-bit Windows environments:

C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\WebJSP
MicroStrategy.war
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\WebJSP
• UNIX and Linux environments: INSTALL_PATH/WebUniversal
Where INSTALL_PATH is the directory you specified as the MicroStrategy
install directory during installation.

MicroStrategy Mobile Server • 32-bit Windows environments:

(JSP) C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP

MicroStrategyMobile.wa • 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 

r (x86)\MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP

• UNIX and Linux environments: INSTALL_PATH/Mobile

Where INSTALL_PATH is the directory you specified as the MicroStrategy
install directory during installation.

MicroStrategy Operations • 32-bit Windows environments:

Manager (JSP) C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Operations Manage
r_JSP
MicroStrategyOM.war
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Operations Manager JSP
• UNIX and Linux environments: INSTALL_PATH/
Where INSTALL_PATH is the directory you specified as the MicroStrategy
install directory during installation.

To deploy the application, you must follow a set of steps that are specific to the
application server you are using. For more details, see the application server vendor
documentation or follow the instructions within this guide.
After deploying a WAR file, you can view the WEB-INF folder, which contains a
subfolder named log. The log folder retains all the log files. For more information on
the directory structure after deploying the WAR file, see Directory structure after
deploying the WAR file, page 192.

Directory structure after deploying the WAR file

The following tables show the default directory structure after deploying MicroStrategy
WAR files in your application server.

MicroStrategy Web

Directory Contents

\assets Supporting files

\html Supporting files

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 192

Installation and Configuration Guide

Directory Contents

\images All image files

\import Sample files for Data Import analysis

\javascript Interface JavaScript files

\jsp Interface JSP code files

\META-INF Configuration files

\plugins Plug-in files for customizations

\resBundles Flash descriptor files

\style Interface style files

\swf Supporting files for widgets

\VisFramework Supporting files for visualizations

\WEB-INF Configuration information for MicroStrategy Web

MicroStrategy Mobile Server

Directory Contents

\assets Supporting files

\css Supporting css files

\html Supporting files

\images All image files

\import Sample files for Data Import analysis

\javascript Interface JavaScript files

\jsp Interface JSP code files

\META-INF Configuration files

\plugins Plug-in files for customizations

\style Interface style files

\swf Supporting files for widgets

\ui Interface files

\VisFramework Supporting files for visualizations

\WEB-INF Configuration information for MicroStrategy Mobile Server

193 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Operations Manager

Directory Contents

\assets Supporting files

\css Supporting css files

\html Supporting files

\images All image files

\import Sample files for Data Import analysis

\javascript Interface JavaScript files

\jsp Interface JSP code files

\META-INF Configuration files

\plugins Plug-in files for customizations

\resBundles Flash descriptor files

\style Interface style files

\swf Supporting files for widgets

\ui Interface files

\VisFramework Supporting files for visualizations

\WEB-INF Configuration information for MicroStrategy Operations

Manager

Deploying with WebLogic and Apache (Solaris)

This section provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications on the Oracle Solaris operating system, using Apache as the Web server and
Oracle WebLogic Server as the application server. It provides information for WebLogic
10.3. You can also the steps provided below to deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP),
MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), and MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP).
This section includes the following information:
• WebLogic paths and folder locations, page 195: Default folder structure for each
version of WebLogic.
• Preconfiguration information, page 195: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 196:
Instructions for deploying the application.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 194

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Re-deploy the application, page 204: Instructions for re-deploying the application.
• Performance-based setup information, page 204: Optional configuration settings to
increase the application’s performance.

The additional configuration steps are not required for MicroStrategy Web
(JSP) to run, but these settings can increase its performance. Review the
performance-based setup information prior to deploying the system to see if
these changes are of interest to you.

WebLogic paths and folder locations

This section presents the default folder structure for each version of WebLogic, and
provides the variable used throughout the rest of this chapter to represent the WebLogic
mydomain folder path.
Each version of WebLogic is installed with a different default path to the WebLogic
mydomain folder. When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), you must make some
changes within the WebLogic folders. Thus, it is important to understand the WebLogic
folder structure for the version of WebLogic you are using. The following path reflects
the default folder structure for WebLogic 10.3: WEBLOGIC_HOME/user_
projects/domains/mydomain/

Note the following:

• WEBLOGIC_HOME is the WebLogic Server home path.
• The folder structures are configurable and your organization may have
changed the default names or path.

Throughout this chapter, the WebLogic mydomain folder is referred to as WEBLOGIC_

MYDOMAIN_FOLDER. This variable refers to the WebLogic mydomain folder in whatever
location it resides on your system. The location of this variable is based on the version of
WebLogic and whether your organization has changed the version’s default name or
path.

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy your
MicroStrategy JSP applications on your machine. This includes the following sections:
• Locating the WAR file, page 191
• Setting up Apache Web server to proxy requests to WebLogic, page 196
This section supports the configuration outlined in the following table. While your setup
may vary slightly, for example, you may have different versions of these applications, the
overall process remains the same.

195 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Requirement Recommended

Operating system Oracle Solaris 10.x or 11.x (on SPARC)

Web server Apache 2.x
Application server WebLogic 10.3
JDK Oracle JDK 1.6.0 or 1.7.0

You can download the JDK here.

Note the following:

• For information on the version numbers supported or certified by
MicroStrategy, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
• For information on installing these products, see
http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/weblogic/
integration/index.html
• Before you start the deployment process, locate the machine name and
IP address.

Setting up Apache Web server to proxy requests to WebLogic

You can have the Apache Web server and WebLogic Server running independently on
the same machine, but to configure Apache to proxy the desired requests to the
WebLogic Server, you must install a plug-in provided by WebLogic. Complete the
instructions at the following URLs to install and configure the plug-in.
For WebLogic 10.3, the URL is:
http://e-docs.bea.com/wls/docs100/plugins/apache.html
Install the plug-in with the WebLogic installation in the following location:
WEBLOGIC_HOME/wlserver_
10.3/server/plugin/solaris/sparc/
where WEBLOGIC_HOME is the path to the WebLogic Server.

To increase the performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP), you can complete

additional setup configurations before the deployment. For more information, see
Performance-based setup information, page 204.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
When your machine has been configured with the necessary settings, you can deploy the
JSP version of MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager with Apache

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 196

Installation and Configuration Guide

and WebLogic. This involves the following steps:

1 Deploying automatically (development mode), page 197.
- or -
Deploying manually (production mode), page 200.
2 Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 214.
3 Launching the project, page 204.

The Performance-based setup information, page 204 section provides

information on additional settings to increase application performance. These
additional settings are not required but can increase the performance of
MicroStrategy Web (JSP). Review this information prior to deployment to see if
these options are of interest to you.

You can deploy MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager using one of
the following deployment methods:
• The automatic deployment feature is the easiest and fastest way. See Deploying
automatically (development mode), page 197. Choose the development mode in the
/WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/bin/startWebLogic.sh file, within the
WebLogic Server folder structure.
• The manual deployment feature can be used for environments where the server is
running in production mode and the automatic deployment is turned OFF. For more
information, see Deploying manually (production mode), page 200.

Deploying automatically (development mode)

When automatic deployment is set to ON, as soon as you place a WAR file in the
/WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/autodeploy folder, the application is automatically
deployed.
With this method you can deploy from:
• A duplicate WAR file. When you deploy from a duplicate WAR file, you are required
to manually configure the web.xml file within the WAR file to allow access to
certain folders. Once this configuration is complete and the WAR file is recompiled,
the JSP application can be deployed using the single WAR file.
• An exploded directory where all the files contained in the WAR file were extracted.
When you deploy from an exploded directory, all of the files and folders within the
WAR file are exposed to WebLogic. This allows WebLogic access to the required
folders so that it can make any necessary configuration changes to files in the
exploded directory.

197 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To automatically deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications from a

duplicate WAR file

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Rename the WAR file to a name you can easily identify and remember. This name is
the context_name used in the uniform resource locator (URL) to access the file.
This step is optional.

If you do not change the name of the file, remember to replace context_
name with MicroStrategy when accessing the application from the URL.

To modify the web.xml file for multiple MicroStrategy deployments

3 If you are deploying more than one MicroStrategy environments on the same
WebLogic application server, prior to deployment, you must modify the web.xml
file as described below:
a Unzip the WAR file by using the following command:
jar -xvf FileName.war
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.
b Open the web.xml file located in the /WEB-INF directory.
c Modify the contextPath parameter. By default, this parameter does not have a
value. Type a unique string for the value of the contextPath parameter. For
example, type WebDep2.
d Save the web.xml file.
e Zip the WAR file by using the following command:
jar -cvf FileName.war *
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP
application

To deploy the WAR file

4 Transfer the WAR file to the following directory:
/WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/autodeploy
The application is automatically deployed. To add and connect to an Intelligence Server,
see Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 202.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 198

Installation and Configuration Guide

To increase the performance of MicroStrategy Web JSP, you can configure

additional settings after deployment. For more information, see Performance-
based setup information, page 204.

To automatically deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications from an

exploded directory

The WAR file must be uncompressed by the same Solaris user who started the
application.

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Create the following new folder:
/home/username/context_folder
where username is your account name used to access the Web server machine, and
context_folder is the name of the new folder.

You can create the new folder anywhere except in the following location:

/WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/autodeploy
3 Copy the WAR file to the new folder.
4 To explode the WAR file inside the folder you created, run the following command:
# jar -xvf FileName.war
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy
JSP application.
5 Delete the WAR file by using the following command:
# rm FileName.war
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.
6 Move the folder to the autodeploy folder with the following commands:
# cd..
# mv context_folder /WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_
FOLDER/autodeploy
The application is automatically deployed. To add and connect to an Intelligence Server,
see Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 202.

To increase the performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP), you can configure

additional settings after deployment. For more information, see Performance-
based setup information, page 204.

199 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Deploying manually (production mode)

With manual deployment you can deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications from:
• A duplicate WAR file. When you deploy from a duplicate WAR file, you are required
to manually configure the web.xml file within the WAR file to allow access to
certain folders. Once this configuration is complete and the WAR file is recompiled,
the JSP application can be deployed using the single WAR file.
• An exploded directory where all the files contained in the WAR file were extracted.
When you deploy from an exploded directory, all of the files and folders within the
WAR file are exposed to WebLogic. This allows WebLogic to access the required
folders to perform any necessary configurations to files in the exploded directory.
Perform the deployment in the /WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/autodeploy
directory.

To manually deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications from a duplicate

WAR file

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.

To modify the web.xml file for multiple MicroStrategy deployments

2 If you are deploying more than one MicroStrategy environment on the same
WebLogic application server, prior to deployment, you must modify the web.xml
file as described below:
a Unzip the WAR file by using the following command:
#jar -xvf FileName.war
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy
JSP application.
b Open the web.xml file located in the /WEB-INF directory.
c Modify the contextPath parameter. By default, this parameter does not have a
value. Type a unique string for the value of the contextPath parameter. For
example, type WebDep2.
d Save the web.xml file.
e Zip the WAR file by using the following command:
#jar -cvf FileName.war *
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 200

Installation and Configuration Guide

To deploy the WAR file

3 Transfer the WAR file to the /WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/autodeploy
directory.
4 Open the WebLogic Server Administration Console (WLS Admin Console) by typing
the following address:
http://IP address:port/console/
where IP address is the IP address of the machine on which you installed the
WebLogic application server and port is the port number for the WebLogic
application server.
5 Type a valid user ID and password at the prompt. The user ID and password are the
ones you specified when installing the WebLogic Server on your machine.
6 To complete this operation, see Configuring from the WebLogic Server
Administration Console , page 201.

To manually deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications from the exploded

directory

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Create a folder in the /WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_FOLDER/autodeploy directory
and transfer the WAR file to this directory.
3 Unzip the WAR file using the following command:
#jar -xvf FileName.war
Where FileName is the name of the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.
4 Open the WebLogic Server Administration Console by accessing the following
address:
http://IP address:Port/console/
where IP address is the IP address of the machine on which you
installed the WebLogic application server and Port is the port number for
the WebLogic application server.
5 Type a valid user ID and password at the prompt. The user ID and password are the
ones you specified when installing the WebLogic Server on your machine.
6 To complete this operation, see Configuring from the WebLogic Server
Administration Console , page 201 below.

Configuring from the WebLogic Server Administration Console

To configure from the WebLogic Server Administration Console, refer to your WebLogic
Server Administration Console documentation on steps to install a web application.

201 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Once you have installed the JSP version of MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or
Operations Manager as a WebLogic Server Administration Console web application, you
have completed the steps required to deploy the application.
To launch the administrative page for MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or
Operations Manager (JSP), see Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP
applications, page 202.

To increase the performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP), you can configure

additional settings after deployment. For more information, see Performance-
based setup information, page 204.

Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

Before you start MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager
(JSP), you must configure their administrator pages.

To configure access to the MicroStrategy JSP applications

1 The following table lists the URL to access MicroStrategy Web Administrator,
MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator, and Operations Manager for each
deployment method.
The servlet names are case-sensitive. Make sure to use the correct case when typing
the mstrWebAdmin name.
If the application server is enabled with security, a dialog box related to the
administrator authentication opens.

Deployment Address
Method

Automatic Access the Administrator page from a web browser using this URL:
deployment
• For Web (JSP): http://IPaddress:7001/context_folder_
Web/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, context_folder_Web is the name of the folder where the Web
(JSP) application was exploded and IPaddress is the IP address of your machine.

• For Mobile Server (JSP): http://IPaddress:7001/context_folder_

Mobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, context_folder_Mobile is the name of the folder where the
Mobile Server application was exploded and IPaddress is the IP address of your machine.

• For Operations Manager (JSP): http://IPaddress:7001/context_folder_

OM/servlet/mstrOM
In the URL listed above, context_folder_OM is the name of the folder where the Operations
Manager application was exploded and IPaddress is the IP address of your machine.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 202

Installation and Configuration Guide

Deployment Address
Method

Manual Access the Administrator page from a browser using this address:
deployment
• For Web (JSP): http://IPaddress:7001/Web_
name/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, IPaddress is the IP address of your machine. Replace the Web_name
variable with the name you specified in the deployed name field when configuring Web (JSP) from
WebLogic Server Administration Console, for example, MyWebApp.

• For Mobile Server (JSP): http://IPaddress:7001/Mobile_

name/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, IPaddress is the IP address of your machine. Replace the Mobile_
name variable with the name you specified in the deployed name field when configuring Mobile
Server from WebLogic Server Administration Console, for example, MyMobileApp.

• For Operations Manager (JSP): http://IPaddress:7001/OM_

name/servlet/mstrOM
In the URL listed above, IPaddress is the IP address of your machine. Replace the OM_name
variable with the name you specified in the deployed name field when configuring Operations
Manager from WebLogic Server Administration Console, for example,
OperationsManagerApp.

2 Type the same user ID and password that was used to start the WebLogic Server on
your machine.
In WebLogic, the deployment of a MicroStrategy JSP application automatically
associates the WebLogic administrative user with the MicroStrategy JSP application
administrator. The WebLogic administrative user is the user who has permissions to
start the WebLogic Server on a given machine.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 For MicroStrategy Web (JSP) deployments, launch the MicroStrategy Web (JSP)
project, as described in Launching the project, page 204.

203 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Launching the project

The address to launch MicroStrategy Web (JSP) is different for each deployment
method. The table below lists the URL you can use to access MicroStrategy Web (JSP).

Deployment Address
Method

Automatic Access MicroStrategy Web (JSP) from a web browser using this URL:
deployment
http://IPaddress:7001/context_folder/servlet/mstrWeb

where context_folder is the name of the folder where the application was
exploded and IPaddress is the IP address of your machine.

Manual Access MicroStrategy Web (JSP) from a browser using the address:
deployment
http://IPaddress/name/servlet/mstrWeb

where IPaddress is the IP address of your machine. Replace the name variable with
the name you specified in the deployed name field when configuring from WebLogic
Server Administration Console, for example, MyWebApp.

Re-deploy the application

If you have already deployed MicroStrategy Web (JSP) with WebLogic and you change
any parameters in the web.xml file, you must re-deploy the application using the
WebLogic Server Administration Console. This allows the changes to take effect in the
deployed application. To re-deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP), refer to your WebLogic
Server Administration Console documentation on steps to re-deploy (update) a web
application.

Performance-based setup information

The performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP) can be increased by configuring it on
various component levels. These additional setup settings are not required, but if you
want to increase the performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP), some changes must be
done before or after the deployment procedure. This section provides the following
configurations:
• Setting the Java heap size, page 204
• Precompiling JSP files, page 205
• Disable/relax auto-reload parameters, page 206
• Configuring Apache Web server to serve static files, page 207

Setting the Java heap size

The Java heap size for the WebLogic Server can be increased by modifying the MEM_
ARGS variable in the startWebLogic.sh script.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 204

Installation and Configuration Guide

To increase the Java heap size

1 Open the startWebLogic.sh script from /WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_

FOLDER/bin/startWebLogic.sh.
2 Define the following line in the script:
MEM_ARGS=”-Xms512m -Xmx1024m”
This line reflects an initial Java heap size of 512 MB. MicroStrategy recommends the
initial java heap size be set at a minimum of 512MB, assuming the machine has
enough memory space. This value may need to be modified to reflect the
requirements of your specific environment. Refer to your third-party application
server documentation for information on how to determine a satisfactory Java heap
size for your environment.
3 Stop and start the application server.

Precompiling JSP files

To avoid the time taken to load the Web pages in the application server when you access
it for the first time, you must precompile the Java Server Pages (JSP) files before
deploying the application. Do this by setting the application server to load all the pages in
the application before deployment. Thus, when you connect for the first time, the pages
are already loaded and the performance is better.

To precompile the JSP files

1 Open the weblogic.xml file located in the /WEB-INF directory.

2 In the jsp-descriptor section, set the keepgenerated and the precompile
parameters to TRUE, as follows:
<jsp-descriptor>
:
:
<jsp-param>
<param-name>keepgenerated</param-name>
<param-value>TRUE</param-value>
</jsp-param>
<jsp-param>
<param-name>precompile</param-name>
<param-value>TRUE</param-value>
</jsp-param>
:
:
</jsp-descriptor>
3 Save the file.

205 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Disable/relax auto-reload parameters

To disable/relax auto-reload parameters, complete the following:
• Set the pageCheckSeconds parameter, page 206
• Set the WebLogic Reload Period parameter, page 207
Each parameter is explained below.

Set the pageCheckSeconds parameter

The pageCheckSeconds parameter sets the interval, in seconds, at which the
WebLogic Server checks to see if JSP files have changed and need recompiling.
Dependencies are also checked and recursively reloaded if changed.
You can set the following values:

Value Description

0 Pages are checked on every request.

-1 The page is not checked until the server is restarted. Any classes used by the JSP page
that live in the servlet classpath are also reloaded.
n Interval (in seconds) in which WebLogic Server checks if JSP files have changed. For
example, if this is set to 1, WebLogic checks the pages every second to see if the JSP
has changed and needs recompiling.

To set the pageCheckSeconds parameter

1 Open the weblogic.xml file located in the /WEB-INF directory.

2 In the jsp-descriptor section, set the pageCheckSeconds parameter value.
For example, the following code sets the value to -1:
<jsp-descriptor>
:
:
<jsp-param>
<param-name>pageCheckSeconds
</param-name>
<param-value>-1</param-value>
</jsp-param>
:
:
</jsp-descriptor>
3 Save the file.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 206

Installation and Configuration Guide

Set the WebLogic Reload Period parameter

In WebLogic, the Reload Period parameter sets how often WebLogic checks whether a
servlet has been modified. If the servlet has been modified, WebLogic reloads it. As the
MicroStrategy Web (JSP) servlets do not change after they have been deployed,
MicroStrategy recommends that you disable the reload period by setting it to -1. A value
of -1 means never reload, and a value of 0 means always reload.
Use the appropriate procedure below, depending on whether you have MicroStrategy
Web (JSP) deployed as a duplicate WAR file.

To set the WebLogic Reload Period

1 Open the weblogic.xml file located in the /WEB-INF directory.

2 In the container-descriptor section, set the servlet-reload-check-
secs parameter value. For example, the following code sets the value to -1:
<container-descriptor>
<servlet-reload-check-secs>-1</servlet-reload-check-
secs>
</container-descriptor>
3 Save the file.

Configuring Apache Web server to serve static files

Because Web servers are tuned to effectively serve static files, the perceived performance
of MicroStrategy Web (JSP) is significantly enhanced if image, style sheet, and JavaScript
files are served via the Apache Web server, and the WebLogic Server handles only the
servlet requests. Do this by editing two main parameters, Alias and
MatchExpression, in the Apache configuration file httpd.conf.
• The Alias parameter is used to create a virtual directory in the Apache Web server.
The virtual directory is needed to serve static files such as images, style sheets, and
JavaScript.
• The MatchExpression parameter is used to configure the Apache plug-in so that
the WebLogic Server handles only the servlet requests.

To configure the Apache Web server to serve static files

1 To change the Alias parameter, add the following lines in the httpd.conf file:
Alias /MicroStrategy/images/"/WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_
FOLDER/autodeploy/MicroStrategy/images/"
<Directory "/WEBLOGIC_MYDOMAIN_
FOLDER/autodeploy/MicroStrategy/images">
Options Indexes MultiViews
AllowOverride None

207 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Order allow, deny

Allow from all
</Directory>

These code excerpts assume the application name is MicroStrategy. See

Deploying with WebLogic and Apache (Solaris), page 194 for information on
default folder structure.

2 Repeat the previous step for the JavaScript and style sheet folders, replacing the
word images in the previous code with the folder name where the JavaScript and
style sheet files are located.
3 Change the MatchExpression parameter by typing */servlet/* in the
MatchExpression parameter. For example,
<IfModule mod_weblogic.c>
WebLogicHost 10.15.133.56
WebLogicPort 7001
MatchExpression */servlet/*
</IfModule>
4 Stop and start the Apache Web server using the commands apachectl start and
apachectl stop.
The Web server now serves image (GIF), style sheet (CSS), JavaScript, and all other static
files, thus reducing the load on the application server and increasing the application’s
performance.

Deploying with WebSphere and IBM HTTP

Server (AIX)
This section provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications on an AIX machine using the WebSphere Server and the IBM HTTP Web
Server. You can use the steps provided below to deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP),
MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), and MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP).
This section includes the following information:
• Preconfiguration information, page 209: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 209:
Instructions for deploying the application.
• Performance-based setup information, page 216: Optional settings to increase the
application’s performance.

These additional settings are not required, but can increase the performance
of MicroStrategy Web (JSP). Review this information prior to deployment to
see if any of these options are of interest to you.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 208

Installation and Configuration Guide

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy
MicroStrategy JSP applications on your machine. Preconfiguration includes the
following step:
• Locating the WAR file, page 191: This file is used as part of the steps for Preparing
for the application installation, page 211.
This section also provides additional setup information for the machine where the
application server and Web server are already installed.
This section supports the following configuration. While your configuration may vary
slightly, for example, you may have different versions of these applications, the overall
process remains the same.

Requirement Recommended

Operating system AIX 6.1.x or 7.1.x (on IBM POWER Architecture)

Web server IBM HTTP Server 7.x or 8.x
Application server IBM WebSphere application server 7.x, 8.0.x, or 8.5.x
JDK IBM JDK 1.6.0
You can download these JDKs from the following location:
http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/java/jdk/aix/service.html

For information on the version numbers certified and supported by MicroStrategy,

see the MicroStrategy Readme.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
Once your machine has the necessary settings configured, you can deploy MicroStrategy
Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager (JSP) on the WebSphere
machine. Deployment involves the following steps:
1 Launching the WebSphere Administrative Console, page 210
2 Starting the WebSphere default application server, page 210
3 Installing the Enterprise Application, page 211
4 Regenerating plugin-cfg.xml, page 213
5 Restarting the application server, page 213
6 Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 214
7 Launching the project, page 215

209 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

The Performance-based setup information, page 216 section provides information

on additional settings to increase application performance. These additional
settings are not required, but can increase the performance of MicroStrategy Web
(JSP). Review this information prior to deployment to see if any of these options
are of interest to you.

Launching the WebSphere Administrative Console

The WebSphere Administrative Console can be accessed only if the WebSphere server is
started on the machine.

To start the Websphere Application Server

1 Execute the startServer script as follows:

cd WAS_HOME/bin
# ./startServer.sh SERVER_NAME

Typically, server1 is the default server name in WebSphere.

2 Ensure that the Administrative Server has started successfully. Execute the following
commands:
cd WAS_HOME/bin
# ./serverStatus.sh -all

To launch the WebSphere Administrative Console

1 In a browser, type the URL for the administrative console. The URL is of the
following form:
http://IP Address:Port/ibm/console
where IP Address is the IP address of the computer on which you installed the
WebSphere application server and Port is the port number for the WebSphere
Administrative Console. Refer to your third-party WebSphere documentation to
confirm the default port number for the administrative console.

Starting the WebSphere default application server

After you launch the WebSphere Administrative Console, you can deploy MicroStrategy
Web (JSP) by starting the default application server.

This is applicable for WebSphere Network Deployment Edition or WebSphere

Enterprise Edition. For WebSphere Express or WebSphere Base Editions, there is
no distinction between an administrative server and a default server. The
StartServer.sh command starts the default application server automatically.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 210

Installation and Configuration Guide

To start the default application server

When the WebSphere Administrative Console opens, a tree view is displayed.

1 Expand the Servers node, or click the link to expand the view.
2 Click the Applications Servers link. A table listing the application servers displays
to the right of the navigation tree. This area is the Workspace.
3 Select the box next to the application server to start.
4 Click Start above the table.

Installing the Enterprise Application

To install the Enterprise Application

1 Expand Applications, and then Enterprise Applications to display a list of

installed applications.
2 Click Install.

Preparing for the application installation

The following steps describe the settings that must be specified for the installation.

Prerequisites
• Copy the WAR file (see Locating the WAR file, page 191) for the MicroStrategy JSP
placation to the WAS_HOME/installableApps directory, where WAS_HOME is the
WebSphere application server home path.

To specify settings for the installation

1 To begin the installation for IBM WebSphere, expand Applications, then expand
Application Types, and then select WebSphere enterprise applications. A
list of enterprise applications is displayed.
2 Click Install. Options to specify the path to the new application are displayed.
3 You must specify the path to the WAR file by selecting either the local file system or
remote file system option. For local file systems, you can click browse to navigate to
the location of the WAR file. For remote file systems, type in the full path for the
location of the WAR file.
4 Click Next to continue the installation.

211 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

5 Select to perform either a Fast Path or Detailed installation. Either type of

installation can support the deployment of MicroStrategy JSP applications.
6 Select the Generate Default Binding check box, and ensure that the Override
existing bindings check box is cleared.
7 Click Next. The Select installation options page opens. In the screens that follow,
you are selecting settings that are used during the installation.
8 Perform the following configuration steps:
• Select the Precompile Java Server Pages files check box.
• Specify the value for the Directory to Install Application as ${APP_
INSTALL_ROOT}/DefaultNode
• Specify an Application Name of your choice.
• Ensure that the Override class reloading settings for Web and EJB
modules check box is cleared.
9 Click Next. The Map modules to application servers page opens.
10 Select the Web Tier check box and click Next. The Map context roots for web
modules page opens.
11 Type a suitable name for ContextRoot, which is case-sensitive. Do not include
.war in the name for ContextRoot as this can cause errors when attempting to
start the application.

The URLs to access MicroStrategy JSP applications contain ContextRoot,

which should be replaced by the name of your choice. For example,
MicroStrategy Web JSP uses the URL http://machine-
name/ContextRoot/servlet/mstrWeb and you can use the default name
of the WAR file, which is MicroStrategy.

12 Click Next. The Summary Page opens.

13 Review the summary and click Finish. A message appears stating that the
installation and precompilation of JSPs was successful. Save the changes to the
master repository.
14 As part of deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP) or MicroStrategy Mobile (JSP), you
can control access to the MicroStrategy Web Administrator page, MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page, and Operations Manager respectively.
To grant access to these resources, map the admin role to the users or groups that
will be given the administrator privileges for your MicroStrategy JSP application. To
access these options in WebSphere, expand the Security options, and then click
Global Security.

Security must be enabled for the WebSphere Server for this feature to work.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 212

Installation and Configuration Guide

Regenerating plugin-cfg.xml

To regenerate plugin-cfg.xml

1 Expand Environment, and then click Update global WebServer Plug-in

configuration.
2 Click OK, and then click Save to master configuration.

Restarting the application server

This section explains how to stop and start the application server. Performing these steps
stops and starts all the applications running on the application server. To stop and start
only the application in which you are working, see To start the Web module, page 214.

To restart the application server

The option to stop and start the application server through the administrative
console is available only for the Websphere Network Deployment and Websphere
Enterprise Editions. To stop and start the application server in Websphere Express
and Websphere Base editions, see below.

1 Expand Servers, and then click the WebSphere Application Servers link. A
table listing the application servers and an icon indicating their status appears:
• red: stopped
• green: started
2 Select the box next to the application server you want to stop, and click Stop. The
status icon changes from green to red.
3 Select the application server you want to start and click Start. The application server
starts and the status icon changes to green.
To stop and start the application server in Websphere Express and Websphere Base
editions, use the following commands:
• stopServer.sh server1 to stop the application server
• startServer.sh server1 to start the application server.

Starting a single JSP application

This process starts only a single JSP application, rather than all the applications running
on the application server. To stop and start all applications, see Restarting the
application server, above.

213 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To start the Web module

1 Expand Applications, then expand Application Types, and then select

WebSphere enterprise applications. A list of enterprise applications is
displayed, along with icons indicating their status:
• red: stopped
• green: started
2 Select the box next to the application to start and click Start.

Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

The administrative pages for your MicroStrategy JSP applications are accessible only to
users with an admin role. To create the set of users and passwords that are authorized
for this access, you must create the necessary role mapping between these users and the
admin role for the MicroStrategy JSP application. The steps to perform this setup are
given above in the section Preparing for the application installation, page 211. For more
information, you can refer to your IBM documentation.

To configure administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

1 Access the servlet by typing the following URL in a web browser:

• For Web (JSP):
http://IPAddress/ContextRootWeb/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, ContextRootWeb is the name you provided for the
ContextRoot for Web Module box in the section Preparing for the application
installation, page 211. For example, the default name of the WAR file, which is
MicroStrategy.
• For Mobile Server (JSP):
http://IPAddress/ContextRootMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, ContextRootMobile is the name you provided for
the ContextRoot for Web Module box in the section Preparing for the
application installation, page 211. For example, the default name of the WAR
file, which is MicroStrategyMobile.
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://IPAddress/ContextRootOM/servlet/mstrOM
In the URL listed above, ContextRootOM is the name you provided for the
ContextRoot for Web Module box in the section Preparing for the application
installation, page 211. For example, the default name of the WAR file, which is
MicroStrategyOM.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 214

Installation and Configuration Guide

The servlet names are case-sensitive. Use the correct case when typing the
mstrWebAdmin name. If the application server is enabled with security, a
dialog box related to the administrator authentication opens.

2 Type the user ID and password assigned with the admin role.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), proceed to launch the project. For
more information, see Launching the project, page 215.

Launching the project

After configuring the MicroStrategy Web Administrator page, you must follow the steps
described in this section to launch your project.

To launch the project

1 Start the Apache Web server by using the following command:

# /usr/HTTPServer/bin/apachectl start
For example, if the IBM HTTP server is installed in the default location
/usr/IBMIHS, then use the following command:
/usr/IBMIHS/bin/apachect1
2 In a Web browser, specify the following URL:
http://MachineName/ContextRoot/servlet/mstrWeb
Alternatively, you can use the IP address of your machine for remote access, as
shown below:
http://IPAddress/ContextRoot/servlet/mstrWeb

215 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

In these addresses, ContextRoot is the name you provided for the context root
for Web Module box on Preparing for the application installation page. For
example, the default name of the WAR file, which is MicroStrategy. For more
information, refer to Preparing for the application installation, page 211.

You can now access the MicroStrategy Web (JSP) application.

Uninstalling MicroStrategy JSP applications

You can uninstall the MicroStrategy JSP applications through the WebSphere
Administrative console.

To uninstall MicroStrategy Web application

1 Expand Applications, then expand Application Types, and then select

WebSphere enterprise applications. A list of enterprise applications is
displayed.
2 Select the desired MicroStrategy JSP application.
3 Click Uninstall.
4 Save the configuration in the master repository.

Performance-based setup information

The performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP) can be increased by configuring it on
various component levels. These additional settings are not necessary, but can increase
the performance of MicroStrategy Web (JSP). This section explains the following
changes:
• Setting the Java heap size, page 216
• Precompiling JSP files, page 217
• Configuring the IBM HTTP Server to serve static files, page 218

Setting the Java heap size

You can increase the Java heap size for a given application server by configuring the
WebSphere Administrative Console.

To increase the Java heap size

1 Access the Administrative Console.

2 Expand the Servers node.
3 Click the Application Servers link to view the list of application servers.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 216

Installation and Configuration Guide

4 Click the application server name, scroll to Additional Properties and click Process
Definition.
5 Click JVM Settings to set the Java heap size settings. MicroStrategy recommends
that you initially set the Java heap size to a minimum of 500MB, assuming the
machine has enough memory space.
This value may need to be modified to reflect the requirements of your specific
environment. Refer to your third-party application server documentation for
information on how to determine a satisfactory Java heap size for your environment.
6 Click Apply and save your changes.
7 Stop and start the application server.

Precompiling JSP files

To avoid the time taken to load the Web pages in the application server when you access
it for the first time, you must precompile the Java Server Pages (JSP) files.
Precompilation can be done during deployment by selecting the Enable pre-compile
of JSPs setting. Otherwise, it can be done after deploying the application.
To precompile the JSPs after deployment, set the application server to load all the pages
in the application. Then when you connect for the first time, the pages are already
loaded and performance is improved.
Before you precompile the JSP files, make sure that:
• The MicroStrategy Web (JSP) application is deployed in the WebSphere
environment.
• You know the defined application name and the Web Module’s name. You can
retrieve these names from the Administrative Console. Locate the application name
under the Enterprise Applications node. Locate the Web Module name by expanding
the application and clicking Web Modules. The default name is Web Tier.

To precompile the JSP files

1 Change the directory to WAS_ROOT/bin.

2 Run the following command:
./JspBatchCompiler.sh -enterpriseapp.name
ApplicationName -webmodule.name webModule
-cell.name cellName -node.name nodeName
-server.name serverName -keepgenerated
TRUE
• If the administrative server is running in a security enabled mode, you are
prompted for the user ID and password to connect to the Admin server.
username userID
password password

217 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

For each JSP file compiled without error, the following message appears: Code
generation successful.

Configuring the IBM HTTP Server to serve static files

The IBM HTTP Server (Web server) is tuned to effectively serve static files. As a result,
perceived performance is greatly enhanced if you configure the IBM HTTP Server to
serve image, style sheet, and JavaScript files. This also reduces the load on the
WebSphere Server so that it can handle only dynamic files while IBM HTTP Server
handles static files. This requires that you do the following:
• Configure the application server level to serve the Java Server Pages (JSPs) and
servlets, which are dynamic files and handled by WebSphere.
• Configure the Web server level to serve the images, JavaScripts, and style sheets,
which are static files and handled by the IBM HTTP Server.
For more information, see the IBM WebSphere Application Server redbook covering
System Management and Configuration. This book discusses separating static content
from dynamic content.

Deploying with Oracle Glassfish Server (Solaris)

This section provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications on an Oracle Glassfish Server 3.1.x in a UNIX/Linux environment. You can
use the steps provided below to deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile
Server (JSP), and MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP).
• Preconfiguration information, page 218: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy JSP application.
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 219:
Instructions for deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or
Operations Manager (JSP).
• Undeploying MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 226: Instructions for
undeploying MicroStrategy JSP applications.

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary for deploying
MicroStrategy JSP applications on your machine, which includes Locating the WAR file,
page 191. It also provides additional setup information that needs to be done on the
machine on which the application server and Web server are already installed.
While your configuration may vary slightly, for example you may have different versions
of these applications, the overall process remains the same:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 218

Installation and Configuration Guide

Requirement Configuration Details

Operating system Solaris 10.x or 11.x (on SPARC)

Web server Oracle iPlanet Web Server 7.x
Application server Oracle Glassfish Server 3.1.x
JDK (missing or bad snippet)

For information on the version numbers certified and supported by MicroStrategy, see
the MicroStrategy Readme.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
Once your machine has been configured, you can deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP,
Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager (JSP) with Oracle Glassfish Server 3.1.x.
The deployment involves the steps below, which are explained in detail in the following
sections:
1 Launching the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console, page 219
2 Deploying your MicroStrategy JSP application, page 220
3 Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 222
4 Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 224
5 Connecting to the Web (JSP) project page, page 225

The administration and deployment tools in Oracle Glassfish Server have the same
interface regardless of the operating system on which they run. Therefore, the
deployment process is the same for all operating systems, and is described below.
There are some minor changes in the Windows environment, which are
highlighted where necessary.

Launching the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console

This procedure describes the steps to launch the Oracle Glassfish Server.

Prerequisites
• The Oracle Glassfish Server is installed. This installation should also include a default
domain, commonly named domain1. If you plan to use a different domain, refer to
your third-party Oracle documentation for creating a domain.
• Copy the WAR file (see Locating the WAR file, page 191) for your MicroStrategy JSP
application to the same machine as the Oracle Glassfish Server, or to a location that
is accessible to the Oracle Glassfish Server machine.

219 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To launch the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console

1 Navigate to the following directory in the command prompt:

InstallDir/bin
where InstallDir is the directory where you installed Oracle Glassfish Server.
2 Type the following command to start the domain:
asadmin start-domain --domaindir DomainDirectory
DomainName
where:
• DomainDirectory is the path you defined when creating the domain. You can
remove the --domaindir option if the domain uses the default directory.
• DomainName is the name of the domain you created in the previous steps.
For example, to start domain1, which is the default domain, type the following
command:
asadmin start-domain domain1
3 Access the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console by typing the following
URL:
http://MachineName:PortNumber
where:
• MachineName is the IP address or the name of the machine where you installed
Oracle Glassfish Server.
• PortNumber is the port number you provided when creating the domain. The
default port number is 4848.
4 If prompted, type the user name and password that you provided when creating the
domain.

Deploying your MicroStrategy JSP application

After launching the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console, follow the steps
below to deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications as a WAR file.

Prerequisites
• Save the WAR file (see Locating the WAR file, page 191) to the same machine as the
Oracle Glassfish Server, or to a location that is accessible to the Oracle Glassfish
Server machine.
• Access to the administrative pages for MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server
(JSP), and Operations Manager (JSP) can be granted by using the admin security

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 220

Installation and Configuration Guide

role and the associated mstradmin group. Granting this access to users can be done
within the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console after deploying the WAR
file. While this default behavior supports most deployment requirements, if you have
specific security requirements for your system, you must modify the security role
details prior to deploying the WAR file, as described in Deploying MicroStrategy
Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 219.

To deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications as a WAR file

1 Access the Administration Console by typing the following URL:

http://MachineName:PortNumber
where:
• MachineName is the IP address or the name of the machine where you installed
Oracle Glassfish Server.
• PortNumber is the port number you provided when creating the domain. The
default port number is 4848.
2 If prompted, type the user name and password that you used to create the domain.
3 Expand the Tree pane on the left side of the Administration Console.
4 Click Applications. The Applications page is displayed.
5 Click Deploy. The Deploy Applications or Modules page is displayed.
6 Select Local Packaged File or Directory That Is Accessible from
GlassFish Server, and then click Browse Files. The Browse Server dialog box
opens.

Selecting the WAR file in this manner is recommended as the Packaged File to
Be Uploaded to the Server option uploads the WAR file via HTTP, which can
require considerable time and system resources.

7 Browse to the location where you saved the MicroStrategy JSP application WAR file.
8 Once you select the appropriate WAR file, click Choose File.
9 From the Type drop-down list, select Web Application.
10 In the Context Root field, type the context root for the application, which is
included in various URLs for the application.
• The URL to access MicroStrategy Web (JSP)
(http://IPAddress:PortNumber/ContextRoot/servlet/mstrWeb)
includes the applications context root, which should be replaced by any name of
your choice. For example, you can use the default name of the WAR file, which
is MicroStrategy.
• The URL to access the MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator Page
(
http://

221 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

IPAddress:PortNumber/ContextRoot/servlet/mstrWebAdmin)
includes the applications context root, which should be replaced by any name of
your choice. For example, you can use the default name of the WAR file, which
is MicroStrategyMobile.
• The URL to access the MicroStrategy Operations Manager
(http://IPAddress:PortNumber/ContextRoot/servlet/mstrOM)
includes the applications context root, which should be replaced by any name of
your choice. For example, you can use the default name of the WAR file, which
is MicroStrategyOM.
11 In the Application Name field, type a descriptive name to distinguish the
application from within the Administration Console.
12 In the Virtual Servers list, select the appropriate server.
13 Select or clear the additional deployment option check boxes according to your
requirements.

It is recommended you select the Precompile JSPs check box to quickly load
the Web pages in the application server when you access it for the first time.

14 Click OK to deploy the application.

Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

For security purposes, you must only assign certain users the administrative
authorization to access the MicroStrategy Web Administrator, Mobile Server
Administrator, or Operations Manager. To do this, users need to be assigned to the
mstradmin group, which is part of the admin security role.
Oracle Glassfish Server supports the following authentication realms out-of-the-box:
• File realm
• Administration realm
• Certificate realm

A realm, also called a security policy domain or security domain, is a scope over
which a common security policy is defined and enforced by the security
administrator of the security service. For more information, see the following
resource:

http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E18930_01/html/821-
2435/ggkuk.html#gkbiy
In Oracle Glassfish Server, the file realm is the default realm. For controlling access to
the Administration pages, you can create users and user groups and assign the
mstradmin group to users in your security realm.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 222

Installation and Configuration Guide

To create users that are assigned to the mstradmin group in the file
realm

1 In the Administration Console, from the Tree pane on the left, click server
(Admin Server). Ensure that the server is running or click Start to start the
server.
2 From the Tree pane on the left, expand Configuration, then server-config, then
Security, then Realms, and then select file. The Edit Realm page is displayed.
3 Click Manage Users. The File Users page is displayed.
4 Click New to create a new user. The New File Realm User page is displayed.
5 Type the following information for the new user:
• User ID: The ID that the user provides when authenticating with the system.
• Group List: The groups that the user is a member of. Type mstradmin to
provide the user administrative access to MicroStrategy Web Administrator,
MicroStrategy Mobile Server Administrator, and Operations Manager.
• New Password: The password used to authenticate a user.
• Confirm New Password: A confirmation of the password, required when
creating a new user.
6 Click OK to create the user. You are returned to the File Users page, where you can
continue to create and manage users for the administration realm.
7 To apply all of these changes, stop and restart the application server:
a In the Administration Console, from the Tree pane on the left, select server
(Admin Server). The General Information page is displayed.
b Click Restart.

Managing the admin security role for specialized group authentication

requirements
MicroStrategy provides a descriptor file, glassfish-web.xml, which enables Oracle
Glassfish Server to map the existing users or groups to security roles. This file is located
within the MicroStrategy JSP application WAR files, and after deployment can be found
in the WebApplicationRootDir/WEB-INF folder.
By default, the admin security role and its mstradmin group defined in this
glassfish-web.xml file can be used to grant administrative access to the
MicroStrategy Web Administrator, Mobile Server Administrator, and Operations
Manager. This provides administrative access without having to make any modifications
to glassfish-web.xml. In these scenarios, you can use the steps provided in
Deploying your MicroStrategy JSP application, page 220 and Configuring
administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 222 to complete the
deployment and authentication requirements.

223 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

While this default behavior supports most deployment requirements, you can modify this
glassfish-web.xml file if you have specialized group authentication requirements to
use a group other than the default mstradmin group defined for the admin security
role. Any groups that are used must be included as part of the admin security role.

Any changes made to the glassfish-web.xml file must be done prior to

deploying the MicroStrategy JSP application.

The contents of this file are as follows, which may differ depending on your installation
of Oracle Glassfish Server:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE glassfish-web-app PUBLIC "-//GlassFish.org//DTD
GlassFish Application Server 3.1 Servlet 3.0//EN"
"http://glassfish.org/dtds/glassfish-web-app_3_0-1.dtd">
<glassfish-web-app>
<security-role-mapping>
<role-name>admin</role-name>
<group-name>mstradmin</group-name>
</security-role-mapping>
</glassfish-web-app>
Once you make any changes to this file, you must deploy the application (see Deploying
your MicroStrategy JSP application, page 220) and assign the security role to the
necessary user accounts (see Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP
applications, page 222).

Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

You can use the steps below to access the administrative page for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

To access the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

1 Access the servlet by typing the following URL in a Web browser:

• For Web (JSP):
http://
IPAddress:PortNumber/ContextRootWeb/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, ContextRootWeb is the name you provided for the
ContextRoot for Web Module box in the section Deploying your
MicroStrategy JSP application, page 220. For example, you can use the default
name of the WAR file, which is MicroStrategy. The default port number is
8080.
• For Mobile Server (JSP):
http://

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 224

Installation and Configuration Guide

IPAddress
:PortNumber/ContextRootMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
In the URL listed above, ContextRootMobile is the name you provided for
the ContextRoot for Web Module box in the section Deploying your
MicroStrategy JSP application, page 220. For example, you can use the default
name of the WAR file, which is MicroStrategyMobile. The default port
number is 8080.
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://
IPAddress:PortNumber/ContextRootMobile/servlet/mstrOM
In the URL listed above, ContextRootMobile is the name you provided for
the ContextRoot for Web Module box in the section Deploying your
MicroStrategy JSP application, page 220. For example, you can use the default
name of the WAR file, which is MicroStrategyOM. The default port number is
8080.

The servlet names are case-sensitive. Use the correct case when typing the
mstrWebAdmin name. If the application server is enabled with security, a
dialog box related to the administrator authentication opens.

2 Type the user ID and password for a user who is a member of the mstradmin group,
as described in Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP
applications, page 222.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), proceed to launch the MicroStrategy
project. For more information, see Connecting to the Web (JSP) project page, page
225 immediately below.

Connecting to the Web (JSP) project page

After restarting the application server, follow the steps described here to connect to the
project page.

225 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To connect to the Web (JSP) project page

1 In a Web browser, type the following URL:

http://MachineName:PortNumber/ContextRoot
If you have used all the default values, you can access the following URLs:
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/
or
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb

Undeploying MicroStrategy JSP applications

Oracle recommends undeploying an application before deploying a newer version. The
steps below show you how to undeploy an existing MicroStrategy JSP application, using
the Oracle Glassfish Server Administration Console.

To undeploy MicroStrategy JSP applications

1 In the Administration Console, from the Tree pane on the left, click Applications.
The Applications page is displayed.
2 Select the check box for the MicroStrategy JSP application.
3 Click Undeploy.
4 After the undeployment is finished, stop and restart the application server for the
changes to take effect.

Deploying with Tomcat (Windows)

This section provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications in a Tomcat-only environment. For information on how to configure
Tomcat to work with IIS, see iishowto.html (Tomcat 6.0) in the Tomcat
documentation. You can use the steps provided below to deploy MicroStrategy Web
(JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), and MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP):
• Preconfiguration information, page 226: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 229:
Instructions for deploying, including step-by-step procedures.

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy
MicroStrategy JSP applications on Tomcat on your machine.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 226

Installation and Configuration Guide

While your setup may vary slightly, for example, you may have different versions of these
applications, the overall process remains the same.

Requirement Recommended

Operating system Windows 2008 Enterprise Edition SP2 (on x64)

Application server Tomcat 7.0.x or 8.0.x
JDK (missing or bad snippet)

Configuring the JDK

If you have not installed the Oracle JDK yet, download the file from the
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html website. Be sure to install the
JDK, not the JRE.

The download site displays a number of software options. These might include
terms such as JRE, JDK, and Java SDK. You must install a development kit (which
is termed JDK or SDK) rather than installing only the JRE.

To configure the JDK, a system variable must point to the folder where you install
the JDK. If you install the JDK to a simple folder path such as C:\ setting the
system variable is easier and more likely to be correct.

After you install the Oracle JDK, you must configure it.

To configure the JDK

1 On your Windows machine, access the environment variables using the steps below:

The third-party products discussed below are manufactured by vendors

independent of MicroStrategy, and the steps to configure these products is
subject to change. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps
to access and modify the environment variables.

a From the Start menu, select Computer. The Computer dialog box opens.
b Click System properties. The System dialog box opens.
c Click Advanced system settings. The System Properties dialog box opens.
d Click Environment Variables. The Environment Variables dialog box opens.
2 Under System Variables, click New to create a system variable. The New System
Variable dialog box opens.
3 In the Variable Name field, type JAVA_HOME.
4 In the Variable Value field, type the path of the folder where you installed the
JDK and click OK.

227 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

For example, if the fully qualified path to your JDK executable is

C:\jdk1.6.0\bin\java.exe, the value of your JAVA_HOME variable is
C:\jdk1.6.0.

If you have installed JDK under the Program Files folder, type Progra~1
when specifying the folder name in the Variable Value box; otherwise the system
does not recognize the folder. For example, type C:\Progra~1\jdk1.6.0 in
the Variable Value box.

Configuring Tomcat
This procedure assumes that you have downloaded and installed Tomcat on your
machine. You can download Tomcat from the Apache website; depending on the version
you want to download, you may need to locate the appropriate file in Apache’s Archive
area. Instructions for downloading and installing Tomcat are also available on the
Apache website.
To configure Tomcat, a system variable must point to the folder where you install
Tomcat. Installing Tomcat to a simple folder path such as C:\Tomcat makes it easier
to define the system variable.
After you install Tomcat, you must configure it.

To configure Tomcat

1 On your Windows machine, access the environment variables using the steps below:

The third-party products discussed below are manufactured by vendors

independent of MicroStrategy, and the steps to configure these products is
subject to change. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps
to access and modify the environment variables.

a From the Start menu, select Computer. The Computer dialog box opens.
b Click System properties. The System dialog box opens.
c Click Advanced system settings. The System Properties dialog box opens.
d Click Environment Variables. The Environment Variables dialog box opens.
2 Under System Variables, click New to create a system variable. The New System
Variable dialog box opens.
3 In the Variable Name field, type CATALINA_HOME.
4 In the Variable Value field, specify the path of the folder where you installed
Tomcat and click OK. For example, if you installed Tomcat directly to the C drive,
the destination folder is C:\Tomcat.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 228

Installation and Configuration Guide

If you installed Tomcat under the Program Files folder, type Progra~1

when specifying the folder in the Variable Value box. Otherwise, the system
does not recognize the folder. For example, type C:\Progra~1\Tomcat in
the Variable Value box.

Setting the Java heap size

The Java heap size for the Tomcat can be modified by defining the JAVA_OPTS
parameter in the catalina.bat file. For example, you can define this parameter as
follows:
JAVA_OPTS = "-Xms1024m -Xmx2048m"
This value may need to be modified to reflect the requirements of your specific
environment. Refer to your third-party application server documentation for information
on how to determine a satisfactory Java heap size for your environment.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
Assuming you have made all the necessary configurations described above, you can begin
deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager (JSP)
with Tomcat. This involves the following steps:
1 Deploying using Tomcat as a stand-alone Web container, page 229
2 Configuring administrative access your MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 231
3 Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 231
4 Launching the project, page 232

Deploying using Tomcat as a stand-alone Web container

To deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications using Tomcat as a stand-

alone Web container

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Copy the WAR file to the Tomcat\webapps folder.

Stop and start Tomcat from the command line

3 From the Start menu, select Run. The Run dialog box opens.
4 Type cmd in the Open drop-down list and click OK. The command prompt opens.

229 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

5 Browse to the Tomcat\bin folder, where Tomcat is the folder in which you
installed Tomcat. For example, in the command prompt, type
cd C:\Tomcat\bin
6 Press ENTER.
C:\Tomcat\bin> is displayed at the command prompt.
7 Type the required commands to start and stop Tomcat, which depends on your
version of Tomcat. For example, for Tomcat 7, type Tomcat7 start to start
Tomcat and type Tomcat7 stop to stop Tomcat. Refer to your third-party Apache
documentation for information on the commands to start and stop Tomcat.

If you installed Tomcat under the Program Files folder, type Progra~1 when
you change folders in the command prompt. Otherwise, the system does not
recognize the folder. For example, type C:\Progra~1\Tomcat\bin in the
command prompt.

Your MicroStrategy JSP application is deployed automatically, based on the following:

• If you have configured Tomcat to deploy an exploded WAR file, which is often the
default behavior, a folder is created within the Tomcat\webapps folder:
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategy by default.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategyMobile by default.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategyOM by default.
• If you have configured Tomcat to deploy an unexploded WAR file, the configuration
files are created within the system’s default temporary file directory. For Windows
systems, the temporary file directory is commonly defined by the TMP environment
variable:
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), a /microstrategy/web-
Version/ folder is created within the temporary file directory, where Version
is the version number for the MicroStrategy Web (JSP) product. Within this
folder location, various configuration files can be found within the WEB-INF
folder and its subfolders.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), a
/microstrategy/mobile-Version/ folder is created within the temporary
file directory, where Version is the version number for the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server (JSP) product. Within this folder location, various configuration
files can be found within the WEB-INF folder and its subfolders.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), a
/microstrategy/ipa-Version/ folder is created within the temporary file
directory, where Version is the version number for the MicroStrategy
Operations Manager (JSP) product. Within this folder location, various
configuration files can be found within the WEB-INF folder and its subfolders.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 230

Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring administrative access your MicroStrategy JSP

applications
To allow users authorized to access MicroStrategy Web Administrator, MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator, or Operations Manager, you must create the users and
assign them the role of admin under the Tomcat user configuration file. The steps to
configure this access are provided below.

To configure administrative access to your MicroStrategy JSP

applications

1 In the Tomcat\conf folder, open the tomcat-users.xml file in a program that

allows you to edit the file, such as Notepad.
2 Add the following tag and save the file:
<user name=”administrator” password=”administrator”
roles=”admin”/>

You can specify any value in the user name and password fields.

3 Stop and start Tomcat from the command line.

Now you can access and configure your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in
Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 231.

Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

You can use the steps below to access the administrative page for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

To access MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

1 Access the servlet by typing the following URL in a Web browser:

• For Web (JSP):
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Mobile Server (JSP):
http://
localhost:8080/MicroStrategyMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategyOM/servlet/mstrOM
The servlet names at the end of the URL are case-sensitive. Make sure to use the
correct case when typing the servlet name. If the application server is enabled with
security, a dialog box related to the administrator authentication opens.

231 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

If you are using Tomcat integrated with IIS, you do not need to specify the
port number in the URL. However, when using Tomcat as a stand-alone Web
container, you must specify the port number. The default port for Tomcat is
8080.

2 When prompted for a user name and password, use the same values you specified in
the tomcat-users.xml file.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), proceed to launch the MicroStrategy
project. For more information, see Launching the project, page 232.

Launching the project

In a Web browser, access MicroStrategy Web (JSP) using this URL:
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb

Deploying with Tomcat (Linux)

This section provides information on how to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications with Tomcat in a Linux environment. You can use the steps provided below
to deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), or MicroStrategy
Operations Manager (JSP):
• Preconfiguration information, page 233: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 235:
Instructions for deploying, including detailed steps.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 232

Installation and Configuration Guide

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy
MicroStrategy JSP applications with Tomcat on your Linux machine:
• Installing the JDK, page 233
• Configuring the JDK, page 233
• Installing Tomcat, page 234
• Configuring Tomcat, page 234
• Locating the WAR file, page 191
While your setup may vary slightly, for example, you may have different versions of these
applications, the overall process remains the same.

Requirement Recommended

Operating system Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.8 (on x86-64)

Application server Tomcat 7.0.x or 8.0.x
JDK (missing or bad snippet)

Installing the JDK

If you have not installed Oracle JDK yet, download the shell file from the
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html website. Be sure to install the
JDK, not the JRE.

The download site displays a number of software options. These might include
terms such as JRE, JDK, and Java SDK. You must install a development kit (which
is termed JDK or SDK) rather than installing only the JRE.

To configure the JDK, a system variable must point to the folder where you install
the JDK. If you install the JDK to a simple folder path such as C:\ setting the
system variable is easier and more likely to be correct.

From the location in which to install the JDK, run the file you downloaded:
jdk-Version-linux-i586.bin
For example, to install version 1.6.0, type the following:
jdk-1_6_0-linux-i586.bin

Configuring the JDK

After you install the Oracle JDK, you must configure it.

233 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To configure the JDK

1 Open the /etc/profile file using a program that allows you to edit the file.
2 Add the following line:
export JAVA_HOME=/PathName/jdkVersion;
where PathName is the destination folder where you installed the JDK and
Version is the version, such as 1_6_0, of the JDK.

Installing Tomcat
This procedure assumes that you have downloaded and installed Tomcat in a directory
named Tomcat on your machine. If you have not installed Tomcat yet, download the zip
file from the following website
• Tomcat 7.0.x: website. http://tomcat.apache.org/download-70.cgi
• Tomcat 8.0.x: website. http://tomcat.apache.org/download-80.cgi

Contact your System Administrator or visit the Apache website for instructions on
downloading and installing Tomcat.

Configuring Tomcat
After you install Tomcat, you must configure Tomcat. The Tomcat configuration includes
creating the environment variable CATALINA_HOME and defining this environment
variable to point to the Tomcat directory.

To configure Tomcat

1 Open the etc/profile file in a program that allows you to edit the file.
2 Type the following:
export CATALINA_HOME = /PathName
where PathName is the directory where you have installed Tomcat.
For example,
export CATALINA_HOME = /Tomcat

Setting the Java heap size

The Java heap size for the Tomcat can be modified by defining the JAVA_OPTS
parameter in the catalina.sh file. For example, you can define this parameter as

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 234

Installation and Configuration Guide

follows:
JAVA_OPTS = "-Xms1024m -Xmx2048m"
This value may need to be modified to reflect the requirements of your specific
environment. Refer to your third-party application server documentation for information
on how to determine a satisfactory Java heap size for your environment.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
After you have performed the configurations described above, you can begin deploying
MicroStrategy JSP applications with Tomcat. This involves the following steps:
1 Deploying using Tomcat as a standalone Web container, page 235
2 Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 237

Deploying using Tomcat as a standalone Web container

To deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications using Tomcat as a

standalone Web container

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Copy the WAR file to the Tomcat/webapps directory.

To start and stop Tomcat from the command line

3 Type # $CATALINA_HOME/bin/startup.sh and press ENTER to start Tomcat,
which deploys your MicroStrategy JSP applications automatically, based on the
following:
• If you have configured Tomcat to deploy an exploded WAR file, which is often
the default behavior, a folder is created within the Tomcat/webapps folder:
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategy by default.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategyMobile by default.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), the folder is
named MicroStrategyOM by default.
• If you have configured Tomcat to deploy an unexploded WAR file, the
configuration files are created within the system’s default temporary file
directory. For UNIX and Linux systems, the temporary file directory is usually
/tmp/ or /var/tmp/:

235 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), a /microstrategy/web-

Version/ folder is created within the temporary file directory, where
Version is the version number for the MicroStrategy Web (JSP) product.
Within this folder location, various configuration files can be found within
the WEB-INF folder and its subfolders.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), a
/microstrategy/mobile-Version/ folder is created within the
temporary file directory, where Version is the version number for the
MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP) product. Within this folder location,
various configuration files can be found within the WEB-INF folder and its
subfolders.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), a
/microstrategy/ipa-Version/ folder is created within the temporary
file directory, where Version is the version number for the MicroStrategy
Operations Manager (JSP) product. Within this folder location, various
configuration files can be found within the WEB-INF folder and its
subfolders.

Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

To allow users authorized to access MicroStrategy Web Administrator, MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator, or Operations Manager, you must create the users and
assign them the role of admin under the Tomcat user configuration file. The steps to
configure this access are provided below.

To configure administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

1 In the Tomcat/conf directory, open the tomcat-users.xml file using a program

that allows you to edit the file.
2 Add the following tags and save the file:
<role rolename=”admin”/>
<user username=”admin” password=”admin” roles=”admin”/>

You can specify any value in the user name and password fields. These are
used to log in to the MicroStrategy Web Administrator and Mobile Server
Administrator pages. The roles field must be admin.

3 Stop and restart Tomcat.

Now you can access and configure your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in
Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 237.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 236

Installation and Configuration Guide

Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

You can use the steps below to access the administrative page for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

To access the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

1 Access the servlet by typing the following URL in a Web browser:

• For Web (JSP):
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Mobile Server (JSP):
http://
localhost:8080/MicroStrategyMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategyOM/servlet/mstrOM
The servlet names at the end of the URL are case-sensitive. Make sure to use the
correct case when typing the servlet name. If the application server is enabled with
security, a dialog box related to the administrator authentication opens.
2 When prompted for a user name and password, use the same values you specified in
the tomcat-users.xml file.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), proceed to launch the MicroStrategy
project. In a Web browser, access MicroStrategy Web (JSP) using the following URL:
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb

Deploying with SAP NetWeaver (Windows)

This section provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications on a Windows machine using the SAP application server. You can use the

237 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

steps provided below to deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile Server
(JSP), or MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP):
• Preconfiguration information, page 238: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 238:
Instructions for deploying the application.

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy
MicroStrategy JSP applications on your machine. It also provides additional setup
information for the machine where the application server and web server are already
installed.
The configuration required to deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications on SAP is provided
in the following table. While your configuration may vary slightly, for example, you may
have different versions of these applications, the overall process remains the same.

Requirement Recommended

Operating system Windows 2008 Enterprise Edition SP2 (on x64)

Application server SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.4.x

For information on the version numbers certified and supported by MicroStrategy,

see the MicroStrategy Readme.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
Once your machine has the necessary settings configured, you can deploy MicroStrategy
Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager (JSP) on the SAP-Windows
machine. Deployment involves the following steps:
1 Deploying MicroStrategy JSP applications with the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server, page 238
2 Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 240
3 Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 240

Deploying MicroStrategy JSP applications with the SAP NetWeaver

Application Server
Follow the steps provided in this section to deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications as a
WAR file.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 238

Installation and Configuration Guide

To deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications as a WAR file

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Copy the WAR file to the Windows machine hosting your application server. The
location in which you store the file is used later and referred to as path_to_war_
file.
3 From the Windows Start menu, select Run. The Run dialog box opens.
4 In the Open drop-down list, type cmd, and click OK. A command prompt opens.
5 Using the command prompt, browse to the following directory within the SAP
Application Server installation directory:
/usr/sap/SID/Instance_Number/j2ee/deployment/scripts/
The SID and Instance_Number parameters are defined during installation and
configuration of the SAP Application Server. The port number above refers to the P4
port number. The default port number is 50004.
6 Type the following command and press ENTER to deploy the WAR file:
Deploy.bat
user_name:password@localhost:port_number path_to_war_
file
The user name and password must have administrative access. The port number
above refers to the P4 port number. The default port number is 50004.
7 Access NetWeaver web admin console using the following URL:
http://localhost:PortNumber/nwa
The PortNumber above refers to the J2EE engine port number. The default port
number is 50000.
8 Log in as an administrative user.
9 From the Operation Management tab, select the Systems tab, and then click
Start & Stop.
10 Select Java EE Applications. A list of applications deployed on the application
server are displayed.
11 Select the MicroStrategy JSP application just deployed from the list.
12 From the Application Details section, select the Status tab, and then click
Start.
13 Select On all instances and Set "Started" as Initial State.
When application is started, the status is displayed as Started.

239 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

To allow users authorized to access MicroStrategy Web Administrator, MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator, or Operations Manager, you must map users or groups to
the admin security role. This security role is defined in the MicroStrategy JSP
application deployment, within the web-j2ee-engine.xml file. You can modify this
file to map users or groups to this admin security role, or include users in the
administrators user group.

Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP applications

You can use the steps below to access the administrative page for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

You must have administrative privileges to access the MicroStrategy Web

Administrator or Mobile Server Administrator page. For more information, see
Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 240.

To access the MicroStrategy Web Administrator or Mobile Server

Administrator page

1 Access the servlet by typing the following URL in a Web browser:

• For Web (JSP):
http://
MachineName:PortNumber/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Mobile Server (JSP):
http://
MachineName
:PortNumber/MicroStrategyMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://
MachineName:PortNumber/MicroStrategyOM/servlet/mstrOM

The servlet names at the end of the URLs listed above are case-sensitive. Use
the correct case when typing the servlet name.

The login dialog box opens.

2 Specify a user name and password.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 240

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and

Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), access the MicroStrategy Web
Application on SAP Web Server by specifying the following URL in the Web browser:
http://
MachineName:PortNumber/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb

Deploying with Oracle 10g (Windows)

This chapter provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications with Apache as the Web server and Oracle Application Server 10g R3 as the
application server. You can use the steps provided below to deploy MicroStrategy Web
(JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), or MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP):
• Preconfiguration information, page 241: Configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).
• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 242:
Instructions for deploying, including detailed steps.

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy
MicroStrategy JSP applications on your machine.
This section uses the following setup. While your setup may vary slightly, for example,
you may have different versions of these applications, the overall process remains the
same.

Requirement Recommended

Operating system Windows 2008 SP2 (on x64)

Application server Oracle Application Server 10g 10.1.3
Web server Apache 2.x
JDK (missing or bad snippet)

241 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
After your machine is configured, you can start the deployment of your MicroStrategy
JSP application with Oracle Application Server 10g R3.
To deploy MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager (JSP)
perform the following procedures:
1 Deploying using the Oracle Enterprise Manager, page 242
2 Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 237

Deploying using the Oracle Enterprise Manager

You can access Oracle Enterprise Manager from the following URL:
http://MachineName:PortNumber/em
Where MachineName is the machine name or IP address of the Oracle machine, and
PortNumber is the port number of Oracle Enterprise Manager.

To deploy with the Oracle Enterprise Manager

1 Start the Apache Web Server. From the Start menu, point to OracleAS 10g -
DEFAULT_HOME1, and then choose Start
ApplicationServerName.MachineName.domain.
2 To verify that the Apache Web Server has started, open Oracle Enterprise Manager,
select HTTP Server, and then click Start.
3 Select the OC4J instance where you want to deploy your MicroStrategy JSP
application. This procedure assumes you are using the default instance name home.
Click home. The OC4J: home page opens.
4 Select the Applications tab.
5 Click Deploy. The Deploy: Select Archive page opens.
6 In the Archive area, select Archive is present on local host.
7 Click Browse to navigate to and select the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP
application. For more information on locating the WAR file, see Locating the WAR
file, page 191.
8 In the Deployment Plan area, select Automatically create a new
deployment plan and click Next. The Deploy: Application Attributes page opens.
9 Enter the Application Name and Context Root. This section on deploying
MicroStrategy Web (JSP) with Oracle 10g uses MicroStrategy as the Application
Name and /MicroStrategy as the Context Root. For Mobile Server (JSP), this
section uses MicroStrategyMobile as the Application Name and

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 242

Installation and Configuration Guide

/MicroStrategyMobile as the Context Root. For Operations Manager (JSP), this

section uses MicroStrategyOM as the Application Name and
/MicroStrategyOM as the Context Root.
10 Click Next. The Deploy: Deployment Settings page opens.

To map a user to the admin security role

To allow users authorized to access MicroStrategy Web Administrator, MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator, or Operations Manager, you must assign users the
security role of admin. In Oracle 10g, the security users and groups are defined in
the Oracle Enterprise Manager.
11 In the Map Security Roles task name, click the Go To Task (pencil) icon. The
Deployment Settings: Map Security Roles page opens.
12 For the admin security role, select the Map Role (pencil) icon. The Deployment
Settings: Map Security Role: admin page opens.
13 Select Map selected users and groups to this role.
14 In the Map Role to Users area, in the User field, type the user name to map to
the admin security role and click Add.
Repeat this step to add all users for whom you want to grant permission to work in
the MicroStrategy Web Administrator and Mobile Server Administrator pages.
15 Click Continue, and then click OK. You are returned to the Deploy: Deployment
Settings page.
16 Click on Deploy to deploy the application.
17 Stop and restart the Apache Web Server.
Now you can access and configure your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in
Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP administrative pages, page 243.

Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP administrative pages

You can use the steps below to access the administrative page for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

To access the MicroStrategy JSP administrative pages

1 In a Web browser, access the administrative page by specifying the following URL:
• For Web (JSP):
http://
IPAddress:PortNumber/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Mobile Server (JSP):
http://

243 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

IPAddress:PortNumber
/MicroStrategyMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://IPAddress:PortNumber/MicroStrategyOM/servlet/mstrOM
Where IPAddress is the IP address of the Oracle machine and PortNumber is the
port number used by the Oracle Application Server. The servlet name at the end of
the URLs listed above are case-sensitive, so be sure to use the correct case when
typing the servlet name.
2 When prompted for a user name and password, specify the values you used earlier
when creating the user mapped to the admin security role (see Deploying using the
Oracle Enterprise Manager, page 242 above).
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), you can now launch the
MicroStrategy project. In a Web browser, access MicroStrategy Web (JSP) using this
URL:
http://
IPAddress:PortNumber/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb
Where IPAddress is the IP address of the Oracle machine and PortNumber is the
port number used by the Oracle Application Server.

Deploying with JBoss (Windows)

This chapter provides information used to deploy and configure MicroStrategy JSP
applications in a JBoss environment. You can use the steps provided below to deploy
MicroStrategy Web (JSP), MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), or MicroStrategy
Operations Manager (JSP):
• Preconfiguration information, page 245: configuration that must occur before you
begin deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations
Manager (JSP).

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 244

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations Manager, page 246:

instructions for deploying, including step-by step procedures.

Preconfiguration information
This section provides the preconfiguration information necessary to deploy
MicroStrategy JSP applications on JBoss on your machine.
This section uses the following configuration. While your setup may vary slightly, for
example, you may have different versions of these applications, the overall process
remains the same.

Requirement Recommended

Operating system Windows 2008 Enterprise Edition SP2 (on x64)

Application server JBoss 7.4.x

JDK (missing or bad snippet)

Configuring the JDK

If you have not installed Oracle JDK yet, download them from the
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html website.

When you go to the download site, you may be presented with a number of
software options. These might include terms such as JRE, JDK, and Java SDK.
You must install a developer kit (which can be termed JDK or SDK) rather than
installing only the JRE.

To configure the JDK, a system variable must point to the folder where you install
the JDK. If you install the JDK to a simple folder path such as C:\ then setting
the system variable is easier and more likely to be correct.

After you install the Oracle JDK, you must configure it.

To configure the JDK

1 On your Windows machine, access the environment variables using the steps below:

The third-party products discussed below are manufactured by vendors

independent of MicroStrategy, and the steps to configure these products is
subject to change. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps
to access and modify the environment variables.

a From the Start menu, select Computer. The Computer dialog box opens.
b Click System properties. The System dialog box opens.
c Click Advanced system settings. The System Properties dialog box opens.

245 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

d Click Environment Variables. The Environment Variables dialog box opens.

2 Under System Variables, click New to create a system variable. The New System
Variable dialog box opens.
3 In the Variable Name box, type JAVA_HOME.
4 In the Variable Value box, specify the destination folder where you installed the JDK
and click OK.
For example, if the fully qualified path to your JDK executable is
C:\jsdk1.6.0\bin\java.exe, the value of your JAVA_HOME variable is
C:\jsdk1.6.0.

If you have installed JDK under the Program Files folder, type Progra~1 in
the destination folder; otherwise the system does not recognize the folder. For
example, C:\Progra~1\jsdk1.6.0.

Installing JBoss
You can download and install JBoss from the following website:
http://www.jboss.org/jbossas/downloads
Keep track of the location in which you install JBoss, as this location is used later
(referred to as JBOSS_HOME) to configure JBoss with a MicroStrategy JSP application
deployment.

Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or

Operations Manager
Assuming you have made all the necessary configurations described above, you can begin
deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), Mobile Server (JSP), or Operations Manager (JSP)
with JBoss. This involves the following steps:
1 Deploying using JBoss as a stand-alone Web container, page 246
2 Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications, page 247
3 Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 248

Deploying using JBoss as a stand-alone Web container

To deploy MicroStrategy JSP applications using JBoss as a stand-

alone Web container

1 Locate the WAR file for your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in Locating
the WAR file, page 191.
2 Copy the WAR file to the JBOSS_HOME\server\default\deploy directory.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 246

Installation and Configuration Guide

3 To start JBoss, browse to JBOSS_HOME\bin. Then run the following command:

run.bat -b 0.0.0.0
Your MicroStrategy JSP application is deployed automatically, based on the following:
• If you have configured JBoss to deploy an exploded WAR file, which is often the
default behavior, a folder is created within the JBOSS_
HOME\server\default\deploy directory:
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategy by default.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategyMobile by default.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), the folder is named
MicroStrategyOM by default.
• If you have configured JBoss to deploy an unexploded WAR file, the configuration
files are created within the system’s default temporary file directory. For Windows
systems, the temporary file directory is commonly defined by the TMP environment
variable:
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), a /microstrategy/web-
Version/ folder is created within the temporary file directory, where Version
is the version number for the MicroStrategy Web (JSP) product. Within this
folder location, various configuration files can be found within the WEB-INF
folder and its subfolders.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), a
/microstrategy/mobile-Version/ folder is created within the temporary
file directory, where Version is the version number for the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server (JSP) product. Within this folder location, various configuration
files can be found within the WEB-INF folder and its subfolders.
▫ When deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), a
/microstrategy/ipa-Version/ folder is created within the temporary file
directory, where Version is the version number for the MicroStrategy
Operations Manager (JSP) product. Within this folder location, various
configuration files can be found within the WEB-INF folder and its subfolders.

Configuring administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

To allow users authorized to access MicroStrategy Web Administrator, MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator, or Operations Manager, you must create the users and
assign them the role of admin under the JBoss user configuration files. The steps to
configure this access are provided below.

To configure administrative access to MicroStrategy JSP applications

1 Browse to the directory JBOSS_HOME\server\default\conf, where JBOSS_

HOME is the location in which you installed JBoss.

247 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

2 Create the following two files within this directory:

▫ users.properties
▫ roles.properties
3 Open the users.properties file in a text editor.
4 Include one line for each user to grant administrative access to the Web
Administrator, Mobile Server Administrator, and Operations Manager, using the
following syntax:
user_id=user_password
For example, you create UserA and UserB with passwords 1234 and 5678 respectively
using the following syntax:
UserA=1234
UserB=5678
5 Save your changes and close the users.properties file.
6 Open the roles.properties file in a text editor.
7 Include one line for each user you included in the users.properties file and
grant them administrative access, using the following syntax:
user_id=admin
For example, you define UserA and UserB to have administrative access using the
following syntax:
UserA=admin
UserB=admin
8 Save your changes and close the roles.properties file.
9 To start JBoss, browse to JBOSS_HOME\bin. Then run the following command:
run.bat -b 0.0.0.0
Now you can access and configure your MicroStrategy JSP application, as described in
Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page, page 248.

Accessing the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

You can use the steps below to access the administrative page for your MicroStrategy JSP
application.

To access the MicroStrategy JSP application administrative page

1 In a Web browser, access the administrative page by specifying the following URL:
• For Web (JSP):
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWebAdmin

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 248

Installation and Configuration Guide

• For Mobile Server (JSP):

http://
localhost:8080/MicroStrategyMobile/servlet/mstrWebAdmin
• For Operations Manager (JSP):
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategyOM/servlet/mstrOM
The servlet names at the end of the URLs listed above are case-sensitive. Make sure
to use the correct case when typing the servlet name. If the application server is
enabled with security, a dialog box related to the administrator authentication opens.
2 When prompted for a user name and password, type the user name for the
administrator user you created in the roles.properties file and the login
information in the users.properties file.
3 After you are authenticated:
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), the MicroStrategy Web
Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence Server.
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP), the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server Administrator page appears. Add and connect to an Intelligence
Server. Once connected, click Mobile Configuration to configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile applications to communicate with Mobile Server and
Intelligence Server. For steps on how to define this configuration, see the
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide. Creating a
configuration completes the steps required to deploy Mobile Server (JSP).
• If you are deploying MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP), you can begin to
monitor and manage your MicroStrategy server systems. For steps to create an
environment, see the Operations Manager Guide.
4 If you are deploying MicroStrategy Web (JSP), proceed to launch the MicroStrategy
Web project page. In a Web browser, access MicroStrategy Web project using this
URL:
http://localhost:8080/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb

Administering your MicroStrategy Web

deployment
You configure and manage MicroStrategy Web connections to Intelligence Servers in the
MicroStrategy Web Administrator page.

Enabling users to install MicroStrategy Office from

Web
From the MicroStrategy Web Administrator page, you can designate the installation
directory path to MicroStrategy Office, and also determine whether or not a link to
Office installation information appears in the MicroStrategy Web interface.

249 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Prerequisites
• You must install and deploy MicroStrategy Web Services to allow the installation of
MicroStrategy Office from MicroStrategy Web. For information on deploying
MicroStrategy Web Services, see the MicroStrategy Office User Guide.

To specify the path to MicroStrategy Office and determine whether or

not users can install MicroStrategy Office from Web

1 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, MicroStrategy Tools, and
then Web Administrator. The MicroStrategy Web Administrator page opens.

If your server is not connected, click Connect.

2 Underneath Web Server on the left, click MicroStrategy Office. The

MicroStrategy Office settings page opens.
3 In the Path to MicroStrategy Office Installation field, type the base URL of
your MicroStrategy Web Services machine, for example:
http://server:port/Web_Services_virtual_
directory/Office

MicroStrategy Web automatically attaches /Lang_

xxxx/officeinstall.htm to the end of the URL, where Lang_xxxx
refers to the currently defined language in MicroStrategy Web. For example, if
the language in MicroStrategy Web is set to English, a completed URL may
appear as follows:

http://localhost/MicroStrategyWS/office/Lang_
1033/officeinstall.htm
4 Test the URL path by clicking Go. If the path you specified is correct, the
MicroStrategy Office Installation page is displayed.
5 Click your browser's Back button to return to the Web Administration -
MicroStrategy Office settings page.
6 To ensure that an Install MicroStrategy Office link is displayed at the top
of users’ project selection and login pages in MicroStrategy Web, select the Show
link to installation page for all users on the Projects and Login pages
check box. When users click the 'Install MicroStrategy Office' link, a page opens with
instructions on how to install MicroStrategy Office on their machine.
7 Click Save to save the settings.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 250

Installation and Configuration Guide

Using absolute paths to share configuration

files
By default, absolute paths are not used for the configuration files of your MicroStrategy
Web, Mobile, or Operations Manager deployments. You can modify the
microstrategy.xml file to reference configuration files using absolute paths. By
using absolute paths, you can allow the same configuration files to be accessed by
multiple systems. For example, absolute paths can be used in a clustered environment in
which you want all instances of the web server to access the same MicroStrategy Web or
Mobile configuration files.
Below is an example of some relative paths that are included in the
microstrategy.xml file by default:
<parameter name="serverConfigFilesDefaultLocation"
value="/WEB-INF/xml/" />
<parameter name="serverLogFilesDefaultLocation"
value="/WEB-INF/log/" />
You can modify these to use absolute paths, as shown in the examples below:
<parameter name="serverConfigFilesDefaultLocation"
value="ABSOLUTE:/usr/User1/MicroStrategy/xml/" />
<parameter name="serverLogFilesDefaultLocation"
value="ABSOLUTE:/usr/User1/MicroStrategy/xml/log/" />

Configuring third-party data sources for

importing data
You can use MicroStrategy Web to import data from different data sources, such as an
Excel file, a table in a database, the results of a Freeform SQL query, or other data
sources, into MicroStrategy metadata, with minimum project design requirements.
To import data from the following data sources, configure a secure connection between
your third-party data source and MicroStrategy Web:
• Dropbox
• Google Analytics
• Google BigQuery
• Google Drive
• Facebook
• Salesforce.com
• Twitter

251 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

The steps below show you how to make these third-party data sources available for
import into MicroStrategy Web.

Prerequisites
• Your third-party data source environment contains the data you plan to integrate in
MicroStrategy Web. You also need the proper credentials to perform some of the
steps below. For example, you need a Salesforce.com login with developer credentials
to perform some of the steps provided below.
• You have deployed MicroStrategy Web so that it uses secure, encrypted
communications. For steps to enable secure communications for your MicroStrategy
Web deployment, refer to the System Administration Guide.
• If you are connecting to Salesforce.com, to ensure proper numeric value integration
and formatting when using Data Import, your Salesforce.com reports must use the
English locale. If you use a different locale for your Salesforce.com reports, you can
still integrate this data into MicroStrategy using Data Import if you connect to
Salesforce.com using the MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Salesforce. For steps to
configure this type of a connection to Salesforce.com, see MicroStrategy ODBC
Driver for Salesforce, page 394.

To configure a connection between a third-party data source and

MicroStrategy Web for Data Import

1 Access the administrative options for your third-party data source. For example, if
you are integrating data from Salesforce.com, log in to Salesforce.com by accessing
https://login.salesforce.com/.
2 You must configure MicroStrategy Web as a remote access application for the third-
party data source. For the steps to define remote access applications in your third-
party data source, refer to your third-party documentation.
When configuring MicroStrategy Web as a remote access application, you must
define the callback URL as the URL to access MicroStrategy Web, including the
event 3172. Depending on how you deployed MicroStrategy Web, the syntax for this
URL can take one of the following forms:
• For MicroStrategy Web (ASP.NET) deployments:
https://
WebServer
/
WebApplicationName
/asp/Main.aspx?evt=3172&src=Main.aspx.3172
• For MicroStrategy Web (JSP) deployments:
https://
WebServer
:
PortNumber

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 252

Installation and Configuration Guide

/
WebApplicationName
/servlet/mstrWeb?evt=3172&src=mstrWeb.3172
In the example URLs above:
• WebServer is the full domain name of your web server that is hosting
MicroStrategy Web. Ensure that you use the full domain name rather than using
an IP address, as using an IP address can require re-authentication when making
the connection.
• PortNumber is the port number of your web server.
• WebApplicationName is the name of the MicroStrategy Web application. The
default name for the MicroStrategy Web application is MicroStrategy.
3 When you save MicroStrategy Web as a remote access application, your third-party
data source provides a Client ID and a Client Secret. Save these two values as they are
required later to configure the connection.
4 Restart the web server that hosts MicroStrategy Web. The next time you log in to
Web and use Data Import, the data source is now an available option.
5 When connecting to your data source using Data Import in MicroStrategy Web, you
must supply the Client ID and Client Secret provided by the data source. Additionally,
the callback URL is the MicroStrategy Web URL you used above to configure
MicroStrategy Web as a remote access application for your data source. The Client
ID, Client Secret, and Callback URL are all defined as OAuth parameters of the
connection to your data source using Data Import.
For steps to use Data Import to integrate data into MicroStrategy, refer to the
MicroStrategy Web Help.

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the steps to deploy MicroStrategy Web, Mobile Server, or Operations
Manager, you can continue your setup and configuration. To help guide the rest of your
installation and configuration steps, refer to the section Installation and configuration
checklists, page 48 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation, for installation and
configuration checklists.

253 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 7
SETTING UP DOCUMENTS
AND HTML DOCUMENTS
This chapter explains the setup required for the Intelligence Server Universal to execute
HTML documents and Report Services documents on UNIX and Linux platforms.
This chapter includes the following sections:
Prerequisites 254
Executing documents and HTML documents in UNIX/Linux 255
Configuring your MicroStrategy installation 260

Prerequisites
This chapter assumes the following:
• You are familiar with UNIX or Linux.
• You are familiar with MicroStrategy Developer and MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
Universal.
• You are familiar with MicroStrategy HTML documents and Report Services
documents.
• You have a Report Services product license if you are using Report Services
documents. HTML documents do not require a Report Services product license.
• You have installed MicroStrategy Developer on a Windows machine.
• You have installed MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal on a UNIX or Linux
machine.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 254

Installation and Configuration Guide

Note the following:

• Some of the steps described in this document may require root access
permissions.
• You must perform extra configuration steps to allow Report Services
documents to support non-Western European fonts on a UNIX system.
For more information, see Graph and document support of non-
Western European fonts, page 422 of Appendix , Troubleshooting.

Executing documents and HTML documents in

UNIX/Linux
A MicroStrategy Report Services document contains objects representing data coming
from one or more reports, as well as positioning and formatting information. Report
Services documents help format data from multiple reports in a single display and can be
used for presentations. When you create a document, you can specify the data that
appears, control the layout, formatting, grouping, and subtotaling of data and specify the
position of page breaks. In addition, you can insert pictures and draw borders in the
document.

In this chapter, the term document signifies a Report Services document. For
additional information on Report Services documents, refer to the Document
Creation Guide.

An HTML document is a container for formatting, displaying, and distributing multiple

reports on the same page, or at the same time within a project. You can create
dashboards and scorecards to display a group of reports within the MicroStrategy
platform.
HTML documents are created using MicroStrategy Developer. Before creating or
executing HTML documents, you must specify the HTML document directory using the
Project Configuration dialog box in MicroStrategy Developer. The HTML document
directory stores HTML templates that are required by the MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server Universal for executing HTML documents. You can store the HTML document
directory on a UNIX or Linux platform, but you must share the directory with the
Windows platform that includes MicroStrategy Developer. For more information on
setting up the HTML document directory on a UNIX or Linux platform, see Setup for
creating and executing HTML documents, page 255.

For additional information on HTML documents, see the HTML Documents

chapter in the Advanced Reporting Guide.

Setup for creating and executing HTML documents

HTML documents can only be created with MicroStrategy Developer on a Windows
platform, but they can be stored and executed from a directory within a UNIX or Linux
platform. The directory that stores the HTML documents must be accessible on the
computer with Intelligence Server Universal and the Windows computer with Developer.

255 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Using the Project Configuration dialog box in MicroStrategy Developer, you must specify
the location of the HTML document directory as an absolute path. This document
directory can be on a local machine or on a remote machine. Users require appropriate
read and write permissions to access this directory. When MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server Universal executes HTML documents, it requires read permission to the HTML
document directory to access the HTML files.
For the procedure of setting up an HTML document directory between Windows and
UNIX and Linux computers below, the following assumptions are made:
• You have installed MicroStrategy Developer on a Windows computer and installed
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal on a UNIX or Linux computer.

Developer can only be installed on a Windows computer.

• MicroStrategy Developer users have at least read permissions to the HTML

document directory for executing existing HTML documents. Write permissions to
the directory are required for MicroStrategy Developer users to create new HTML
documents.
• For the file paths described in the procedure below, machine-name is used to
represent the name of the machine you store the HTML document directory on. For
example, if you store the directory on a machine named UNIX1, machine-name
should be replaced with UNIX1. This machine must have Samba installed to provide
access to the folder on a Windows computer.
• You must have root permissions on any UNIX or Linux computer used to set up the
HTML document directory. This includes the computer that stores the HTML
document directory as well as any computer that must be setup to access the
directory.

To set up the HTML document directory

1 Create a directory to hold the HTML document directory on the desired UNIX or
Linux computer. This procedure assumes that the path of the HTML document
directory is machine-name:/share/htmldocuments. This is the machine that
is referenced as machine-name in the steps below. To create this directory, enter
the commands below:
# cd /
# mkdir share
# cd share
# mkdir htmldocuments
2 Install Samba software on the UNIX or Linux computer that you created the HTML
documents directory in the step above. With this software, the HTML documents
directory is accessible to the Windows computer with MicroStrategy Developer
installed. You can get the latest version of Samba at http://www.samba.org.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 256

Installation and Configuration Guide

Notice that Samba uses a .org extension and not the more common .com
extension. Using a .com extension takes you to an incorrect website.

3 Share the directory machine-name:/share across the network through NFS. For
example, you must share UNIX1:/share. Make sure read and write permissions are
set for the share. This step allows other UNIX/Linux computers to access the
directory.
4 Create a Samba share, named “share”, with read and write permissions that points to
the directory machine-name:/share. For example, you must share
UNIX1:/share.This step allows Windows computers to access the directory.
The Samba share is created in the Samba smb.conf file. For specific instructions on
how to setup a Samba share, refer to the Samba website at
http://www.samba.org.
5 Restart Samba.
6 Mount the HTML document directory on the computer that has the Intelligence
Server installed on it. Root privileges are required for this.
On the computer with Intelligence Server, type the command su and the root
password at the command prompt to log in as a superuser, or log in as root. The
command prompt changes to the pound sign (#). Perform the commands below:

In the commands below, machine-name refers to the machine name of the

computer where you stored the HTML documents directory and created an
NFS and Samba share. This may be a different name than the computer that
you are mounting the directory on.

The final mount command contains a space between /htmldocuments and

/machine-name.

cd /
mkdir machine-name
cd machine-name
mkdir share
cd share
mkdir htmldocuments
cd /
mount machine-name:/share/htmldocuments /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments
7 You can cache the connection to the UNIX/Linux HTML documents directory from
the Windows computer so that you are not prompted for authentication each time
the directory is accessed:

257 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

a From the Windows computer that has MicroStrategy Developer installed, click
Start, and select Run. The Run dialog box opens.
b Type \\machine-name\share\htmldocuments, and click OK to open the
top-level shared HTML documents directory. For example, type
\\UNIX1\share\htmldocuments.

This must be performed every time you restart the computer.

8 Using the Project Configuration dialog box in MicroStrategy Developer, set the
HTML document directory as an absolute path by following the steps below:
a In Developer, right-click the project associated with the HTML documents and
select Project Configuration. The Project Configuration dialog box opens.
b Expand Project definition and click Advanced. The Project Configuration -
Advanced options are displayed.
c In the HTML document directory box, type the absolute path \\machine-
name\share\htmldocuments. For example, type
\\UNIX1\share\htmldocuments.
d Click OK to accept the changes.
9 Create a directory named xsls under the HTML document directory and copy the
XSL files you require for creating HTML documents to the xsls directory,
/machine-name/share/htmldocuments/xsls. If you stored XSL files in a
different directory or did not copy them from their original default directory, you
must copy them into the new xsls directory. For example, the default HTML
document directory for the Tutorial project is
Program Files\MicroStrategy\Tutorial Reporting.
10 If you want to insert images into the HTML document, create a directory named
images under the HTML document directory, and copy the images to the directory
/machine-name/share/htmldocuments/images.
You are now ready to create and execute your HTML documents. Remember to create
your HTML documents in the HTML document directory, otherwise, Intelligence Server
cannot execute the HTML documents correctly.

Setup for executing existing HTML documents

If you have created HTML documents prior to establishing a connection between the
HTML document directory on the UNIX or Linux machine with MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server and the Windows machine with MicroStrategy Developer, you must
make sure that all the files used for an HTML document are copied to the shared HTML
document directory. After the connection is established, you should always create the
HTML documents in the shared HTML document directory. Once the existing files are
copied, you can execute the HTML documents using Intelligence Server.
In the procedure of setting up existing HTML documents, the following assumptions are
made:
• You have completed all the steps listed in the section Setup for creating and
executing HTML documents, page 255.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 258

Installation and Configuration Guide

• The location of the HTML document directory is /machine-

name/share/htmldocuments. For the file paths described in the procedure
below, machine-name is used to represent the name of the machine on which you
store the HTML document directory. For example, if you store the directory on a
machine named UNIX1, machine-name should be replaced with UNIX1.

To set up existing HTML documents for execution

1 Copy the HTML file for any existing HTML document to /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments.
2 View the source code of each HTML file and copy the XSL file used by each HTML
document in an appropriate directory under /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments.
For example, if the location of the XSL file in the source code is
xsl="\xsls\myxsl.xsl, then copy myxsl.xsl to /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments/xsls. If the location of the XSL file in the source
code is xsl="\myxsl.xsl, then copy myxsl.xsl to /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments.
3 View the source code for the images used by each HTML document in an
appropriate directory under /machine-name/share/htmldocuments.
For example, if the location of the image file in the source code is
\images\myimage.gif, then copy myimage.gif to /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments/images. If the location of the XSL file in the
source code is \myimage.gif, then copy myimage.gif to /machine-
name/share/htmldocuments.
You are now ready to execute your HTML documents.

Setup for executing Report Services documents

A MicroStrategy Report Services document is used to format data from multiple reports.
These documents can be exported to PDF format. To execute documents and export
them to PDF format using MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal in a UNIX or
Linux environment, you must perform some additional setup tasks.
When Intelligence Server Universal is running on a UNIX or Linux platform, all fonts are
converted to the Courier New font for:
• Reports exported to PDF format
• Report Services documents
• Graphs contained in HTML documents
• Graphs displayed in MicroStrategy Web
This occurs because the fonts required by the PDF component are missing from UNIX
and Linux machines running Intelligence Server Universal. The missing fonts may
include Microsoft True Type fonts.

259 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy does not distribute or license Microsoft fonts, and therefore cannot
package Microsoft fonts with Intelligence Server Universal.

To resolve this issue, you must install the font files in the PDFGeneratorFiles folder
within the MicroStrategy installation path on the UNIX or Linux machine, as described
below.

To copy fonts to your UNIX or Linux machine

1 Log in to your UNIX or Linux machine that hosts Intelligence Server Universal.
2 Install the Microsoft True Type fonts. Refer to the following resources for
information on licensing requirements for and installing Microsoft True Type fonts:
• http://www.microsoft.com/typography/RedistributionFAQ.mspx
• http://www.ascendercorp.com/msfonts/msfonts_main.html
• http://corefonts.sourceforge.net/
3 Copy the font files into the INSTALL_PATH/PDFGeneratorFiles directory,
where INSTALL_PATH is the directory you specified as the MicroStrategy install
directory during installation.
4 To update the list of fonts available, you must restart the Intelligence Server.

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the steps to set up documents and HTML documents for UNIX and
Linux, you can continue your setup and configuration. To help guide the rest of your
installation and configuration steps, refer to the section Installation and configuration
checklists, page 48 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation, for installation and
configuration checklists.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 260

 8
AUTOMATED INSTALLATION
ON WINDOWS
This chapter explains the various possibilities for performing fully automated and
unattended installations within the MicroStrategy platform. This includes customizations
to the installation routines available with the product. It explains the different resources
you can use to deploy MicroStrategy products through various scenarios including:
• Deploying the MicroStrategy platform across the network through the Microsoft
System Management Server (SMS) or its equivalent (for example, IBM Tivoli)
• Embedding the MicroStrategy platform within third party custom applications and
other installation routines
• Customizing the MicroStrategy installation to meet the various environment-specific
requirements for a given site
This chapter provides the following information:
• The different types of installations that can be performed with MicroStrategy
products.
• How to perform a fully automated MicroStrategy installation by modifying various
installation parameters in Windows ini-like response files.
• How to customize certain aspects of the MicroStrategy installation to meet various
site-specific requirements for multi-user environments, such as strict standards for
software deployment to user communities and so on.

Automated and silent installations require advanced techniques such as creating

and running response.ini files. Therefore, automated and silent installations should
be handled by system administrators with full knowledge of the environment and
the desired MicroStrategy installation.

Before installing MicroStrategy products, you should refer to Chapter 1, Planning Your
Installation for important pre-installation information.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 261

Installation and Configuration Guide

Installation log file

Before you begin to learn about automated installation options, it is important to know
about the installation log file. The setup program generates a log file in text format. This
log file contains records of all actions performed by the setup program and by other
executable files related to installation. The installation log file can be particularly helpful
if you encounter errors during the installation process. For example, the log can tell you
if a registry key or path was not added or if a critical file was not registered successfully.
The setup.exe file writes to this log file. The log file data includes:
• Update dates
• Machine specifications
• User selections
• List of files to be registered
• List of files that do not require registration
• List of registry entries
• Identification of files that fail during registration
• Installation activity such as performance counter loading and DSN creation
• Reboot time file registration results
The default location for the install.log file is:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy
• 64-bit Windows environments: Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy
Both the location and the name can be changed. You can specify the log file name and
location in the following places:
• Command line, reading the parameter LogFile. For example:
setup.exe --LogFile=“C:\install.log”
• Response file in [LogFile]. See Configuring a response.ini file to install
MicroStrategy, page 263 for more information.

Methods of installation
The installation methods discussed in this chapter are:
• Installing and configuring with a response.ini file, page 263
• Silent installation, page 311

262 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Installing and configuring with a response.ini

file
The response.ini file can facilitate the installation and setup of MicroStrategy
products by allowing you to progress through the installation and project creation
processes with a single keystroke. A response.ini file is an initialization file that is
used to send parameters or selections to the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard. This
allows you to run it silently as all the options are pre-selected in that file. This section
describes how to create and use response.ini for the following tasks:
• Configuring a response.ini file to install MicroStrategy, page 263
• Configuring your installation with a response.ini file, page 309
• Uninstalling with a response.ini file, page 309

Configuring a response.ini file to install MicroStrategy

The response.ini file for installation allows you to automate certain aspects of the
installation by modifying a Windows ini-like response file. This option is typically
implemented by:
• OEM applications that embed MicroStrategy installations within other products
• IT departments who want to have more control over desktop installations
The response.ini file specifies all the selections you want to make during the
installation in the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard. You can either run it with all the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard options that are pre-selected, or run it without having
to use the wizard at all.

The response.ini file should not be confused with the setup.iss file, which
is used by the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard to perform silent installation.
When both response.ini and setup.iss are included in the setup,
response.ini overrides setup.iss. For details on the setup.iss file, see
Silent installation, page 311.

Component dependencies
When you use a response.ini file to install MicroStrategy products, there are some
key dependencies among separate components you should be aware of. The products
listed below require either pre-installed software or certain MicroStrategy components to
be selected to successfully install the products with a response.ini file:
• MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager requires MicroStrategy Command Manager to be
included in the installation.
• MicroStrategy Delivery Engine, MicroStrategy Subscription Portal, MicroStrategy
Tutorial – Delivery Installation and MicroStrategy Tutorial – Delivery Configuration

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 263

Installation and Configuration Guide

require MicroStrategy Narrowcast Administrator and SequeLink ODBC Socket

Server to be included in the installation.
• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Administrator requires SequeLink ODBC Socket
Server to be included in the installation.
• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Subscription Portal requires SequeLink ODBC
Socket Server to be included in the installation.
• MicroStrategy Function Plug-in Wizard requires Microsoft Visual C++ to be installed
before running your response.ini file.
• MicroStrategy Analytic Modules requires MicroStrategy Developer or a combination
of MicroStrategy Analyst and MicroStrategy Architect to be included in the
installation.
• MicroStrategy Office can be installed along with other MicroStrategy components by
using a response.ini file. However, you can also install MicroStrategy Office as
its own stand-alone installation, which lets you install only MicroStrategy Office. For
information on using the stand-alone installation of MicroStrategy Office, including
performing the installation silently, see Silent installation of MicroStrategy Office,
page 314.
• To use Usher Security Server and Usher Network Manager, they are required to be
included in the installation.
• Usher Analytics requires Usher Security Server and Usher Network Manager to be
included in the installation.
• Usher Professional requires Usher Security Server, Usher Network Manager and
Usher Analytics to be included in the installation.

Creating a response.ini file

You can create a response.ini file in any text editor and save the file as
response.ini in the desired folder.

You must save the file as ANSI encoding.

The following tables describe the parameters and options for the all the sections, such as
Installer, Paths, and so on in the response.ini file. It is followed by sample
response.ini files for your reference.

The options are case sensitive, therefore they must be entered as indicated in the
tables below.

264 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Installer

Options Description

[Installer] Section that begins the installation.

ExpressMode = TRUE or False. Indicates whether the installation uses Express

Install or Custom Install.
HideAllDialogs = TRUE or FALSE. Indicates whether the installation uses all default
values. FALSE displays all the dialog boxes and you must browse
using the Next buttons. The default is FALSE.

LogFile = Location where the install.log file is generated. If left empty, it

takes the default location and file name of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy\
install.log.
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy\install.lo
g.

CreateShortcuts = TRUE or FALSE. TRUE creates the shortcuts for MicroStrategy

products, tools, and documentation. The default is TRUE.

PreventReboot = TRUE or FALSE. TRUE prevents the machine from rebooting after
installation is done. Note the following conditions:
• If both ForceReboot = TRUE and PreventReboot =
TRUE, then PreventReboot applies first.
• If both ForceReboot and PreventReboot are FALSE and
HideDialog for [Finish] is set to TRUE, then the machine
reboots only if it is required.

The default is FALSE.

ForceReboot = TRUE or FALSE. TRUE reboots the machine after the installation is
done. The default is FALSE.

EnterpriseManagerOve TRUE or FALSE. If you select FALSE, the warehouse and metadata
rwrite = files are not updated but the rest of the files for Enterprise Manager
are updated. This prompt only impacts the files in the Microsoft
Access database. The default is FALSE.

ShowConfigWizard = TRUE or FALSE. When using silent install, set to FALSE to prevent
the Configuration Wizard from coming up after reboot. The default is
TRUE.

RunConfigWizard = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to specify whether to run the
Configuration Wizard. The default is FALSE.

ConfigWizardResponse Specify the name of the response file for the Configuration Wizard;

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 265

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

File = otherwise, it takes the default name of response.ini.

For more details on configuring the response.ini file for the
Configuration Wizard, see Configuring your installation with a
response.ini file, page 309.

BackupFiles = TRUE or FALSE. If you set the value to TRUE, it creates a backup of
the following files:
• *.pds

• *.xsl

• *.asp

• *.css

• *.js

• *.sql

The default is FALSE.

StopIIS = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to stop Internet Information Services
(IIS) during installation. The default is FALSE.

AnalyticsOverwrite = TRUE or FALSE. This option overwrites the Analytics Modules from
a previous install. The default is FALSE.

TutDeliveryOverwrite TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to overwrite the Delivery Tutorial
= from a previous installation. The default is FALSE.

CheckRenameOperation TRUE or FALSE. In some instances, as a result of a previous

s = installation or an uninstall, certain files may be missing or
irreplaceable during installation. Therefore, you are prompted to do
one of the following:
• Reboot at the beginning of installation to replace this file. It is
recommended that you select this option.
• Continue with the installation at the risk of the software not
functioning properly.

If you enter FALSE, the prompt does not display. The default is
TRUE.

EnableTracing = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to trace the setup process in a log
file that is saved in the Temp folder. The log file records errors that
are encountered during the installation. The default is FALSE.

EnableASPNETServices TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to enable the ASP.NET MicroStrategy
= Web Services extensions that IIS Admin requires. The default is
FALSE.

266 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

EnableASPServices = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to enable the ASP MicroStrategy
Web Services extensions that IIS Admin requires. The default is
FALSE.

ShowWelcomeScreen = TRUE or FALSE. Set to TRUE to display the Welcome screen after
reboot. The Welcome screen is displayed only once after reboot. The
default is TRUE.

PropertiesFilesOverw TRUE or FALSE. Set to TRUE to create new properties files. These
rite= files are related to the Tutorial Delivery component. The default is
FALSE, which uses the current version of the properties files. The
default is FALSE.

CheckTCPIP= TRUE or FALSE. Set to TRUE to check that the TCP/IP network
protocol is active. If set to FALSE, the setup doesn't check for it. The
default is TRUE.

CheckIIS= TRUE or FALSE. Set to TRUE to check for Internet Information

Services. The default is TRUE.

StopAllServices= TRUE or FALSE. Set to TRUE to stop all services required to be

stopped to complete a MicroStrategy installation. If set to FALSE,
the user is prompted if services need to be stopped. The default is
TRUE.

Setup Express Install

Options Description

[SetupExpress] Section that begins the installation.

HideDialog = TRUE or False. Indicates whether the installation uses Express Install or
Custom Install.

Paths

Options Description

[InitialPaths] Section for specifying the path for the products that you select to install.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 267

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

COMMONFILES = Location where the common files like response.ini, install.log,

and so on will be installed. If left empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\Common Files\MicroStrategy
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\Common Files\MicroStrategy

Developer = Location where Developer will be installed. If left empty, it takes the default
location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Desktop
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Desktop

ObjectManager = Location where Object Manager will be installed. If left empty, it takes the
default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Object Manager
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Object Manager

CommandManager Location where Command Manager will be installed. If left empty, it takes
= the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Command Manager
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Command Manager

EnterpriseManag Location where Enterprise Manager will be installed. If left empty, it takes
er = the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Enterprise Manager
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Enterprise Manager

Server = Location where the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server will be installed. If left
empty, it takes the default location of:
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Intelligence Server

268 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Web = Location where MicroStrategy Web will be installed. If left empty, it takes
the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Web ASPx
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Web ASPx

WebUniversal = Location where MicroStrategy Web Universal will be installed. If left empty, it
takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Web JSP
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Web JSP

WebServices = Location where MicroStrategy Web Services will be installed. If left empty, it
takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Web Services
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Web Services

WebServicesUniv Location where MicroStrategy Web Services Universal will be installed. If left
ersal = empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Web Services JSP
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Web Services JSP

Office = Location where MicroStrategy Office will be installed. If left empty, it takes
the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Office
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Office

TutorialReporti Location where MicroStrategy Tutorial - Reporting will be installed. If left

ng = empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Tutorial Reporting
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Tutorial Reporting

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 269

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

AnalyticsModule Location where the Analytics Modules will be installed. If left empty, it takes
s = the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Analytics Modules
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Analytics Modules

NCSAdminDeliver Location where the Narrowcast Server Delivery Engine will be installed. If
yEngine = left empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Narrowcast Server\
Delivery Engine
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Narrowcast Server\Delivery En
gine

SubscriptionPor Location where the Subscription Portal will be installed. If left empty, it
tal = takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Narrowcast Server\
Subscription Portal
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Narrowcast Server\Subscriptio
n Portal

TutorialDeliver Location where MicroStrategy Tutorial - Delivery will be installed. If left

y = empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Narrowcast Server\
Tutorial
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Narrowcast Server\Tutorial

IntegrityManage Location where MicroStrategy Integrity Manager will be installed. If left

r = empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Integrity Manager
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Integrity Manager

Mobile = Location where MicroStrategy Mobile will be installed. If left empty, it takes
the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Mobile Clients

270 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 

(x86)\MicroStrategy\Mobile Clients

MobileASPPath = Location where MicroStrategy Mobile Server ASP.NET will be installed. If left
empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Mobile Server ASPx
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Mobile Server ASPx

MobileJSPPath = Location where MicroStrategy Mobile Server JSP will be installed. If left
empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP

OperationsManag Location where MicroStrategy Operations Manager ASP.NET will be

erASP = installed. If left empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Operations Manager
 ASPx
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Operations Manager ASPx

OperationsManag Location where MicroStrategy Operations Manager JSP will be installed. If

erJSP = left empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Operations Manager
 JSP
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Operations Manager JSP

Portlets = Location where MicroStrategy Portlets will be installed. If left empty, it takes
the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Portlets
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\Portlets

MDXCubeProvider Location where the MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider will be installed. If left
= empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\MDX Cube Provider

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 271

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 

(x86)\MicroStrategy\MDX Cube Provider

GISConnectors = Location where the MicroStrategy GIS Connectors will be installed. If left
empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\GISConnectors
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\GISConnectors

SystemManager = Location where the MicroStrategy System Manager will be installed. If left
empty, it takes the default location of:
• 32-bit Windows environments:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\SystemManager
• 64-bit Windows environments: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy\SystemManager

Welcome dialog box

Options Description

[Welcome] Section for configuring the Welcome dialog box.

HideDialog TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is FALSE.
=

RemoveAll TRUE or FALSE. This option is for the uninstall process only. Setting it to TRUE
= removes all MicroStrategy products during the uninstall process. The default is
FALSE.
For an example of a response file used to uninstall all MicroStrategy products, see
Uninstalling with a response.ini file, page 309.

Customer Information dialog box

Options Description

[UserRegistration] Section for specifying the customer information.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

UserFirstName = Indicates the user name of the currently logged user or a user who is
already registered. If no information is provided, you cannot proceed
to the next page. If you are installing Usher, this is the first name of the

272 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Usher Security Administrator.

UserLastName = Indicates the user name of the currently logged user or a user who is
already registered. If no information is provided, you cannot proceed
to the next page. If you are installing Usher, this is the last name of the
Usher Security Administrator.

UserEmail = Indicates the email of the currently logged user, or a user who is
already registered. This email address is also used receive the badge
invitation for your Usher Security network. If no information is
provided, you cannot proceed.

CompanyName = The name of the company for which the software is registered. The
default is the company name in the registry. This is also the default
company name when your Usher Security network is created.

LicenseKey = Specify the license key for the software. If you do not specify the
license key, the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard will ask for it when it
reaches that step. By default it is blank for a fresh install or displays
the license key from a previous install.

Choose Destination Location dialog box

Options Description

[SuiteTarget] Section specifying the name of the target directory from where you can run
the MicroStrategy products.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is FALSE.

TargetDirectory Location of the root directory for the Program Files. The default is set to:
= • 32-bit Windows environment:
C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
• 64-bit Windows environment: C:\Program Files 
(x86)\MicroStrategy

Select Components dialog box

In the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, the Select Components dialog box contains
check boxes to select or clear for products to be installed. The
[ComponentSelection] options specify whether you want the following products to
be visible to the user. In addition, you can set the default selection for each product.

Options Description

[ComponentSelection] Equivalent to the Select Components dialog box

that you see during installation. For the
Visible option, you can either enter TRUE to

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 273

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

show a product or FALSE to hide it. If you do not

specify a TRUE or FALSE value for each product,
TRUE is used for all products. For the Select
option, you can enter TRUE to select the check
box next to a product. If you enter FALSE, the
check box next to the product is not selected.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box.

The default is FALSE.

AnalyticsModulesVisible = MicroStrategy Analytics Modules

ArchitectVisible = MicroStrategy Architect

CommandManagerVisible = MicroStrategy Command Manager

DeliveryEngineVisible = MicroStrategy Delivery Engine

DeveloperVisible = MicroStrategy Developer

AnalystVisible = MicroStrategy Analyst

EnterpriseManagerVisible = MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager

FunctionPluginVisible = MicroStrategy Function Plug-In Wizard

GISConnectorsVisible = MicroStrategy GIS Connectors

IntegrityManagerVisible = MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

IServerDistributionServicesVisible MicroStrategy Distribution Services

=

IServerOLAPServicesVisible = MicroStrategy OLAP Services

IServerReportServicesVisible = MicroStrategy Report Services

IServerTransactionServicesVisible MicroStrategy Transaction Services

=

IServerVisible = MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

MobileServerASPVisible = MicroStrategy Mobile Server (ASP.NET)

MobileServerJSPVisible = MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP)

MobileVisible = MicroStrategy Mobile

NCSAdminVisible = MicroStrategy Narrowcast Administrator

ObjectManagerVisible = MicroStrategy Object Manager

274 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

OfficeVisible = MicroStrategy Office

OperationsManagerASPVisible = MicroStrategy Operations Manager (ASP.NET)

OperationsManagerJSPVisible = MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP)

PortletsVisible = MicroStrategy Portlets

SequeLinkVisible = SequeLink ODBC Socket Server

ServerAdminVisible = MicroStrategy Server Administrator

SubscriptionPortalVisible = MicroStrategy Subscription Portal

SystemManagerVisible = MicroStrategy System Manager

MDXCubeProviderVisible = MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider

TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible = MicroStrategy Tutorial - Delivery Configuration

TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible = MicroStrategy Tutorial - Delivery Installation

WebAnalystVisible = MicroStrategy Web Analyst

WebProfessionalVisible = MicroStrategy Web Professional

WebReporterVisible = MicroStrategy Web Reporter

WebServerASPNETVisible = MicroStrategy Web Server (ASP.NET)

WebServerJSPVisible = MicroStrategy Web Server (JSP)

WebServicesASPNETVisible = MicroStrategy Web Services (ASP.NET)

WebServicesJSPVisible = MicroStrategy Web Services (JSP)

UsherServerVisible = Usher Security Server

UsherNetworkManagerVisible = Usher Network Manager

UsherAnalyticsVisible = Usher Analytics

UsherProfessionalVisible = Usher Professional

During the installation process in the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, the Select
Components dialog box contains check boxes to select or clear for products to be
installed. You can either specify TRUE to install a product or FALSE to uninstall it. If
you do not specify a TRUE or FALSE value for each product, the installation always uses
the most recent selection from a previous install.

This means that if you have a product installed and you do not specify a TRUE or
FALSE value, the product is upgraded.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 275

Installation and Configuration Guide

If you specify TRUE, the product check box is selected. The [ComponentSelection]
options specify whether the check box for each product will be selected or cleared.

Options Description

AnalyticsModulesSelect = MicroStrategy Analytics Modules

ArchitectSelect = MicroStrategy Architect

CommandManagerSelect = MicroStrategy Command Manager

DeliveryEngineSelect = MicroStrategy Delivery Engine

DeveloperSelect = MicroStrategy Developer

AnalystSelect = MicroStrategy Analyst

EnterpriseManagerSelect = MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager

FunctionPluginSelect = MicroStrategy Function Plug-In Wizard

GISConnectorsSelect = MicroStrategy GIS Connectors

IntegrityManagerSelect = MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

IServerDistributionServicesSelect = MicroStrategy Distribution Services

IServerOLAPServicesSelect = MicroStrategy OLAP Services

IServerReportServicesSelect = MicroStrategy Report Services

IServerSelect = MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

IServerTransactionServicesSelect = MicroStrategy Transaction Services

MobileSelect = MicroStrategy Mobile

MobileServerASPSelect = MicroStrategy Mobile Server (ASP.NET)

MobileServerJSPSelect = MicroStrategy Mobile Server (JSP)

NCSAdminSelect = MicroStrategy Narrowcast Administrator

ObjectManagerSelect = MicroStrategy Object Manager

OfficeSelect = MicroStrategy Office

OperationsManagerASPSelect = MicroStrategy Operations Manager

(ASP.NET)

OperationsManagerJSPSelect = MicroStrategy Operations Manager (JSP)

PortletsSelect = MicroStrategy Portlets

SequeLinkSelect = SequeLink ODBC Socket Server

276 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

ServerAdminSelect = MicroStrategy Server Administrator

SubscriptionPortalSelect = MicroStrategy Subscription Portal

SystemManagerSelect = MicroStrategy System Manager

MDXCubeProviderSelect = MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider

TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect = MicroStrategy Tutorial - Delivery

Configuration

TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect = MicroStrategy Tutorial - Delivery Installation

WebAnalystSelect = MicroStrategy Web Analyst

WebProfessionalSelect = MicroStrategy Web Professional

WebReporterSelect = MicroStrategy Web Reporter

WebServerASPNETSelect = MicroStrategy Web Server (ASP.NET)

WebServerJSPSelect = MicroStrategy Web Server JSP

WebServicesASPNETSelect = MicroStrategy Web Services (ASP.NET)

WebServicesJSPSelect = MicroStrategy Web Services (JSP)

UsherServerVisible = Usher Security Server

UsherNetworkManagerVisible = Usher Network Manager

UsherAnalyticsVisible = Usher Analytics

UsherProfessionalVisible = Usher Professional

Installation Files

Options Description

[IODSourceLocation] Section specifying the location of the files required to install the
MicroStrategy components you have selected for installation.
Specifying the location of the installation files is only required if you
have downloaded only a subset of the MicroStrategy installation files
and stored some of the files in another location. For steps to
determine the files required for your installation, see Creating custom
installation packages, page 46.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 277

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Style = Determines whether the required installation files are provided in a

folder or at a URL. You must define this parameter with one of the
following values:
• FILESERVER: Type this value if the required installation files are
stored in a folder on the local machine or a server machine. You must
also provide the location of the files using the SourceLocation
parameter.
• HTTP: Type this value if the required installation files are stored at an
unsecured URL. You must also provide the location of the files using the
URL parameter.
• HTTPS: Type this value if the required installation files are stored at a
secured URL. You must also provide the location of the files using the
URL parameter, as well as the user name and password to access the
URL using the UserName and Password parameters.

SourceLocation = Location of the folder that stores any required installation files. Type
the location of the local file path. If you store the files in a local folder,
do not provide a location in the URL parameter.

URL = Location of the URL for the HTTP or HTTPS location that stores any
required installation files. Type the URL for the location that stores any
required installation files. If you store the files at an HTTP or HTTPS
location, do not provide a location in the SourceLocation
parameter.

UserName = If you retrieve the installation files from a URL location, type a user
name that has access to the URL location. If there is no login required
to the URL or you retrieve the installation files from a local folder, you
can leave this field blank.

Password = If you retrieve the installation files from a URL location, type a
password for the user name. If there is no login required to the URL or
you retrieve the installation files from a local folder, you can leave this
field blank.

Usher Configuration

Options Description

[UsherConfig] Section that configures Usher Security Services.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box.

The default is FALSE.

ExpressSkipUsherConfig= TRUE or FALSE when ExpressMode= TRUE.

TRUE to skip Usher configuration in Express
Installation. Set to FALSE when ExpressMode=
FALSE.

278 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

CACertificateChain = Complete certificate chain for your SSL Server

Certificate that you obtained from you IT
Administrator. The path must be specified in an
absolute format such
asC:\folder\example.pem.

ServerCertificate = The SSL Server Certificate (.crt) file for your Windows
server. The path must be specified in an absolute
format such as C:\folder\example.crt.

ServerCertificateKey = The key file for your SSL Server Certificate (.crt). The
path must be specified in an absolute format such
C:\folder\example.key.

ServerCertificateKeyPasswordFile If your CA-signed certificate has a password, create

= a text file containing this password and enter the
text file location.

SMTPServer = SMTP Server used for Usher email service.

SMTPServerPort = SMTP Server Port.

SMTPUser = If your server is password protected, enter the

username for the server. This is optional.

SMTPUserPassword = If your server is password protected, enter the

password for the server. This is optional.

SMTPEmail = The email address that is authorized to send emails

from your SMTP server. This email address is used
to send badge invitations for your Usher Security
Network.

FQDN = The Fully Qualified Domain Name of your Windows

server.

Repository Configuration

Options Description

[MySQLDialog] MySQL is requires as a repository in Express Install or required by

Usher products in Custom Install.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

AgreeToDownloadMySQL= TRUE or FALSE.TRUE to allow the installed to download the

MySQL components for you. FALSE to follow the links below to
download the MySQL components yourself, being sure to save all
of the components to your Downloads folder. If not all the
components are placed correctly in your Downloads folder, the
Express Install or Custom Install with Usher products cannot
proceed.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 279

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Please note that if you choose TRUE, you are authorizing the
installer to download MySQL components on your behalf. These
MySQL components are open-source software provided under the
GPL licenses. These MySQL components are not provided by
MicroStrategy. For access to the source code for these MySQL
components, please visit please visit
http://www.mysql.com and related links.
MySQL:
http://dev.mysql.com/get/Downloads/MySQL-5.6/mysql-
5.6.28-winx64.zip
MySQL Connector/ODBC 5.3.4:
http://dev.mysql.com/get/Downloads/Connector-
ODBC/5.3/mysql-connector-odbc-5.3.4-winx64.msi
MySQL Connector/Java 5.1.22:
http://dev.mysql.com/get/Downloads/Connector-J/mysql-connector-
java-5.1.22.zip
MySQL Connector/Python 2.1.3
http://dev.mysql.com/get/Downloads/Connector-
Python/mysql-connector-python-2.1.3-py2.7-
winx64.msi
MySQL time zone description tables:
http://downloads.mysql.com/general/timezone_2015g_
posix.zip

MicroStrategy Web virtual directory

Options Description

[WebVirtualDirectory] Section that specifies the virtual directory to be used for the
MicroStrategy Web application.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

VirtualDirectory = Enter a name for the virtual directory. The default is

MicroStrategy.

RemoveVD = YES or NO. This option is for the uninstall only. Set this option to
remove an existing MicroStrategy Web virtual directory from a
previous installation. The default is NO.

280 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Mobile Server virtual directory

Options Description

[MobileVirtualDirectory] Section that specifies the virtual directory to be used for

the MicroStrategy Mobile Server applications.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The

default is FALSE.

VirtualDirectory = Enter a name for the virtual directory. The default is

MicroStrategyMobile.

ReconfigureVirtualDirectory TRUE or False. This option is relevant to upgrading

= MicroStrategy from a pre-9.0.1m version. TRUE replaces
the virtual directory used to support MicroStrategy Mobile
for BlackBerry with the new virtual directory specified for
MicroStrategy Mobile Server. For more information on
upgrade installations, see the Upgrade Guide.

RemoveVD = YES or NO. This option is for the uninstall only. Set this
option to remove an existing MicroStrategy Mobile Server
virtual directory from a previous installation. The default is
NO.

Health Center service account

Options Description

[HealthCenterServiceAccount] Section that configures the machine running

the silent installation as a Health Agent or
Master Health Agent.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog

box. The default is FALSE.

Port = Type the port number to use to connect to the

Health Agent machine. The default port is
44440.

AccessCode = Type the access code that must be provided by

Health Center to access this Health Agent. If
you leave this field blank, no access code is
required to access this Health Agent.

SkipAccountSetting = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE requires that the

machine is configured to be a Health Agent,
and you must supply the other information. The
default is TRUE, which skips the configuration
of the machine as a Health Agent.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 281

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Domain = Type the domain of a Windows login with full

administrative privileges under which to run the
Health Center service.

Login = Type the user name of a Windows login with full

administrative privileges under which to run the
Health Center service.

The user account used to run Health Center

must have full administrator privileges for
the local machine. If the administrator
default privileges have been modified for
the user account, connection errors can
occur.

Password = Type a valid password for the Windows login

provided.

MasterHealthAgent = TRUE or FALSE. TRUE specifies the current

machine as a Master Health Agent, which is
responsible for most of the Health Center
operations, such as scheduling system checks
and transmitting diagnostics packages to
MicroStrategy Technical Support. If you install
MicroStrategy Operations Manager, the default
is TRUE, otherwise the default is FALSE.

RepositoryPath = Type the location to store the Health Center

repository. The repository contains
configuration information about the Health
Center system, such as the list of machines on
the network and the MicroStrategy products
they have installed, and also the destination for
all exported diagnostics packages.

CustomerExperienceProgram = TRUE or FALSE. TRUE enrolls the installation

in the Customer Experience Improvement
Program. If you join the Customer Experience
Improvement Program, Health Center transmits
anonymous data about your system to
MicroStrategy. No report data or prompt
answers are collected or transmitted. All
information sent to MicroStrategy as a result of
this program is stored in the Census subfolder
of the Health Center Repository. The default is
FALSE.

MicroStrategy Operations Manager virtual directory

Options Description

[OperationsManagerVirtualDirectory] Section that specifies the virtual directory to be

282 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

used for MicroStrategy Operations Manager.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog

box. The default is FALSE.

VirtualDirectory = Enter a name for the virtual directory. The

default is MicroStrategyOM.

ReconfigureVirtualDirectory = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to TRUE if the

virtual directory for the MicroStrategy
Operations Manager should be reconfigured to
support a new virtual directory.

RemoveVD = YES or NO. This option is for the uninstall only.

Set this option to remove an existing
MicroStrategy Operations Manager virtual
directory from a previous installation. The
default is NO.

MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider virtual directory

Options Description

[MDXCubeProviderVirtualDirectory] Section that specifies the virtual directory to be

used for the MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box.

The default is FALSE.

VirtualDirectory = Enter a name for the virtual directory. The default

is MicroStrategyMDX.

ReconfigureVirtualDirectory = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to TRUE if the

virtual directory for the MicroStrategy MDX
Cube Provider should be reconfigured to support
a new virtual directory.

RemoveVD = YES or NO. This option is for the uninstall only. Set
this option to remove an existing MicroStrategy
MDX Cube Provider virtual directory from a
previous installation. The default is NO.

Subscription Portal virtual directory

Options Description

[PortalVirtualDirectory] Section that specifies the virtual directory to be used for

MicroStrategy Subscription Portal.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 283

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box . The

default is FALSE.

VirtualDirectory = Enter a name for the virtual directory. The default is

NarrowcastServer.

RemoveVD = YES or NO. This option is for the uninstall only. Set this option
to remove an existing MicroStrategy Subscription Portal virtual
directory from a previous installation. The default is NO.

MicroStrategy Web Services virtual directory

Options Description

[WebServicesDirectory] Section that specifies the virtual directory to be used for

MicroStrategy Web Services.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

VirtualDirectory = Enter a name for the virtual directory. The default is

MicroStrategyWS.

RemoveVD = YES or NO. This option is for the uninstall only. Set this option to
remove an existing MicroStrategy Subscription Portal virtual
directory from a previous installation. The default is NO.

Intelligence Server service account

Options Description

[IServerServiceAccount] Section specifying the Windows account for the MicroStrategy

Intelligence Server service. You have two options:
• bypass entering the account information
• enter the account information

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

SkipAccountSetting = TRUE or FALSE. Set TRUE to bypass the service account setting
in the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Setting dialog box. If you
bypass it, then the service runs with the local system account
that is installing the products. The default is FALSE.

Domain = Enter the domain where the account is located.

284 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

Login = Enter the user name of the account to use.

Password = Enter the password for the account.

ServiceStartup = AUTO or MANUAL. Select to set the Intelligence Server service

startup to be automatic or manual. The default is AUTO.

Narrowcast Server service account

Options Description

[NarrowcastServiceAccount] Section specifying the Windows account from which the

MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server service will run.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default
is FALSE.

SkipAccountSetting = TRUE or FALSE.

If you specify this value as FALSE, the service account
settings are not skipped and the MicroStrategy Narrowcast
Server setting dialog box is displayed. Specify the details of
the Windows account that the MicroStrategy Narrowcast
Server services will use to log on and click Next to proceed
with the installation process.

Domain = Enter the domain where the account is located.

Login = Enter the user name of the account to use.

Password = Enter the password for the account.

MicroStrategy Web Services and Web Services Universal URL setting

Options Description

[OfficeWebServicesURL] Section specifying the URL for MicroStrategy Web Services and
Web Services Universal.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

AllowBlankURL = TRUE or FALSE. Specify whether to allow a blank URL. The

installation routine validates the provided URL. If no URL is
provided, the user is informed that it has been left blank and
needs to be configured with the MicroStrategy Office Configuration
Tool. If this is set to TRUE, the user message is not displayed if the
URL is left blank. The default is FALSE.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 285

Installation and Configuration Guide

Options Description

URL = Enter a URL pointing to a valid MicroStrategy Web Services

installation, for example,
http://localhost/MicrostrategyWS/MSTRWS.asmx

MicroStrategy Office setting

Options Description

[MSOfficeLoadOptions] Section specifying the options that determine if the MicroStrategy

Office toolbar is loaded in the installed Microsoft Office
applications.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is
FALSE.

ConfigureExcel = TRUE or FALSE. Specify to load the MicroStrategy Office toolbar by

default when the Microsoft Excel application runs. This applies only
if Excel is installed in the target machine. The default is TRUE.

ConfigureWord = TRUE or FALSE. Specify to load the MicroStrategy Office toolbar by

default when the Microsoft Word application runs. This applies only
if Word is installed on the target machine. The default is TRUE.

ConfigurePowerpoint = TRUE or FALSE. Specify to load the MicroStrategy Office toolbar by

default when the Microsoft PowerPoint application runs. This
applies only if PowerPoint is installed on the target machine. The
default is TRUE.

Intelligence Server definition setting

Options Description

[ServerDefinitionSetting] Section specifying whether or not the MicroStrategy

Intelligence Server will use the server definition included with
the Tutorial.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default
is FALSE.

OverwriteServerDefinition TRUE or FALSE. This option relates to the Tutorial. Set this
= option to overwrite existing MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
definitions from a previous install. The default is FALSE.

286 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Analytics Module setting

Options Description

[AnalyticsSetting] Section that specifies the DSN used to connect to the MicroStrategy
Analytics Modules.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is FALSE.

OverwriteDSN = TRUE or FALSE. Set this option to overwrite an existing DSN with the
same name. The data source names are as follows:
• Analytics_Metadata

• CAM_WH_AC

• FRAM_WH_AC

• HRAM_WH_AC

• MicroStrategy_Tutorial_Data

• SAM_WH_AC

• SDAM_WH_AC

The default is FALSE.

Start Copying Files dialog box

Options Description

[Summary] Section that specifies the installation summary in the Start Copying Files dialog
box.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is FALSE.

MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete dialog box

Options Description

[Finish] Section that specifies the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard Complete dialog
box.

HideDialog = TRUE or FALSE. FALSE displays the dialog box. The default is FALSE.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 287

Installation and Configuration Guide

Example of a response.ini file for Custom Installation to install all

components
Starting from 10.4, you can find the sample_custom.ini in the same
location as the installation setup.exe. Replace any text between the angled
brackets <> with your own specific information.

[Installer]
ExpressMode=FALSE
PropertiesFilesOverwrite=FALSE
EnableTracing=FALSE
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
PreventReboot=FALSE
CheckTCPIP=TRUE
CheckIIS=TRUE
CreateShortcuts=TRUE
CheckRenameOperations=TRUE
AnalyticsOverwrite=TRUE
TutDeliveryOverwrite=TRUE
BackupFiles=TRUE
RunConfigWizard=FALSE
StopAllServices=TRUE
StopIIS=TRUE
EnableASPServices=TRUE
EnableASPNETServices=TRUE
ShowWelcomeScreen=FALSE
ShowConfigWizard=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerOverwrite=TRUE
ConfigWizardResponseFile=
LogFile=C:\Program Files (x86)\Common
Files\MicroStrategy\install.log
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserFirstName=<UserFirstName>
UserLastName=<UserLastName>
UserEmail=<UserEmail>
CompanyName=<CompanyName>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKey>
[SetupExpress]
HideDialog=TRUE
[SuiteTarget]
HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files (x86)\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###

288 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

DeveloperVisible=TRUE
AnalystVisible=TRUE
ArchitectVisible=TRUE
ServerAdminVisible=TRUE
FunctionPluginVisible=FALSE
CommandManagerVisible=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerVisible=TRUE
ObjectManagerVisible=TRUE
IntegrityManagerVisible=TRUE
IServerVisible=TRUE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerReportServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=TRUE
WebAnalystVisible=TRUE
WebProfessionalVisible=TRUE
WebReporterVisible=TRUE
WebServerASPNETVisible=TRUE
WebServerJSPVisible=TRUE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=TRUE
WebServicesJSPVisible=TRUE
OfficeVisible=TRUE
MobileVisible=TRUE
MobileClientVisible=TRUE
MobileServerASPVisible=TRUE
MobileServerJSPVisible=TRUE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=TRUE
NCSAdminVisible=TRUE
DeliveryEngineVisible=TRUE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=TRUE
TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=TRUE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=TRUE
SequeLinkVisible=TRUE
PortletsVisible=TRUE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=TRUE
GISConnectorsVisible=TRUE
SystemManagerVisible=TRUE
OperationsManagerASPVisible=TRUE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=TRUE
UsherServerVisible=TRUE
UsherNetworkManagerVisible=TRUE
UsherAnalyticsVisible=TRUE
UsherProfessionalVisible=TRUE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove(FALSE) ###
DeveloperSelect=TRUE
AnalystSelect=TRUE
ArchitectSelect=TRUE
ServerAdminSelect=TRUE
FunctionPluginSelect=FALSE
CommandManagerSelect=TRUE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 289

Installation and Configuration Guide

EnterpriseManagerSelect=TRUE
ObjectManagerSelect=TRUE
IntegrityManagerSelect=TRUE
IServerSelect=TRUE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerReportServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=TRUE
WebAnalystSelect=TRUE
WebProfessionalSelect=TRUE
WebReporterSelect=TRUE
WebServerASPNETSelect=TRUE
WebServerJSPSelect=TRUE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=TRUE
WebServicesJSPSelect=TRUE
OfficeSelect=TRUE
MobileSelect=TRUE
MobileClientSelect=TRUE
MobileServerASPSelect=TRUE
MobileServerJSPSelect=TRUE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=TRUE
NCSAdminSelect=TRUE
DeliveryEngineSelect=TRUE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=TRUE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=TRUE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=TRUE
SequeLinkSelect=TRUE
PortletsSelect=TRUE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=TRUE
GISConnectorsSelect=TRUE
SystemManagerSelect=TRUE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=TRUE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=TRUE
UsherServerSelect=TRUE
UsherNetworkManagerSelect=TRUE
UsherAnalyticsSelect=TRUE
UsherProfessionalSelect=TRUE
[UsherConfig]
HideDialog=TRUE
ExpressSkipUsherConfig=FALSE
CACertificateChain=<AbsolutePath_CACertificateChainFile>
ServerCertificate=<AbsolutePath_SSLServerCertificateFile>
ServerCertificateKey=<AbsolutePath_
SSLServerCertifiateKeyFile>
ServerCertificateKeyPasswordFile=<Optional_AbsolutePath_
ServerCertificateKeyPasswordFile>
SMTPServer=<SMTPServer>
SMTPServerPort=<SMTPServerPort>
SMTPUser=<Optional_SMTPUser>
SMTPUserPassword=<Optional_SMTPUserPassword>

290 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

SMTPEmail=<EmailSenderAddress>
FQDN=<FQDN>
[MySQLDialog]
HideDialog=TRUE
AgreeToDownloadMySql=TRUE
[ServerDefinitionSetting]
HideDialog=TRUE
OverwriteServerDefinition=FALSE
[HealthCenterServiceAccount]
HideDialog=TRUE
Port=<PortNumber>
AccessCode=<AccessCode>
SkipAccountSetting=FALSE
Domain=<WindowsLoginDomain>
Login=<WindowsLogin>
Password=<WindowsLoginPassword>
MasterHealthAgent=TRUE
RepositoryPath=C:\HealthCenterRepo
CustomerExperienceProgram=FALSE
[AnalyticsSetting]
HideDialog=TRUE
OverwriteDSN=FALSE
[WebVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategy
ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[MobileVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyMobile
ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[OperationsManagerVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyOM
ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[PortalVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=NarrowcastServer
ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[WebServicesVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyWS
ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[OfficeWebServicesURL]
HideDialog=TRUE
AllowBlankURL=FALSE
URL=http://localhost/MicroStrategyWS/mstrws.asmx
[MSOfficeLoadOptions]
HideDialog=TRUE
ConfigureExcel=TRUE
ConfigurePowerpoint=TRUE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 291

Installation and Configuration Guide

ConfigureWord=TRUE
[IServerServiceAccount]
HideDialog=TRUE
SkipAccountSetting=TRUE
Login=<NT_UserLoginHere>
Password=<UserPasswordHere>
Domain=<DomainHere>
ServiceStartUp=AUTO
[NarrowcastServiceAccount]
HideDialog=TRUE
SkipAccountSetting=TRUE
Login=<NT_UserLoginHere>
Password=<UserPasswordHere>
Domain=<DomainHere>
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
OLAP Services, then you cannot use IServerOLAPServicesSelect=TRUE and
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=TRUE to install these components.

Example of a response.inifile for Express Installation

Starting from 10.4 you can find the sample_express.ini in the same
location as the installation setup.exe. Replace any text between angled
brackets <>with your own specific information.

[Installer]
ExpressMode=TRUE
PropertiesFilesOverwrite=
EnableTracing=
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
PreventReboot=
CheckTCPIP=
CheckIIS=TRUE
CreateShortcuts=
CheckRenameOperations=
AnalyticsOverwrite=
TutDeliveryOverwrite=
BackupFiles=
RunConfigWizard=FALSE
StopAllServices=TRUE
StopIIS=TRUE
EnableASPServices=
EnableASPNETServices=

292 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

ShowWelcomeScreen=FALSE
ShowConfigWizard=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerOverwrite=
ConfigWizardResponseFile=
LogFile=
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserFirstName=<UserFirstName>
UserLastName=<UserLastName>
UserEmail=<UserEmail>
CompanyName=<CompanyName>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKey>
[SetupExpress]
HideDialog=TRUE
[UsherConfig]
HideDialog=TRUE
ExpressSkipUsherConfig=FALSE
CACertificateChain=<AbsolutePath_CACertificateChainFile>
ServerCertificate=<AbsolutePath_SSLServerCertificateFile>
ServerCertificateKey=<AbsolutePath_
SSLServerCertifiateKeyFile>
ServerCertificateKeyPasswordFile=<Optional_AbsolutePath_
ServerCertificateKeyPasswordFile>
SMTPServer=<SMTPServer>
SMTPServerPort=<SMTPServerPort>
SMTPUser=<Optional_SMTPUser>
SMTPUserPassword=<Optional_SMTPUserPassword>
SMTPEmail=<EmailSenderAddress>
FQDN=<FQDN>
[MySQLDialog]
HideDialog=TRUE
AgreeToDownloadMySql=TRUE
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE

Example of a response.ini file: Installs Intelligence Server,

Enterprise Manager, and other components
[Installer]
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
StopAllServices=TRUE
StopIIS=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerOverwrite=TRUE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 293

Installation and Configuration Guide

[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserName=<UserNameHere>
CompanyName=<CompanyNameHere>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKeyHere>
[SuiteTarget]
HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###
ServerAdminVisible=TRUE
CommandManagerVisible=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerVisible=TRUE
ObjectManagerVisible=TRUE
IServerVisible=TRUE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerReportServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=TRUE
IntegrityManagerVisible=TRUE
SystemManagerVisible=TRUE
DeveloperVisible=FALSE
AnalystVisible=FALSE
ArchitectVisible=FALSE
FunctionPluginVisible=FALSE
WebAnalystVisible=FALSE
WebProfessionalVisible=FALSE
WebReporterVisible=FALSE
WebServerASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServerJSPVisible=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServicesJSPVisible=FALSE
OfficeVisible=FALSE
MobileVisible=FALSE
MobileClientVisible=FALSE
MobileServerASPVisible=FALSE
MobileServerJSPVisible=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=FALSE
NCSAdminVisible=FALSE
DeliveryEngineVisible=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=FALSE
SequeLinkVisible=FALSE
PortletsVisible=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=FALSE

294 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

GISConnectorsVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=FALSE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove
(FALSE) ###
ServerAdminSelect=TRUE
CommandManagerSelect=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerSelect=TRUE
ObjectManagerSelect=TRUE
IServerSelect=TRUE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerReportServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=TRUE
IntegrityManagerSelect=TRUE
SystemManagerSelect=TRUE
DeveloperSelect=FALSE
AnalystSelect=FALSE
ArchitectSelect=FALSE
FunctionPluginSelect=FALSE
WebAnalystSelect=FALSE
WebProfessionalSelect=FALSE
WebReporterSelect=FALSE
WebServerASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServerJSPSelect=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServicesJSPSelect=FALSE
OfficeSelect=FALSE
MobileSelect=FALSE
MobileClientSelect=FALSE
MobileServerASPSelect=FALSE
MobileServerJSPSelect=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=FALSE
NCSAdminSelect=FALSE
DeliveryEngineSelect=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=FALSE
SequeLinkSelect=FALSE
PortletsSelect=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=FALSE
GISConnectorsSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=FALSE
[IServerServiceAccount]
HideDialog=TRUE
SkipAccountSetting=FALSE
Login=<UserName>
Password=<Password>
Domain=<Domain>

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 295

Installation and Configuration Guide

ServiceStartUp=AUTO
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE
Copy and paste this example to create a response.ini file. Replace any text between
angled brackets (<>) with your own specific information. For example, change
UserName=<UserNameHere> to UserName=jsmith. Make sure to check that all file
paths are entered with correct spacing.

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
OLAP Services, then you cannot use IServerOLAPServicesSelect=TRUE and
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=TRUE to install these components.

Example of a response.ini file: Installs Intelligence Server

components
[Installer]
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
StopAllServices=TRUE
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserName=<UserNameHere>
CompanyName=<CompanyNameHere>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKeyHere>
[SuiteTarget]
HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###
ServerAdminVisible=TRUE
IServerVisible=TRUE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerReportServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=TRUE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=TRUE
CommandManagerVisible=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerVisible=FALSE
ObjectManagerVisible=FALSE
IntegrityManagerVisible=FALSE
DeveloperVisible=FALSE
AnalystVisible=FALSE
ArchitectVisible=FALSE

296 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

FunctionPluginVisible=FALSE
WebAnalystVisible=FALSE
WebProfessionalVisible=FALSE
WebReporterVisible=FALSE
WebServerASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServerJSPVisible=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServicesJSPVisible=FALSE
OfficeVisible=FALSE
MobileVisible=FALSE
MobileClientVisible=FALSE
MobileServerASPVisible=FALSE
MobileServerJSPVisible=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=FALSE
NCSAdminVisible=FALSE
DeliveryEngineVisible=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=FALSE
SequeLinkVisible=FALSE
PortletsVisible=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=FALSE
GISConnectorsVisible=FALSE
SystemManagerVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=FALSE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove
(FALSE) ###
ServerAdminSelect=TRUE
IServerSelect=TRUE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerReportServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=TRUE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=TRUE
CommandManagerSelect=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerSelect=FALSE
ObjectManagerSelect=FALSE
IntegrityManagerSelect=FALSE
DeveloperSelect=FALSE
AnalystSelect=FALSE
ArchitectSelect=FALSE
FunctionPluginSelect=FALSE
WebAnalystSelect=FALSE
WebProfessionalSelect=FALSE
WebReporterSelect=FALSE
WebServerASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServerJSPSelect=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServicesJSPSelect=FALSE
OfficeSelect=FALSE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 297

Installation and Configuration Guide

MobileSelect=FALSE
MobileClientSelect=FALSE
MobileServerASPSelect=FALSE
MobileServerJSPSelect=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=FALSE
NCSAdminSelect=FALSE
DeliveryEngineSelect=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=FALSE
SequeLinkSelect=FALSE
PortletsSelect=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=FALSE
GISConnectorsSelect=FALSE
SystemManagerSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=FALSE
[IServerServiceAccount]
HideDialog=TRUE
SkipAccountSetting=FALSE
Login=<UserName>
Password=<Password>
Domain=<Domain>
ServiceStartUp=AUTO
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE
Copy and paste this example to create a response.ini file. Replace any text between
angled brackets (<>) with your own specific information. For example, change
UserName=<UserNameHere> to UserName=jsmith. Make sure to check that all
file paths are entered with correct spacing.

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
OLAP Services, then you cannot use IServerOLAPServicesSelect=TRUE and
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=TRUE to install these components.

Example of a response.ini file: Installs MicroStrategy Web

components
[Installer]
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
StopAllServices=TRUE
StopIIS=TRUE
EnableASPServices=TRUE
EnableASPNETServices=TRUE
[Welcome]

298 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserName=<UserNameHere>
CompanyName=<CompanyNameHere>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKeyHere>
[SuiteTarget]
HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###
WebReporterVisible=TRUE
WebAnalystVisible=TRUE
WebProfessionalVisible=TRUE
WebServerASPNETVisible=TRUE
WebServerJSPVisible=TRUE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=TRUE
WebServicesJSPVisible=TRUE
ServerAdminVisible=FALSE
IServerVisible=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerReportServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=FALSE
CommandManagerVisible=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerVisible=FALSE
ObjectManagerVisible=FALSE
IntegrityManagerVisible=FALSE
DeveloperVisible=FALSE
AnalystVisible=FALSE
ArchitectVisible=FALSE
FunctionPluginVisible=FALSE
OfficeVisible=FALSE
MobileVisible=FALSE
MobileClientVisible=FALSE
MobileServerASPVisible=FALSE
MobileServerJSPVisible=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=FALSE
NCSAdminVisible=FALSE
DeliveryEngineVisible=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=FALSE
SequeLinkVisible=FALSE
PortletsVisible=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=FALSE
GISConnectorsVisible=FALSE
SystemManagerVisible=FALSE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 299

Installation and Configuration Guide

OperationsManagerASPVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=FALSE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove
(FALSE) ###
WebReporterSelect=TRUE
WebAnalystSelect=TRUE
WebProfessionalSelect=TRUE
WebServerASPNETSelect=TRUE
WebServerJSPSelect=TRUE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=TRUE
WebServicesJSPSelect=TRUE
ServerAdminSelect=FALSE
IServerSelect=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerReportServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=FALSE
CommandManagerSelect=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerSelect=FALSE
ObjectManagerSelect=FALSE
IntegrityManagerSelect=FALSE
DeveloperSelect=FALSE
AnalystSelect=FALSE
ArchitectSelect=FALSE
FunctionPluginSelect=FALSE
OfficeSelect=FALSE
MobileSelect=FALSE
MobileClientSelect=FALSE
MobileServerASPSelect=FALSE
MobileServerJSPSelect=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=FALSE
NCSAdminSelect=FALSE
DeliveryEngineSelect=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=FALSE
SequeLinkSelect=FALSE
PortletsSelect=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=FALSE
GISConnectorsSelect=FALSE
SystemManagerSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=FALSE
[WebVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategy
ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[WebServicesVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyWS

300 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

ReconfigureVirtualDirectory=TRUE
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE
Copy and paste this example to create a response.ini file. Replace any text between
angled brackets (<>) with your own specific information. For example, change
UserName=<UserNameHere> to UserName=jsmith. Make sure to check that all file
paths are entered with correct spacing.

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
Web Reporter, then you cannot use WebReporterVisible=TRUE and
WebReporterSelect=TRUE to install these components.

Example of a response.ini file: Installs Enterprise Manager

components
[Installer]
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
StopAllServices=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerOverwrite=TRUE
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserName=<UserNameHere>
CompanyName=<CompanyNameHere>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKeyHere>
[SuiteTarget]
HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###
EnterpriseManagerVisible=TRUE
ServerAdminVisible=FALSE
CommandManagerVisible=FALSE
ObjectManagerVisible=FALSE
IServerVisible=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerReportServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=FALSE
IntegrityManagerVisible=FALSE
DeveloperVisible=FALSE
AnalystVisible=FALSE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 301

Installation and Configuration Guide

ArchitectVisible=FALSE
FunctionPluginVisible=FALSE
WebAnalystVisible=FALSE
WebProfessionalVisible=FALSE
WebReporterVisible=FALSE
WebServerASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServerJSPVisible=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServicesJSPVisible=FALSE
OfficeVisible=FALSE
MobileVisible=FALSE
MobileClientVisible=FALSE
MobileServerASPVisible=FALSE
MobileServerJSPVisible=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=FALSE
NCSAdminVisible=FALSE
DeliveryEngineVisible=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=FALSE
SequeLinkVisible=FALSE
PortletsVisible=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=FALSE
GISConnectorsVisible=FALSE
SystemManagerVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=FALSE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove
(FALSE) ###
EnterpriseManagerSelect=TRUE
ServerAdminSelect=FALSE
CommandManagerSelect=FALSE
ObjectManagerSelect=FALSE
IServerSelect=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerReportServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=FALSE
IntegrityManagerSelect=FALSE
DeveloperSelect=FALSE
AnalystSelect=FALSE
ArchitectSelect=FALSE
FunctionPluginSelect=FALSE
WebAnalystSelect=FALSE
WebProfessionalSelect=FALSE
WebReporterSelect=FALSE
WebServerASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServerJSPSelect=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServicesJSPSelect=FALSE

302 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

OfficeSelect=FALSE
MobileSelect=FALSE
MobileClientSelect=FALSE
MobileServerASPSelect=FALSE
MobileServerJSPSelect=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=FALSE
NCSAdminSelect=FALSE
DeliveryEngineSelect=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=FALSE
SequeLinkSelect=FALSE
PortletsSelect=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=FALSE
GISConnectorsSelect=FALSE
SystemManagerSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=FALSE
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE
Copy and paste this example to create a response.ini file. Replace any text between
angled brackets (<>) with your own specific information. For example, change
UserName=<UserNameHere> to UserName=jsmith. Make sure to check that all file
paths are entered with correct spacing.

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
Enterprise Manager, then you cannot use EnterpriseManagerVisible=TRUE
and EnterpriseManagerSelect=TRUE to install these components.

Example of a response.ini file: Installs Developer, Architect, and

other components
[Installer]
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
StopAllServices=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerOverwrite=TRUE
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserName=<UserNameHere>
CompanyName=<CompanyNameHere>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKeyHere>
[SuiteTarget]

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 303

Installation and Configuration Guide

HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###
AnalystVisible=TRUE
DeveloperVisible=TRUE
ArchitectVisible=TRUE
CommandManagerVisible=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerVisible=TRUE
ObjectManagerVisible=TRUE
FunctionPluginVisible=TRUE
ServerAdminVisible=FALSE
IServerVisible=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerReportServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=FALSE
IntegrityManagerVisible=FALSE
WebAnalystVisible=FALSE
WebProfessionalVisible=FALSE
WebReporterVisible=FALSE
WebServerASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServerJSPVisible=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServicesJSPVisible=FALSE
OfficeVisible=FALSE
MobileVisibile=FALSE
MobileClientVisible=FALSE
MobileServerASPVisible=FALSE
MobileServerJSPVisible=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=FALSE
NCSAdminVisible=FALSE
DeliveryEngineVisible=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=FALSE
SequeLinkVisible=FALSE
PortletsVisible=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=FALSE
GISConnectorsVisible=FALSE
SystemManagerVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=FALSE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove (FALSE) ###
AnalystSelect=TRUE
DeveloperSelect=TRUE
ArchitectSelect=TRUE
CommandManagerSelect=TRUE
EnterpriseManagerSelect=TRUE

304 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

ObjectManagerSelect=TRUE
FunctionPluginSelect=TRUE
ServerAdminSelect=FALSE
IServerSelect=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerReportServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=FALSE
IntegrityManagerSelect=FALSE
WebAnalystSelect=FALSE
WebProfessionalSelect=FALSE
WebReporterSelect=FALSE
WebServerASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServerJSPSelect=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServicesJSPSelect=FALSE
OfficeSelect=FALSE
MobileSelect=FALSE
MobileClientSelect=FALSE
MobileServerASPSelect=FALSE
MobileServerJSPSelect=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=FALSE
NCSAdminSelect=FALSE
DeliveryEngineSelect=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=FALSE
SequeLinkSelect=FALSE
PortletsSelect=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=FALSE
GISConnectorsSelect=FALSE
SystemManagerSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=FALSE
[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE
Copy and paste this example to create a response.ini file. Replace any text between
angled brackets (<>) with your own specific information. Make sure to check that all file
paths are entered with correct spacing.

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
Developer, then you cannot use DeveloperVisible=TRUE and
DeveloperSelect=TRUE to install these components.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 305

Installation and Configuration Guide

Example of a response.ini file: Installs Developer components

[Installer]
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
StopAllServices=TRUE
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=FALSE
[UserRegistration]
HideDialog=TRUE
UserName=<UserNameHere>
CompanyName=<CompanyNameHere>
LicenseKey=<CustomerLicenseKeyHere>
[SuiteTarget]
HideDialog=TRUE
TargetDirectory=C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy
[ComponentSelection]
HideDialog=TRUE
### Visible Components ###
AnalystVisible=TRUE
DeveloperVisible=TRUE
ArchitectVisible=FALSE
FunctionPluginVisible=FALSE
CommandManagerVisible=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerVisible=FALSE
ObjectManagerVisible=FALSE
ServerAdminVisible=FALSE
IServerVisible=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerReportServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesVisible=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesVisible=FALSE
IntegrityManagerVisible=FALSE
WebAnalystVisible=FALSE
WebProfessionalVisible=FALSE
WebReporterVisible=FALSE
WebServerASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServerJSPVisible=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETVisible=FALSE
WebServicesJSPVisible=FALSE
OfficeVisible=FALSE
MobileVisible=FALSE
MobileClientVisible=FALSE
MobileServerASPVisible=FALSE
MobileServerJSPVisible=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesVisible=FALSE
NCSAdminVisible=FALSE
DeliveryEngineVisible=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalVisible=FALSE

306 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

TutorialDeliveryInstallVisible=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureVisible=FALSE
SequeLinkVisible=FALSE
PortletsVisible=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderVisible=FALSE
GISConnectorsVisible=FALSE
SystemManagerVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPVisible=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPVisible=FALSE
### Components To Install (TRUE) or Remove
(FALSE) ###
AnalystSelect=TRUE
DeveloperSelect=TRUE
ArchitectSelect=FALSE
FunctionPluginSelect=FALSE
CommandManagerSelect=FALSE
EnterpriseManagerSelect=FALSE
ObjectManagerSelect=FALSE
ServerAdminSelect=FALSE
IServerSelect=FALSE
IServerOLAPServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerReportServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerDistributionServicesSelect=FALSE
IServerTransactionServicesSelect=FALSE
IntegrityManagerSelect=FALSE
WebAnalystSelect=FALSE
WebProfessionalSelect=FALSE
WebReporterSelect=FALSE
WebServerASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServerJSPSelect=FALSE
WebServicesASPNETSelect=FALSE
WebServicesJSPSelect=FALSE
OfficeSelect=FALSE
MobileSelect=FALSE
MobileClientSelect=FALSE
MobileServerASPSelect=FALSE
MobileServerJSPSelect=FALSE
AnalyticsModulesSelect=FALSE
NCSAdminSelect=FALSE
DeliveryEngineSelect=FALSE
SubscriptionPortalSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryInstallSelect=FALSE
TutorialDeliveryConfigureSelect=FALSE
SequeLinkSelect=FALSE
PortletsSelect=FALSE
MDXCubeProviderSelect=FALSE
GISConnectorsSelect=FALSE
SystemManagerSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerASPSelect=FALSE
OperationsManagerJSPSelect=FALSE

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 307

Installation and Configuration Guide

[Summary]
HideDialog=TRUE
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE
Copy and paste this example to create a response.ini file. Replace any text between
angled brackets (<>) with your own specific information. Make sure to check that all file
paths are entered with correct spacing.

Your license key determines which MicroStrategy components will be available for
your installation. For example, if your license key does not include MicroStrategy
Developer, then you cannot use DeveloperVisible=TRUE and
DeveloperSelect=TRUE to install these components.

Using the response.ini file

The setup program supports several command-line parameters. The following applies to
this function:
• Parameters using double dashes, such as --auto, are defined by MicroStrategy. For
example, you can use the --auto parameter as follows:
Path\setup.exe --Auto=TRUE --LogFile=“C:\install.log”
• The command line is not case-sensitive.
The following parameters are supported by the setup program:
• Auto= instructs the setup program to use the response file and default values to
enable a one-click installation. If a component, such as serial key or disk space has
an invalid value, the setup program automatically reverts to multiple-click mode, and
all dialog boxes are displayed.
• ResponseFile= contains responses to installation questions and redefines default
parameters. The path and file name must be in double quotes (“ ”). If you use this
parameter, do not use any other parameters.
• ConfigFile= used by the Configuration Wizard to set up a repository, a server, or a
client. The path and file name must be in double quotes (“ ”).
• LogFile= used to specify an alternative location and/or name (other than
install.log) for the log file in the Common Files directory. If only the file
name is entered, the default location remains the Common Files directory. Once
specified, the alternative file becomes the default.

To use the response.ini file to install MicroStrategy components

1 Save your response.ini file to the directory C:\. You can save to a different
directory, but the example command provided in these steps assumes the response
file is saved to the directory location C:\.

308 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

2 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then select Accessories, and
then right-click Command Prompt and select Run as Administrator. The
User Account Control dialog box opens.

The steps to open a Windows command prompt with administrator privileges

may be different depending on your version of Windows.

3 Click Yes to open the command prompt with administrator privileges. The
command prompt is displayed.
4 Type the following command in the Windows command line:
Path\setup.exe --ResponseFile=”C:\response.ini”
Where Path is the directory where the setup.exe file is stored.
• Press ENTER to begin the installation.

Activating your installation

After your installation is complete, you must activate your MicroStrategy software
installation within 30 days. To activate your software you can follow the instructions
provided in Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.

Configuring your installation with a response.ini file

The Configuration Wizard walks you through the process of setting up the environment
for the MicroStrategy products installed in your system. It is possible to configure server
definition, project source names, and the metadata repository using a response.ini
file. The steps required to create a response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy are
provided in Configuring MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.

Uninstalling with a response.ini file

You can uninstall all MicroStrategy products at once using a response.ini file. You
must create a response file with the RemoveAll parameter set to TRUE in the Welcome
section. This is also known as a silent uninstallation.

You must save the file as ANSI encoding.

Before uninstallation begins, the MicroStrategy application:

• Checks for user privileges. If they are not valid, uninstallation stops.
• Checks for running components. If one is found, uninstallation stops.
• Stops and deletes the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server service.
• Deletes application created files.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 309

Installation and Configuration Guide

Example of a response.ini file to uninstall MicroStrategy

You can use the following response file to remove all MicroStrategy products:
[Installer]
PropertiesFilesOverwrite=FALSE
EnableTracing=FALSE
HideAllDialogs=TRUE
ForceReboot=TRUE
PreventReboot=FALSE
CheckTCPIP=TRUE
CheckIIS=TRUE
CheckSP=TRUE
CreateShortcuts=TRUE
CheckRenameOperations=TRUE
AnalyticsOverwrite=FALSE
TutDeliveryOverwrite=FALSE
BackupFiles=FALSE
RunConfigWizard=FALSE
StopAllServices=TRUE
StopIIS=TRUE
EnableASPServices=FALSE
ConfigWizardResponseFile=
RegistrySizeReq=
LogFile=
[Welcome]
HideDialog=TRUE
RemoveAll=TRUE
[WebVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategy
RemoveVD=YES
[MobileVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyMobile
RemoveVD=YES
[OperationsManagerVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyOM
RemoveVD=YES
[PortalVirtualDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=NarrowcastServer
RemoveVD=YES
[WebServicesDirectory]
HideDialog=TRUE
VirtualDirectory=MicroStrategyWS
RemoveVD=YES
[Finish]
HideDialog=TRUE

310 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

For details on creating a response.ini file, see Creating a response.ini file, page 264.
After you have created a response.ini file, open a Windows command prompt to
uninstall all MicroStrategy products. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs,
then select Accessories, and then right-click Command Prompt and select Run as
Administrator. The User Account Control dialog box opens.

The steps to open a Windows command prompt with administrator privileges may
be different depending on your version of Windows.

Click Yes to open the command prompt with administrator privileges. The command
prompt is displayed. Type the following script at the command prompt to uninstall all
MicroStrategy products:
Path1\setup.exe --ResponseFile= “Path2\response.ini”
Where the Path1 for setup.exe must be the path to the original setup.exe used to
install MicroStrategy products. The Path2 for the response file is the path where you
saved your response.ini file.

Silent installation
A silent, or unattended, installation is one that presents no user interface. Silent
installations are useful for system administrators who do not want users to interfere with
the installation. They are typically implemented by IT departments that perform
package-based installations across the network.
You can use silent installation to easily embed MicroStrategy products with other
applications. This can be done to develop an OEM application that includes
MicroStrategy functionality. For information on deploying a silent installation for OEM
applications, see OEM silent installations, page 343.

Silent installation output

The system verifies compliance with installation prerequisites and places related
messages in a file created for that purpose. The following applies to the generation and
storage of output messages during silent installation:
• The MSTRInst.log file is created and placed in the Temp folder.
• The MSTRInst.log file is maintained during the entire setup.
• All system-generated messages, including messages containing reasons for pre-
installation termination, are stored in the MSTRInst.log file.

If there are installation termination messages in subsequent installation instances

that use the same dialog flow, they are also stored in the MSTRInst.log.

The table below identifies the information that the MSTRInst.log file includes.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 311

Installation and Configuration Guide

Line Description

Function Identifies the function calls in the setup script.

[F]

Information Logs information about the setup that is running.

[I]

Warning Includes feedback that you must verify related to the setup. For example, in normal
[W] mode, when MicroStrategy applications are running on a machine where the setup is
being run, you are prompted to close all MicroStrategy applications before proceeding.
In silent mode, you are not prompted, and instead the setup terminates.
Severe Includes fatal problems that prevent the setup from proceeding. For example, the
[S] Intelligence Server Service cannot be created and setup fails as a result.

A typical line in the MSTRInst.log file includes source file name, function name,
source line number, and time. It appears as follows:
[Z:\InstallMaster\Setup\Script Files\MALicense.rul]
[UseDLL][l: 28][1318179ms][W] Le file C:\WINDOWS\TEMP\
{84D0D5E2-719A-11D7-847C-000C293B5019}\{B339F3B3-E78C-
45E8-B4D2-3C46C1C13663}\MAInst.dll couldn't be loaded
in memory.

When reviewing warning messages in the MSTRInst.log file, look for [W] and
[S] to find related problems.

Activating silent installations

After your silent installation is complete, you must activate your MicroStrategy software
installation within 30 days. To activate your software you can follow the instructions
provided in Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.

Troubleshooting silent installations

Silent installation may not work if you are installing in a different environment than the
one you recorded. This is the case because any dialog box that was not recorded
previously is not recognized, such as if you are prompted to stop your Intelligence Server
or your IIS Web server. If this happens, check:
• The version of Intelligence Server to ensure that you have the right one for the
products you are installing
• That you do not have any MicroStrategy applications running
• The setup.log file to see if the ResultCode=0
• The install.log for any recorded errors during installation and the
MSTRInst.log file for any possible errors
The most common errors are:

312 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

▫ -8, which is an invalid path to the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard silent

response .iss file.
▫ -12, which is dialog boxes out of order. This occurs because an unrecorded
screen opened when running the silent install.
It is recommended that you create a silent install that can be used with a
response.ini file. For more information, see OEM silent installations, page 343. This
way you can change the settings in the response.ini file without having to generate a
new .iss file.

Silent installation of a hotfix

A hotfix is a file or a collection of files that you can apply to MicroStrategy products
installed on your computer to correct a specific problem. Hotfixes are packaged in an
executable (.exe) file, which is a self-installing format. When you install a hotfix, files
are backed up automatically so that you can remove the hotfix later.
You can apply a hotfix to MicroStrategy products using silent installation. For
information on installing the hotfix of MicroStrategy Office, see Silent installation of
MicroStrategy Office, page 314.

Prerequisites
• You must obtain and unzip the MicroStrategy hotfix files. These files include
HFResponse.ini and HFsetup.iss. The rest of this procedure assumes you have
saved these files to the file path C:\. If you save it to another file path, replace C:\
with the file path to the HFReponse.ini and HFsetup.iss.

To perform a silent installation of a hotfix

If you are installing a hotfix of MicroStrategy Office, see Silent installation of

MicroStrategy Office, page 314.

1 Insert the disk containing the Hotfix installable in the disk drive.
2 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then select Accessories, and
then right-click Command Prompt and select Run as Administrator. The
User Account Control dialog box opens.

The steps to open a Windows command prompt with administrator privileges

may be different depending on your version of Windows.

3 Click Yes to open the command prompt with administrator privileges. The
command prompt is displayed.
4 Access the disk drive through the command prompt.
5 Run the silent installation with the following command:
InstallPath\setup.exe -LLanguageValue --
ResponseFile="C:\HFresponse.ini" -s -f1”C:\HFsetup.iss”

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 313

Installation and Configuration Guide

In the command listed above, you must supply the following information:
• InstallPath: The location in which to install the MicroStrategy
hotfix.
• LanguageValue: Determines the language for the installation. Refer to
Language settings for silent installations, page 346, for an explanation of the
LanguageValue parameter. For example, to select English, the command is as
follows: InstallPath\setup.exe -LL0009 --
ResponseFile="C:\HFresponse.ini" -s -f1”C:\HFsetup.iss”
You can check the status of the silent installation in Windows Task Manager. After
applying the Hotfix, you can view it in the Add/Remove Programs window.

Silent installation of MicroStrategy Office

You can also install MicroStrategy Office as its own stand-alone installation, which lets
you install only MicroStrategy Office. The stand-alone installation of MicroStrategy
Office can also be used to install hotfixes of the MicroStrategy Office product.
To perform a silent installation of MicroStrategy Office as a stand-alone installation,
refer to the procedure below.

You can also perform an installation of MicroStrategy Office as its own stand-alone
installation, but with the assistance of a MicroStrategy Office installation wizard.
The steps to use the MicroStrategy Office installation wizard are provided in the
MicroStrategy Office User Guide.

Prerequisites
• You must have Microsoft .NET Framework and Microsoft Web Services
Enhancement Runtime to install and support MicroStrategy Office. For the required
versions of these components, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
• You must have Microsoft Windows Installer 4.5 to install MicroStrategy Office.
• Microsoft Office must already be installed on the machine.

To perform a silent installation of MicroStrategy Office

1 Download the MicroStrategy Office stand-alone installation files. You can retrieve
these from the MicroStrategy installation disk, or from the MicroStrategy download
site. The MicroStrategy Office stand-alone installation files include files named
MicroStrategyOffice.msi and MicroStrategyOffice64.msi. These .msi
files are for installing MicroStrategy Office on 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Microsoft
Office, respectively.
2 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then select Accessories, and
then right-click Command Prompt and select Run as Administrator. The
User Account Control dialog box opens.

314 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

The steps to open a Windows command prompt with administrator privileges

may be different depending on your version of Windows.

3 Click Yes to open the command prompt with administrator privileges. The
command prompt is displayed.
4 From a command prompt, navigate to the MicroStrategy Office hotfix installation
folder.
5 To view information on the options to run the silent install command, enter the
following command:
msiexec.msi /?
This includes information on options to log the installation details to a log file.
6 To run the silent installation using installation options defined by the current
MicroStrategy Office configuration, enter one of the following commands:
• To install on 32-bit versions of Microsoft Office:
msiexec.exe /i MicroStrategyOffice.msi /qn
• To install on 64-bit versions of Microsoft Office:
msiexec.exe /i MicroStrategyOffice64.msi /qn

You can also use additional parameters as part of the silent installation
command, including the following:

▫ INSTALLDIR: Defines the directory in which MicroStrategy Office will be

installed. For example, you can define this parameter as
INSTALLDIR=”C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\Office”.
▫ WSURL: Defines the URL for MicroStrategy Web Services. For example, you
can define this parameter as
WSURL=”http://localhost/MicroStrategyWS/MSTRWS.asmx”.
▫ LW: Specify whether to load the MicroStrategy Office toolbar by default
when the Microsoft Word application runs. This applies only if Word is
installed in the target machine. The default is 3, which loads the toolbar.
You can set this option to 2 to not load the toolbar for Microsoft Word.
▫ LE: Specify whether to load the MicroStrategy Office toolbar by default
when the Microsoft Excel application runs. This applies only if Excel is
installed in the target machine. The default is 3, which loads the toolbar.
You can set this option to 2 to not load the toolbar for Microsoft Excel.
▫ LP: Specify whether to load the MicroStrategy Office toolbar by default
when the Microsoft PowerPoint application runs. This applies only if
PowerPoint is installed in the target machine. The default is 3, which loads
the toolbar. You can set this option to 2 to not load the toolbar for Microsoft
PowerPoint.
▫ OFFICECREATESHORTCUTS: Specify whether to create a shortcut for
MicroStrategy Office in the Windows Start menu. The default is 1, which

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 315

Installation and Configuration Guide

creates the shortcut. You can set this option to 0 to exclude the creation of
this shortcut.

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the steps to install Intelligence Server, you can continue the set up and
configuration of your installation. To help guide the rest of your installation and
configuration steps, refer to the section Installation and configuration checklists, page
48 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation, for installation and configuration
checklists.

316 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 9
AUTOMATED INSTALLATION
ON UNIX AND LINUX
This chapter explains the various methods of performing a fully automated and
unattended installation within the MicroStrategy platform when you do not have access
to a UNIX or Linux graphical user interface (GUI).

Intelligence Server Universal configurations possible through the command line

on UNIX and Linux are covered in Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy Using
Command Line Tools.

This chapter has one section: Silent installation, page 317

Before installing MicroStrategy products, you should refer to Chapter 1, Planning Your
Installation for important preinstallation information.

Silent installation
A silent or unattended installation is one that presents no graphical user interface (GUI).
Silent installations allow you to automate the installation, so it can be called from a script
and executed without user interaction. Silent installations are useful for system
administrators who do not want users to run the installation themselves. The silent
installation can be done on one or more computers.

Completing a silent installation

To run silent installation, you must create an options file and then run it with the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard. Save the options file as options.txt. An example
of an options.txt file is provided in Example of an options file, page 318 below. You
can use the example as a template and replace italicized text with your own information.
This options file or response file is used with the command line argument -options to
modify the wizard settings. The settings that can be specified for the wizard are listed in
the next section, Parameters for a silent installation, page 321.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 317

Installation and Configuration Guide

To complete a silent installation

1 Log on to the computer where you are installing one or more MicroStrategy
products.
2 You can access the installation files by asking your system administrator to share the
files in a network location.
3 Browse to the MicroStrategyInstallation/QueryReportingAnalysis_
UNIX directory. Depending on your UNIX or Linux environment, browse to one of
the following folders:
• Solaris: QueryReportingAnalysis_SunOS
• AIX: QueryReportingAnalysis_AIX
• HP-UX: QueryReportingAnalysis_HP-UX
• Linux: QueryReportingAnalysis_Linux
4 Open options.txt in a text editor.
5 Specify a value for a setting by replacing the character’s Value. For detailed
information on the parameters and values that can be supplied with the
options.txt file for a silent installation, see Parameters for a silent installation,
page 321.
6 Save the changes to the options.txt file.
7 To use the options file on a silent installation, specify -silent -options
FileName as a command line argument to the wizard, where FileName is the
name of this options file, for example, options.txt. For example, type the
command:
setup.sh -silent -options options.txt
If you are installing a MicroStrategy hotfix, use the setupHF.sh file instead. For
example, type the command:
setupHF.sh -silent -options options.txt

Example of an options file

Copy and paste this example to create an options.txt file. Replace any italicized text
with your own specific information. For example, change
userRegistration.user=UserName to userRegistration.user=jsmith.
Make sure you check for correct spaces and new lines in all file paths.
For descriptions of each of the options listed in this example, see Parameters for a silent
installation, page 321.

Be aware of the following:

318 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• The example below assumes you are not using a CPU-based license for
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. For CPU-based licenses, you must add the
parameter:
cpuCount.number=maximum
• The example below assumes you are using the full set of installation files to
support the MicroStrategy installation. If you have downloaded only a subset of
the .tzp files that are required for the MicroStrategy installation, you must
define where these files are stored, using the parameters described in Providing
installation files for smaller installations, page 335.
licenseAgreement.accept=true
userRegistration.user=UserName
userRegistration.company=CompanyName
userRegistration.cdKey=License
install.Instance=new
install.Operation=FRESH_INSTALL
suite.homeDirectory=Path
suite.installDirectory=Path
suite.logDirectory=Path
SelectComponents.visible=true
IntelligenceServer.visible=true
IntelligenceServer.active=true
ReportServices.visible=true
ReportServices.active=true
OLAPServices.visible=true
OLAPServices.active=true
DistributionServices.visible=true
DistributionServices.active=true
TransactionServices.visible=true
TransactionServices.active=true
WebAnalyst.visible=true
WebAnalyst.active=true
WebReporter.visible=true
WebReporter.active=true
WebProfessional.visible=true
WebProfessional.active=true
Portlets.visible=true
Portlets.active=true
GISConnectors.visible=true
GISConnectors.active=true
WebServices.visible=true
WebServices.active=true
MobileClient.visible=true
MobileClient.active=true
MobileServer.visible=true
MobileServer.active=true
CommandManager.visible=true
CommandManager.active=true
EnterpriseManager.visible=true

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 319

Installation and Configuration Guide

EnterpriseManager.active=true
SystemManager.visible=true
SystemManager.active=true
IntegrityManager.visible=true
IntegrityManager.active=true
OperationsManager.visible=true
OperationsManager.active=true
UsherSecurityServer.visible=true
UsherSecurityServer.active=true
UsherNetworkManager.visible=true
UsherNetworkManager.active=true
UsherAnalytics.visible=true
UsherAnalytics.active=true
UsherMobile.visible=true
UsherMobile.active=true
WebUniversal.deployDirectory=Path
Portlets.installDirectory=Path
GISConnectors.installDirectory=Path
OperationsManager.installDirectory=Path
WebServices.installDirectory=Path
MobileServer.installDirectory=Path
CommandManager.installDirectory=Path
SystemManager.installDirectory=Path
UsherSecurityServer.installDirectory=Path
UsherNetworkManager.installDirectory=Path
UsherAnalytics.installDirectory=Path
UsherMobile.installDirectory=Path
HealthCenter.port=PortNumber
HealthCenter.accessCode=AccessCode
HealthCenter.configureDaemon=true
HealthCenter.master=false
HealthCenter.repository=Path
HealthCenter.customerExperienceProgram=false
UsherSecurityServer.tomcatDir=Path
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBHost=IP_Address
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBPort=Port
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBUser=UserName
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBPassword=UserPassword
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBInstance=DatabaseInstance
UsherSecurityServer.serverLogDBInstance=DatabaseInstance
UsherSecurityServer.serverPortOne=Port
UsherSecurityServer.serverPortTwo=Port
UsherSecurityServer.serverSslCert=Path
UsherSecurityServer.serverSslKey=Path
UsherSecurityServer.serverCaCert=Path
UsherSecurityServer.gatewayPort=Port
UsherSecurityServer.gatewaySslCert=Path
UsherSecurityServer.gatewaySslKey=Path
UsherSecurityServer.gatewayCaCert=Path
UsherNetworkManager.apacheDir=Path

320 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

UsherNetworkManager.apacheUser=UserName
UsherNetworkManager.apacheGroup=GroupName
UsherNetworkManager.useSameDBSetting=false
UsherNetworkManager.DBHost=IP_Address
UsherNetworkManager.DBPort=Port
UsherNetworkManager.DBUser=UserName
UsherNetworkManager.DBPassword=UserPassword
UsherNetworkManager.DBInstance=DatabaseInstance
UsherAnalytics.useSameDBSetting=false
UsherAnalytics.DBHost=IP_Address
UsherAnalytics.DBPort=Port
UsherAnalytics.DBUser=UserName
UsherAnalytics.DBPassword=UserPassword

Parameters for a silent installation

The following parameters define how a silent installation is performed.
The settings follow their descriptions, in the format
settingname=Value

License agreement
Define whether the license agreement is accepted by default.
licenseAgreement.accept=Value
You can define this parameter with one of the following values:
• true: The MicroStrategy license agreement is accepted by default. If you perform
the installation as a silent installation that does not display the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard, you must use this value to install MicroStrategy successfully.
• false: The MicroStrategy license agreement is not accepted by default. The user
that installs MicroStrategy must select to accept the license agreement to continue
with the MicroStrategy installation.

Customer information
Your name, the name of the company for which you work, and the license key.
• User:
userRegistration.user=Value
• Company:
userRegistration.company=Value
• License key:
userRegistration.cdKey=Value

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 321

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy installation instance

You can either install a new instance of MicroStrategy, or modify an existing
MicroStrategy installation.
• To install a new instance of MicroStrategy:
install.Instance=new
• To modify an existing MicroStrategy installation:
install.Instance=InstallPath

MicroStrategy operations
In addition to installing MicroStrategy, you can also modify, repair, uninstall, and
upgrade existing MicroStrategy installations.
• To install a new instance of MicroStrategy:
install.Operation=FRESH_INSTALL
• To modify an existing MicroStrategy installation:
install.Operation=MODIFY
• To repair an existing MicroStrategy installation by performing the previous
installation attempt:
install.Operation=REPAIR
• To uninstall an existing MicroStrategy installation:
install.Operation=UNINSTALL
• To upgrade an existing MicroStrategy installation:
install.Operation=UPGRADE
• To install a MicroStrategy hotfix installation:
install.Operation=HOTFIX_INSTALL
• To uninstall an existing MicroStrategy hotfix installation:
install.Operation=HOTFIX_UNINSTALL

MicroStrategy install locations

The install locations of the product. Specify valid directories where the product should be
installed. For additional requirements when choosing directories, see Choose Destination
Location, page 84.
• Home directory: The location where the MicroStrategy configuration files and
application launchers are to be installed.

322 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

suite.homeDirectory=Path
• Install directory: The location where the MicroStrategy products are to be installed.
suite.installDirectory=Path
• Log directory: The location where the MicroStrategy application logs are to be
created.
silent.logDirectory=Path

Product features
When you install products using an options file, the following two values may be
specified for each product:
• Each product includes a visible option, which can use one of the following values:
▫ true: Indicates that the feature is displayed in the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard as available for installation.
▫ false: Indicates that the feature is not displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard as available for installation. If you define a product’s visible
option as false, it cannot be installed.
If you do not specify a true or false value for each product, true is used for all
products. You can also define the visible option for all products using the parameter
SelectComponents.visible. You can exclude these visible options for each
product if you are using the options file as part of a completely silent installation
where no user interface is displayed to the user.
• Each product includes an active option, which can use one of the following values:
▫ true: Indicates that the feature is selected for installation.
▫ false: Indicates that the feature is not selected for installation, or the product
is to be uninstalled as part of an installation that modifies or uninstalls previously
installed MicroStrategy software.
To review a description of each MicroStrategy project, see MicroStrategy products and
components, page 1.

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal

The state of whether MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
IntelligenceServer.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal.
IntelligenceServer.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal for installation, use:
IntelligenceServer.visible=true

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 323

Installation and Configuration Guide

IntelligenceServer.active=true
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal is installed if you select to install any of the
following MicroStrategy products:
• MicroStrategy Report Services, page 324
• MicroStrategy OLAP Services, page 324
• MicroStrategy Distribution Services, page 324
• MicroStrategy Transaction Services, page 325

MicroStrategy Report Services

The state of whether MicroStrategy Report Services is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
ReportServices.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Report Services.
ReportServices.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Report Services for installation, use:
ReportServices.visible=true
ReportServices.active=true

MicroStrategy OLAP Services

The state of whether MicroStrategy OLAP Services is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
OLAPServices.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy OLAP Services.
OLAPServices.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy OLAP Services for installation, use:
OLAPServices.visible=true
OLAPServices.active=true

MicroStrategy Distribution Services

The state of whether MicroStrategy Distribution Services is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
DistributionServices.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Distribution Services.

324 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

DistributionServices.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Distribution Services for installation, use:
DistributionServices.visible=true
DistributionServices.active=true

MicroStrategy Transaction Services

The state of whether MicroStrategy Transaction Services is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
TransactionServices.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Transaction Services.
TransactionServices.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Transaction Services for installation, use:
TransactionServices.visible=true
TransactionServices.active=true

MicroStrategy Web Universal Analyst

The state of whether MicroStrategy Web Universal Analyst is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
WebAnalyst.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Web Universal Analyst.
WebAnalyst.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Web Universal Analyst for installation, use:
WebAnalyst.visible=true
WebAnalyst.active=true

MicroStrategy Web Universal Reporter

The state of whether MicroStrategy Web Universal Reporter is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
WebReporter.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Web Universal Reporter.
WebReporter.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Web Universal Reporter for installation, use:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 325

Installation and Configuration Guide

WebReporter.visible=true
WebReporter.active=true

MicroStrategy Web Universal Professional

The state of whether MicroStrategy Web Universal Professional is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
WebProfessional.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Web Universal Professional.
WebProfessional.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Web Universal Professional for installation, use:
WebProfessional.visible=true
WebProfessional.active=true

MicroStrategy Portlets
The state of whether MicroStrategy Portlets is displayed in the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard:
Portlets.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Portlets.
Portlets.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Portlets for installation, use:
Portlets.visible=true
Portlets.active=true

MicroStrategy GIS Connectors

The state of whether MicroStrategy GIS Connectors is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
GISConnectors.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy GIS Connectors.
GISConnectors.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy GIS Connectors for installation, use:
GISConnectors.visible=true
GISConnectors.active=true

326 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Web Services J2EE

The state of whether MicroStrategy Web Services J2EE is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
WebServices.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Web Services J2EE.
WebServices.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Web Services J2EE for installation, use:
WebServices.visible=true
WebServices.active=true

MicroStrategy Mobile Server JSP

The state of whether MicroStrategy Mobile Server JSP is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
MobileServer.visible=Value
The selection state of Mobile Server JSP.
MobileServer.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Mobile Server JSP for installation, use:
MobileServer.visible=true
MobileServer.active=true

MicroStrategy Command Manager

The state of whether MicroStrategy Command Manager is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
CommandManager.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Command Manager.
CommandManager.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Command Manager for installation, use:
CommandManager.visible=true
CommandManager.active=true

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 327

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy System Manager

The state of whether MicroStrategy System Manager is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
SystemManager.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy System Manager.
SystemManager.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy System Manager for installation, use:
SystemManager.visible=true
SystemManager.active=true

MicroStrategy Integrity Manager

The state of whether MicroStrategy Integrity Manager is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
IntegrityManager.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Integrity Manager.
IntegrityManager.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Integrity Manager for installation, use:
IntegrityManager.visible=true
IntegrityManager.active=true

MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager

The state of whether MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
EnterpriseManager.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager.
EnterpriseManager.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager for installation, use:
EnterpriseManager.visible=true
EnterpriseManager.active=true

328 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Operations Manager

The state of whether MicroStrategy Operations Manager is displayed in the
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
OperationsManager.visible=Value
The selection state of MicroStrategy Operations Manager.
OperationsManager.active=Value
For example, to select MicroStrategy Operations Manager for installation, use:
OperationsManager.visible=true
OperationsManager.active=true

Usher Security Server

The state of whether Usher Security Server is displayed in the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard:
UsherSecurityServer.visible=Value
The selection state of Usher Security Server.
UsherSecurityServer.active=Value
For example, to select Usher Security Server for installation, use:
UsherSecurityServer.visible=true
UsherSecurityServer.active=true

Usher Network Manager

The state of whether Usher Network Manager is displayed in the MicroStrategy
Installation Wizard:
UsherNetworkManager.visible=Value
The selection state of Usher Network Manager.
UsherNetworkManager.active=Value
For example, to select Usher Network Manager for installation, use:
UsherNetworkManager.visible=true
UsherNetworkManager.active=true

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 329

Installation and Configuration Guide

Usher Analytics
The state of whether Usher Analytics is displayed in the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard:
UsherAnalytics.visible=Value
The selection state of Usher Analytics.
UsherAnalytics.active=Value
For example, to select Usher Analytics for installation, use:
UsherAnalytics.visible=true
UsherAnalytics.active=true

Usher Mobile
The state of whether Usher Mobile is displayed in the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard:
UsherMobile.visible=Value
The selection state of Usher Mobile.
UsherMobile.active=Value
For example, to select Usher Mobile for installation, use:
UsherMobile.visible=true
UsherMobile.active=true

CPU license information

This value should be specified when the license being used for MicroStrategy Intelligence
Server is based on CPUs. Legal values are integers between 1 and either the number of
CPUs allowed by the license or the number of CPUs in the machine, whichever is lower.
cpuCount.number=Value
By default, the maximum number of CPUs is allowed. This is represented with the
following value for this parameter:
cpuCount.number=maximum

MicroStrategy product and component installation locations

You can define the installation locations for the following products and components:
• MicroStrategy Web Universal Install Location:
WebUniversal.deployDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy Portlets Install Location:

330 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Portlets.installDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy GIS Connectors Install Location
GISConnectors.installDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy Operations Manager Install Location
OperationsManager.installDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy Web Services J2EE Install Location
WebServices.installDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy Mobile Server JSP Install Location
MobileServer.installDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy Command Manager Install Location
CommandManager.installDirectory=Value
• MicroStrategy System Manager Install Location
SystemManager.installDirectory=Value
• Usher Security Server Install Location:
UsherSecurityServer.installDirectory=Value
• Usher Network Manager Install Location:
UsherNetworkManager.installDirectory=Value
• Usher Analytics Install Location:
UsherAnalytics.installDirectory=Value
• Usher Mobile Install Location:
UsherMobile.installDirectory=Value

Health Center Agent configuration

You can configure the machine as a Health Center Agent or Master Health Agent as part
of the silent installation:
• The port used by the Health Center Agent:
HealthCenter.port=Value
Provide a valid, available port value between 1,024 and 65,533.
• The access code required to access the Health Center Agent and its information:
HealthCenter.accessCode=Value

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 331

Installation and Configuration Guide

If no access code is provided, then the Health Center Agent can be accessed without
supplying an access code.
• Configure the Health Center Agent as a daemon:
HealthCenter.configureDaemon=Value
You can define this parameter as true or false.
▫ HealthCenter.configureDaemon=true
Configures this Health Agent as a daemon, so that the Health Agent process is
constantly running in the background. This requires you to configure the Health
Agent using an account that has root access privileges to the machine.
▫ HealthCenter.configureDaemon=false
Configures the Health Agent as an application, which is required if you do not
have root access to the machine. In this case, be careful not to stop the Health
Agent process, so that the machine can remain part of the Health Center system
at all times.
• Configure the Master Health Agent:
HealthCenter.master=Value
You can define this parameter as true or false, with the value of true
configuring the machine as a Master Health Agent, which is responsible for most of
the Health Center operations, such as scheduling system checks and transmitting
diagnostics packages to MicroStrategy Technical Support. If you configure the
machine as a Master Health Agent, you must specify the following configurations:
▫ The location to store the Health Center repository. The repository contains
configuration information about the Health Center system, such as the list of
machines on the network and the MicroStrategy products they have installed,
and also the destination for all exported diagnostics packages:
HealthCenter.repository=Value
▫ You can choose to enroll the installation in the Customer Experience
Improvement Program:
— HealthCenter.customerExperienceProgram=true
Enrolls the installation in the Customer Experience Improvement Program.
Once enrolled, Health Center transmits anonymous data about your system
to MicroStrategy. No report data or prompt answers are collected or
transmitted. All information sent to MicroStrategy as a result of this
program is stored in the Census subfolder of the Health Center Repository.
— HealthCenter.customerExperienceProgram=false
Opts out of the Customer Experience Improvement Program.

332 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Usher Security Server configuration: Tomcat database

Usher Security Server installs a database that is a system of record for individual Usher
identities. You can configure Usher Security Server to communicate with the database, as
part of the silent installation:
• The location of the Tomcat directory used by Usher Security Server:
UsherSecurityServer.tomcatDir=Path
Provide a valid folder path that contains the correct version of Tomcat. You must be
able to write to the webapps subfolder.
• The IP address for the machine that hosts the database:
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBHost=IP_Address
• The port number for the database connection:
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBPort=Port
• The account name for the database user that administers the database:
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBUser=UserName
• The password for the database user specified above:
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBPassword=UserPassword
• The name of the Usher Security Server database:
UsherSecurityServer.serverDBInstance=DatabaseInstance
• The name of the database that stores log information for the Usher Security Server:
UsherSecurityServer.serverLogDBInstance=
DatabaseInstance

Usher Security Server configuration: Ports and certificates

Set up a trust relationship for Usher Security Server using the Public Key Infrastructure
(PKI), as part of the silent installation:
• The port used by Usher Security Server for server (one-way SSL) authentication:
UsherSecurityServer.serverPortOne=Port
• The port used by Usher Security Server for client and server (two-way SSL) mutual
authentication:
UsherSecurityServer.serverPortTwo=Port
• The location of the public key SSL certificate file:
UsherSecurityServer.serverSslCert=Path
• The location of the private key file:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 333

Installation and Configuration Guide

UsherSecurityServer.serverSslKey=Path
• The location of the SSL certificate chain:
UsherSecurityServer.serverCaCert=Path

Usher Security Server configuration: Gateways

Set up a trust relationship for the Agent Gateway using the Public Key Infrastructure
(PKI), as part of the silent installation:
• The port used by Usher Security Server for the Agent Gateway (one-way SSL)
authentication:
UsherSecurityServer.gatewayPort=Port
• The location of the public key SSL certificate file:
UsherSecurityServer.gatewaySslCert=Path
• The location of the private key file:
UsherSecurityServer.gatewaySslKey=Path
• The location of the SSL certificate chain:
UsherSecurityServer.gatewayCaCert=Path

Usher Network Manager configuration

You can configure Usher Network Manager as part of the silent installation:
• The location of the Apache directory used by Usher Network Manager:
UsherNetworkManager.apacheDir=Path
Provide a valid folder path that contains the conf and conf.d folders. You must be
able to write to the conf.d subfolder.
• The Apache user name:
UsherNetworkManager.apacheUser=UserName
• The Apache group name:
UsherNetworkManager.apacheGroup=GroupName
• Specify whether to use the same database connection as Usher Security Server:
UsherNetworkManager.useSameDBSetting=false
By default, the same database connection is not used (set to false). If false is
specified, you must define the database connection using the settings listed below.
• The IP address for the machine that hosts the database:

334 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

UsherNetworkManager.DBHost=IP_Address
• The port number for the database connection:
UsherNetworkManager.DBPort=Port
• The account name for the database user that administers the database:
UsherNetworkManager.DBUser=UserName
• The password for the database user specified above:
UsherNetworkManager.DBPassword=UserPassword
• The name of the Usher Network Manager database:
UsherNetworkManager.DBInstance=DatabaseInstance

Usher Analytics configuration

Usher Analytics installs a database to store Usher activity data. You can configure Usher
Analytics to communicate with the database, as part of the silent installation:
• Specify whether to use the same database connection as Usher Security Server:
UsherAnalytics.useSameDBSetting=false
By default, the same database connection is not used (set to false). If false is
specified, you must define the database connection using the settings listed below.
• The IP address for the machine that hosts the database:
UsherAnalytics.DBHost=IP_Address
• The port number for the database connection:
UsherAnalytics.DBPort=Port
• The account name for the database user that administers the database:
UsherAnalytics.DBUser=UserName
• The password for the database user specified above:
UsherAnalytics.DBPassword=UserPassword

The Usher Analytics database needs to be on the same MySQL instance as the
Usher Security Server database.

Providing installation files for smaller installations

You can reduce the amount of data that has to be downloaded for the installation by
excluding some of the .tzp files, located in the DataFiles folder, from the download.
You can use this technique to download only the files required to complete your

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 335

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy installation, which can then also be used to reduce the amount of data
packaged and downloaded for other MicroStrategy installations.

If you are performing a MicroStrategy hotfix installation, you must include all of
the files provided as part of the hotfix installation in their default location. This
means that you cannot use the options provided below to point to the location of
the hotfix installation files.

To reduce the amount of data required for MicroStrategy installations, you first need to
determine the files required to support your installation of MicroStrategy, as described in
Creating custom installation packages, page 46. Once you determine and collect the
.tzp files required to support your MicroStrategy installation, you can specify the
location of these files using the following parameters:
• InstallOnDemand.style=Value
Determines whether the required installation files are provided in a folder or at a
URL. You must define this parameter with one of the following values:
▫ FileSystem: Type this value if the required installation files are stored in a
folder on the local machine or a server machine. You must also provide the
location of the files using the InstallOnDemand.sourceLocation
parameter.
▫ HTTP: Type this value if the required installation files are stored at an unsecured
URL. You must also provide the location of the files using the
InstallOnDemand.url parameter.
▫ HTTPS: Type this value if the required installation files are stored at a secured
URL. You must also provide the location of the files using the
InstallOnDemand.url parameter, as well as the user name and password to
access the URL using the InstallOnDemand.username and
InstallOnDemand.password parameters.
• InstallOnDemand.sourceLocation=Value
Location of the folder that stores any required installation files. Type the location of
the local file path. If you store the files in a local folder, do not provide a location for
the InstallOnDemand.url parameter.
• InstallOnDemand.url=Value
Location of the URL for the HTTP or HTTPS location that stores any required
installation files. Type the URL for the location that stores any required installation
files. If you store the files at an HTTP or HTTPS location, do not provide a location
for the InstallOnDemand.sourceLocation parameter.
• InstallOnDemand.bypassCertificateChecking=Value
If you retrieve the installation files from a URL location using HTTPS, you can use
this setting to skip any certificate checking by defining this option to true. To
maintain certificate checking, define this option as false.
• InstallOnDemand.username=Value

336 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

If you retrieve the installation files from a URL location, type a user name that has
access to the URL location. If there is no login required to the URL or you retrieve
the installation files from a local folder, you do not need to define a value for this
parameter.
• InstallOnDemand.password=Value
If you retrieve the installation files from a URL location, type a password for the user
name. If there is no login required to the URL or you retrieve the installation files
from a local folder, you do not need to define a value for this parameter.

Unique post-installation configurations

MicroStrategy supports many different UNIX and Linux environments with various
system configurations. There are a few cases in which you must perform some manual
configurations to support the use of MicroStrategy on your system. For more
information, see Unique post-installation configurations, page 95 in Chapter 3,
Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux.

Silent installation output

The installation returns 0 if the installation is successful, and any other value if it is not.
The install.log file in the InstallPath directory provides more information on
possible errors. For more information on the install.log file, see Installation log
file, page 262 in Chapter 2, Installing MicroStrategy on Windows.

If the installation fails on any of the steps before it starts copying the files, it does
not give any feedback other than the return value different from 0.

Activating a silent installation

After your silent installation is complete, you must activate your MicroStrategy
installation within 30 days. To activate your installation you can follow the instructions
provided in Chapter 4, Activating Your Installation.

Configuring MicroStrategy in command line

mode
The MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard is provided in command line mode so that you
can use the Configuration Wizard through the operating system console if you do not
have access to the GUI. Running the Configuration Wizard in command line mode to
configure MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux machines is covered in the Configuring
MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353 section in Chapter 11, Configuring
MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 337

Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

After completing the steps to install MicroStrategy products, you can set up and
configure your installation. To help guide the rest of your installation and configuration
steps, refer to the section Installing and configuring MicroStrategy on UNIX and
Linux, page 49 in Chapter 1, Planning Your Installation, for an installation and
configuration checklist.

338 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 10
DEPLOYING OEM
APPLICATIONS
This chapter explains the common workflow for deploying the MicroStrategy platform as
an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) application.
The MicroStrategy platform can be deployed as an OEM application in various ways:
• MicroStrategy can be deployed as a software as a service model through the use of
MicroStrategy Web. In this scenario MicroStrategy is installed and configured at a
centralized location using the standard process, and the customized application is
deployed as an OEM application using MicroStrategy Web. For information on
deploying MicroStrategy Web, see Chapter 6, Deploying MicroStrategy Web, Mobile
Server, and Operations Manager. For information on customizing MicroStrategy
Web, see Customizing MicroStrategy Web, page 342.
• MicroStrategy can be deployed as part of an OEM software bundle directly to a
customer environment. This chapter focuses on the development and deployment of
this type of OEM application.
The table below provides a best practices checklist of how to deploy MicroStrategy as an
OEM application. In addition to using the checklist below to deploy a MicroStrategy as
an OEM application, you can also use MicroStrategy System Manager. System Manager
lets you define multiple configurations for your MicroStrategy environment that can be
executed in a single workflow. For steps to use System Manager to deploy MicroStrategy
configurations, see the System Administration Guide.

Complete Task

Install MicroStrategy on an OEM environment. For information on installing MicroStrategy,

see:
• Chapter 2, Installing MicroStrategy on Windows
• Chapter 3, Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux

Create DSNs using the Connectivity Wizard, as described in Creating DSNs for OEM
environments, page 340.
Configure MicroStrategy using the Configuration Wizard. This tool allows you to save
configurations as response files that can be used to automate the configuration for the

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 339

Installation and Configuration Guide

Complete Task

OEM deployment. This allows you to re-use all the configurations performed when
developing an OEM application for the deployment process as well, as described in
Configuring a MicroStrategy installation, page 341.
Design projects and a reporting environment. You can use the various MicroStrategy
products and relevant documentation to create the required MicroStrategy environment.
For additional best practices when designing a reporting environment, see Designing a
project and reporting environment, page 341.
Customize MicroStrategy Web through the use of the MicroStrategy SDK, as described in
Customizing MicroStrategy Web, page 342.
Deploy a MicroStrategy OEM application on an OEM’s customer environment, as described
in Deploying a MicroStrategy OEM application, page 342.
Create DSNs on the OEM’s customer environment as necessary, as described in Creating
DSNs for OEM environments, page 340.
Configure and tune an OEM deployment through the use of various MicroStrategy tools, as
described in Tuning an OEM deployment, page 347.

If you are modifying a project that has already been deployed as an OEM application, see
Updating OEM applications, page 348 for best practices on how to incorporate any custom
reports or objects that may have been created for the deployed application.
Troubleshoot your MicroStrategy OEM applications using MicroStrategy Health Center, as
described in Troubleshooting support for MicroStrategy OEM applications, page 349

Creating DSNs for OEM environments

Establishing communication between MicroStrategy and your databases or other data
sources is an essential first step in configuring MicroStrategy products for reporting and
analysis of your data. These data sources are used to store the data warehouse and the
MicroStrategy metadata, which are both required to support a MicroStrategy reporting
environment.
To create a connection to these data sources you need an ODBC driver as well as a data
source name (DSN). MicroStrategy comes packaged with ODBC drivers to support
connecting to various data sources. For more information on ODBC drivers, see
Communicating with databases, page 128.
When setting up your OEM environment, you must create a separate DSN to connect to
the main data source and the metadata repository. This requirement is true even if the
data source and metadata repository are stored in the same database or other data
source. The main data source and the metadata are described below:
• A data source stores the data that users of the system can analyze through BI
capabilities offered by MicroStrategy products.
• Metadata is a repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data
warehouse with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of business
views, terms, and needs to the underlying database structure. Metadata can reside on
the same server as the data warehouse or on a different server. It can be also be

340 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

stored in a different relational database than your data warehouse. A metadata can be
created using the Configuration Wizard, as described in Configuring a
MicroStrategy installation, page 341.
A DSN can be created using the MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard, as described in
Defining DSNs, page 132.

Creating DSNs as part of an OEM deployment

As part of the deployment of an OEM application, the Connectivity Wizard can also be
run from the command line to create DSNs on UNIX and Linux environments. This
allows you to perform this configuration using scripts. For information on creating DSNs
using the command line version of the Connectivity Wizard, see Creating a DSN for a
data source, page 350.
For OEM deployments on Windows machines, use the Connectivity Wizard interface to
create DSNs, as described in Defining DSNs, page 132.

Configuring a MicroStrategy installation

After installing MicroStrategy, you can use the MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard to
configure the metadata repository, statistics tables, History List tables, MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server, and multiple project sources.
The Configuration Wizard interface guides you through each of these configurations, as
described in Initial MicroStrategy configuration, page 137.
In addition, all configurations that are performed using the Configuration Wizard can be
saved as response files. These files can then be used later to automate much of the initial
configuration of MicroStrategy when deploying it as an OEM application. This allows you
to re-use all the configurations performed when developing an OEM application. For
information on configuring MicroStrategy using a response file, see Configuring
MicroStrategy with a response file, page 161.

Designing a project and reporting environment

You can use the various MicroStrategy products and relevant documentation to create
the required MicroStrategy reporting environment for your OEM application. The
following best practices can be helpful when creating this reporting environment:
• It is common to define objects such as reports, documents, attributes, metrics, and
filters that are created for the OEM application so that they cannot be modified once
it is deployed. You can modify the object security of each object so that it does not
allow write access. This ensures that the reports provided out of the box with the
OEM application are not modified and overwritten. Users can still use Save As to
save their own personal copies of any objects to make any required changes.
• You can modify the folder permissions in MicroStrategy to determine where reports
and objects can be created. Limiting the folders that allow write access can require
users to create reports in their My Reports folder.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 341

Installation and Configuration Guide

• If you are modifying a project that has already been deployed as an OEM application,
see Updating OEM applications, page 348 for best practices on how to incorporate
any custom reports or objects that may have been created for the deployed
application.

Customizing MicroStrategy Web

MicroStrategy Web provides users with a highly interactive environment and a low-
maintenance interface for reporting and analysis. Using the MicroStrategy Web
interface, users can access, analyze, and share corporate data through any web browser
on any operating system.
With the MicroStrategy SDK, you can customize, embed, or extend MicroStrategy Web
into your application, or modify the standard interface or functionality. Common
customizations for OEM deployments include:
• Customizing the look and feel of the MicroStrategy Web interface. This can include
changing the color scheme, adding or removing content, using customized logos, and
many other customizations.
• Integrating MicroStrategy Web with third-party applications such as:
▫ Portals
▫ External security and user management systems
▫ Advanced data visualizations
• Extending functionality to support composite applications includes such things as
writeback capabilities and other custom features.
To customize MicroStrategy Web using the MicroStrategy SDK, refer to the
MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL). The MSDL contains details about the
architecture, object models, customization scenarios, code samples, and so on that are
useful for building a sophisticated and highly functional, customized application.
The MicroStrategy SDK and MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) are not included
in the MicroStrategy installation. You can download the MicroStrategy SDK from the
MicroStrategy support site https://resource.microstrategy.com/msdz/default.asp. You
can also access the MicroStrategy Developer Library from the MicroStrategy support site.

Deploying a MicroStrategy OEM application

Once an OEM application is developed, it then must be deployed to the customer’s
environment. Steps to deploy an OEM installation include:
1 Installing the required MicroStrategy products on the customer’s environment. This
can be automated using silent installation techniques, as described in OEM silent
installations, page 343. To use the Installation Wizard to install MicroStrategy
products, see:
• Chapter 2, Installing MicroStrategy on Windows

342 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Chapter 3, Installing MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux

2 Additional configurations are required, as described in Configuring an OEM
deployment installation, page 347.

OEM silent installations

You can use silent installation to easily embed MicroStrategy products with other
applications. The steps below show you how to use a silent installation to deploy an OEM
application on a Windows environment. For additional information on silent
installations, see Chapter 8, Automated Installation on Windows.
You can follow the steps below to perform a silent installation on a Windows
environment. To perform a silent installation on a UNIX or Linux environment, see
Silent installation, page 317.

Prerequisites
• Ensure that the MicroStrategy installation files are accessible on the machine in
which the installation is being performed. If a required installation file is not
accessible, the installation can fail, often providing a warning about missing
requirements.

To perform an OEM silent installation

When MicroStrategy products are installed as software bundled with another product,
the following procedure is strongly recommended:
1 Create an installation response file (response.ini) for the MicroStrategy products
to install. The table that follows shows which sections of the file are mandatory and
which are optional.
For detailed information regarding the contents of the response.ini file, see
Configuring a response.ini file to install MicroStrategy, page 263.

Response File Section Selection

[Installer] Required

HideAllDialogs = Required

PreventReboot = Optional

StopAllServices = Optional

StopIIS = Optional

CheckRenameOperations = Optional

[UserRegistration] Required

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 343

Installation and Configuration Guide

Response File Section Selection

[ComponentSelection] Required

EnterpriseManagerSelect = Required

[InitialPaths] Required

EnterpriseManager = Required

Setting HideAllDialogs = TRUE causes the script for the response file to:

• Use default values as specified in the response.ini file.

• Not require user input.
• Keep the dialog flow consistent from one instance to the next. Consistency in
the response file script from one instance to the next is necessary; if
setup.iss detects an inconsistency in the dialog flow, installation is
terminated and a log file for the failure is created.
The only dialog flow modifications pertinent to silent installation are specific to file
location. Therefore, the only portion of the response.ini that may need to be
modified is the [InitialPaths] section.
The rest of this procedure assumes you have saved the response.ini file to the
file path C:\. If you save it to another file path, replace C:\response.ini with
the file path of your response.ini file.
You must save the response.ini file as ANSI encoding.
2 Create the setup.iss file to use in conjunction with the response.ini file for
the silent installation. Use a text editor to create the setup.iss file with the
following information:
[InstallShield Silent]
Version=v7.00
File=ResponseFile
[File Transfer]
OverwrittenReadOnly=NoToAll
[Application]
Name=MicroStrategy
Version=x.y.z
#x.y.z represent the version of the
product#
Company=MicroStrategy
Lang=LanguageValue
[{8CCF3F6C-55B7-4A27-8C68-ADF21D0585A2}-DlgOrder]
Count=0
You must save the setup.iss file as ANSI encoding.

344 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Be aware of the following

The version in the setup.iss file must match the MicroStrategy version you
are installing exactly. For example, if you are installing version 9.3.0 you must
enter Version=9.3.0. Entering a version as Version=9 or
Version=9.3.x causes an error when trying to perform a silent installation
of version 9.3.0.
Refer to Language settings for silent installations, page 346, for an
explanation of the LanguageValue parameter within the line
Lang=LanguageValue.

3 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then select Accessories, and
then right-click Command Prompt and select Run as Administrator. The
User Account Control dialog box opens.

The steps to open a Windows command prompt with administrator privileges

may be different depending on your version of Windows.

4 Click Yes to open the command prompt with administrator privileges. The
command prompt is displayed.
5 Run the silent install with the response.ini file in conjunction with the
setup.iss file as follows:

Refer to Language settings for silent installations, page 346, for an

explanation of the LanguageValue parameter.

INSTALL_PATH\setup.exe -LLanguageValue --
ResponseFile="C:\response.ini" -s -f1”c:\setup.iss” -
f2”c:\setup.log”
In the syntax shown above, the -s parameter indicates that the installation is to be
completely silent. If the -s parameter is not included in the command, then an
interface is displayed during the installation that shows the progress of the
installation.

If the setup program encounters an invalid value for an installation

requirement, the setup terminates and the silent installation is ended. You can
review any errors in the setup.log file.

6 If a restart is required after the installation is complete, a restart of the machine is

automatically triggered. Power the machine back on to allow for the completion of
any configurations that are required after the restart of the machine.
7 After the installation is complete, you can check the result of the installation process.
If the silent installation is successful, the resulting code value is zero
(ResultCode=0) in the setup.log file. This is the only indication of the
installation being completed if the installation is completely silent and a restart of the
machine is not required.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 345

Installation and Configuration Guide

Language settings for silent installations

In the final two steps of the procedure to run an OEM silent installation:
• You can set MicroStrategy Developer language settings by setting the language value
in the setup.iss file.
• You can bypass the language prompt by running setup.exe with the command line
option for the language.
The following table lists the values for the different languages that MicroStrategy
supports.

Language Value

Danish 0006

Dutch 0019

English 0009

French 0012

German 0007

Italian 0016

Japanese 0017

Korean 0018

Portuguese 0022

Simplified Chinese 2052

Spanish 0010

Swedish 0029

Traditional Chinese 1028

For example, to select English as the language:

• For the setup.iss file, change Lang=LanguageValue to:
Lang=0009
• To run the silent install, use the command line option as follows:
Path\setup.exe -L0009

For the command line option, you must type -L in front of the language code
to signify that you are entering a language.

346 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring an OEM deployment installation

Once MicroStrategy has been installed on the customer’s environment, the following
additional steps must be taken to prepare the initial configuration of MicroStrategy
software:
• Provide the MicroStrategy metadata that was developed for the OEM application.
• Create separate DSNs to connect to the data warehouse and the metadata, as
described in Creating DSNs for OEM environments, page 340.
• Use the Configuration Wizard to configure metadata, Intelligence Server, and project
sources. If you saved your configurations as response files, these configurations can
be re-used for automated configuration. For information on using the Configuration
Wizard, see Configuring a MicroStrategy installation, page 341.
• Configure and tune an OEM deployment through the use of various MicroStrategy
tools, as described in Tuning an OEM deployment, page 347.

Tuning an OEM deployment

A MicroStrategy OEM deployment requires additional tuning and configuration, both
during deployment and throughout the life cycle of the OEM application. Various ways
to perform these configurations are described below:

Tuning with Command Manager

MicroStrategy Command Manager lets you perform various administrative and
application development tasks by using text commands that can be saved as scripts. You
can manage configuration settings within the MicroStrategy platform, for either project
sources or Narrowcast Server metadatas. With Command Manager, you can change
multiple configuration settings all at once, without using the MicroStrategy Developer or
Narrowcast Administrator interface.
Developers of OEM applications that use embedded MicroStrategy projects may find that
they need flexibility in configuring their environment. Command Manager Runtime is a
slimmed-down version of the Command Manager command-line executable for use with
these OEM applications. For information about obtaining Command Manager Runtime,
contact your MicroStrategy sales representative.
OEM application deployments typically required on-premise configuration of
environment-specific settings such as database user and password, governing options,
caching options, and other tuning requirements. Command Manager Runtime scripts
enable OEMs to automate a number of such configuration settings.
Command Manager Runtime uses a subset of the commands available for the full version
of Command Manager. If you try to execute a script with statements that are not
available in Command Manager Runtime, the script fails with the message “You are not
licensed to run this command.” For a list of the commands available in Command
Manager Runtime, with syntax and examples for each command, refer to the
Supplemental Reference for System Administration.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 347

Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring MicroStrategy in command line mode

The MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard is provided in command line mode so that you
can use the Configuration Wizard through the operating system console if you do not
have access to the GUI. Running the Configuration Wizard in command line mode to
configure MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux machines is covered in Configuring
MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353.

Updating OEM applications

The lifecycle of an OEM application often requires the OEM application to be updated
with new reports and other enhancements. These enhancements can be developed
within the OEM application and then the customer’s existing application can be updated.
For more information on updating OEM applications, see:

Modifying deployed OEM applications

If you are modifying a project that has already been deployed as an OEM application, you
must update the application in a way that does not disrupt any current customer
development, as described below:
• Retrieve the customer’s metadata so that custom reports or other objects that have
been created can also be included in the OEM application update.
• Any new objects deployed as part of the OEM application update should be tested to
ensure that they do not negatively affect the objects provided with the previous
deployment of the OEM application. MicroStrategy Integrity Manager can be used to
automate the testing of including new objects in an OEM application. For
information on Integrity Manager, refer to the System Administration Guide.

Deploying an OEM application update

Once updates for an OEM application are complete, the OEM application must then be
deployed. There are two ways in which an updated OEM application can be redeployed,
as described below:
• Replace the entire project in the OEM application, as described in Replacing a
project in an OEM application, page 348.
• Merge new objects into the existing project for the OEM application, as described in
Merging new objects into a project in an OEM application, page 349.

Replacing a project in an OEM application

Once updates for an OEM application are complete, the project can be replaced in an
OEM application. This is commonly done by duplicating the updated OEM project, and
then merging that project into the production OEM application.

348 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

These tasks can be achieved using the MicroStrategy Project Duplication Wizard and
Project Merge Wizard. Both of these tools can perform their tasks from the command
line, which can allow the project duplication and replacement process to be automated.
The steps to use these tools to duplicate and replace a project are provided in the System
Administration Guide.

Merging new objects into a project in an OEM application

Once updates for an OEM application are complete, the updates to the project can be
deployed through the use of update packages. An update package is a file containing a set
of object definitions and conflict resolution rules. When you create an update package,
you first add objects, and then specify how any conflicts involving the objects are
resolved.
These update packages can be developed using Object Manager. Once the package is
ready for deployment, it can be deployed using Object Manager or Command Manager
Runtime. For information on creating and deploying an update package with Object
Manager, refer to the information on managing projects provided in the System
Administration Guide. For information on Command Manager Runtime, refer to the
Supplemental Reference for System Administration.

Troubleshooting support for MicroStrategy OEM

applications
MicroStrategy Health Center can help you diagnose and fix problems in your
MicroStrategy system. It detects known problems and provides an immediate solution.
In cases where Health Center cannot fix a problem immediately, it enables you to bundle
relevant log files into a diagnostic package and transmit this package to MicroStrategy
Technical Support for review and troubleshooting.
Health Center is provided with a MicroStrategy installation.
For information on using Health Center to diagnose and fix problems in your
MicroStrategy environment, refer to the System Administration Guide.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 349

 11
CONFIGURING
MICROSTRATEGY USING
COMMAND LINE TOOLS
MicroStrategy tools are provided in command line mode on UNIX and Linux so that you
can perform various configuration tasks through the operating system console. This
enables you to perform your required configurations even if you do not have access to
the MicroStrategy interface.
On a Windows machine, it is recommended to use the appropriate MicroStrategy
interfaces to perform the configurations described in this chapter.

When you perform MicroStrategy configuration tasks through a UNIX or Linux

operating system console, you must make sure reserved words and characters are
not mistakenly included in your commands. To avoid issues caused by reserved
words and characters, see Supporting reserved words and characters, page 371.

This chapter covers the configurations listed below:

• Creating a DSN for a data source, page 350
• Testing ODBC connectivity
• Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini file, page 353
• Configuring and controlling Intelligence Server, page 367

Creating a DSN for a data source

After you install an ODBC driver (see Appendix , Connecting to Databases and Data
Sources), you can define one or more data sources for it. The DSN should provide a
unique description of the data, for example, Payroll_Project_Metadata or
Payroll_Warehouse.
The DSN is the name for a pointer used by a client application (in this case
MicroStrategy) to find and connect to a data source. Multiple DSNs can point to the
same data source and one DSN can be used by different applications.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 350

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy provides a one-line command line version of the MicroStrategy

Connectivity Wizard to create DSNs on UNIX and Linux.

You can create DSNs using the MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard on Windows,
UNIX, and Linux machines, as described in Communicating with databases, page
128.

To create a DSN on UNIX/Linux from the command line

1 From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is

the directory that you specified as the home directory during installation.
2 Browse to the folder bin.
3 Type mstrconnectwiz -h, and then press ENTER to display command line syntax
and examples for different database platforms.
4 Create your command based on the syntax and examples displayed. For example, the
command below creates a DSN for an Oracle database and tests login credentials:
mstrconnectwiz ORCLW MyOracleDSN 12.34.56.78 orcl 1521
-u:OracleUser -p:OracleUserPasword

Testing ODBC connectivity

ODBC connectivity is one of two layers of connectivity that are listed in the next table,
along with the associated connectivity testing programs. Connectivity should be tested
from the bottom up—the network layer first and then the ODBC layer.

Layer Test with

ODBC driver Test ODBC

mstrtestodbc or mstrtodbcx

Network Simple Network Layer Testing Tool

TCP/IP Ping, PING.EXE, for TCP/IP

The test method described above reflects the situation when the ODBC driver and
the database network software are bundled. If they are not bundled, they must be
configured and tested separately, using database-specific tools.

Using the DB Query Tool

The MicroStrategy DB Query Tool is available in Windows, UNIX, and Linux to test and
troubleshoot connectivity to databases, create and execute SQL commands through
ODBC, and run scripts.

351 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Prerequisites
Before you use the DB Query Tool, test the network layer with the network layer utility,
PING.EXE. Consult your operating system or network system documentation for details.

To use the DB Query Tool

1 To use the DB Query Tool:

• On Windows using the DB Query Tool interface, perform the following step:
— From the Windows Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and then choose DB Query Tool.
• On Windows from the command line, perform the following steps:
— From the Windows Start menu, select Run. The Run dialog box opens.
— In the Open drop-down list, type cmd and click OK. A command prompt
opens.
— Type todbcx.exe and press ENTER. Prompts guide you through testing
your ODBC connection from the command line and should be used in place
of the steps below. For detailed steps on how to use the command line
version of this tool, see Testing ODBC connectivity in Chapter 11,
Configuring MicroStrategy Using Command Line Tools.
• On UNIX or Linux using the DB Query Tool interface, perform the following
steps:
— In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrdbquerytool, then press
ENTER.
• On UNIX or Linux from the command line, perform the following steps:
— In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory that you specified as the home directory during
installation.
— Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrtodbcx, then press ENTER.
Prompts guide you through testing your ODBC connection from the
command line and should be used in place of the steps below. For detailed
steps on how to use the command line version of this tool, see Testing
ODBC connectivity in Chapter 11, Configuring MicroStrategy Using
Command Line Tools.
2 From the Session menu, select Open Connection, or click the Connect icon on
the toolbar. The Connect dialog box opens. The connection interface varies
depending on the destination database.
3 Select the DSN for a data source.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 352

Installation and Configuration Guide

4 Enter the appropriate user name and password.

5 Click Connect. After your connection is opened, the connection string is displayed
in the MicroStrategy DB Query Tool at the bottom. Your cursor is inserted
automatically in the SQL Statement window.
6 In the SQL Statement window, type a SQL query such as:
select count (*) from Table
where Table is a system-defined table, such as SYSOBJECTS for Microsoft SQL
Server or a MicroStrategy-created table such as DSSMDSYSPROP in the
MicroStrategy metadata.
7 From the Queries menu, select Execute Query. A table of data from the database
is displayed in the Query Result window.
8 From the Session menu, select Close Connection to close the database
connection.
9 From the File menu, select Exit to close the MicroStrategy DB Query Tool.
The DB Query Tool includes many useful features not discussed here. Refer to the DB
Query Tool Online Help for details.

Configuring MicroStrategy with a response.ini

file
The MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard is provided in command line mode so that you
can use the Configuration Wizard even if you do not have access to a GUI. You can
perform the following configurations with the Configuration Wizard in command line
mode:
• Create metadata, statistics, and History List tables
• Create new MicroStrategy Intelligence Server definitions in the metadata, assign an
existing server definition for Intelligence Server, and delete existing server definitions
• Create MicroStrategy project sources in a server (three-tier) mode

Direct (two-tier) data sources are available only on the Windows operating
system.

Using the Configuration Wizard in command line mode creates a response.ini file.
This file can then be used from the command line to configure MicroStrategy without
stepping through the pages of the Configuration Wizard. You can also distribute a
response.ini file to other users and machines to perform multiple configurations
without stepping through the Configuration Wizard for each configuration.
This section covers the following procedures and information related to configuring
MicroStrategy from the command line on a Linux or UNIX machine using a
response.ini file:
• Creating a response.ini file, page 354

353 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367

• Parameters and options in the response.ini file, page 367

You can also configure MicroStrategy using the Configuration Wizard in command
line mode on a Windows machine. However, on a Windows machine, it is
recommended to use the Configuration Wizard graphical user interface to create
and use a response file, which is described in Configuring MicroStrategy with a
response file, page 161.

Before you can configure MicroStrategy with the Configuration Wizard in command line
mode, you must ensure that you meet the prerequisites listed in Configuration Wizard
prerequisites, page 138.

Creating a response.ini file

This section describes how to configure MicroStrategy using the command line mode.
Performing the steps in this section creates a response.ini file that can be used to
configure MicroStrategy installations on UNIX and Linux machines.

To configure MicroStrategy using the command line mode

1 In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is

the directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation.
2 Browse to the bin directory.
3 At the command prompt, type mstrcfgwiz-editor, then press ENTER. The
Configuration Wizard opens in command line mode.
The sections or pages of the wizard displayed depend on your selections.
4 Review the information on the welcome screen and press ENTER to continue.
5 You can select to use a response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, or create a
new response.ini file to support a new configuration, as described below:
• Type 1, and then press ENTER to use a response.ini file to configure
MicroStrategy. For steps to use a response.ini file in command line mode,
see Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.
• Type 2, and then press ENTER to create a new response.ini file. You can
select from various configuration tasks, as described in the Configuration tasks,
page 354 section within this procedure.

Configuration tasks
6 You can support the configuration tasks described in the sections listed below:
• Type 1, and then press ENTER to create metadata, History List, and statistics
tables. Refer to Creating metadata, History List, and statistics tables, page 355
for steps to create metadata and statistics tables.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 354

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Type 2, and then press ENTER to configure a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

definition. Refer to Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 362 for
steps to configure an Intelligence Server definition.
• Type 3, and then press ENTER to create project sources. Refer to Creating a
project source, page 366 for steps to create project sources.

Creating metadata, History List, and statistics tables

If you selected option 1 in Configuration tasks, page 354, you can create metadata tables,
History List tables, and statistics tables. The steps to perform these configuration tasks
are provided separately in the sections below:
• Creating metadata tables, page 355
• Creating History List tables, page 357
• Creating statistics tables, page 360

Creating metadata tables

You can create metadata tables in a data source, as described in the procedure below.

If metadata tables already exist in the location you plan to store your metadata
tables in and you do not want to overwrite the current metadata tables, you should
use the option described below.

Prerequisite
• This procedure assumes you have already opened the Configuration Wizard in
command line mode and selected to create metadata and statistics tables, as
described in Creating a response.ini file, page 354.

To create metadata tables

1 In the prompt asking whether to create metadata tables, type Y, and then press
ENTER. You are then prompted for ODBC data source information.
2 Type the number corresponding to the ODBC DSN for the database to store your
metadata tables, and then press ENTER.

If you do not have a DSN defined on your UNIX or Linux machine, see
Creating a DSN for a data source, page 350.

3 If the Configuration Wizard detects an existing metadata repository in the database

location you specified, a message is displayed on whether to re-create the metadata
tables. If you type Y and press enter, all information in the existing metadata
repository is overwritten when the response file is executed at a later time.

355 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

4 Depending on your database type, you may be prompted to provide a login and
password to your DSN:
a Type a login name for your database that stores your metadata tables, and then
press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a password for the login name.
b Type a password for the login name provided, and then press ENTER. You are
then prompted to provide a metadata prefix for the metadata tables.
5 Depending on your database type, you can enter characters to use as a prefix for the
names of your metadata tables or use no prefix, as described below:
• Type the required prefix characters, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to provide no metadata prefix.
6 The next configuration displayed depends on your ODBC data source details:
• If the data source points to a DB2 MVS database, steps to configure a DB2 MVS
database are displayed. These are described in the To configure DB2 MVS
database options, page 356 section within this procedure.
• If the data source does not point to a DB2 MVS database, the step to select a
metadata script is displayed. This step is described in the To select a metadata
script, page 356 section within this procedure.

To configure DB2 MVS database options

These steps are displayed if you are creating your metadata tables in a DB2 MVS
database.
7 You can enter the database name to use or use the default name, as described below:
• Type the database name to use, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default database.
You are then prompted to provide the MVS table space name.
8 You can enter characters to use as a table space name for your metadata tables or use
the default table space name, as described below:
• Type the required table space name characters, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default table space
name.
You are then prompted to select a metadata script to create the metadata tables.

To select a metadata script

9 You can select the script used to create the metadata tables or use the default script,
as described below:
• Enter a valid path to a script file, and then press ENTER.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 356

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Leave the field blank, and then press ENTER to use the default script for your
database type.
You are then prompted to create History List tables.

To create History List tables

10 You can choose whether to create History List tables or not, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to create History List tables. Creating History List
tables is described in Creating statistics tables, page 360.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to skip History List table creation. You are then
prompted to create statistics tables, as described in the To create statistics tables,
page 357 section within this procedure.

To create statistics tables

11 You can choose whether to create statistics tables or not, as described below.
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to create statistics tables. Creating statistics tables
is described in Creating statistics tables, page 360.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to skip statistics tables creation. You are then
prompted to provide a name for the response.ini file, as described in the To
generate a response.ini file, page 357 section within this procedure.

To generate a response.ini file

12 By default, the configuration is saved as Response.ini in the /HOME_PATH/
directory, where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory
during installation. You can leave the field blank to use the default name or type a
different name, and then press ENTER. The response.ini file is generated, and
you are prompted whether to run the configuration immediately.
13 You can choose to run the configuration you just completed or to run the
configuration using the response.ini file at a different time, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to run the configuration.
You can also use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as
described in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to quit without running the configuration. You
can use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as described
in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

Creating History List tables

You can create History List tables in a data source, as described in the procedure below.

357 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
• This procedure assumes you have already opened the Configuration Wizard in
command line mode and selected to create metadata, History List, and statistics
tables, as described in Creating a response.ini file, page 354.

To create History List tables

1 After you create metadata tables (see Creating metadata tables, page 355) or skip
both of the creation of metadata tables, you are prompted to create History List
tables.
To create History List tables, type Y, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted
for ODBC data source information.
2 You can supply ODBC DSN information in various ways described below, which
depend on whether you previously created metadata tables as part of the
configuration process:
• If you did not create metadata tables as part of the configuration process, you are
prompted to enter ODBC DSN information. The steps to enter this information
is described in the To provide ODBC DSN information, page 358 section within
this procedure.
• If you created metadata tables as part of the configuration process, you are
prompted whether to use the same metadata table ODBC DSN information for
your History List tables. You have the following options:
— Type Y, and then press ENTER to create History List tables with the same
ODBC DSN information entered for your metadata tables. You are then
prompted to select a History List script to create the History List tables,
which is described in the To select a History List script, page 359 section
within this procedure.
— Type N, and then press ENTER to provide different ODBC DSN information,
which is described in the To provide ODBC DSN information, page 358
section within this procedure.

To provide ODBC DSN information

3 Type the number corresponding to the ODBC DSN for a database to create your
History List tables in, and then press ENTER.

If you do not have a DSN defined on your UNIX or Linux machine, see
Creating a DSN for a data source, page 350.

4 Depending on your database type, you may be prompted to provide a login and
password to your DSN:
a Type a login name for your database to create your History List tables in, and
then press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a password for the login
name.
b Type a password for the login name provided, and then press ENTER.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 358

Installation and Configuration Guide

5 The next configuration displayed depends on your ODBC data source details:
• If the data source points to a DB2 MVS database, steps to configure a DB2 MVS
database are displayed. These are described in the To configure DB2 MVS
database options, page 359 section within this procedure.
• If the data source does not point to a DB2 MVS database, the step to select a
statistics script to create statistics tables is displayed. This step is described in the
To select a History List script, page 359 section within this procedure.

To configure DB2 MVS database options

These steps are displayed if you are creating your metadata tables in a DB2 MVS
database.
6 You can enter the database name to use or use the default name, as described below:
• Type the database name to use, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default database.
You are then prompted to provide the MVS table space name.
7 You can enter characters to use as a table space name for your metadata tables or use
the default table space name, as described below:
• Type the required table space name characters, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default table space
name.
You are then prompted to select a statistics script to create statistics tables.

To select a History List script

8 You can select the script used to create the History List tables or use the default
script, as described below:
• Enter a valid path to a script file, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the field blank, and then press ENTER to use the default script for your
database type.
You are then prompted to create statistics tables.

To create statistics tables

9 You can choose whether to create statistics tables or not, as described below.
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to create statistics tables. Creating statistics tables
is described in Creating statistics tables, page 360.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to skip statistics tables creation. You are then
prompted to provide a name for the response.ini file, as described in the To
generate a response.ini file, page 360 section within this procedure.

359 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To generate a response.ini file

10 By default, the configuration is saved as Response.ini in the /HOME_PATH/
directory, where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory
during installation. You can leave the field blank to use the default name or type a
different name, and then press ENTER. The response.ini file is generated, and
you are prompted whether to run the configuration immediately.
11 You can choose to run the configuration you just completed or to run the
configuration using the response.ini file at a different time, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to run the configuration.
You can also use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as
described in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to quit without running the configuration. You
can use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as described
in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

Creating statistics tables

You can create statistics tables in a data source, as described in the procedure below.

Prerequisites
• This procedure assumes you have already opened the Configuration Wizard in
command line mode and selected to create metadata, History List, and statistics
tables, as described in Creating a response.ini file, page 354.

To create statistics tables

1 After you create metadata tables (see Creating metadata tables, page 355), create
History List tables (Creating History List tables, page 357), or skip both of these
procedures, you are prompted to create statistics tables.
To create statistics tables, type Y, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted for
ODBC data source information.
2 You can supply ODBC DSN information in various ways described below, which
depend on whether you previously created metadata tables as part of the
configuration process:
• If you did not create metadata tables as part of the configuration process, you are
prompted to enter ODBC DSN information. The steps to enter this information
is described in the To provide ODBC DSN information, page 361 section within
this procedure.
• If you created metadata tables as part of the configuration process, you are
prompted whether to use the same metadata table ODBC DSN information for
your statistics tables. You have the following options:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 360

Installation and Configuration Guide

— Type Y, and then press ENTER to create statistics tables with the same ODBC
DSN information entered for your metadata tables. You are then prompted
to select a statistics script to create the statistics tables, which is described in
the To select a statistics script, page 362 section within this procedure.
— Type N, and then press ENTER to provide different ODBC DSN information,
which is described in the To provide ODBC DSN information, page 361
section within this procedure.

To provide ODBC DSN information

3 Type a valid ODBC DSN for a database to create your statistics tables in, and then
press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a login to your DSN.
4 Type a login name for your database to create your statistics tables in, and then press
ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a password for the login name.
5 Type a password for the login name provided, and then press ENTER.
The next configuration displayed depends on your ODBC data source details:
• If the data source points to a DB2 MVS database, steps to configure a DB2 MVS
database are displayed. These are described in the To configure DB2 MVS
database options, page 361 section within this procedure.
• If the data source does not point to a DB2 MVS database, the step to select a
statistics script to create statistics tables is displayed. This step is described in the
To select a statistics script, page 362 section within this procedure.

To configure DB2 MVS database options

These steps are displayed if you are creating your metadata tables in a DB2 MVS
database.
6 You can enter the database name to use or use the default name, as described below:
• Type the database name to use, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default database.
You are then prompted to provide the MVS table space name.
7 You can enter characters to use as a table space name for your metadata tables or use
the default table space name, as described below:
• Type the required table space name characters, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default table space
name.
You are then prompted to select a statistics script to create statistics tables.

361 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To select a statistics script

8 You can select the script used to create the statistics tables or use the default script,
as described below:
• Enter a valid path to a script file, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the field blank, and then press ENTER to use the default script for your
database type.
You are then prompted to provide a name for the response.ini file.

To generate a response.ini file

9 By default, the configuration is saved as Response.ini in the /HOME_PATH/
directory, where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory
during installation. You can leave the field blank to use the default name or type a
different name, and then press ENTER. The response.ini file is generated, and
you are prompted whether to run the configuration immediately.
10 You can choose to run the configuration you just completed or to run the
configuration using the response.ini file at a different time, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to run the configuration.
You can also use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as
described in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to quit without running the configuration. You
can use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as described
in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

If you selected option 2 in Configuration tasks, page 354, you can set up MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server to create, use, or delete server definitions. To begin setting up your
server definition, you must enter information about your ODBC DSN and MicroStrategy
connections.

To set up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

1 Type the corresponding number for the ODBC DSN for a database to connect
Intelligence Server to. This should be the data source that stores your metadata.
Then press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a login to your DSN.
2 Type a login name for your database to create your statistics tables in, and then press
ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a password for the login name.
3 Type a password for the login name provided, and then press ENTER. You are then
prompted to provide a metadata prefix.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 362

Installation and Configuration Guide

4 You can enter characters to use as a prefix for the names of your metadata tables or
use no prefix, as described below:
• Type the required prefix characters, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to provide no metadata prefix.
You are then prompted to provide a temp table prefix.
5 You can enter characters to use as a prefix for the names of temp tables or use no
prefix, as described below:
• Type the required prefix characters, and then press ENTER.
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to provide no temp table prefix.
You are then prompted to provide a MicroStrategy user login.
6 Type a valid MicroStrategy user login that has administrator privileges, and then
press ENTER.You are then prompted to provide a password for the login name.

The default administrator account is Administrator with a blank password.

This should be changed after you initial configuration.

7 Type a password for the MicroStrategy user login provided, and then press ENTER.
You are then prompted to choose the type of Intelligence Server configuration to
complete.
8 You can perform one of the Intelligence Server configuration tasks, which are
described in the sections below:
• Type 1, and then press ENTER to create a new server definition. Refer to
Creating and using a server definition, page 363 for steps to create a new server
definition.
• Type 2, and then press ENTER to use an exiting server definition. This
configuration follows the same steps for creating a new server definition, which
are described in Creating and using a server definition, page 363.
• Type 3, and then press ENTER to delete a server definition. Refer to Deleting a
server definition, page 365 for steps to delete a server definition.
• Type 4, and then press ENTER to create a new server definition and use it as the
default server definition. This configuration follows the same steps for creating a
new server definition, which are described in Creating and using a server
definition, page 363.

Creating and using a server definition

You perform the same steps to complete the following actions:
• Create a new server definition
• Create a new server definition and use it as the default server definition
• Use an existing server definition.

363 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

The action taken depends on what action you selected to complete in the procedure To
set up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 362.
Prerequisites
• This procedure assumes you have already opened the Configuration Wizard in
command line mode and entered configuration information for your Intelligence
Server, as described in Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 362.

To create and use a server definition

1 In the prompt that asks for a server definition name, type the name that
distinguishes the server definition, and press ENTER. You can press ENTER without
entering any information to use the default server definition. You are then prompted
to choose the projects to load for the server definition.
2 Type the names of projects to load when the server definition starts, and then press
ENTER. Separate the project names with the \ character. You are then prompted to
choose projects to not load for the server definition.
3 Type the names of projects to not load when the server definition starts, and then
press ENTER. Separate the project names with the \ character. You are then
prompted to provide a TCP port to use for Intelligence Server.
4 You can use the default port number or enter a different port number for
Intelligence Server, as described below:
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default port number.
• Type a port number, and then press ENTER.
You are then prompted whether to register Intelligence Server as a service.
5 You can choose whether to register Intelligence Server as a service, as described
below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to register Intelligence Server as a service. To
perform this configuration, you must be logged into your UNIX or Linux
machine with an account that has root level access and permissions.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to not register Intelligence Server as a service.
You are then prompted whether to start Intelligence Server when finished
6 Type Y and press ENTER to start Intelligence Server after the response file is
executed. You are then prompted to provide a name for the response.ini file.

To generate a response.ini file

7 By default, the configuration is saved as Response.ini in the /HOME_PATH/
directory, where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory
during installation. You can leave the field blank to use the default name or type a
different name, and then press ENTER. The response.ini file is generated, and
you are prompted whether to run the configuration immediately.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 364

Installation and Configuration Guide

8 You can choose to run the configuration you just completed or to run the
configuration using the response.ini file at a different time, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to run the configuration.
You can also use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as
described in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to quit without running the configuration. You
can use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as described
in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

Deleting a server definition

You can delete a server definition to remove it from the available server definitions for
Intelligence Server.
Prerequisites
• This procedure assumes you have already opened the Configuration Wizard in
command line mode and entered configuration information for your Intelligence
Server, as described in Setting up MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 362.

To delete a server definition

1 In the prompt that asks for server definitions to be removed, type the name that
distinguishes the server definition, and press ENTER. You can list multiple server
definitions to be deleted, separating server definition names with the \ character.
You are then prompted to provide a name for the response.ini file.

To generate a response.ini file

2 By default, the configuration is saved as Response.ini in the /HOME_PATH/
directory, where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory
during installation. You can leave the field blank to use the default name or type a
different name, and then press ENTER. The response.ini file is generated, and
you are prompted whether to run the configuration immediately.
3 You can choose to run the configuration you just completed or to run the
configuration using the response.ini file at a different time, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to run the configuration.
You can also use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as
described in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.
• Type N, and then press ENTER to quit without running the configuration. You
can use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as described
in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

365 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Creating a project source

If you selected option 3 in Configuration tasks, page 354, you can create project sources,
as described in the procedure below.

To create a project source

1 In the prompt that asks for a project source name, type the name for the project
source to be created, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide the
Intelligence Server name.
2 Type the Intelligence Server name, and then press ENTER. You can also press ENTER
without typing any information to accept the default Intelligence Server. You are
then prompted to provide a TCP port to use for Intelligence Server.
3 You can use the default port number or enter a different port number for
Intelligence Server, as described below:
• Leave the prompt blank, and then press ENTER to use the default port number.
• Type a port number, and then press ENTER.
You are then prompted to define a time interval for a project source connection time
out.
4 Type a numerical value (in minutes) for the amount of inactivity that is allowed
before a user is automatically disconnected from a project source. This enforces a
connection time out for inactive users connected to a project source. Type 0 to
define that users are not disconnected from project sources due to inactivity. Then
press ENTER.
You are then prompted to select an authentication type for the project source.
5 You can type the corresponding number to select one of the authentication types
listed in the command line. For information on each authentication type, see
Authentication modes, page 160.
You are then prompted to provide a name for the response.ini file.

To generate a response.ini file

6 By default, the configuration is saved as Response.ini in the /HOME_PATH/
directory, where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory
during installation. You can leave the field blank to use the default name or type a
different name, and then press ENTER. The response.ini file is generated, and
you are prompted whether to run the configuration immediately.
7 You can choose to run the configuration you just completed or to run the
configuration using the response.ini file at a different time, as described below:
• Type Y, and then press ENTER to run the configuration.
You can also use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as
described in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 366

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Type N, and then press ENTER to quit without running the configuration. You
can use the response.ini file created for future configurations, as described
in Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy, page 367.

Using the response.ini file to configure MicroStrategy

This section describes how to use the response.ini file through the MicroStrategy
Configuration Wizard. For information on how to configure through the MicroStrategy
Configuration Wizard, see Creating a response.ini file, page 354.

To use the response.ini file through the Configuration Wizard in

command line mode

1 In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is

the directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation.
2 Browse to the folder bin.
3 Type mstrcfgwiz-editor -r ReponseFile, where ReponseFile is the full
qualified path to the response.ini file. For example:
mstrcfgwiz-editor -r
/home/username/MicroStrategy/RESPONSE.INI
4 Press ENTER.
If the path and the response file are valid, the configuration is performed and a
successful configuration message appears. If an error occurs before or during the
process, an error message displays the error that occurred when executing the response
file.

Parameters and options in the response.ini file

For a list of all parameters and options available for a response.ini file, see Response
configuration parameters and options, page 164.

Configuring and controlling Intelligence Server

MicroStrategy provides various command line tools to configure and control Intelligence
Servers running on UNIX and Linux. Each command line tool provides descriptive
prompts and help information to guide you on how you can use the tool. This section
gives a general overview of each tools functionality, and how to access more detailed
information on how to use the tools.

On a Windows machine, these configurations can be completed with

MicroStrategy Developer, Service Manager, and other MicroStrategy tools. For
information on performing various administrative tasks, see the System
Administration Guide.

367 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Starting, configuring, and monitoring Intelligence

Server with mstrsvr
If your Intelligence Server is installed on a UNIX or Linux machine, you can start,
configure, and monitor your Intelligence Server from the command line with mstrsvr.
This tool starts Intelligence Server from the command line and displays the following
information about your Intelligence Server connection:
• Intelligence Server version number
• Intelligence Server instance name
• Metadata DSN
• Metadata login
• Intelligence Server definition name
• Port number
You can then perform various configuration and monitoring tasks for your running
Intelligence Server, which includes but is not limited to:
• Display database connection information
• Open, idle, and resume projects
• Check and close jobs
• Monitor users
• Define server clustering options
• Monitor memory usage information
• Stop the server
• Monitor lock contentions

To start, configure, and monitor Intelligence Server with mstrsvr

1 From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is

the directory that you specified as the home directory during installation.
2 Browse to the folder bin.
3 Type mstrsvr, and then press ENTER to start Intelligence Server and display
available configuration and monitoring options.
4 Once Intelligence Server is started, general configuration information is displayed
along with all available configuration and monitoring options. Perform any
configuration and monitoring tasks you require.
5 To quit the tool and stop Intelligence Server, type S, and then press ENTER.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 368

Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring the default server instance with mstrsvr-

configure
You can configure the default server instance for Intelligence Server using mstrsvr-
configure, which is a wizard-style command line tool that prompts you for the
required information.

To configure the default server instance with mstrsvr-configure

1 From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is

the directory that you specified as the home directory during installation.
2 Browse to the folder bin.
3 Type mstrsvr-configure, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted to
provide a port number for Intelligence Server.
4 Type a port number, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a
DSN to connect to.
5 Type a DSN, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted to provide a valid login
for the DSN.
6 Type a valid login for the DSN, and then press ENTER. You are then prompted to
provide a password for the DSN login.
7 Type a valid password for the DSN login, and then press ENTER. You are then
prompted to provide a server definition name.
8 Type a server definition name, and then press ENTER. Your default server instance is
configured.

Creating and configuring Intelligence Server instances

with mstrctl
You can create and configure Intelligence Server instances with the mstrctl tool.
Intelligence Servers running with a particular server definition are referred to as server
instances.

To create and configure Intelligence Server instances with mstrctl

1 From a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is

the directory that you specified as the home directory during installation.
2 Browse to the folder bin.
3 Type mstrctl -h, and then press ENTER. Help information is displayed, which
provides syntax standards and available configuration options.
4 Review the help information and run any required configuration tasks.

369 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

There are some commands that can output information to a file, or require a long
definition that can be retrieved from a file. For information on using files to store
output from and provide input to mstrctl commands, see Using files to store
output and provide input, page 370.
You do not need to enter any command to quit the mstrctl tool because it is a one-line
command line tool.

Using files to store output and provide input

With the mstrctl command line tool, you can perform the following tasks:
• Display and modify a server configuration
• Display and modify a service configuration
• Display and modify a server instance configuration
The commands that display the configurations listed above output long XML definitions
to the command line. The commands that modify the configurations listed above require
a long XML definition as input.
Rather than displaying and inputting long XML definitions from the command line, you
can use files to store and provide input for long XML definitions.

Be aware of the following:

• Configuring Intelligence Server with XML files requires extensive
knowledge of the various parameters and values used to define
Intelligence Server configurations. Providing an incorrect XML
definition to configure Intelligence Server can cause errors and
unexpected functionality.
• Prior to using commands to display and modify service configurations
(gsvc and ssvc) you must register Intelligence Server as a service. You
can perform this task by using the rs command for mstrctl. To
register an Intelligence Server as a service on a UNIX or Linux
machine, you must be logged in with an account that has root user
privileges and permissions.

The following commands can have their output sent to a file:

• gsc: Displays a server configuration
• gsvc: Displays a service configuration
• gsic: Displays a server instance configuration
For example, you can run the following command to output the server instance
configuration to an XML file:
mstrctl -s IntelligenceServer gsic > ServerInstance.xml
A ServerInstance.xml file is saved in the current directory.
The following commands can read input from a file:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 370

Installation and Configuration Guide

• ssc: Modifies a server configuration

• ssvc: Modifies a service configuration
• ssic: Modifies a server instance configuration
For example, you can run the following command to modify the server instance
configuration by reading input from an XML file:
mstrctl -s IntelligenceServer ssic < ServerInstance.xml
The XML definition in ServerInstance.xml is used to define the server instance
configuration.
It would be difficult and time consuming to type a complete server, service, or server
instance configuration from the command line. An easier way to provide this type of
configuration is to output the current configuration to a file, modify the file with a text
editor, and then use the file as input to a command to modify the configuration.

Supporting reserved words and characters

When you perform MicroStrategy configuration tasks through the UNIX or Linux
operating system console, you must make sure reserved words and characters are not
mistakenly included in your commands.
UNIX and Linux operating system consoles use reserved words and characters to
perform various actions. For example, the $ character may perform an action when
included as part of a command executed through the operating system console. If this
character is included in a command to configure, it can cause the command to fail.
For example, you use the following command to create a DSN to an Oracle database:
mstrconnectwiz ORCLW $MyOracleDSN 12.34.56.78 orcl 1521 -
u:OracleUser -p:OracleUserPasword
Notice that the name of the DSN begins with the $ character. If this is a reserved
character, the command fails to execute properly.
To avoid this problem, you can place single quotes (‘’) around any character strings that
may include reserved words or characters. This prevents the operating system console
from interpreting the characters as an operating system action, and instead includes
them as part of the character string. For example, the same command as above to create
a DSN can be rewritten as follows:
mstrconnectwiz ORCLW ‘$MyOracleDSN’ 12.34.56.78 orcl 1521
-u:OracleUser -p:OracleUserPasword
This time, the name of the DSN $MyOracleDSN is enclosed by single quotes, which
allows all of the characters to be interpreted as a string of characters.

371 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Configuring your MicroStrategy installation

To help guide the rest of your installation and configuration steps, refer to the section
Installing and configuring MicroStrategy on UNIX and Linux, page 49 in Chapter 1,
Planning Your Installation, for an installation and configuration checklist.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 372

 12
ADDING OR REMOVING
MICROSTRATEGY
COMPONENTS
This chapter describes how to add or remove MicroStrategy components on different
operating systems.
This chapter includes the following sections:
Adding or removing MicroStrategy components on Windows 373
Re-installing MicroStrategy components on Windows 374
Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on Windows 376
Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on UNIX and Linux 377

Adding or removing MicroStrategy components

on Windows
You can choose to add or remove one or more MicroStrategy components.
If you installed the MicroStrategy components using a disk, you need your original
installation disk to add or remove MicroStrategy components.

To add or remove MicroStrategy components

1 Close all installed MicroStrategy products.

2 Open the Microsoft Control Panel and navigate to the options to add or remove
programs. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to access
these options.
3 Within the list of installed programs, select MicroStrategy and click Change. The
MicroStrategy Setup Maintenance program opens.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 373

Installation and Configuration Guide

4 Select Modify and click Next.

5 Select to accept the license agreement and click Next.
6 Verify your customer information and click Next.
7 Select the components to add by selecting their check boxes. Clear the check boxes
for the components you want to uninstall. Click Next.

The components that are currently installed are displayed with their check
boxes selected. These components are not re-installed during the modification
process. If you clear any of the check boxes, that particular component is
uninstalled during the modification process. You are advised not to clear the
check boxes of the components that are already installed, unless you want to
remove the component.

8 If you are prompted to stop your Web server, click Yes to stop it and continue with
adding or removing files.
9 Verify the settings and click Next to begin copying or removing the files.
10 After the modification routine is complete, click Finish to close the maintenance
program. To fully remove MicroStrategy Office or MicroStrategy Health Center, see
Uninstalling MicroStrategy Office, page 377 and Uninstalling MicroStrategy Health
Center, page 377.
For more details on each page of the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, see Chapter 2,
Installing MicroStrategy on Windows.

Re-installing MicroStrategy components on

Windows
You can re-install MicroStrategy components if you face problems with previously
installed components. During re-installation the list of components previously installed
are displayed and these components are re-installed. If you installed the MicroStrategy
components using a disk, you need your original installation disk to repair the
installation.

The re-installation of MicroStrategy Office must be performed separately. The

procedure for re-installing MicroStrategy Office is explained in the following
section.

To re-install MicroStrategy components

1 Close all installed MicroStrategy products.

2 Open the Microsoft Control Panel and navigate to the options to add or remove
programs. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to access
these options.

374 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

3 Within the list of installed programs, select MicroStrategy and click Change. The
MicroStrategy Setup Maintenance program opens.
4 Select Repair and click Next.
5 Accept the license agreement and click Next.
6 You are prompted to select Yes to continue with the re-installation procedure and
overwrite the components. If you do not want to overwrite the components, select
No.
7 If you are prompted to stop your Web server, click Yes to stop it and continue with
the re-installation.
8 As part of a repair installation, you can also designate this machine as a Health
Agent. Provide this configuration information as required and continue with the re-
installation routine.
9 After the re-installation routine is complete, click Finish to close the maintenance
program.
For details on each page of the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, see Chapter 2,
Installing MicroStrategy on Windows.

Re-installing MicroStrategy Office

This section describes the re-installation procedure for MicroStrategy Office.

To re-install MicroStrategy Office

1 Close all installed MicroStrategy products.

2 Open the Microsoft Control Panel and navigate to the options to add or remove
programs. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to access
these options.
3 Within the list of installed programs, select MicroStrategy Office and click
Change. The MicroStrategy Office Setup Maintenance program opens.
4 Select Repair and click Next.
5 Accept the license agreement and click Next.
6 You are prompted to select Yes to continue with the re-installation procedure and
overwrite the components. If you do not want to overwrite components, select No.
7 If you are prompted to stop your Web server, click Yes to stop it and continue with
the re-installation.
8 After the re-installation routine is complete, click Finish to close the maintenance
program.
For details on each page of the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, see Chapter 2,
Installing MicroStrategy on Windows.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 375

Installation and Configuration Guide

Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on

Windows
The uninstallation procedure performs the following functions:
• Unregisters and removes selected files, registry entries, and shortcuts logged in the
Uninst.isu log file.
• Calls a custom DLL to handle unlogged items, such as registry entries and files.
Before uninstallation begins, the DLL file performs the following functions:
• Checks for user privileges. If they are not valid, uninstallation stops.
• Checks for running components. If a component is found running, uninstallation
stops.
• Stops and deletes the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server service. This occurs only
when the Intelligence Server is being uninstalled.
• Deletes files created by the application, such as *.log, *.gid, *.ldb and *.tb.

The uninstallation of MicroStrategy Office must be performed separately. The

procedure for uninstalling MicroStrategy Office is explained in the following
sections.

To uninstall MicroStrategy components on Windows

1 Close all installed MicroStrategy products.

2 Open the Microsoft Control Panel and navigate to the options to add or remove
programs. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to access
these options.
3 Within the list of installed programs, select MicroStrategy and click Change. The
MicroStrategy Setup Maintenance program opens.
4 Select Remove and click Next.
5 Click Yes to any prompts that appear.
6 If you are prompted to stop your Web server, click Yes to stop it and continue with
the uninstallation.
7 After the uninstall routine is complete, select Yes to restart your computer, or No to
restart it later.
8 Click Finish to close the maintenance program.

You should restart the computer for a clean uninstall.

376 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Uninstalling MicroStrategy Office

This section describes the steps to uninstall MicroStrategy Office.

To uninstall MicroStrategy Office

1 Close all installed MicroStrategy products.

2 Open the Microsoft Control Panel and navigate to the options to add or remove
programs. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to access
these options.
3 Within the list of installed programs, select MicroStrategy Office and click
Change. The MicroStrategy Office Setup Maintenance program opens.
4 Select Remove and click Next.
5 You are prompted to select Yes to continue with the uninstallation procedure.
6 After the uninstallation routine is complete, click Finish to close the maintenance
program.

Uninstalling MicroStrategy Health Center

This section describes the steps to uninstall MicroStrategy Health Center. These steps are
required to remove all supporting files for Health Center.

To uninstall MicroStrategy Health Center

1 Close all installed MicroStrategy products.

2 Open the Microsoft Control Panel and navigate to the options to add or remove
programs. Refer to the appropriate Microsoft documentation for steps to access
these options.
3 Within the list of installed programs, select Health Center and click Change. The
MicroStrategy Health Center Setup Maintenance program opens.
4 Select Remove and click Start.
5 After the uninstallation routine is complete, click Finish to close the maintenance
program.

Uninstalling MicroStrategy components on UNIX

and Linux
This section discusses how to uninstall MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, Web Universal,
and other MicroStrategy products on a UNIX or Linux platform.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 377

Installation and Configuration Guide

To uninstall MicroStrategy products on UNIX and Linux

1 In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to INSTALL_PATH, where INSTALL_

PATH is the directory you specified as the install directory during installation.
2 Browse to the /_uninst folder.
3 You can uninstall MicroStrategy products using the MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard or through the command line as described in the options below:
• To uninstall using the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, type ./setup.sh and
press ENTER. Follow the steps described in To complete uninstallation with
the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard, page 378 below to complete the
uninstallation process.
• To uninstall through the command line, type ./setup.sh -console and
press ENTER. Follow the command line prompts to complete the uninstallation
process.

To complete uninstallation with the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard

4 A dialog box opens, prompting you to select a language. Specify the language to be
used for the MicroStrategy uninstallation and click OK to proceed to the next step.
5 The MicroStrategy Installation Wizard opens with the Welcome page displayed. Click
Next. The MicroStrategy Installation Selection page opens.
6 Select Use an existing installation, and then select the installation from the
drop-down list.
7 From the Selected Operation area, select one of the following uninstallation options:
• Modify: Select this option to uninstall only some of the MicroStrategy products
installed on the machine. Click Next and continue with the steps To specify
which MicroStrategy products to uninstall, page 378 below.
• Uninstall: Select this option to uninstall all MicroStrategy products installed on
the machine. Click Next and continue with the steps To specify which
MicroStrategy products to uninstall, page 378 below.

To specify which MicroStrategy products to uninstall

8 The License Agreement page opens. Review the license agreement and select I
accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next. The
Customer Information page opens.
9 Type your user name, company name, and license key for your installation and click
Next. The Select Components page opens.
10 Clear the check box for all MicroStrategy products that are to be uninstalled, and
then click Next.

378 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

You can also install products as part of the uninstallation by selecting the
check box for any MicroStrategy product not previously installed.

11 On the Product Uninstallation page, select the products to uninstall. Click Next.

To complete the uninstallation process

12 On the Start installer operation page, verify the information and click Start. The
products listed are uninstalled.
13 After uninstallation is complete, a message is displayed. Click Finish to complete the
process and exit the MicroStrategy Installation Wizard.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 379

 A
Connecting to Databases and Data
Sources
This appendix describes the configuration parameters required to connect MicroStrategy
to various databases and data sources. Data Source Names (DSN) can be created using
the MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard, and in UNIX and Linux, you can also configure
parameters with the odbc.ini file. This appendix discusses the following topics:
• Creating DSNs for specific data sources, page 380: Configuration information
required to create a DSN for data sources available through the Connectivity Wizard.
• Creating database connections in Web, page 414: Steps to define a new database
connection directly from Web for users to import data from a data source into
MicroStrategy.
• Configuring ODBC parameters with odbc.ini, page 416: Configuration information
required to configure data sources using the odbc.ini file in a UNIX or Linux
environment.

Creating DSNs for specific data sources

You can create a DSN for data sources available through the Connectivity Wizard. The
following table lists the information required for each type of data source when you
create a new DSN using the Connectivity Wizard. For information on what operating
systems each ODBC driver is certified for, see Certified ODBC drivers for MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server, page 43.
• For ODBC-specific driver details, refer to the different ODBC driver sections below
the table.
• You can create a DSN from the command line version of the Connectivity Wizard in
UNIX or Linux. Browse to HOME_PATH/bin, where HOME_PATH is the directory
you specified as the home directory during installation. In the console window, type
./mstrconnectwiz -h, then press ENTER. This command displays command
line syntax and examples for different database platforms. Create your command
based on the syntax and examples displayed. Once you run your command, a DSN is
created in the odbc.ini file.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 380

Installation and Configuration Guide

Driver Details

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

Apache Hive Wire Protocol for
• Host name
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page
383 • Database name
• Port number (10000 in most cases)

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

Amazon Redshift Wire Protocol
• Host name
for Windows and UNIX/Linux,
page 384 • Port number (5439 in most cases)
• Database name

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

DB2 Wire Protocol for Windows
• Host name
and UNIX/Linux, page 384
• Database name
• Port number

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

DB2 Wire Protocol for iSeries
• IP address
for Windows and UNIX/Linux,
page 385 • Collection
• Location
• Isolation level
• Package owner
• TCP port (446 in most cases)

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

DB2 z/OS for Windows and
• IP address
UNIX/Linux, page 385
• Collection
• Location
• Package collection
• Package owner
• TCP port (446 in most cases)

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

Impala Wire Protocol for
• Host name
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page
386 • Port number (21050 in most cases)
• Database name

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

Informix Wire Protocol for
• Server name
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page
386 • Host name
• Port number (1526 in most cases)

381 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Driver Details

• Database name

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

Microsoft SQL Server for
• Host name
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page
387 • Port number
• Database name
• Use Windows NT Authentication for login ID
• Enable SQL Database (Azure) support

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

MongoDB for Windows and
• Host name
UNIX/Linux, page 388
• Port number
• Database name

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Data source name and either:

Oracle Wire Protocol for
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page Standard connection:
388 • Host name
• Port number (in most cases, 1521)
• SID (MicroStrategy default is ORCL)
• Service name
• Alternate servers
TNSNames connection:
• Server name
• TNSNames file

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

Pivotal Greenplum Wire
• Host name
Protocol for Windows and
UNIX/Linux, page 389 • Port number (5432 in most cases)
• Database name

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data Source Name

PostgreSQL Wire Protocol for
• Host Name
Windows and UNIX/Linux, page
390 • Port Number
• Database Name
• User Name

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for • Data source name

SAP Sybase ASE Wire Protocol
• Network address
for Windows and UNIX/Linux,
page 390 • Database name
• Enable unicode support

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 382

Installation and Configuration Guide

Driver Details

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for The MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for SequeLink allows you to access
SequeLink, page 390 Microsoft Access databases or Microsoft Excel files stored on a
Windows machine from an Intelligence Server hosted on a UNIX or
Linux machine.
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for The MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Salesforce allows you to access
Salesforce, page 394 resources on Salesforce.com, from an Intelligence Server hosted
on a UNIX or Linux machine.

This section also provides information on how to install and configure drivers from other
vendors with MicroStrategy:
• ODBC Driver for Red Brick for UNIX/Linux, page 395
• ODBC Driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ for UNIX/Linux, page 396
• ODBC Driver for Teradata for UNIX/Linux, page 397
• ODBC Driver for Informix 8 for UNIX, page 399
• ODBC Driver for Netezza for UNIX/Linux, page 400
• ODBC Driver for MySQL 5.x for Linux, page 401
• ODBC Driver for Aster Database for Linux, page 403
• ODBC Driver for DataDirect Cloud for Linux, page 404
• ODBC Driver for Amazon Redshift for Linux, page 406
• ODBC Driver for Vertica for Linux or Solaris, page 407
• ODBC Driver for SAP HANA for Windows and Linux, page 409
• Other data sources and relational databases for Windows, page 412

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Apache Hive Wire

Protocol for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Apache Hive Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Apache Hive data source
configuration in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or ApacheHive-1 can
serve to identify the connection.
• Host Name: The name or IP address of the machine on which the Apache Hive
data source resides. The system administrator or database administrator assigns the
host name.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. If no database
name is provided, the default database is used for the connection. The database
administrator assigns the database name.

383 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Port Number: The port number for the connection. The default port number for
Apache Hive is usually 20000. Check with your database administrator for the
correct number.
• Use Native Catalog Functions: By default, native catalog functions are used to
retrieve catalog information, rather than using ODBC catalog functions. This
commonly improves performance of this type of data retrieval. However, this is only
supported for HiveServer2 instances. Clear this check box if your data source
connection supports the use of HiveServer1 instances.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Amazon Redshift Wire

Protocol for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Amazon Redshift Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Amazon Redshift data source
configuration in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or Redshift-1 can serve
to identify the connection.
• Host Name: The server name or IP address of the machine on which the Amazon
Redshift data source resides. Contact your system administrator for the server name
or IP address.
• Port Number: The port number for the connection. In most cases, the default port
number is 5439, but you should check with your database administrator for the
correct number.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. The database
administrator assigns the database name.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for DB2 Wire Protocol for

Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for DB2 when running against DB2:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the DB2 data source configuration in
MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or DB2-Serv1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Host Name: The name of the machine that runs the DB2 server.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default, which is
assigned by the database administrator.
• Port Number: The DB2 server listener's port number. In most cases, the default
port number is 50000, but you should check with your database administrator for
the correct number.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 384

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for DB2 Wire Protocol for

iSeries for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for DB2 Wire Protocol for iSeries/DB2 for i:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the DB2 data source configuration in
MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or DB2-1 can serve to identify the connection.
• IP Address: The IP Address of the machine where the catalog tables are stored.
This can be either a numeric address such as 123.456.789.98, or a host name. If
you use a host name, it must be located in the HOSTS file of the machine or a DNS
server.
• Collection: The name that identifies a logical group of database objects.
• Location: The DB2 location name, which is defined during the local DB2
installation.
• Isolation Level: The method by which locks are acquired and released by the
system.
• Package Owner: The package's AuthID if you want to specify a fixed user to create
and modify the packages on the database. The AuthID must have authority to
execute all the SQL in the package.
• TCP Port: The DB2 DRDA listener process's port number on the server host
machine provided by your database administrator. The default port number is usually
446.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for DB2 z/OS for Windows

and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for DB2 z/OS (formerly known as OS/390):
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the DB2 z/OS data source configuration
in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or DB2z/OS-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• IP Address: The IP Address of the machine where the catalog tables are stored.
This can be either a numeric address such as 123.456.789.98, or a host name. If
you use a host name, it must be located in the HOSTS file of the machine or a DNS
server.
• Collection: The name that identifies a logical group of database objects, which is
also the current schema. On DB2 z/OS, the user ID should be used as the Collection.
• Location: The DB2 z/OS location name, which is defined during the local DB2
z/OS installation. To determine the DB2 location, you can run the command
DISPLAY DDF.

385 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• Package Collection: The collection or location name where bind packages are
created and stored for searching purposes.
• Package Owner (Optional): The package's AuthID if you want to specify a fixed
user to create and modify the packages on the database. The AuthID must have
authority to execute all the SQL in the package.
• TCP Port: The DB2 DRDA listener process's port number on the server host
machine provided by your database administrator. The default port number is usually
446.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Impala Wire Protocol

for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Impala Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Impala data source configuration in
MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or Impala-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Host Name: The name or IP address of the machine on which the Impala data
source resides. The system administrator or database administrator assigns the host
name.
• Port Number: The port number for the connection. The default port number for
Impala is usually 21050. Check with your database administrator for the correct
number.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. If no database
name is provided, the default database is used for the connection. The database
administrator assigns the database name.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Informix Wire Protocol

for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Informix Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Informix data source configuration in
MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or Informix-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Server Name: The client connection string designating the server and database to
be accessed.
• Host Name: The name of the machine on which the Informix server resides. The
system administrator or database administrator assigns the host name.
• Port Number: The Informix server listener's port number. The default port
number for Informix is commonly 1526.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 386

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default, which is

assigned by the database administrator.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Microsoft SQL Server

for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy-branded version of the Microsoft SQL Server driver:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Microsoft SQL Server data source
configuration in MicroStrategy. For example, Personnel or SQLServer-1 can serve to
identify the connection.
• Host Name: Enter the name of a SQL Server on your network. For example, if
your network supports named servers, you can specify an address such as
SQLServer-1. You can also specify the IP address such as 123.45.678.998.
Contact your system administrator for the server name or IP address.
Additionally, if you use named instances to distinguish SQL Server databases, you can
include the named instance along with either the server name or IP address using
the format ServerName\NamedInstance or IPAddress\NamedInstance.
The following are examples of providing the server name for your SQL Server
database:
▫ SQLServer-1\Instance1
▫ 123.45.678.998\Instance1
• Port Number: The port number for the connection. The default port number for
SQL Server is usually 1433. Check with your database administrator for the correct
number.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. The database
administrator assigns the database name.
• Use Windows NT Authentication for login ID: This option is available if you
are configuring your connection on Windows. Select this check box to use Windows
NT authentication to pass a user’s credentials on the Windows machine to execute
against a SQL Server database.
If you use Windows NT authentication with SQL Server, you must enter the
Windows NT account user name and password in the Service Manager. For
information on the Service Manager, see the System Administration Guide.

Inserting date data into SQL Server 2000 tables can cause errors if the
system’s Regional Settings are not set properly. Ensure that the date format is
defined to be in an English format.

• Enable SQL Database (Azure) support: Defines whether the DSN is created
to support SQL Azure. Select this check box if the DSN is used to access a SQL Azure
data source.

387 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for MongoDB for Windows

and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for MongoDB:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the MongoDB data source configuration
in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or MongoDB-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Host Name: The server name or IP address of the machine on which the
MongoDB data source resides. Contact your system administrator for the server
name or IP address.
• Port Number: The port number for the connection. Check with your database
administrator for the correct number.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. The database
administrator assigns the database name.
• Schema Definition Path: The path where configuration files that define the
relational map of native data are stored. These configuration files are created in this
location when first connecting to the data source and then used for subsequent
connections.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Oracle Wire Protocol for

Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for
MicroStrategy ODBC driver for Oracle Wire Protocol:
Data Source Name: Enter a name to identify the Oracle data source configuration in
MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or Oracle-1 can serve to identify the connection. A
DSN is required for any Oracle Wire Protocol connection. Depending on whether you
want to use a standard connection or a TNSNames connection, refer to one of the
following lists of options below:
• Standard Connection: A standard connection is configured through Oracle Wire
Protocol with the following connection parameters:
▫ Host Name: The name of the Oracle server to be accessed. This can be a server
name such as Oracle-1 or an IP address such as 123.456.789.98.
▫ Port Number: The Oracle listener port number provided by your database
administrator. The default port number is usually 1521.
▫ One of the following parameters; which one you choose is up to your personal
preference:
— SID: The Oracle System Identifier for the instance of Oracle running on the
server. The default SID is usually ORCL.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 388

Installation and Configuration Guide

— Service Name: The global database name, which includes the database
name and the domain name. For example, if your database name is
finance and its domain is business.com the service name is
finance.business.com.
▫ Alternate Servers: A list of alternate database servers to enable connection
failover for the driver. If the primary database server entered as the SID or
service name is unavailable, a connection to the servers in this list is attempted
until a connection can be established. You can list the servers in SID or service
name format, as shown in the following examples:
— Using an SID: (HostName=DB_server_name:
PortNumber=1526:SID=ORCL)
— Using a Service Name: (HostName=DB_server_name:
PortNumber=1526:ServiceName=service.name.com)
• TNSNames Connection: A TNSNames connection uses a TNSNAMES.ORA file to
retrieve host, port number, and SID information from a server (alias or Oracle net
service name) listed in the TNSNAMES.ORA file. A TNSNames connection requires
the following parameters:
▫ Server Name: A server name, which is included in a TNSNAMES.ORA file
included in the TNSNames File text box below.
▫ TNSNames File: The location of your TNSNAMES.ORA file. Make sure to enter
the entire path to the TNSNAMES.ORA file, including the file name itself. You
can specify multiple TNSNAMES.ORA files.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Pivotal Greenplum Wire

Protocol for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Pivotal Greenplum Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Greenplum data source configuration
in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or Greenplum-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Host Name: The name or IP address of the machine on which the Greenplum data
source resides. The system administrator or database administrator assigns the host
name.
• Port Number: The port number for the connection. The default port number for
Greenplum is usually 5432. Check with your database administrator for the correct
number.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. The database
administrator assigns the database name.

389 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for PostgreSQL Wire

Protocol for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC driver for PostgreSQL Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the PostgreSQL data source configuration
in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or PostgreSQL-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Host Name: The name or IP address of the machine on which the PostgreSQL
database resides. The system administrator or database administrator assigns the
host name.
• Port Number: The port number for the connection. The default port number for
PostgreSQL is usually 5432. Check with your database administrator for the correct
number.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. The database
administrator assigns the database name.
• User Name: The name of a valid user for the PostgreSQL database.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for SAP Sybase ASE Wire

Protocol for Windows and UNIX/Linux
The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SAP Sybase ASE Wire Protocol:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Sybase ASE data source configuration
in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or SybaseASE-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Network Address: The network address, in the format ServerName_or_
IPAddress,PortNumber. For example, if your network supports named servers,
you can specify an address such as SybaseASE-1,5000. You can also specify the IP
address such as 123.456.789.98,5000. Contact your system administrator for
the server name or IP address.
• Database Name: The name of the database to connect to by default. The database
administrator assigns the database name.
• Enable Unicode support (UTF8): Select this check box if the database supports
unicode.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for SequeLink

The MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for SequeLink allows you to access Microsoft Access
databases or Microsoft Excel files stored on a Windows machine from an Intelligence
Server hosted on a UNIX or Linux machine. The steps below show you how to perform
the necessary configurations on the various machines to support this type of
configuration:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 390

Installation and Configuration Guide

• Preparing the Microsoft Access database, page 391

• Preparing the Microsoft Excel file, page 392
• Configuring the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink, page 393

Preparing the Microsoft Access database

You must complete the steps provided below to access an Access database stored on a
Windows machine from an Intelligence Server hosted on a UNIX or Linux machine.

Prerequisites
• On the Windows machine where the Access database is stored, you must create a
DSN to connect to the Access database. For instructions on creating a DSN, see
Creating a DSN for a data source, page 133.

To access Microsoft Access databases from an Intelligence Server

hosted on UNIX or Linux

1 On the Windows machine that stores the Access database to connect to, install the
SequeLink ODBC Socket Server. This can be installed as part of a MicroStrategy
installation, and is included in the Other components options of the MicroStrategy
Product Suite (see Select Features, page 55).

The SequeLink ODBC Socket Server that is provided with a MicroStrategy

installation is for exclusive use with the MicroStrategy Product Suite. You are
not licensed to use this product with any application other than MicroStrategy
products.

To configure the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server

2 On the Windows machine where you installed the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server,
from the Start menu, point to Programs, point to DataDirect SequeLink 5.5
Service for ODBC Socket, and then select SequeLink Management Console
Snap-in.
3 Under Console Root, expand SequeLink 5.5 Manager, expand Connected to
SLAgent55, expand SequeLink Services, expand SLSocket55, expand
Configuration, and then select Data Source Settings.
4 From the Action menu, point to New, and select Data Source. A new data source
is created underneath Data Source Settings.
5 Type a descriptive name for the new data source, such as Access Data Source.
6 Expand the new data source and select Advanced.
7 Right-click DataSourceSOCODBCConnStr and select Properties. The
DataSourceSOCODBCConnStr Properties dialog box opens.

391 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

8 In the Value field, type DSN=AccessDSN, where AccessDSN is the DSN you
created to connect to your Access database. This is different from the data source
you created as part of the steps to configure the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server.
9 Click OK.
10 Within the same data source, select User Security.
11 Right click DataSourceLogonMethod and select Properties. The
DataSourceLogonMethod Properties dialog box opens.
12 From the Value drop-down list, select Anonymous. This allows connection to the
Access database without using a user name and password.
13 Click OK.
14 Right-click the data source, point to All Tasks, and select Save configuration.
15 On the UNIX or Linux machine that hosts your Intelligence Server, you must
configure the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink to connect to the Access
database. For instructions on how to perform this configuration, see Configuring the
MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink, page 393.

Preparing the Microsoft Excel file

You must complete the steps provided below to access Excel files stored on a Windows
machine from an Intelligence server hosted on a UNIX or Linux machine.

Prerequisites
• On the Windows machine where the Excel file is stored, you must prepare the Excel
file as a valid data source. For instructions to prepare an Excel file, see Prepare an
Excel file as a valid data source, page 413.
• On the Windows machine where the Excel file is stored, you must create a DSN to
connect to the Excel file. For instructions to create a DSN for an Excel file, see Use
your Excel file as a data source, page 414.

To access Microsoft Excel files from an Intelligence Server hosted on

UNIX or Linux

1 On the Windows machine that stores the Excel files to connect to, install the
SequeLink ODBC Socket Server. This can be installed as part of a MicroStrategy
installation, and is included in the Other components options of the MicroStrategy
Product Suite (see Select Features, page 55).

To configure the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server

2 On the Windows machine where you installed the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server,
from the Start menu, point to Programs, point to DataDirect SequeLink 5.5

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 392

Installation and Configuration Guide

Service for ODBC Socket, and then select SequeLink Management Console
Snap-in.
3 Under Console Root, expand SequeLink 5.5 Manager, expand Connected to
SLAgent55, expand SequeLink Services, expand SLSocket55, expand
Configuration, and then select Data Source Settings.
4 From the Action menu, point to New, and select Data Source. A new data source
is created underneath Data Source Settings.
5 Type a descriptive name for the new data source, such as Excel Data Source.
6 Expand the new data source, and select Advanced.
7 Right-click DataSourceSOCODBCConnStr and select Properties. The
DataSourceSOCODBCConnStr Properties dialog box opens.
8 In the Value field, type DSN=ExcelDSN, where ExcelDSN is the DSN you created
to connect to your Excel file. This is different from that data source you created as
part of the steps to configure the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server.
9 Click OK.
10 Within the same data source, select User Security.
11 Right click DataSourceLogonMethod and select Properties. The
DataSourceLogonMethod Properties dialog box opens.
12 From the Value drop-down list, select Anonymous. This allows connection to the
Excel file without using a user name and password.
13 Click OK.
14 Right-click the data source, point to All Tasks, and select Save configuration.
15 On the UNIX or Linux machine that hosts your Intelligence Server, you must
configure the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink to connect to the Excel
files. For instructions on how to perform this configuration, see Configuring the
MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink, page 393.

Configuring the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink

The steps provided below show you how to configure the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for
SequeLink to access either Microsoft Access databases or Excel files stored on a
Windows machine.

To configure the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for SequeLink

1 On the UNIX or Linux machine that hosts Intelligence Server, browse to HOME_
PATH where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory during
installation.
2 Open the odbc.ini.example file and find the section that starts with
[SequeLinkODBC]. Copy this section into the odbc.ini file. For information on

393 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

the parameters, refer to DataDirect’s documentation at

http://media.datadirect.com/download/docs/odbc/allodbc/help.html.
3 Edit the parameters listed below:
• Host: Type the IP address of the Windows machine that stores the Access
database or Excel files.
• ServerDataSource: Type the name of the data source for the Access database
or Excel file to connect to as a data source. This is the name of the data source
that you defined while configuring the SequeLink ODBC Socket Server, as
shown in the example image below:

4 Save the odbc.ini file.

5 Restart Intelligence Server.

MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Salesforce

The MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Salesforce allows you to access resources on
Salesforce.com, from an Intelligence Server hosted on a Windows or Linux machine.

You can also use MicroStrategy Web and Import Data to integrate Salesforce.com
data into MicroStrategy. For steps to configure a connection to Salesforce.com to
support this type of integration, see Configuring third-party data sources for
importing data, page 251.

The following information is required for setting up the driver connection for the
MicroStrategy ODBC driver for Salesforce:
• Data Source Name: A name to identify the Salesforce data source configuration
in MicroStrategy. For example, Finance or Salesforce-1 can serve to identify the
connection.
• Host Name: The URL used to log in to the Salesforce.com system. You can keep
the default of login.salesforce.com to connect to the production instance. However,
you can also connect to other systems such as test.salesforce.com if you are
connecting to testing environments.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 394

Installation and Configuration Guide

If you attempt to test the connection to your Salesforce.com system, the password syntax
is PasswordSecuritytoken, where Password is the password for the user account
and Securitytoken is the additional security token required to access Salesforce.com.
Do not use any spaces or other characters to separate the password and security token.
As part of configuring a connection to your Salesforce.com system, you can include the
password and security token as part of the database login, which is a component of a
database instance used to access the DSN in MicroStrategy. For steps to create a database
login, which you can use to provide the Salesforce.com password and security token, see
Creating a database login.

ODBC Driver for Red Brick for UNIX/Linux

The ODBC driver for Red Brick is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The following
steps show how to configure ODBC driver for Red Brick.

To create an ODBC Driver for Red Brick

1 Install ODBC Driver for Red Brick for the correct operating system. For information
on installation, refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide for UNIX and
Linux provided by IBM.

Make sure you install the Red Brick Client Products (version 6.2 and higher)
so that they can be accessed by the appropriate users. You need the following
components:

• RISQL Entry Tool, RISQL Reporter, and Client TMU

• Red Brick ODBCLib (SDK)
• Red Brick ODBC Driver

The directory where Red Brick Client Products are installed should always be
accessible to MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

To define the location of the driver files

2 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and provide the location of the directory where the Red Brick
Client Products are installed. Within the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is
included:
RB_CONFIG='<RB_CONFIG>'

395 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Replace this <RB_CONFIG> placeholder with the location of where the Red Brick
Client Products are installed. Do not modify any other occurrences of <RB_
CONFIG> within odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To configure a DSN
6 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and find the section that starts with [RED_
BRICK_62] if you are using Red Brick 6.2 or [RED_BRICK_63] if you are using
Red Brick 6.3. Copy the section into the odbc.ini file.
8 Edit the DSN parameters SERVER and DATABASE, and modify the value of RB_
CONFIG with the location of the directory where the Red Brick Client Products are
installed. For information on the available parameters, refer to your third-party Red
Brick driver documentation. This can often be found along with the driver
installation.
9 Save the odbc.ini file.
For details on these DSN parameters, refer to the product documentation provided
directly by the database vendor.

ODBC Driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ for

UNIX/Linux
ODBC driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The
following steps show how to configure ODBC driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ.

To configure ODBC Driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ

1 Install ODBC Driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ for the correct operating system.
For information on installation, refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide
provided by Sybase.

The directory where ODBC driver for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ is installed
should always be accessible to MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

To define the location of your environment

2 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 396

Installation and Configuration Guide

chmod u+w ODBC.sh

4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and add the location of the directory where the ODBC Driver
for Sybase Adaptive Server IQ is installed. Within the ODBC.sh file, the following
definitions are included:
IQDIR15='<IQDIR15>'
IQDIR16='<IQDIR16>'
Replace the <IQDIR15> and <IQDIR16> placeholders, depending on your version
of Sysbase Adaptive Server IQ, with the directory path. Do not modify any other
occurrences of <IQDIR15> or <IQDIR16> within odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To configure a DSN
6 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and find the section that starts with [SAP
SYBASEIQVersion], where Version is the version of Sybase Adaptive Server IQ.
Copy the section into the odbc.ini file.
8 Edit the DSN parameters EngineName, DatabaseName and CommLinks, and modify
the value of ASDIR with the location of the directory where the ODBC Driver for
Sybase Adaptive Server IQ is installed. For information on the available parameters,
refer to your third-party Sybase driver documentation. This can often be found along
with the driver installation.
9 Save the odbc.ini file.
For details on these DSN parameters, refer to the product documentation provided
directly by the database vendor.

ODBC Driver for Teradata for UNIX/Linux

ODBC driver for Teradata is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The following steps
show how to configure the ODBC driver for Teradata.
For information on setting up an ODBC driver for Teradata through the Connectivity
Wizard on Windows, see Other data sources and relational databases for Windows,
page 412.

To configure the ODBC Driver for Teradata

1 Install the ODBC Driver for Teradata for the correct operating system. For
information on installation, refer to the product documentation provided directly by
the database vendor.

397 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Note the following:

The directory where the ODBC driver for Teradata is installed should always be
accessible to MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.
You can enable Teradata Parallel Transporter for your connections to Teradata.
This can improve performance when retrieving large amounts of data, typically
0.5 Gigabytes and larger, which can occur most commonly in MicroStrategy
when publishing Intelligent Cubes. For steps to configure this support, refer to
the MicroStrategy Web Help.

To specify the Teradata GSS library installation (AIX only)

2 For AIX only, you need to specify the Teradata GSS library installation in the
ODBC.sh. In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_
PATH is the directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation.
Browse to the folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and provide the location of the local Teradata GSS library
installation. Within the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is included:
MSTR_TERADATA_PATH='<MSTR_TERADATA_PATH>'
Replace this <MSTR_TERADATA_PATH> placeholder with the directory path. Do not
modify any other occurrences of <MSTR_TERADATA_PATH> within odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To configure a DSN
6 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and find the section that starts with
[TERADATA_SERVER]. Copy that section into the odbc.ini file in the [ODBC
Data Sources] section.
8 Edit the DSN parameters DBCName, Database, and DefaultDatabase, and modify the
value of MSTR_TERADATA_PATH with the location of the directory where the ODBC
Driver for Teradata is installed.
You can also edit the parameters in the odbc.ini file to reflect your environment.
To support parameterized queries, define the EnableExtendedStmtInfo parameter as
EnableExtendedStmtInfo=Yes. For information on the other available
parameters, refer to your third-party Teradata driver documentation. This can often
be found along with the driver installation.
9 Save the odbc.ini file.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 398

Installation and Configuration Guide

ODBC Driver for Informix 8 for UNIX

The MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Informix 8 is already installed in the INSTALL_
PATH/lib directory.

The ODBC Driver for Informix 8 for UNIX and Linux is a MicroStrategy-branded
ODBC driver, but it is not accessible through the Connectivity Wizard.

However, the Informix Client Software Developer’s Kit (CSDK) must be installed before
you create a DSN. This software is not included in the MicroStrategy product suite
installation and must be obtained through the database vendor or a third party. For
information on installation, refer to the product documentation provided directly by the
database vendor.
The following steps show how to configure the MicroStrategy ODBC driver for Informix
8.

To configure ODBC Driver for Informix 8

1 Install the Informix CSDK.

The directory where CSDK is installed should always be accessible to

Intelligence Server.

To configure the environment

2 In a UNIX console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and make the following changes:
• Provide the location of the directory where the Informix Client Software
Developer's Kit (CSDK) is installed. The following definition is included:
INFORMIXDIR='<INFORMIXDIR>'
Replace this <INFORMIXDIR> placeholder with the directory path. Do not
modify any other occurrences of <INFORMIXDIR> within odbc.sh.
• Provide the name of the Informix Server. The following definition is included:
INFORMIXSERVER='<INFORMIXSERVER>'
Replace this <INFORMIXSERVER> placeholder with the directory path.

This value is chosen from the list in <INFORMIXDIR>/etc/sqlhosts.

399 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Do not modify any other occurrences of <INFORMIXSERVER> within

odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To configure a DSN
6 In a UNIX console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with [IBM
INFORMIX]. Copy the section into the odbc.ini file.
8 Edit the DSN parameters Database, Servername, and Service. For information on the
available parameters, refer to your third-party Teradata driver documentation. This
can often be found along with the driver installation.
9 Save the odbc.ini file.
For details on these DSN parameters, refer to the product documentation provided
directly by the database vendor.

ODBC Driver for Netezza for UNIX/Linux

ODBC driver for Netezza is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The following steps
show how to configure ODBC driver for Netezza.
You must modify odbcinst.ini file and odbc.ini file to create the DSN for Netezza.

To configure ODBC driver for Netezza

1 Install the ODBC Driver for Netezza for the correct operating system. For
information on installation, refer to the product documentation provided directly by
the database vendor.

The directory where Netezza is installed should always be accessible to

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

To modify the odbcinst.ini file

2 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
3 Edit the odbcinst.ini file and replace all instances of <NETEZZA_ODBC_DIR>
with the location of the directory where the Netezza ODBC Driver is installed. An
example of this is as follows:
If the original path is:
Driver = /<NETEZZA_ODBC_DIR>/lib64/libnzodbc.so

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 400

Installation and Configuration Guide

Then the modified path will be:

Driver = /usr/odbc/netezzahome/lib64/libnzodbc.so
4 Save the odbcinst.ini file.

To modify the odbc.ini file

5 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with [IBM
NETEZZA].
6 Open the MicroStrategy odbc.ini file.
7 Copy and paste the contents from the odbc.ini.example file for your Netezza
ODBC driver. You should paste the contents of the DSN exactly as they appear in the
example file.
8 Make the following changes to the copied sample file:
• Modify the driver location to match the location of the installed Netezza ODBC
Driver.
• Change the database, server name, user name, and password, and any other
relevant parameters to match the information for your database. For
information on the available parameters, refer to your third-party Netezza driver
documentation. This can often be found along with the driver installation.
9 Save the odbc.ini file.
For details on these DSN parameters, refer to the product documentation provided by
the database vendor.

ODBC Driver for MySQL 5.x for Linux

The ODBC driver for MySQL 5.x is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The following
steps show how to configure the ODBC driver for MySQL 5.x, which is certified for the
Linux operating system.
You must modify the odbc.ini file to create the DSN for MySQL 5.x.

The third-party product(s) discussed in the procedure below is manufactured by

vendors independent of MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy makes no warranty, express,
implied or otherwise, regarding this product, including its performance or
reliability.

To configure ODBC driver for MySQL 5.x

1 Install the 64-bit ODBC Driver for MySQL for the Linux operating system, found at
the hyperlink http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/connector/odbc/. This site is valid
as of the release of this manual. For information on installation, refer to the product
documentation provided by the database vendor.
• Ensure that the driver files are installed to the /usr/lib directory.

401 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

• For exact version numbers of MySQL drivers certified with MicroStrategy, refer
to the MicroStrategy General Information Readme.

To define the location of the driver files

2 In a UNIX/Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and provide the location of the directory where the MySQL
driver is installed. Within the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is included:
MYSQL_PATH='<MYSQL_PATH>'
Replace this <MYSQL_PATH> placeholder with the location of where the MySQL
driver is installed. Do not modify any other occurrences of <MYSQL_PATH> within
odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To modify the odbc.ini file

6 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with
[MySQL].
8 Open the MicroStrategy odbc.ini file.
9 Copy and paste the contents from the odbc.ini.example file for your MySQL
ODBC driver. You should paste the contents of the DSN exactly as they appear in the
example file.
10 Make the following changes to the copied sample file:
• Modify the <MYSQL_ODBC_DIR> placeholder in the driver location to match
the location of the installed MySQL ODBC Driver.
• Change the database, server name, user name, password, and any other relevant
parameters to match the information for your database. For information on the
available parameters, refer to your third-party MySQL driver documentation.
This can often be found along with the driver installation.

Ensure that there is no white space between the equals sign (=) which
separates the parameter and its value.

11 Save the odbc.ini file.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 402

Installation and Configuration Guide

You can test a connection to your MySQL database with the MicroStrategy DB
Query Tool.

This completes the steps to create a DSN and configure an ODBC driver for MySQL
Community Server 5.x. To create a database instance and database connection, see
Creating a database instance, page 175 and Creating a database connection, page 178.

ODBC Driver for Aster Database for Linux

The ODBC driver for Aster Database is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The
following steps show how to configure the ODBC driver for Aster Database for Linux.
You must modify the odbc.ini file to create the DSN for Aster.

The third-party product(s) discussed in the procedure below is manufactured by

vendors independent of MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy makes no warranty, express,
implied or otherwise, regarding this product, including its performance or
reliability.

To configure ODBC driver for Aster Database

1 Install the Aster ODBC Driver for the Linux operating system. For information on
installation, refer to the product documentation provided by the database vendor.
• The path to the installation location you choose for the ODBC driver is used later
in this procedure as the value for the Driver parameter in the odbc.ini file.
• For exact version numbers of Aster drivers certified with MicroStrategy, refer to
the MicroStrategy General Information Readme.

To configure the environment

2 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and provide the location of the Aster library installation.
Within the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is included:
ASTER_PATH='<ASTER_PATH>'
Replace this <ASTER_PATH> placeholder with the location of the Aster library
installation. Do not modify any other occurrences of <ASTER_PATH> within
odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

403 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To modify the odbc.ini file

6 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with
[Aster Database].
8 Open the MicroStrategy odbc.ini file.
9 Copy and paste the contents from the odbc.ini.example file for your Aster
ODBC driver. You should paste the contents of the DSN exactly as they appear in the
example file.
10 Make the following changes to the copied sample file:
• Modify the driver location to match the location of the installed Aster ODBC
Driver.
• Change the database, server name, user name, password, and any other relevant
parameters to match the information for your database. For information on the
available parameters, refer to your third-party Aster Database driver
documentation. This can often be found along with the driver installation.

Ensure that there is no white space between the equals sign (=) which
separates the parameter and its value.

11 Save the odbc.ini file.

This completes the steps to create a DSN and configure an ODBC driver for Aster
Database.

ODBC Driver for DataDirect Cloud for Linux

The ODBC driver for DataDirect Cloud is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The
following steps show how to configure the ODBC driver for DataDirect Cloud for Linux.

The third-party product(s) discussed in the procedure below is manufactured by

vendors independent of MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy makes no warranty, express,
implied or otherwise, regarding this product, including its performance or
reliability.

To configure ODBC driver for DataDirect Cloud

1 Install the DataDirect Cloud ODBC Driver for the Linux operating system. For
information on installation, refer to the product documentation provided by the
database vendor.
• The path to the installation location you choose for the ODBC driver is used later
in this procedure as the value for the Driver parameter in the odbc.ini file.
• For exact version numbers of DataDirect Cloud drivers certified with
MicroStrategy, refer to the MicroStrategy General Information Readme.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 404

Installation and Configuration Guide

To configure the environment

2 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and provide the location of the DataDirect Cloud ODBC driver
files. Within the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is included:
DataDirectCloud_PATH='<DataDirectCloud_PATH>'
Replace this <DataDirectCloud_PATH> placeholder with the location of the
DataDirect Cloud ODBC driver files. Do not modify any other occurrences of
<DataDirectCloud_PATH> within odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To modify the odbc.ini file

6 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with
[DataDirect Cloud].
8 Open the MicroStrategy odbc.ini file.
9 Copy and paste the contents from the odbc.ini.example file for your DataDirect
Cloud ODBC driver. You should paste the contents of the DSN exactly as they appear
in the example file.
10 Make the following changes to the copied sample file:
• Modify the driver location to match the location of the installed DataDirect
Cloud ODBC Driver.
• Change the database, server name, user name, password, and any other relevant
parameters to match the information for your database. For information on the
available parameters, refer to your third-party DataDirect Cloud driver
documentation. This can often be found along with the driver installation.

Ensure that there is no white space between the equals sign (=) which
separates the parameter and its value.

11 Save the odbc.ini file.

This completes the steps to create a DSN and configure an ODBC driver for DataDirect
Cloud.

405 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

ODBC Driver for Amazon Redshift for Linux

The ODBC driver for Amazon Redshift is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver (for the
MicroStrategy-branded driver, see MicroStrategy ODBC Driver for Amazon Redshift
Wire Protocol for Windows and UNIX/Linux, page 384). The following steps show how
to configure the ODBC driver for Amazon Redshift for Linux.

The third-party product(s) discussed in the procedure below is manufactured by

vendors independent of MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy makes no warranty, express,
implied or otherwise, regarding this product, including its performance or
reliability.

To configure ODBC driver for Amazon Redshift

1 Install the Amazon Redshift ODBC Driver for the Linux operating system. For
information on installation, refer to the product documentation provided by the
database vendor.
• The path to the installation location you choose for the ODBC driver is used later
in this procedure as the value for the Driver parameter in the odbc.ini file.
• For exact version numbers of Amazon Redshift drivers certified with
MicroStrategy, refer to the MicroStrategy General Information Readme.

To configure the environment

2 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and make the following changes:
• Provide the location of the directory where the Amazon Redshift ODBC driver
files are installed. The following definition is included:
REDSHIFT_PATH='<REDSHIFT_PATH>'
Replace this <REDSHIFT_PATH> placeholder with the directory path. Do not
modify any other occurrences of <REDSHIFT_PATH> within odbc.sh.
• Provide the location of amazon.redshiftodc.ini. The following definition
is included:
AMAZONREDSHIFTODBCINI='<AMAZONREDSHIFTODBCINI>'
Replace this <AMAZONREDSHIFTODBCINI> placeholder with the directory
path. Do not modify any other occurrences of <AMAZONREDSHIFTODBCINI>
within odbc.sh.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 406

Installation and Configuration Guide

5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To modify the odbc.ini file

6 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with
[Amazon Redshift ODBC DSN 64].
8 Open the MicroStrategy odbc.ini file.
9 Copy and paste the contents from the odbc.ini.example file for your Amazon
Redshift ODBC driver. You should paste the contents of the DSN exactly as they
appear in the example file.
10 Make the following changes to the copied sample file:
• Modify the driver location to match the location of the installed Amazon
Redshift ODBC Driver.
• Change the database, server name, user name, password, and any other relevant
parameters to match the information for your database. For information on the
available parameters, refer to your third-party Amazon Redshift driver
documentation. This can often be found along with the driver installation.

Ensure that there is no white space between the equals sign (=) which
separates the parameter and its value.

11 Save the odbc.ini file.

This completes the steps to create a DSN and configure an ODBC driver for Amazon
Redshift.

ODBC Driver for Vertica for Linux or Solaris

The ODBC driver for Vertica is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The following steps
show how to configure the ODBC driver for Vertica for Linux or Solaris.
You must modify the odbc.ini file to create the DSN for Vertica.

The third-party product(s) discussed in the procedure below is manufactured by

vendors independent of MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy makes no warranty, express,
implied or otherwise, regarding this product, including its performance or
reliability.

407 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

To configure ODBC driver for Vertica

1 Install the ODBC Driver for Vertica for the Linux or Solaris operating system. For
information on installation, refer to the product documentation provided by the
database vendor.

Note the following:

• The path to the installation location you choose for the ODBC driver is
used later in this procedure as the value for the Driver parameter in the
odbc.ini file.
• For exact version numbers of Vertica drivers certified with
MicroStrategy, refer to the MicroStrategy General Information
Readme.

To configure the environment

2 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the ODBC.sh file and provide the location of the vertica.ini file. Within
the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is included:
VERTICAINI='<VERTICAINI_PATH>'
Replace this <VERTICAINI_PATH> placeholder with the location of the
vertica.ini file. Do not modify any other occurrences of <VERTICAINI_PATH>
within odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

To modify the odbc.ini file

6 In a Linux or Solaris console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is
the directory you specified as the home directory during installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and search for the section that starts with [HP
VERTICA].
8 Open the MicroStrategy odbc.ini file.
9 Copy and paste the contents from the odbc.ini.example file for your Vertica
ODBC driver. You should paste the contents of the DSN exactly as they appear in the
example file.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 408

Installation and Configuration Guide

10 Make the following changes to the copied sample file:

• Modify the driver location to match the location of the installed Vertica ODBC
Driver.
• Change the database, server name, user name, password, and any other relevant
parameters to match the information for your database. For information on the
available parameters, refer to your third-party Vertica driver documentation.
This can often be found along with the driver installation.

Ensure that there is no white space between the equals sign (=) which
separates the parameter and its value.

11 Save the odbc.ini file.

This completes the steps to create a DSN and configure an ODBC driver for Vertica.

ODBC Driver for SAP HANA for Windows and Linux

The ODBC driver for SAP HANA is not a MicroStrategy-branded driver. The following
steps show how to configure ODBC driver for SAP HANA 1.x.
• To configure an ODBC Driver for SAP HANA on Windows, page 409
• To configure an ODBC Driver for SAP HANA on Linux, page 410

Prerequisites:
• MicroStrategy recommends that the SAP HANA user account used to create the
database is granted full permissions for the database. If the database user account
cannot be granted full permissions to the database, you can use the
recommendations listed in Required database permissions to create metadata,
History List, and statistics repositories, page 143 to determine the required
permissions for the SAP HANA database user account. In addition, ensure the
following permissions are defined for your SAP HANA user account:
▫ Insert permission for the _SYS_BIC schema.
▫ Select permission for the _SYS_REPO schema.

To configure an ODBC Driver for SAP HANA on Windows

1 Install the SAP HANA ODBC driver files on the Windows system that will host the
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. For specific installation steps, refer to your third-
party SAP documentation.

For exact version numbers of SAP HANA drivers certified with MicroStrategy,
refer to the MicroStrategy General Information Readme.

2 Using the Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator, create a data source name to
connect to your SAP HANA data source.

409 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

For best practices on using the Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator to
create data source names that are to be used in MicroStrategy, see Managing
ODBC and data sources with Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator,
page 134.

3 You can use the MicroStrategy DB Query Tool to test whether data can be retrieved
data from your SAP HANA data source. For information on how to use the
MicroStrategy DB Query Tool, see Using the DB Query Tool, page 351.
4 To use an SAP HANA as a data source, you must create a database instance in
MicroStrategy. For information on creating a database instance, see Creating a
database instance, page 175.

When creating a database connection, which is part of a database instance,

ensure that you select Non UTF-8 as the character set encoding for Windows
drivers.

This completes the steps for the initial connection to SAP HANA in MicroStrategy for
Windows environments. For additional configuration requirements, see Additional
requirements to support SAP HANA, page 412.

To configure an ODBC Driver for SAP HANA on Linux

1 Install the SAP HANA ODBC driver files on the Linux system that will host the
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. For specific installation steps, refer to your third-
party SAP documentation.

For exact version numbers of SAP HANA drivers certified with MicroStrategy,
refer to the MicroStrategy General Information Readme.

To configure the environment

2 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during installation. Browse to the
folder env.
3 Add Write privileges to the ODBC.sh file by entering the following command:
chmod u+w ODBC.sh
4 Edit the odbc.sh file and provide the location where you installed the SAP HANA
ODBC driver files. Within the ODBC.sh file, the following definition is included:
SAPHANA_PATH='<SAPHANA_PATH>'
Replace this <SAPHANA_PATH> placeholder with the location of the SAP HANA
ODBC driver files. Do not modify any other occurrences of <SAPHANA_PATH>
within odbc.sh.
5 Save the ODBC.sh file and remove Write privileges from the file by entering the
following command:
chmod a-w ODBC.sh

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 410

Installation and Configuration Guide

To configure a DSN
6 In a Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH where HOME_PATH is the
directory you specified as the Home Directory during your MicroStrategy installation.
7 Open the odbc.ini.example file and find the section that starts with [SAP
HANA]. Copy the section into the odbc.ini file.
8 Edit the following information from the syntax that you copied to odbc.ini:
• Driver=<SAPHANA_PATH>/libodbcHDB.so
Replace <SAPHANA_PATH> with the location where you installed the SAP
HANA ODBC driver files.
• Servernode=ip_address:port
▫ Replace ip_address with the IP address for the machine that hosts the
SAP HANA database.
▫ Replace port with the port number for the connection to the SAP HANA
database. Contact your SAP HANA database administrator for the required
port number.
• USER=uid
Replace uid with a valid SAP HANA user account.
• PASSWORD=pwd
Replace pwd with the password for the SAP HANA user account described
above.
For information on the available parameters, refer to your third-party SAP HANA
driver documentation. This can often be found along with the driver installation.
9 Save the odbc.ini file.
10 You can use the MicroStrategy DB Query Tool to test whether data can be retrieved
data from your SAP HANA data source. For information on how to use the
MicroStrategy DB Query Tool, see Using the DB Query Tool, page 351.
11 To use an SAP HANA as a data source, you must create a database instance in
MicroStrategy. For information on creating a database instance, see Creating a
database instance, page 175.

When creating a database connection, which is part of a database instance, for

SAP HANA, ensure that you select Non UTF-8 as the character set encoding
for UNIX drivers.

This completes the steps for the initial connection to SAP HANA in MicroStrategy for
Windows environments. For additional configuration requirements, see Additional
requirements to support SAP HANA, page 412 below.

411 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Additional requirements to support SAP HANA

Review the following additional requirements to ensure a successful integration of SAP
HANA in MicroStrategy:
• Be aware that once you import tables from SAP HANA into MicroStrategy, you must
manually import any prefix information as well. Using the Warehouse Catalog, you
can select all tables imported from SAP HANA and select Import Prefix to import the
prefix information. For additional steps to access and use the Warehouse Catalog, see
the Project Design Guide.
• If the tables in SAP HANA include input parameters, these are supported in
MicroStrategy using prompts. Using the Table Editor available in MicroStrategy
Developer, you can create and modify prompts to support input parameters. For
steps to access and use the Table Editor, refer to the Project Design Help.

Other data sources and relational databases for

Windows
If you use other databases or data sources, refer to the database-specific documentation
for information on required settings. Standard settings are supported by MicroStrategy
for most relational databases.

Teradata
If you intend to use Teradata, which is certified by MicroStrategy, you need to:
• Pre-install the NCR ODBC Driver for Teradata RDBMS.
• Ensure that Teradata DSNs are set to Run in Quiet Mode.
If you use Teradata, the following settings are required for setting up the driver
connection.
In the Teradata ODBC Driver Options dialog box, click Options to set the following
required options:
• Session Mode: Select Teradata as the session mode to apply for the duration of the
session.
• Date Time Format: Set this value to AAA format so the ODBC driver handles the
Dates, Time, and Timestamps as ANSI-compatible strings. The ANSI-compatible
strings are only available with the V2R3 or later databases.
• Disable Parsing: Select this check box to disable parsing of SQL statements by the
ODBC driver.
You can enable Teradata Parallel Transporter for your connections to Teradata. This can
improve performance when retrieving large amounts of data, typically 0.5 Gigabytes and
larger, which can occur most commonly in MicroStrategy when publishing Intelligent
Cubes. For steps to configure this support, refer to the MicroStrategy Web Help.
For information on other options, refer to the online help by clicking Help.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 412

Installation and Configuration Guide

Microsoft Excel
A Microsoft Excel file can be used as a data source in MicroStrategy. The information
provided below explains how to prepare an Excel file for use with MicroStrategy and how
to connect to the Excel file.
This data can be used as part of a MicroStrategy project in various ways. For example,
you can integrate the Excel data in your project using tools such as Architect, as
described in the Project Design Guide. You can also use Freeform SQL and Query Builder
to access your Excel data, as described in the Advanced Reporting Guide.

Prepare an Excel file as a valid data source

To use an Excel file as a data source, you must create and store the data in the Excel file
so that it can be recognized in MicroStrategy as a set of tables that contain valid data.

To create a table with valid data in an Excel file

1 Prepare the Excel file as follows:

• Ensure that all column headers are of a valid format:
— No spaces in the header name (for example, Category_ID instead of Category
ID) .
— Alphanumeric, and beginning with a letter.
• Ensure that all cells for the ID column have a value in them.
2 In the Excel file, create a table by performing the following:
a Highlight the specific rows and columns with the data to use to create a report
with, including the column headers, such as Category_ID and Category_DESC.

Do not use the column headings at the top of the Excel spreadsheet,
marked as A, B, C, and so on to select the whole column. Doing so may
include numerous empty cells with NULL values.

b In the Name Box, type a name for the highlighted cells, and then press
ENTER. The name you type in is used in MicroStrategy as a table name.

The Name Box is the drop-down list on the left-hand side below the
toolbars.

You can create multiple tables in one Excel file by highlighting different parts of
the file and assigning them different names.
3 Save the Excel file.

Ensure that the file is not password-protected.

413 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Use your Excel file as a data source

To use an Excel file as a data source, you can create a data source name (DSN) for the
Excel file. This DSN can be used by a database instance in MicroStrategy to connect to
the Excel file. For information on creating a database instance, see Creating a database
instance, page 175.
As an alternative, you can use Data Import to quickly include Excel data in your
MicroStrategy project. Steps to use Data Import to import data and begin your analysis is
included in the MicroStrategy Web Help.

Text files
A text file can be used as a data source in MicroStrategy. You can use Data Import to
quickly include data from text files in your MicroStrategy project. Steps to use Data
Import to import data and begin your analysis is included in the MicroStrategy Web
Help.

Creating database connections in Web

In MicroStrategy Web, users can import data from different data sources, such as a
database or the results of a Freeform query, then create reports, documents, and
dashboards to report on their imported data. You can define a new database connection
directly from Web for users to import data from, or edit, delete, rename, or duplicate an
existing connection.

Prerequisite
• You must have the Create and Edit Database Instances and Connections and Create
and Edit Database Logins privileges to define a new database connection.
• If you plan to connect to a data source using a DSN, the DSN must be created and
available. If a DSN is not available, you can use the DSNLess Connection option to
connect to your data source.

To create a new database connection

1 In MicroStrategy Web, navigate to any folder page, such as Shared Reports or My

Reports.
2 From the navigation bar on the left, click Create, then select Access External
Data. Click Database. The Select Import Options dialog box opens.
3 Select Pick Tables to select single or multiple tables to import data from.
• If you want to use a graphical interface to build the SQL query to use to import
your data, select Build a Query.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 414

Installation and Configuration Guide

• If you want to manually type or paste a query to import your data, select Type a
Query.
4 Click OK. The Import from Tables page opens.
5 From the Data Sources panel, click Add. The Data Source dialog box opens.
6 Select the type of connection to your database, as follows:
• To connect to a data source using a DSN, select DSN Connections. Select the
DSN of the database that you want to connect to from the DSN drop-down list,
then select the appropriate database management system (DBMS) from the
DBMS drop-down list.
• To connect directly to a data source, select DSNless Connections.
▫ If you clear the Show databases whose drivers were not found
check box, only databases that have an installed and configured driver are
available for selection. These databases can be connected to by selecting the
required Database and Version from the drop-down lists, and supplying
the required connection information. For a detailed list of the information
required for each database type, see Creating DSNs for specific data sources,
page 380.
▫ If you select the Show databases whose drivers were not found
check box, additional databases that do not have a configured driver are
available for selection. These databases can be connected to by selecting the
required Database and Version from the drop-down lists, and then
configuring a connection to the database by completing the following steps:
a Click Show connection string.
b Type the value for each configuration requirement listed. Depending on the
database you are connecting to, this includes the server name, port
number, and database name. For a detailed list of the information
required for each database type, see Creating DSNs for specific data
sources, page 380.
c Select the Edit connection string check box. You can now edit the
connection string.
d Modify the Driver={DriverName} part of the connection string, where
DriverName is the default name used for the driver. Replace the default
DriverName with the name of the driver that your administrator
installed for the database.
e If there were any optional configuration parameters that you chose not to
define, modify the connection string to remove the parameters completely
from the string. These parameters are listed with an equal sign (=)
followed immediately by a semicolon (;), indicating no value is provided.
For example, if the connection string includes AlternateServers=;
remove this text from the connection string.
7 Type a user name and password with access to the database in the User and
Password fields.
8 Type a name for the database connection in the Data Source Name field.

415 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

9 Do one of the following:

• To allow other users to import data using the database connection, select the
Share this connection with everybody check box.
• To deny other users the ability to import data using the database connection,
clear the Share this connection with everybody check box.
10 Click OK to create the connection. For more information on importing data into
Web, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.

Configuring ODBC parameters with odbc.ini

The odbc.ini file is the configuration file that stores the definitions for all the ODBC
DSNs in a UNIX or Linux environment. Therefore this section is not relevant to ODBC
and DSN connections on Windows.
For information on what operating systems each ODBC driver is certified for, see
Certified ODBC drivers for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, page 43.
These ODBC DSNs are defined by specifying values for certain DSN parameters. This file
is activated by the environment variable ODBCINI, and is required by all ODBC
applications. By default, the odbc.ini file is installed in HOME_PATH, where HOME_
PATH is the directory you specified as the home directory during installation on UNIX or
Linux. It contains the definitions for all of the MicroStrategy-branded ODBC drivers.

MicroStrategy supports ODBC drivers from other vendors that you can install
separately. This involves manually defining the DSN parameters in the odbc.ini
file.

Modification of the odbc.ini file is necessary to configure the full list of ODBC driver
settings or for ODBC drivers that are not accessible through the MicroStrategy
Connectivity Wizard. However, caution should be taken when modifying the odbc.ini
file as incorrect modifications can cause unintended functionality and errors.
Refer to the odbc.ini.example file installed in HOME_PATH, where HOME_PATH is
the directory you specified as the home directory during installation on UNIX or Linux.
It is recommended copy the examples in the odbc.ini.example file to odbc.ini, to
act as a basis for your configurations. This example file uses commonly used settings for
the driver parameters.
If you require additional information on the purpose of and available options for each
parameter, refer to the following resources:
• For any data source listed in odbc.ini.example as a MicroStrategy driver, refer
to DataDirect’s documentation at
http://media.datadirect.com/download/docs/odbc/allodbc/help.html.
• For any data source that is not listed in odbc.ini.example as a MicroStrategy
driver, refer to the documentation for the third-party vendor of the driver. This can
often be found along with the driver installation.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 416

 B
Installing the MicroStrategy
Hadoop Gateway
The MicroStrategy Hadoop Gateway is a data processing engine that you install in your
Apache Hadoop® environment. The Hadoop Gateway lets you analyze unstructured data
in Hadoop, and provides high-speed parallel data transfer between the Hadoop
Distributed File System (HDFS) and your MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.
The steps to install the Hadoop Gateway on your Hadoop cluster are described in the
sections below.

Installing the Hadoop Gateway

The Hadoop Gateway consists of the following components, which you install on your
Hadoop cluster:
• Big Data Query Engine (BDQE): The BDQE handles communication between your
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server and your Hadoop cluster. In your Hadoop cluster,
the BDQE runs on an edge node or gateway node. The edge node is the interface
between your Hadoop cluster and external servers.
• Big Data Execution Engine (BDEE): The BDEE runs on all the nodes that run
Hadoop services in your cluster.

Installing and deploying the Hadoop Gateway

components
To install and deploy the Hadoop Gateway, you perform the following high-level steps:
• Download and extract the Hadoop Gateway files that apply to your environment.
• Configure the Big Data Query Engine (BDQE) and Big Data Execution Engine
(BDEE) files to add information about your cluster.
• Copy the BDEE to the remaining nodes in your cluster.
• Start the BDQE and BDEE.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 417

Installation and Configuration Guide

Detailed steps to install and deploy the Hadoop Gateway are below.

Prerequisites
• You have installed Hadoop on UNIX/Linux servers.
• You have set up your Hadoop cluster, with at least one edge node. The edge node is
the interface between your Hadoop cluster and external servers.
• You have created a user account that the BDQE can use to communicate with the
servers in your cluster. For example, mstr-hadoop-gateway.
• You have created a Secure Shell (SSH) private key for your BDQE node using the
RSA algorithm, so that the edge node can use SSH to communicate with the cluster.
By default, the file name for a private key created with the RSA algorithm is id_rsa.
• You know the host name or IP address of the edge node that you install the BDQE
on.
• You know the host names or IP addresses of all the nodes that you want to install
the BDEE on.
• On all the nodes that you are installing the Hadoop Gateway components on, you
have created a folder for the components. The paths for the folder must be identical
for all nodes. For example, if you want to install the Hadoop Gateway in
/var/lib/mstr-hadoop-gateway, you must create the /var/lib/mstr-
hadoop-gateway folder in all the nodes of your Hadoop cluster.

To install the Hadoop Gateway

To download and extract the Hadoop Gateway

1 To download the files for the Hadoop Gateway, visit
https://download.microstrategy.com, and expand the MicroStrategy Add-ons
and Tools section.
2 Click the link for the Hadoop Gateway. A ZIP archive is downloaded.
3 Extract the ZIP archive. The archive contains packages for different environments.
Depending on your environment, review the following list for the package that is
appropriate for your environment:

Environment type File name to use

Cloudera CDH 4.2.x bde-1.0-2.0.0-cdh4.2.1-SNAPSHOT-

dist.tar.gz
Cloudera CDH 4.3.x bde-1.0-2.0.0-cdh4.3.0-SNAPSHOT-
dist.tar.gz

418 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Environment type File name to use

Cloudera CDH 5.0.x bde-1.0-2.3.0-cdh5.0.0-SNAPSHOT-

dist.tar.gz
Cloudera CDH 5.1.X bde-1.0-2.3.0-cdh5.1.0-SNAPSHOT-
dist.tar.gz
Cloudera CDH 5.3.X bde-1.0-2.5.0-cdh5.3.0-SNAPSHOT-dist.tar.gz

Cloudera CDH 5.4.X bde-1.0-2.6.0-cdh5.4.0-SNAPSHOT-dist.tar.gz

Hortonworks Data bde-1.0-2.4.0.2.1.1.0-385-SNAPSHOT-

Platform (HDP) 2.1.x dist.tar.gz

4 Copy the appropriate package to the edge node that you want to install the BDQE on.
5 On the node that you are installing the BDQE on, open a UNIX/Linux terminal, and
navigate to the folder that you copied the Hadoop Gateway package to.
6 Extract the contents of the package, using the following command:
tar -xzf package
Where package is the appropriate package for your environment.
The package is extracted, creating a folder with the same name as the package. For
example, if you extracted bde-1.0-2.3.0-cdh5.1.0-SNAPSHOT-
dist.tar.gz for a Cloudera CDH 5.1.0 environment, the contents of the package
are extracted to a folder called bde-1.0-2.3.0-cdh5.1.0-SNAPSHOT-dist.

To configure the Hadoop Gateway components and add information about your
environment
7 In the terminal, navigate to the folder that you extracted the Hadoop Gateway
package to, and navigate to the conf folder.
8 Open bde.xml.tempate. The configuration file for the Hadoop Gateway opens.
The file is in the XML format, with a list of <property> elements.
9 In the configuration file, add the following information by editing the following
properties:
a Add a path to deploy the BDEE component to, for all the nodes in your cluster.
To add the path, edit the following property:
<property>
<name>com.microstrategy.bde.bde_remote_deploy_dir
</name>
<value>path-to-BDEE</value>
</property>

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 419

Installation and Configuration Guide

Where path-to-BDEE is the path that you want to deploy the BDEE to on all
the nodes of your Hadoop cluster. The steps to deploy the BDEE are described
later in this procedure.
Ensure that you have created the above folder in all the nodes of your Hadoop
cluster.
b Add the path to your SSH private key, which the BDQE uses to communicate
with the other nodes in your cluster. To add the path, edit the following
property:
<property>
<name>com.microstrategy.bde.local_key</name>
<value>path-to-ssh-private-key</value>
</property>
Where path-to-ssh-private-key is the path to the private key that you
created.
c Add the user name that the BDQE uses to communicate with the nodes in your
cluster. To add the user name, edit the following property:
<property>
<name>com.microstrategy.bde.account</name>
<value>bdqe-user-name</value>
</property>
Where bdqe-user-name is the user name that you created.
d Add the host name of the edge node that runs the BDQE. To add the host name,
edit the following property:
<property>
<name>com.microstrategy.bde.multicoordinator.coordin
atorHostList</name>
<value>bdqe-host-name</value>
</property>
Where bdqe-host-name is the host name or IP address of the edge node that
runs the BDQE.
10 Save and close bde.xml.template.
11 Rename bde.xml.tempate to bde.xml.
12 In the conf folder, create a new text file called slaves.
13 Open the slaves file in a text editor.
14 Type the host names or IP addresses of the nodes that you want to install the BDEE
on, with each node on a new line. For example:
node1-bdee.example.com
node2-bdee.example.com
node3-bdee.example.com

420 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

15 Save and close the slaves file.

16 You can use the bde-configure.sh script under the bin folder to guide you
through the installation process. To do so, execute the script with no parameters.

To deploy the BDEE to the cluster

17 In the terminal window, navigate to the bin folder.
18 Type the following command:
./cluster dist
The files for the BDEE are copied to the nodes that you configured in the slaves
file above.

To start the BDQE and BDEE services

19 Navigate to the bin folder.
20 To start the BDQE, type the following command:
./bde-bdqe start
The BDQE service starts.
21 To start the BDEE on all the nodes that you configured, type the following
command:
./cluster run "bin/bde-bdee start"
The BDEE service starts on all the nodes that you deployed the BDEE files to.
22 To stop the BDQE, type the following command:
./bde-bdqe stop
The BDQE service stops.
23 To stop the BDEE on all the nodes that you configured, type the following
command:
./cluster run "bin/bde-bdee stop"
The BDEE service stops on all the nodes that you deployed the BDEE files to.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 421

 C
Troubleshooting
This appendix provides information on common problems that you might encounter
while installing and configuring MicroStrategy on UNIX, Linux, and Windows operating
systems.

Reviewing general installation errors

Any errors in your MicroStrategy installation are written to the install.log file.

Review errors found in install.log

1 Browse to INSTALL_PATH where INSTALL_PATH is the directory you specified as

the Install Directory during installation
2 Open the install.log file. (For Unix, use an editor with a command like dtpad
install.log. For Windows, use Notepad or some other text editor to open the
file.)
3 Review the error messages. A common error is to run out of space.

Graph and document support of non-Western

European fonts
If your UNIX system uses non-Western European fonts, you may see indiscernible values
returned in place of text on your graphs when accessed through MicroStrategy Web or
Web Universal. This also occurs for Report Services documents when accessed through
MicroStrategy Web or Web Universal or any other MicroStrategy client application (such
as Developer) that connects to an Intelligence Server connected (three-tier) project
source.
To support non-Western European fonts, copy True Type fonts into the Intelligence
Server installation directory. Copy these fonts, which have a .ttc or .ttf extension, to
INTELLIGENCE_SERVER_INSTALL_PATH\PDFGeneratorFiles. The default

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 422

Installation and Configuration Guide

installation path for the Intelligence Server in UNIX is

home\MicroStrategy\PDFGeneratorFiles. For the change to take effect, you
must restart Intelligence Server.

Server port number errors

This section provides troubleshooting information on server port number errors.

I forgot the server port number

1 Open MicroStrategy Service Manager.
• Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then MicroStrategy
Tools, and then select Service Manager. MicroStrategy Service Manager
opens.
• UNIX/Linux: In a UNIX or Linux console window, browse to HOME_PATH
where HOME_PATH is the directory you specified as the home directory during
installation. Browse to the folder bin and type ./mstrsvcmgr, then press
ENTER. MicroStrategy Service Manager opens.
2 Click Options. This launches the Service Options dialog box.
3 Click Intelligence Server Options tab to view the port number.

Port number is in use

In a UNIX or Linux environment, you can find a port available for use with the following
procedure:
1 Browse to your target directory. This is the path indicated during installation as the
Directory Name.
2 Browse to the folder bin and type mstrctl –s IntelligenceServer di
FindingPortNumber, then press ENTER.
3 Type mstrctl –s IntelligenceServer ci FindingPortNumber, then
press ENTER.
4 Type mstrctl –s IntelligenceServer gs FindingPortNumber, then
press ENTER.
5 An XML file is returned. Search for the tag <tcp_port_number>, which contains
a port number you can use. Record this number.

DSN connection errors

This section provides troubleshooting information on DSN connection errors.

423 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Testing the DSN connection failed in DSN Creator

1 In MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard, go to the Driver Details page and review all
the information.
2 Click each of the boxes and read the comments at the bottom of the window.
3 Enter the information required for each box and click Test. The connection is either
successful, or an error message is displayed to explain the problem.

Metadata and other repository creation errors

This section provides troubleshooting information on metadata, History List, and
statistics repository creation errors.
The errors listed below do not cover errors that can occur because a user does not have
the correct database permissions to create a metadata, History List, or statistics
repository. For information on providing the proper database permissions to create these
repositories, see Required database permissions to create metadata, History List, and
statistics repositories, page 143.

Creating a metadata fails due to insufficient page size

When creating a metadata within a IBM DB2 database, the following error and resulting
error message can be encountered:
Invalid Page Size for DB2 UDB Metadata
This can occur when an IBM DB2 database user has access to a tablespace that does not
have the space requirements necessary for the metadata repository. The MicroStrategy
metadata repository requires a page size of at least 8 KB.
To avoid this error, it is recommended to revoke access to any tablespaces that are lower
than 8 KB in page size for the user account that is creating the metadata. The user must
also have access to a tablespace with a page size of at least 8 KB. Contact your database
administrator to perform this user configuration.

Creating a History List repository fails due to

insufficient page size
When creating a History List repository within a Sybase database, the following error and
resulting error message can be encountered.
Creating table TableName failed because the minimum row
size would be PageSizeRequirement bytes. This exceeds
the maximum allowable size of a row for this table,
PageSizeLimit bytes.
This can occur when a Sybase database does not have the page size requirements
necessary for the History List Repository. To solve this error, contact your database
administrator to increase the current available space (PageSizeLimit in the error

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 424

Installation and Configuration Guide

message above) for the table space to be large enough to store the History List repository
(PageSizeRequirement in the error message above). As a general rule, the page size
for the History List repository should be at least 4 KB.

Permission errors
This section provides troubleshooting information on permission errors in a UNIX or
Linux environment.

Missing JVM file

The installation fails just before it starts transferring files, and the following error is
displayed:
JVM not found
Clear the set group ID on execution(s) bit on the permissions of the directory where the
InstallPath for the Intelligence Server is to be placed.
1 In a console window, type:
#chmod g-s directory
where directory is the InstallPath for Intelligence Server.
2 Press ENTER.

425 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

GLOSSARY
A

account
Creates a relationship between access privileges and user login credentials.
Account permissions are based on granted roles, and each role has specific
privileges. See also: application administrator, application designer, subscription
administrator, system administrator.

Activation Code
A code used to activate MicroStrategy Intelligence Server after installation. This
code is sent to an email address provided during activation.

ad hoc query
A SQL query dynamically constructed by desktop tools and whose results are not
known before it is sent to the server. The user is asking a new question that has
not been answered by an existing report.

address
Set of information that tells Narrowcast Server how to send services to a
particular subscriber. Each address can be associated with one and only one
login/user. Each address is defined to use a specific device. See also: device.

address display
A name that is displayed by receiving systems. For email delivery, the address
display is used to identify the email address. For example,
[email protected] might be displayed as “Smith, John” by
the receiving email client.

address ID
An ID value that identifies individual addresses. Each address can be subscribed
to a subscription set multiple times.

administration object
Narrowcast Server components that control the processing of Narrowcast
messages, providing the means to acquire, format, and transmit messages to
recipients. These objects are created and configured by the system administrator.

administrator
A user who installs and monitors software and user configurations, maintains
the state of the software, and administers the MicroStrategy servers in the
platform. An administrator also defines users, assigns user login accounts and
user privileges, and analyzes the performance of the system.

aggregate data
Information or facts added together or "aggregated" to form summaries of
information considered as a whole.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 426

Installation and Configuration Guide

aggregate function
A numeric function that acts on a column of data and produces a single result.
Examples include SUM, COUNT, MAX, MIN, and AVG.

aggregate table
A fact table that stores data that has been aggregated along one or more
dimensions.

All Subscription Data

An XML string that returns subscription information. It requires you to select an
XSL stylesheet to format the subscription information returned as desired.

analyst
A user who analyzes business data by accessing reports, performing drilling, and
otherwise manipulating reports and documents to see required business data. An
analyst receives useful data from information devices like smart phones and
email without necessarily understanding how such information is derived or
delivered.

analytical application
In MicroStrategy, a software application designed to provide predefined reports
and other analytics based on a predefined metadata repository, for various
industries to gain insight into their business data. The application is not fixed to a
specific physical schema, giving it the flexibility to be ported to a company's
existing data warehouse.

Analytical Engine
A component of the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server that performs all
advanced analytical functions. The Analytical Engine evaluates functions not
supported by the data warehouse RDBMS and it cross-tabulates reports.

analytics
Predefined tools that allow analysis within the Analysis Module's functional
areas. Analytics include reports (graph, grid, and so on), scorecards, dashboards,
and so on.

analytics library
The collection of reports and related objects in the MicroStrategy metadata
repository. Library objects include reports, metrics, filters, and prompts. Library
objects are defined based on attributes and facts (objects in the logical data
model.)

application administrator
Narrowcast Administrator user role. This role is designed for a Narrowcast
Administrator console user who performs some of the same tasks as the
application designer but has the ability to modify application objects created by
any Narrowcast Administrator account. This role is intended for quality
managers, development managers, configuration managers, and other users
requiring full access to all application objects. See also: application designer.

427 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

application designer
A Narrowcast Administrator user role. This role is designed for a Narrowcast
Administrator console user who develops and tests services, which include
documents, publications, schedules, and subscription sets. Configures and
manages Subscription Portals that allow end users to subscribe to a variety of
Narrowcast services via the Web. Configures data sources, content, and portal
layout. Publishes services and device types, and selects default devices for
Subscription Portals. Specifies information source properties and default site
preferences. Installs, configures, and administers the development environment.
Administers subscribers and subscriptions for development and testing purposes.
See also: application administrator.

application object
MicroStrategy object used to provide analysis of and insight into relevant data.
Application objects are developed in MicroStrategy Developer and they are the
building blocks for reports and documents. Application objects include these
object types: report, document, template, filter, metric, custom group,
consolidation, prompt.

application program interface (API)

A set of related functions that provides an interface between existing applications
and new applications. The API can be seen as a platform over a set of services on
which new applications can be built. The functions, or interfaces, are
implemented in a Dynamic Link Library and are defined in a standardized
syntax. Application functionality available in the platform can be integrated or
embedded into other applications through the use of the APIs.

attachment
Any file that is included in an email message. Attachments can originate from
outside Narrowcast Server (that is, any pre-existing file can be sent as part of a
service) or can be created by Narrowcast Server (that is, Narrowcast Server can
create an Excel attachment on the fly).

attribute
A data level defined by the system architect and associated with one or more
columns in a data warehouse lookup table. Attributes include data classifications
like Region, Order, Customer, Age, Item, City, and Year. They provide a means
for aggregating and filtering at a given level.

attribute element
A value of any of the attribute forms of an attribute. For example, New York and
Dallas are elements of the attribute City; January, February, and March are
elements of the attribute Month.

attribute form
One of several columns associated with an attribute that are different aspects of
the same thing. Every attribute supports its own collection of forms.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 428

Installation and Configuration Guide

attrition rate
The number of lost employees divided by the number of employees in a given
time period.

authentication object
Object used by an information source that specifies who the user is and the
security context within which that user will interact with that information
source. Contains the security information required to make a connection or
perform task execution. Depending on the information source module, it should
contain information such as the user login name and password. For a
MicroStrategy Information Source, the object is a MicroStrategy user. See also:
personalization object.

auto text code

Dynamic text that is populated by the document or dataset, consisting of the
document’s or dataset’s settings rather than data from the data warehouse.
Examples of auto text codes, which can be considered as a type of variable, are
document name, page number, and execution time. Auto text codes are
contained in text field controls on a document. See also: Data field, Text field.

autostyle
A set of predefined formatting that can be easily applied to many reports in
either MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy Web. Autostyles are a good way
to apply a corporate look and feel to reports.

axes (axis)
(1) A vector along which data is displayed. There are three axes—Row, Column,
and Page. When a user defines a template for a report, he places template units—
attributes, dimensions, metrics, consolidations, and custom groups—along each
axis. (2) One part of a multi-part graphical diagram. Many SDAM reports display
data on more than one graphical axis, such as the Quotation Activity Summary
report and the Quarterly Conversion Summary report.

banding
A method of organizing values according to a set of descriptive or meaningful
data ranges called buckets. Banding is also used for display purposes, where every
other row is a different color and the two colors alternate. Compare:
consolidation.

base table
A fact table that stores data at the lowest level of dimensionality.

block
A logical display element used to control the display of large reports in the
limited page and slide dimensions of Microsoft Word and PowerPoint. A block
may consist of multiple fetches. Blocks are defined by Microsoft Office product-
specific configuration settings.

429 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

break by
An attribute or hierarchy where calculations for an OLAP function restart. To
break by an attribute or hierarchy means to restart calculations that use OLAP,
or Relative, functions when the analytical engine reaches the next instance of
the specified attribute or hierarchy. Examples of OLAP functions include
RunningStdevP, Rank, NTile, and various expressions that calculate percent
values. To break by an attribute or hierarchy in an expression, you must set the
BreakBy parameter.

business intelligence (BI) system

A system that facilitates the analysis of volumes of complex data by providing the
ability to view data from multiple perspectives.

cache
A special data store holding recently accessed information for quick future
access. This is normally done for frequently requested reports, whose execution
is faster because they need not run against the database. Results from the data
warehouse are stored separately and can be used by new job requests that require
the same data. In the MicroStrategy environment, when a user runs a report for
the first time, the job is submitted to the database for processing. However, if the
results of that report are cached, the results can be returned immediately without
having to wait for the database to process the job the next time the report is run.

caching
A special data storage method in which recently accessed values are stored for
quick future access. Caching is used primarily to improve report execution
performance.

calculated expression
A metric obtained dynamically, directly from metrics on a document dataset, by
using at least one of the metrics in the document. Calculated expressions allow
you to use simple arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /) to combine metrics from
different datasets in the document. See also: Derived metric.

catalog
A table that contains the names of all non-temporary tables in a data warehouse.

characteristic attribute
An attribute that is a parent of a child attribute, but not part of the "main"
hierarchy associated with the child attribute. For example, consider a hierarchy
consisting of Year, Month, Day. Day of Week is a parent of Day, and a
characteristic attribute.

child attribute
The lower-level attribute in an attribute relationship. See also: parent attribute or
relationship.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 430

Installation and Configuration Guide

clustering
A way of using machine resources to provide an efficient and robust processing
environment for a Narrowcast Server system. A cluster consists of two or more
machines, each machine running at least one Narrowcast Server component.
These components are: MicroStrategy Logging Server, distribution manager
(DM), execution engine (EE).

column
(1) A one-dimensional vertical array of values in a table. (2) The set of fields of a
given name and datatype in all rows of a given table. (3) MicroStrategy object in
the schema layer that can represent one or more physical table columns or no
columns.

component
A computing unit that provides a specific piece of the Narrowcast Server
functionality and interacts with other components. Examples are the Narrowcast
Administrator, execution engine, distribution manager, MicroStrategy Logging
Server, Object Repository, and Subscription Book Repository.

compound metric
A metric that cannot have a level placed on the entire metric, although it can be
set separately on each of the components.

conditional formatting
A method used to format specified controls in a document depending on
predefined criteria. It allows certain properties of controls, including sections, to
be controlled by data-driven conditions.

conditional metric
A metric containing filter criteria in its definition.

conditionality
Conditionality of a metric enables you to associate an existing filter object with
the metric so that only data that meets the filter conditions is included in the
calculation.

configuration objects
A MicroStrategy object appearing in the system layer and usable across multiple
projects. Configuration objects include (among others) these object types: users,
database instances, database logins, schedules.

connection string
Stores the information required to connect to a database server. A connection
string usually includes a DSN and the user ID and password required to log in to
the database server. This information varies depending on the particular database
server.

console user
A user who works with the Narrowcast Administrator console, managing
subscriptions, developing services, and administering the system, in contrast to

431 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

an end user. See also: end user.

consolidation
An object that can be placed on a template and is made up of an ordered
collection of elements called consolidation elements. Each element is a grouping
of attribute elements that accommodates inter-row arithmetic operations.
Compare: custom group.

content
The information in services, including all reports, miscellaneous text, and file
attachments that are accessible to the user. Content is dynamic in the sense that
personalization, error handling conditions, and device settings all influence the
overall content output and format of each service.

control
Any item in the document’s Layout area that you can select. This can be a text
field, line, rectangle, image, panel stack, selector, Grid/Graph, or HTML
container. These different kinds of controls are referred to as control types. See
also: Grid/Graph, HTML container, Panel stack, Selector, Text field.

control default
A set of options that can be set for each type of control and each section in a
document. You can set the defaults according to the control that is currently
selected; afterward, its format is applied to any object of the same type that you
create in the document.

custom group
An object that can be placed on a template and is made up of an ordered
collection of elements called custom group elements. Each element contains its
own set of filtering qualifications.

custom SQL
Additional SQL code independently created by the user for execution against the
data warehouse. MicroStrategy provides tools to write custom SQL, including
Freeform SQL and Query Builder.

dashboard
An interactive, visually intuitive display of data. A dashboard can summarize key
business indicators (KPIs) to provide a status check. Users can change how they
view the dashboard's data using interactive features, such as selectors, grouping,
widgets, and visualizations. Users can explore their data via multiple paths, using
text, data filtering, and layers of organization. See also: Visual Insight dashboard,
Dashboard-style document.

dashboard-style document
A visually intuitive display of data that summarizes key business indicators for a
quick status check. A special type of document, dashboard-style documents

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 432

Installation and Configuration Guide

usually provide interactive features that let users change how they view the
dashboard-style document’s data.

Data Explorer
A portion of the interface used to browse through data contained in the
warehouse. Users can navigate through hierarchies of attributes that are defined
by the administrator to find the data they need.

data field
Dynamic text that is populated from a dataset with data that originated in the
data warehouse (or an Intelligence Server cache). A data field is only a reference
to the metric, attribute, consolidation, or custom group on a report. Data fields
are contained in text field controls on a document. See also: Auto text code, Text
field.

data mart
A database, usually smaller than a data warehouse, designed to help managers
make strategic decisions about their business by focusing on a specific subject or
department.

data mart report

A special kind of report that saves its report data in a database rather than
returning those results to the user. Data mart reports either create a new table in
the database to store the report data or append the report data into an existing
table.

data modeling
A method used to define and analyze data requirements needed to support the
business functions of an enterprise. These data requirements are recorded as a
conceptual data model with associated data definitions. Data modeling defines
the relationships between data elements and data structures.

data source
A data source is any file, system, or storage location which stores data that is to
be used in MicroStrategy for query, reporting, and analysis. A data warehouse
can be thought of as one type of data source, which refers more specifically to
using a database as your data source. Other data sources include text files, Excel
files, and MDX cube sources such as SAP BW, Microsoft Analysis Services,
Oracle Essbase, and IBM Cognos TM1.

data source name (DSN)

Provides connectivity to a database through an ODBC driver. A DSN generally
contains host machine name or IP address, instance name, database name,
directory, database driver, User ID, password, and other information. The exact
information included in the DSN varies by DBMS. Once you create a DSN for a
particular database, you can use it in an application to call information from the
database.

433 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

data warehouse
A database, typically very large, containing the historical data of an enterprise.
Used for decision support or business intelligence, it organizes data and allows
coordinated updates and loads.

database connection
Stores all database-specific connection information such as DSN, driver mode
and SQL execution mode as well as connection caching information.

database instance
(1) Database server software running on a particular machine. Though it is
technically possible to have more than one instance running on a machine, there
is usually only one instance per machine. (2) The MicroStrategy object that
represents a logical definition of a data warehouse. It stores all information
necessary for MicroStrategy to access the data warehouse for a particular project.

database login
The login ID and password that MicroStrategy Intelligence Server uses to log in
to a particular database on behalf of a user. See also: login ID.

dataset
A MicroStrategy report used to define the data available on a Report Services
document.

Datasets
(1) A pane in the Document Editor that shows all objects (grouped by datasets)
that can be used in the document. (2) All objects that can be used in the
document as supplied by the datasets. Dataset objects are attributes,
consolidations, custom groups, and metrics.

decile(deciling)
The method by which a group is broken up into ten groups of equal elements.
The first decile consists of the top ten percent; the second, the 11th to 20th
percent; the third, the 21st to 30th percent; and so on. demographics,
demographic data. Data that locates, identifies, and describes a population and its
properties; for example, data describing the age groups of people living in certain
geographical areas or income categories. Other dimensions of demographic data
include race, religion, political preference, spending preferences, and family size.

demographics (demographic data)

Data that locates, identifies, and describes a population and its properties; for
example, data describing the age groups of people living in certain geographical
areas or income categories. Other dimensions of demographic data include race,
religion, political preference, spending preferences, and family size.

derived attribute
An attribute calculated from a mathematical operation on columns in a
warehouse table. For example, Age can be calculated from the expression
[Current Date–Birth Date]. See also: attribute.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 434

Installation and Configuration Guide

derived metric
A metric based on data already available in a report. It is calculated by the
Intelligence Server, not in the database. Use a derived metric to perform
calculations on report data after it has been returned from the database.

description column
Optional columns that contain text descriptions of attribute elements.

device
MicroStrategy object that represents message-receiving technology employed by
end users, such as a mobile phone or tablet. The device object specifies how a
publication should be formatted and transmitted to a specific device type. For
example, an Outlook 98 Device might specify that the first document in the
publication must be plain text and no longer than 128 characters. It might also
specify that the second document could be either plain text or HTML, and if it is
HTML, image references can be embedded. A device includes specifications for
both formatting and transmission. Devices are used in the definition of addresses
to specify what information transmitter will be used to transmit content to those
addresses and how that content should be formatted and packaged. See also:
address, content, information transmitter, administration object.

device ID
Numeric ID value that indicates the delivery method and device that a recipient
prefers. Devices are specified for subscriptions in dynamic subscription sets by
providing the device ID for each recipient. Device IDs are found under the
properties for each device within Narrowcast Administrator. For example, one
subscription might specify Outlook 2000, while another recipient might specify a
mobile device. One subscriber then only receives email content formatted for
Outlook while the other subscriber only receives mobile device content
formatted for this phone.

dimension
An element or factor making up a complete entity or variable (a quantity that
may assume any one of a set of values).

directory server
A directory service provider running on a particular machine. Directory servers
are often part of email servers, and stores user names, addresses, and
authentication information. Unlike the Subscription Book, however, they are
neither intended nor well-suited to store and retrieve subscriptions. Directory
servers usually enable client connections through the lightweight directory
access protocol (LDAP), and are often used for centralized user authentication
across many systems. See also: Subscription Book, Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol (LDAP).

display locale
Controls which object names are shown in Narrowcast Administrator. Since
objects can have multiple names to support end users in more than one
language, one name must be chosen for display in Narrowcast Administrator.
The display locale serves this role. The locale selected for this purpose should be

435 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

the one that the Narrowcast Administrator needs to use most frequently when
defining objects. See also: locale, execution locale, selection locale, system locale,
user locale.

distribution manager (DM)

(1) Delivery Engine object that receives service execution triggers, distributes
service data to the execution engines for processing, designates failover execution
engines, and tracks the status of other system components. If the primary
distribution manager fails, one of the backup distribution managers becomes the
primary and takes over processing where the failed component stopped. (2) Piece
of software or component used to instantiate a distribution manager object. (3)
Machine being used to instantiate the distribution manager object.

distribution set
A schedule and subscription set pair, created during service definition. Specifies
when and to whom Narrowcast Server will send a service. See also: schedule,
subscription set.

document
A display representing data coming from one or more reports, as well as
positioning and formatting information. A Report Services document is used to
format data from multiple reports in a single display of presentation quality.

document (Narrowcast)
A Narrowcast document contains the static information from the document
template and the dynamic content from document elements, and is ready to be
transmitted by Narrowcast Server. Each document has a specific type, such as
HTML, plain text, Excel, or derived from an imported file.

document (Report Services)

A type of data display that shows data usually coming from multiple reports. A
Report Services document formats data from multiple reports in a single display
of presentation quality. A dashboard is a type of Report Services document, often
including interactive components.

document element
Part of a Narrowcast document containing dynamic content that is generated
when that document is executed as part of a service. Consists of at least one
information object, plus error-handling instructions. Might include an XSL
stylesheet selection, depending on the type of information object chosen.

document formatter
Transforms the raw data of the information objects and the structure of the
Narrowcast document templates into a complete, formatted Narrowcast
document. The operations of document formatters include such tasks as XSL
processing and transformation, XML merging, character replacement, and string
padding. Formatting rules might account for device characteristics, locale
definition, and other recipient-specific formatting control information.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 436

Installation and Configuration Guide

document formatting module (DFM)

A piece of software, or a component, that performs the work required for
turning Narrowcast document templates and information objects into
Narrowcast documents. The formatting process can use device characteristics,
locale definition, and other recipient-specific control information.

document template
Provides the structure and layout for a Narrowcast document. For example, an
Excel document template includes the basic workbook structure, any predefined
macros, and static worksheet content.

drill
A method of obtaining supplementary information after a report has been
executed. The new data is retrieved by re-querying the Intelligent Cube or
database at a different attribute or fact level.

drill path (attribute drill path)

In MicroStrategy, a path that determines which attributes are presented to an
interface; typically a project defines drill paths from parent attributes to their
children.

dynamic content
Document content that is dynamically retrieved at service execution time and
that can be personalized for each message recipient. Dynamic content is created
using content information objects. This content changes depending on the
results returned by the information object and can return different results for
different subscribers. For example, a weekly report returns different information
from week to the next, and each subscriber might request different content in
his report. Examples include a MicroStrategy report, a Web query, a SQL query,
or content from an external system. See also: static content.

dynamic subscription set

A subscription object containing at least one piece of subscription information
retrieved from an information object instead of from the Subscription Book
Repository. Useful for changing or alert-driven subscription sets. Some dynamic
subscription sets acquire all their information from a single information object.
Others retrieve only the Subscription ID from the information object while the
rest of the subscription information is acquired from the Subscription Book
Repository. Still others combine both methods. See also: segmentation
information object, Subscription ID, subscription information object,
subscription set.

editor
A dialog used to create and edit MicroStrategy Objects. There is a Filter Editor,
Template Editor, Attribute Editor, Metric Editor, Report Editor, and so on.

437 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

end user
A subscriber, the person receiving messages from Narrowcast Server service, in
contrast to a console user. See also: console user.

entity relationship diagram (ERD)

A diagram that provides a graphical representation of the physical structure of
the data in the source system, which lets you easily recognize tables and columns
and the data stored in those columns.

entry level
The lowest level set of attributes at which a fact is available for analysis.

ETL
Short for extraction, transformation, and loading. (1) The process used to
populate a data warehouse from disparate existing database systems. (2) Third-
party software used to facilitate such a process.

execution engine (EE)

(1) Delivery Engine object that controls the execution of narrowcast messages,
called services. It receives service segments from the distribution manager, then
determines the content and subscriber information with input from other
components, including the Subscription Book Module and information source
modules. (2) A piece of software or component that is used to instantiate an
execution engine object. (3) A machine being used to instantiate an execution
engine object.

execution locale
Determines how content is generated for the users who receive it. When a
document is created, the application designer can specify that the document
should be executed in a specific execution locale. The definition of the locale
then controls how information should be gathered, formatted, packaged and
delivered for this document. For example, an application designer might define a
French and a German locale to gather information in the appropriate languages.
If one of these locales is chosen as the execution locale for a document, all
dynamic content in this document is retrieved using the corresponding language.
See also: locale, display locale, selection locale, system locale, user locale.

expression
Formulas built from functions, attributes, facts, metrics, and consolidations that
can be used to define attribute forms, fact calculations, metrics, or filters.

fact
(1) A measurement value, often numeric and typically aggregatable, stored in a
data warehouse. (2) A schema object representing a column in a data warehouse
table and containing basic or aggregated numbers—usually prices, or sales in
dollars, or inventory quantities in counts. See also: metric.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 438

Installation and Configuration Guide

fact table
A database table containing numeric data that may be aggregated along one or
more dimensions. Fact tables may contain atomic or summarized data. Compare:
base table.

fetch
The amount of report data retrieved from one call to MicroStrategy Web
Services. Fetches are used to control the amount of network traffic between
MicroStrategy Office and MicroStrategy Web Services and the amount of
memory used by MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. When you execute a report
or document into a Microsoft product, the Execution Status dialog box displays
the progress of each fetch. Fetch size is controlled by Microsoft Office product-
specific configuration settings. Maximum fetch size is governed by an
Intelligence Server setting in MicroStrategy Developer.

filter
A MicroStrategy object that specifies the conditions that the data must meet to
be included in the report results. Using a filter on a report narrows the data to
consider only the information that is relevant to answer your business question,
since a report queries the database against all the data stored in the data
warehouse. A filter is composed of at least one qualification, which is the actual
condition that must be met for the data to be included on a report. Multiple
qualifications in a single filter are combined using logical operators. Examples
include "Region = Northeast" or "Revenue > $1 million". A filter is normally
implemented in the SQL WHERE clause.

Flash-enabled document
A Report Services document in which Flash Mode is selected as an available
display mode in the Document Properties dialog box.

flattened
A report display type in which the results of a report are displayed with all
attributes and metrics flattened side-by-side on one axis. Also, any subtotals
within the report are not displayed. It is convenient to execute your report or
HTML document in this display type if you intend to use Excel’s drop-down lists
to filter, hide/show data, and more.

folder
A MicroStrategy object used for grouping and storing in a single place a set of
objects that are similar, such as filters, templates, and reports.

folder list
A portion of the interface that lists all the folders found in the project in a
hierarchical fashion. It helps a user to visualize and browse through a
MicroStrategy project.

form
One of several columns that are different representations of the same thing, as
ID, Name, Long Description, Abbreviation.

439 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

function plug-in
Allows user-defined functions to be used by the MicroStrategy Analytical Engine.

governing parameters
Designed to keep the execution profile of a system within acceptable limits.
Protects the system from overconsumption of resources such as memory, disk
space, network capacity, and CPU cycles.

graph
A graphical image display of data. Sometimes referred to as a chart. See also
report.

graph analytic
An analytic showing data as points, lines, or bars, arranged according to axes
based on the chosen metrics. Although not all analytics can be displayed in every
graph type available, many analytics can be viewed in several ways. Choices for
graph display include bars, lines, area graphs, and three-dimensional graphs.

graph view
Report viewing mode that displays results as a graphical chart.

grid
A spreadsheet-style two-dimensional display of data. See also report.

grid analytic
An analytic consisting of rows and columns. Each row or column has a heading,
and each heading represents a prompt from the analytic. Grid analytics can be
modified easily, by drilling, moving columns, converting columns to rows,
sorting, and using page-by to display subsets of the analytic data as separate
pages.

grid view
Report viewing mode that displays result data in a tabular format.

Grid/Graph
A control placed in a document that displays information in the same way a
MicroStrategy report does.

grouping
A way to create a hierarchical structure for a document.

hierarchy
A set of attributes defining a meaningful path for element browsing or drilling.
The order of the attributes is typically—though not always—defined such that a
higher attribute has a one-to-many relationship with its child attributes.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 440

Installation and Configuration Guide

hint
A comment that passes instructions to a database optimizer about choosing an
execution plan for a given SQL statement. In MicroStrategy, a hint can be
defined in VLDB properties to appear within a MicroStrategy-issued SQL
statement.

History List
A folder where users can retrieve the results of previously executed or scheduled
reports and documents.

HTML container
A control that either displays real-time information from the web or displays
formatted HTML.

HTML document
(1) A compound report displaying multiple grids and graphs. (2) The
MicroStrategy object that supports such a report.

ID column
A column that contains attribute element identification codes. All attributes must
have an ID column.

imported file
A file imported from outside of Narrowcast Server and stored in its original
format. For example, a text file contains only plain text and an HTML file
contains only HTML. Storing information in the file format preserves the
integrity of the original data since files cannot be modified with Narrowcast
Server. Files cannot be directly included in publications; they must first be
associated with imported documents, which serve as containers to allow them to
be attached to publications. Imported files can also be used as stylesheets or
templates for documents.

incremental fetch
A feature that returns a large set of information, such as subscriptions, to the
console in numerous small pieces as those pieces are needed. This ensures that
network traffic and client processing is kept to a minimum.

information delivery platform

Server that, whenever certain conditions are in effect, acquires information from
a variety of sources, personalizes that information, formats it, and transmits it
through a variety of technologies.

information object
Application object containing a set of instructions that specify how to get data
from a particular type of information source. Defined by using an information
source module, it is set up when a service is built and executed when the service
that uses it is run. Plays one of three roles: content, subscription, or

441 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

segmentation. See also: information object role, information object type,

information source,information source module (ISM).

information object role

Indicates how the information supplied by the information object is used by
Narrowcast Server. Three roles are available: Content ( Supplies information for
the document), Subscription ( Provides a list of subscribers and related
subscription information for dynamic subscription sets), Segment (Specifies the
first and last subscriptions for each segment of the subscription set). See also:
information object.

information object type

Indicates the format of the data returned by the information object and how
Narrowcast Server can use this data. Three types are available: Text (Returns a
plaintext string that is inserted directly into a document's content), XML
(Returns an XML string that must be combined with an XSL stylesheet to
produce content appropriate for each type of document), Image (Returns an
image in JPG format that is inserted directly into the document's content). See
also: information object.

information source
Contains information about how to connect to a specific source of content using
an information source module. The Delivery Engine requests and acquires
information from information sources. An information source uses
personalization objects for personalization. See also: information source module
(ISM), personalization object.

information source module (ISM)

An executable process that receives requests for information and returns that
information as well-defined data. It defines and processes information objects.
One ISM can be used to load various information sources. For example, an ISM
can be set up to access MicroStrategy Developer projects and can be used for any
MicroStrategy Developer projects that you want to use as an information source.
See also: information object, information source.

information transmission module (ITM)

An executable process or component designed to support a particular delivery
capability. For example, MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server provides the email
(SMTP) Module, which is used for the email (SMTP) Information Transmitter.
The ITM indicates what documents and document types it supports, as well as
the arrangement of these documents. Also, the ITM provides a user interface for
defining device characteristics. Those characteristics are stored in the Object
Repository and retrieved by the information transmission module to control
packaging and delivery. See also: device, document (Narrowcast), information
transmitter, publication.

information transmitter
Administration object that delivers formatted content, in the form of
publications, to end user devices. An information transmitter might serve the
purpose of sending email via SMTP or mobile device messages using an SMS
gateway. In general, an information transmitter supports one type of

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 442

Installation and Configuration Guide

transmission technology, such as SMTP, FTP, HTTP, or ODBC, but this is not a
requirement. Information transmitters depend on information transmission
modules. See also: device, document (Narrowcast), information transmission
module (ITM), publication.

installation log file

The MicroStrategy setup program generates a log file in text format. This log file
contains records of all actions performed by the setup program and by other
executable files related to installation.

Intelligent Cube
A copy of the report data saved in memory and used for manipulation of the view
definition. This division allows multiple reports with different views to share a
common data definition.

Java database connectivity

A Java API that enables Java programs to execute SQL statements. This allows
Java programs to interact with any SQL-compliant database. Since nearly all
relational database management systems (DBMSs) support SQL, and because
Java itself runs on most platforms, JDBC makes it possible to write a single
database application that can run on different platforms and interact with
different DBMSs. JDBC is similar to ODBC, but is designed specifically for Java
programs, whereas ODBC is language-independent.

join
A SQL operation that combines data from multiple tables into a single result
table.

KPI (key performance indicator)

An indicator gauging how well a company progresses in numerous areas such as
finance, customer service, and product availability and distribution.

Layout area
The middle panel of the Document Editor in which you place data or other
controls to determine the appearance of the document when it is viewed as a
PDF.

level
(1) In a data warehouse, facts are said to be stored at a particular level defined by
the attribute IDs present in the fact table. For example, if a fact table has a Date
column, an Item_ID column, and a fact column, that fact is stored at the
Date/Item level. (2) With regard to metric calculation, the level is the level of
calculation for the metric.

443 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)

An open standard that client computers use to communicate with directory
service providers. Client machines connect to a particular logical directory on a
particular physical directory server. See also: directory server.

Lightweight Directory Interchange Format (LDIF)

File format that is exported from LDAP directory services.

link
A connection from a document to another document or a report. A link lets an
analyst execute another document or report (the target) from a document (the
source), and to pass parameters to answer any prompts that are in the target.

load balancing
A strategy aimed at achieving even distribution of MicroStrategy Web Universal
user sessions across MicroStrategy Intelligence Servers. MicroStrategy achieves
four-tier load balancing by incorporating load balancers into MicroStrategy Web
Universal.

locale
Specifies what regional characteristics to apply to data and formatting, including
number format, date format, time format, and character sets. Your system might
support multiple locales. See also: display locale, execution locale, selection
locale, system locale, user locale.

Locale ID
Numeric ID value used to indicate the locale that a recipient prefers. Locales are
specified for subscriptions in dynamic subscription sets by providing the Locale
ID. Locale IDs are found under the properties for each locale within Narrowcast
Administrator. For example, one subscription might specify French, while
another recipient might specify German. One subscriber then only receives
French content while the other subscriber only receives German content.

logical data model

A graphical representation of data that is arranged logically for the general user,
as opposed to the physical data model or warehouse schema, which arranges
data for efficient database use.

login ID
Login identifier, typically supplied with a password.

lookup table
A database table used to uniquely identify attribute elements. They typically
consist of descriptions of dimensions. Lookup tables are usually joined to fact
tables to group the numeric facts in the fact table by dimensional attributes in
the lookup tables.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 444

Installation and Configuration Guide

managed object
A schema object unrelated to the project schema, which is created by the system
and stored in a separate system folder. Managed objects are used to map data to
attributes, metrics, hierarchies and other schema objects for Freeform SQL,
Query Builder, and MDX cube reports.

manual fetch
A type of incremental report result fetching in which you are asked to confirm
each fetch. For example, when you execute a report, you are prompted to
confirm that each fetch, or section of report results, is displayed.

many-to-many relationship
An attribute relationship in which multiple elements of a parent attribute can
relate to multiple elements of a child attribute, and vice versa.

many-to-one relationship
An attribute relationship in which (1) multiple elements of a parent attribute
relate to only one element of a child attribute, and (2) every element of the child
attribute can relate to multiple elements of the parent.

MDX cube
An MDX cube is a collection or set of data retrieved from an MDX cube source,
which is imported into MicroStrategy and mapped to various objects to allow
query, reporting, and analysis on the data.

MDX cube report

The central focus for MicroStrategy users to query, analyze, and visually present
data from MDX cube sources in a manner that answers and evaluates their
business questions. MDX cube reports provide the same data display and analysis
functionality as standard MicroStrategy reports, but rather than reporting on
data from a relational data warehouse, MDX cube reports report on data from
MDX cube sources.

MDX cube source

When integrated with MicroStrategy, the third-party tools SAP BW, Microsoft
Analysis Services, Oracle Essbase, and IBM Cognos TM1 are referred to as MDX
cube sources. You can import and map data from these different MDX cube
sources in MicroStrategy to query, report on, and analyze data with
MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy can integrate with MDX cube source data as well
as access data from a relational database concurrently.

messaging application program interface (MAPI)

Allows Windows applications to send email messages through external email
programs. Designed primarily to connect client applications such as Microsoft
Outlook to mail servers such as Microsoft Exchange Server. Not intended for
server-to-server communications.

445 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

metadata
A repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data warehouse
with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of the business
view, terms, and needs to the underlying database structure. Metadata can reside
on the same server as the data warehouse or on a different database server. It
can even be held in a different RDBMS.

metadata (or metadata repository)

A repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data warehouse
with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of the business
view, terms, and needs to the underlying database structure. Metadata can reside
on the same server as the data warehouse or on a different database server. It
can even be held in a different RDBMS.

metric
(1) A business calculation defined by an expression built with functions, facts,
attributes, or other metrics. For example: Sum(dollar_sales) or [Sales] - [Cost].
(2) The MicroStrategy object that contains the metric definition. It represents a
business measure or key performance indicator. See also: fact.

MicroStrategy Analytics Module

A MicroStrategy project with prepackaged metadata, including best practices
reports, scorecards, and dashboards, key performance indicators, attributes,
business metrics, filters, and custom groups; default physical and logical data
models to allow the module to work with your physical schemas and data model
or with the module’s packaged data warehouse schema; and a reference guide for
the Analysis Module’s data model, the analysis area, metadata object definitions,
data dictionary, and individual report use scenarios.

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

Core of the MicroStrategy architecture, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
manages and organizes users, projects, and database connections; coordinates,
prioritizes, and executes all user requests; and allocates the resources necessary
to complete them. It tracks schedules, manages security, and provides the ability
to monitor and analyze the daily activity of the entire decision support
environment.

MicroStrategy Logging Client

Service that receives logging messages from Narrowcast Server components and
relays them to the MicroStrategy Logging Server. Logging messages include
segment status information, statistics information, and error event notification.
See also: MicroStrategy Logging Server.

MicroStrategy Logging Server

Server that collects logging messages from MicroStrategy Logging Clients and
distributes them to consumers. Logging messages include segment status
information, statistics information, and error event notification. See also:
MicroStrategy Logging Client.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 446

Installation and Configuration Guide

multidimensional analysis
A form of analysis of the data in a data warehouse that includes many
relationships, each representing a dimension. For example, a retail analysis may
seek to understand the relationships among sales by region, by quarter, by
demographic distribution (income, education level, gender), and by product.
Multidimensional analysis provides results for these complex relationships.

multipart MIME
Part of the MIME specification, which includes more than one body part in a
body section within a MIME message. This is typically used to enable the
inclusion of separate text and HTML message bodies, embedded images, and
other body parts within an email message. See also: multipurpose Internet mail
extensions (MIME).

multipurpose Internet mail extensions (MIME)

The specification as defined by RFC 1521 (maintained by the Internet
Engineering Task Force at http://www.ietf.org/) for encoding message contents,
attached files, embedded images, and other embedded files into a single (typically
7-bit) data string. Many modern email clients support MIME. Because the
MIME specification includes encoding of message contents, it allows for
messages that use character sets other than US-ASCII. See also: multipart
MIME.

Narrowcast Administrator account

An object that allows a user to log in to MicroStrategy Narrowcast Administrator.
It is created within Narrowcast Administrator, and its definition is stored in the
Object Repository of a system. Each Narrowcast Administrator account is based
on a specific Windows account. When a new Narrowcast Server system is
created, two Narrowcast Administrator accounts are automatically added to it,
one of which is the local Administrator Windows account for the machine that
was used to create the system. Narrowcast Administrator accounts can have
various privileges, which control what Narrowcast Administrator users can do.
These privileges include: Service design, Application administration, System
administration, Subscription administration.

Narrowcast Server system

A collection of machines, software components, and objects that collectively
provide the ability to process and deliver narrowcast messages to recipients. The
objects that make up a system are divided into two categories, administration
objects and application objects. See also: administration object, application
object, clustering, component.

object
Conceptually, an object is the highest grouping level of information about one
concept, used by the user to achieve the goal of specified data analysis. More

447 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

concretely, an object is any item that can be selected and manipulated, including
folders, reports, facts, metrics, and so on.

object template
A MicroStrategy object that allows you to start with a predefined structure when
creating a new object. You can use object templates for many MicroStrategy
objects, including metrics, documents, reports, and report templates.

ODBC (open database connectivity)

An open standard with which client computers can communicate with relational
database servers. Client machines make a connection to a particular logical
database, on a particular physical database server, using a particular ODBC
driver.

ODBC driver
Software interface to an ODBC service provider. See also: open database
connectivity (ODBC).

ODBC driver manager

Coordinates communication between a client application and database server.
The client application tells the driver manager that it needs to connect using a
particular connection string. The DSN found in this connection string provides
the driver manager with the type of database server to which the application
needs access. From this information, the driver manager decides what driver to
use and initiates the communication.

one-to-many relationship
An attribute relationship in which every element of a parent attribute can relate
to multiple elements of a child attribute, while every element of the child
attribute relates to only one element of the parent. The one-to-many attribute
relationship is the most common in data models.

one-to-one relationship
An attribute relationship in which every element of the parent attribute relates to
exactly one element of the child attribute, and vice versa.

online analytical processing

In general, a system with analytical processing that involves activities such as
manipulating transaction records to calculate sales trends, growth patterns,
percent to total contributions, trend reporting, and profit analysis.

operational data store

A database that typically stores transactional data generated by and used in the
conducting of business operations. The data can be used as a trigger condition or
as content.

outline mode
Report viewing mode that creates indented, collapsible groupings of related
elements to make reports neater and easier to read.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 448

Installation and Configuration Guide

page
An amount of data that is analogous to a page in a page-by report. Each page of a
page-by report represents one combination of elements from each attribute on
the page-by axis. For example, one page may contain data related to 2006 as well
as the Southeast region. A report with no attributes on the page-by axis is
considered to have one page. When you execute a report or document into a
Microsoft product, the Execution Status dialog box displays the progress of each
page.

page-by
Segmenting data in a grid report by placing available attributes, consolidations,
and metrics on a third axis called the Page axis. Since a grid is two-dimensional,
only a slice of the cube can be seen at any one time. The slice is characterized by
the choice of elements on the Page axis. By varying the selection of elements, the
user can page through the cube.

panel
A way of grouping data in a document so that users can navigate subsets of data
as if the subsets were pages in a smaller document. Each “page”, or layer of data,
is a panel; a group of panels is called a panel stack.

panel stack
The holder for a collection of panels, or layers of data, in a document. A user can
navigate or flip through the panels in a panel stack; only one panel is displayed at
a time.

parent attribute
The higher-level attribute in an attribute relationship with one or more children.
See also: child attribute or relationship.

partition
A relational database table broken down into smaller component tables. This can
be done at the database level or at the application level. See the MicroStrategy
System Administration Guide for more information.

partition mapping
The division of large logical tables into smaller physical tables based on a
definable data level, such as month or department. Partitions minimize the
number of tables and records within a table that must be read to satisfy queries
issued against the warehouse. By distributing usage across multiple tables,
partitions improve the speed and efficiency of database queries.

partition mapping table

A warehouse table that contains information used to identify the partitioned base
tables as part of a logical whole. (A partitioned base table is a warehouse table
that contains one part of a larger set of data. Partition tables are usually divided
along logical lines, such as time or geography.) Also referred to as a PMT.

449 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

persistence
A default behavior in MicroStrategy Office ensuring that every report and
document you run in an Excel workbook, PowerPoint presentation, or Word
document retains a link to MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. This ensures that
you and other users can refresh the reports and documents to retrieve the latest
data from the data warehouse or other data sources. Every report or document
executed also contains properties that are persisted; these properties determine
how the report or document is displayed and can be modified by users once it is
refreshed.

personalization
The process that allows each subscriber to receive data that has been filtered and
formatted specifically for him. Narrowcast Server uses locale, subscription, and
personalization objects to personalize services. See also: locale, personalization
object, subscription.

personalization object
An object handled by information sources for personalization. The three types
are: authentication, preference and security. The combination of the
authentication, preference, and security objects control the data that is returned
by an information object. See also:authentication object, information object,
information source, preference object, question object, security object.

personalization set
A combination of locale, authentication, security, and preference objects to
achieve personalized information, or information filtered and formatted
specifically for a subscriber.

personalized page execution

In the context of the MicroStrategy Information Source Module, each page of a
report is used as a result for one or more subscribers. See also: page-by,
personalization set.

personalized report execution

In the context of the Information Source Module, each result is derived from the
separate execution of a report. Answers to prompts and MicroStrategy users both
impact personalization in this execution mode. See also: personalization set.

physical address
The address location used to locate recipients and deliver messages. For email
delivery, this is a standard SMTP address in the form [email protected]. No
physical address is required for delivery to the Subscription Portal. The physical
address required by other information transmitters depends on the individual
information transmitter.

physical warehouse schema

A detailed graphic representation of your business data as it is stored in the data
warehouse. It organizes the logical data model in a method that make sense from
a database perspective.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 450

Installation and Configuration Guide

PIN
The personal identification number required by some delivery methods. A PIN is
not used for email, mobile device, or Subscription Portal delivery. The use of a
PIN by other information transmitters depends on the individual information
transmitter.

plug-in
An additional processing component integrated with MicroStrategy products.
For example, advanced statistical and financial functions can be added as
additional processing components.

plugin
An application that can easily be installed and executed by the MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server in one of several identical interfaces. For example, advanced
statistical and financial functions can be added as additional processing
components.

port number
The port number is how a server process identifies itself on the machine on
which it is running. For example, when the Intelligence Server machine receives
a network call from a client (Developer, Web Universal, Narrowcast Server,
Command Manager, and so on), it knows to forward those calls to the
Intelligence Server port number that is specified in the call.

portability
The ability of an analytical application to be integrated into an existing data
warehouse. To port the Analysis Module, you “map” the module to the physical
schema of an existing data warehouse.

portal
A site that offers a centralized access point for finding and managing
information via a variety of different services. It offers a broad array of resources
and services, such as email, discussion forums, search engines, and other online
services. A portal is accessible through the use of a web browser. See also:
Subscription Portal.

preference object
Type of personalization object that uses the answers to question objects to
specify the information that the user wants. At run-time, the preference object is
applied to information objects to personalize them. Preferences are usually
controlled by the user, but can be set by the subscription administrator. For an
Information Source, preference objects are prompt answers. See also:
personalization object, question object.

prefix
A prefix is stored in the project metadata associated with a table or tables and is
used by the Engine to generate SQL. Also, the Catalog Server uses it to obtain
table sample values and row counts. In most cases, it should match the name
space field since it is used to qualify on a specific table belonging to a certain

451 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

owner or name space. Prefixes can be defined and modified from the Warehouse
Catalog interface.

preview fetch
A type of incremental report result fetching in which you can see a preview of
the report data as it runs. You specify how many rows of the report you want to
preview at a time, and fetching automatically stops after one fetch.

primary key
In a relational database, the set of columns required to uniquely identify a record
in a table.

privilege
Assigned to users, a privilege defines the functionality available to a user, for
example, which objects a given user can create and which applications and
editors he can use.

process
An executing application comprising one or more threads. Processes use
temporary private address spaces and control operating system resources such as
files, dynamic memory allocations, pipes, and synchronization objects.

production metadata
The repository you create during the configuration portion of the installation
process, and which works with your data warehouse and serves as your working
metadata repository.

productivity analysis
A process that measures company productivity and identifies ways to increase it.

project
(1) The highest-level intersection of a data warehouse, metadata repository, and
user community, containing reports, filters, metrics, and functions. (2) An object
containing the definition of a project, as defined in [1]. The project object is
specified when requesting the establishment of a session.

project designer
The user category of one who creates projects and all of the schema objects
(facts, attributes, hierarchies) for a project. A project designer is thoroughly
familiar with the data model and schema object editors.

project source
Defines a connection to the metadata database and is used by various
MicroStrategy components to access projects. A direct project source is a two-
tier connection directly to a metadata repository. A server project source is a
three-tier connection to a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. One project source
can contain many projects and the administration tools found at the project
source level are used to monitor and administer all projects in the project source.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 452

Installation and Configuration Guide

prompt
MicroStrategy object in the report definition that is incomplete by design. The
user is asked during the resolution phase of report execution to provide an
answer that completes the information. A typical example with a filter is
choosing a specific attribute on which to qualify.

Property List
The list of settings used to specify the appearance or any other characteristic of a
control on a document.

publication
An ordered collection of documents that completely defines the content of a
service for a specific set of devices. Each publication is used for exactly one locale
and one information transmission module. A publication specifies: An
information transmitter, At least one device or A set of documents. See also:
device, document (Narrowcast), information transmitter.

qualification
The actual condition that must be met for data to be included on a report.
Examples include “Region = Northeast” or “Revenue &gt; $1 million”.
Qualifications are used in filters and custom groups. You can create multiple
qualifications for a single filter or custom group, and then set how to combine
the qualifications using the logical operators AND, AND NOT, OR, and OR NOT.

query
A request for data from a database or data warehouse. A report is a database
query.

Query Engine
The MicroStrategy component responsible for submitting SQL code to the
database.

question object
Type of personalization object that specifies the questions to ask the user to
determine the user’s preferences. Answers are used as preference objects. For a
MicroStrategy Information Source, a question object is defined by choosing a
report, and the questions to be asked depend on the definition of that report. In
personalized page execution mode, the user is asked what page to display, using
the page-by functionality. In personalized report execution mode, the questions
include all prompt objects defined on the selected report except the security
object prompt. See also: page-by, personalization object, preference object.

Quick Grid
A report display type in MicroStrategy Office in which the report is run as a CSV
and bulk-loaded into Excel in one fetch. Although this results in a fast report
execution time, formatting from the report definition, such as fonts, colors, and
thresholds is not applied. You can apply formatting to Quick Grids using
Microsoft Excel’s AutoFormats.

453 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

ranking
A type of OLAP function that returns the rank of a value in a group of values.
Rows with equal values with respect to the ordering are assigned the same rank.

relate table
A table containing the ID columns of two or more attributes, thus defining
associations between them.

relationship
An association specifying the nature of the connection between one attribute
(the parent) and one or more other attributes (the children). See also: child
attribute or parent attribute.

report
The central focus of any decision support investigation, a report allows users to
query for data, analyze that data, and then present it in a visually pleasing
manner.

report designer
The user category of one who creates all application objects such as grid and
graph reports, filters, templates, documents, consolidations, and custom groups.
The report designer understands all of the business intelligence capabilities of the
system.

report resolution
The process of filling placeholders such as prompts with information determined
at run time.

report template
A MicroStrategy object that allows you to define the layout of general categories
of information in a report. In a report template, you specify the information that
you want to retrieve from your data source, and the way that you want the data
to be displayed in Grid view. A report template does not include filter
information. Report templates are often referred to as just as templates.

retention(employee)
The process of maintaining or securing employee loyalty to minimize loss of key
talent.

role
A feature of the security subsystem that defines which objects a given user can
create and which operations he can perform. The different Narrowcast Server
roles are: System administrator (who manages the entire system), Application
administrator (who administers application objects only), Application designer
(who develops application objects only and cannot modify objects owned by
other users), Subscription administrator (who manages the Subscription Book),
Portal administrator (who configures and manages Subscription Portals).

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 454

Installation and Configuration Guide

schedule
Sets the time or frequency that a service is executed. A schedule represents a
recurrence pattern, not a fixed date. It is defined relative to time zones to
account for daylight savings, date boundaries, and other time zone-specific
issues. To allow subscribers globally to receive services at specific local times, a
service can contain more than one schedule.

schema
(1) The set of tables in a data warehouse associated with a logical data model. The
attribute and fact columns in those tables are considered part of the schema
itself. (2) The layout or structure of a database system. In relational databases,
the schema defines the tables, the fields in each table, and the relationships
between fields and tables.

schema object
MicroStrategy object created, usually by a project designer, that relates the
information in the logical data model and physical warehouse schema to the
MicroStrategy environment. These objects are developed in MicroStrategy
Architect, which can be accessed from MicroStrategy Developer. Schema objects
directly reflect the warehouse structure and include attributes, facts, functions,
hierarchies, operators, partition mappings, tables, and transformations.

scorecard
A type of tally sheet displaying a company's performance using key performance
indicators (KPIs) that gauge how well a company progresses in areas such as
finance, customer service, and product availability and distribution. See also KPI
(key performance indicator).

security filter
A qualification associated with a user that is applied to all queries executed by
that user.

security object
Type of personalization object that specifies what information the user should
have access to. Security filtering criteria applied to an information source during
subscriber interaction. For a MicroStrategy Information Source, it is a response
to a prompt in the form of a single attribute element. Each user can have one
security object per information source. See also: personalization object, security
object prompt.

security object prompt

Specifies which attribute in the project corresponds to a user or subscriber. The
answer to this prompt is used as a security object in MicroStrategy. See also:
prompt, security object.

security role
In a MicroStrategy security model, the set of privileges that a user can have.

455 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

segment
A group of subscriptions within a subscription set. Subscription sets are divided
into multiple pieces, or segments, so that the work required to execute a service
for all subscriptions can be distributed across multiple systems to allow parallel
work processing. The size of the segment is part of the service definition and
controls the work packages that are sent to each execution engine.

segmentation
The task of dividing the subscriptions within a subscription set into equal-sized
groups or segments. Segmentation ensures that all subscription information
objects and content information objects return only information for
subscriptions in the current segment. Subscription sets are always segmented
using the subscription ID, and the boundaries of segments are specified as
subscription ID values. For the MicroStrategy Information Source, segmentation
can be performed automatically by Narrowcast Server, or the application
designer can control how the subscription set is segmented and how subscription
information objects and content information objects constrain the information
they return.

segmentation information object

An information object that returns the segment boundary values for a
subscription set. Boundary values determine the size of the segment and are
always given in the form of subscription ID values corresponding to the first
subscription ID in each segment. Segment information objects are used only for
dynamic subscription sets.

segmentation prompt
A prompt that controls the information returned in a report used as a content
information object or subscription information object. Segmentation can be
performed automatically by Narrowcast Server, or prompts can be added to
content information objects and subscription information objects manually. This
process limits the number of subscriptions and content pages returned to only
provide information for subscriptions in the current segment.

selection locale
Determines which users should receive which content. When a user is created,
the subscription administrator (using Narrowcast Administrator) or the user
(using the Subscription Portal) selects a locale for which the user will receive
content. When a publication is created, the application designer chooses a
selection locale that determines which users receive the content in a publication.
If a user chooses Locale A, the application designer must choose Locale A as the
selection locale for a publication for the user to receive this publication. See also:
locale, display locale, execution locale, system locale, user locale.

selector
A type of control in a document that allows a user to: Flip through the panels in
a panel stack, to see different predefined layers of data, or “pages”, in the same
document. Display different attribute elements or metrics in a Grid/Graph.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 456

Installation and Configuration Guide

SequeLink
Third-party (non-MicroStrategy) software that configures and manages data
access across multiple data stores, operating systems, and deployment options.

SequeLink machine
The machine where SequeLink is installed. This machine can be independent
from the rest of the Subscription Portal.

SequeLink services
SequeLink creates two NT services: SLAgent 54, which is the Administrator, and
SLSocket54, which is the Server.

server definition
A MicroStrategy object stored in the metadata containing information about the
configuration of an Intelligence Server.

server instance
The combination of an Intelligence Server running with a particular server
definition.

service
An object that provides all the information needed for the Delivery Engine to
correctly generate messages. That information includes the delivery conditions,
content, personalization rules, and subscriptions for sending messages for a
particular purpose. For example, one service delivers a daily message containing a
stock portfolio update, while another delivers alerts to mobile devices when the
value of a stock changes significantly. A service comprises at least one schedule-
subscription pair and a set of publications.

service designer
Narrowcast Administrator user role. This role is for a Narrowcast Administrator
console user who develops and tests services, which include documents,
publications, schedules, and subscription sets. Configures and manages
Subscription Portals that allow end users to subscribe to a variety of Narrowcast
services via the web. Configures data sources, content, and portal layout.
Publishes services and device types, and selects default devices for Subscription
Portals. Specifies information source properties and default site preferences.
Installs, configures, and administers the development environment. Administers
subscribers and subscriptions for development and testing purposes. See also:
application administrator.

service provider interface (SPI)

The specification for a set of related functions that can be implemented by a
software developer to augment or enhance the capabilities of a software product
or platform. This allows a developer to enable his software to be called by an
existing piece of software. See also: application program interface (API), plug-in.

service queue
In Narrowcast Administrator, a visual display of upcoming services to be
processed.

457 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

simple metric
A type of metric that can stand alone or be used as a building block for
compound metrics. Simple metrics always contain at least one aggregate
function, such as sum or average, applied to a fact, attribute, or another metric.
The entire metric can only contain one level.

slice
One page of content in a multi-page report. Narrowcast Server divides a single
multi-page report into multiple individual pages of content that are used as
personalized content for individual subscriptions. slicing attribute. A slicing
attribute is the attribute used to divide multi-page reports executed using
personalized page execution mode into multiple individual pages of content. The
first attribute on the page axis is used as the slicing attribute.

smart fetch
A type of report result fetching in which fetching continues until completion or
you cancel the operation. This is the default fetch method used in MicroStrategy
Office.

smart tag alias

A smart tag name that you can specify for a report or project. When Microsoft
Office recognizes this name, the MicroStrategy Office Smart Tag actions menu is
displayed. This means that when the name you specify is typed, it becomes a
smart tag that provides several options to execute the report.

Software Development Kit

A distribution package of application program development software and the
instructions for its use. Allows customization of an application.

sort
Arranging data according to some characteristic of the data itself (alphabetical
descending, numeric ascending, and so forth). See also: drill, page-by, subtotal.

sort by
The order of the return values of an expression in relation to the order of the
value or metadata object given. A sort by includes whether to sort in ascending
or descending order, and which metadata object to sort by. Sort by may also be
performed on the value of the subexpression, which is the input argument. To
sort by a value or metadata object in an expression, you must set the SortBy
parameter.

SQL (Structured Query Language)

The standardized query language established in 1986 by the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) and used to request information from tables in a
relational database and to manipulate the tables' structure and data.

SQL Engine
The MicroStrategy Intelligence Server component that in report execution
converts report requests into SQL to be used for a database query.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 458

Installation and Configuration Guide

static content
Document content that is contained directly in the document and does not
change from one service execution to the next. It cannot be personalized for
different subscribers. Examples include an HTML template, a static URL, and so
on. Compare with: dynamic content.

Structured Query Language (SQL)

A relational database language used to read data from tables in a relational
database and to manipulate their structure and their data.

subscriber
A person who receives content from at least one service. Each individual who
receives messages from Narrowcast Server has a login that provides password-
controlled access to subscription and user preference information for the
individual and his addresses. Subscribing at least one of these addresses to a
particular service allows the individual to receive messages.

subscription
An enrollment in a service; a subscription is composed of one user and one
address. subscription administrator Narrowcast Administrator user role.This role
is designed for a console user who manages the Subscription Book, including
users, addresses, and subscription sets. Also installs, configures, and administers
the Subscription Book Module.

Subscription Book
Contains all users, addresses, and subscription sets. Stored in the Subscription
Book Repository. See also: subscription set.

Subscription Book Module

A software component that provides the ability to create, edit, and use the
objects within a Subscription Book. Those objects include users, addresses, and
subscriptions. See also: Subscription Book Repository.

Subscription Book Repository

Stores all subscription information, including addresses and user information.

Subscription ID
The ID value used by Narrowcast Server to segment subscription sets. It is also
called Segmentation ID. This value is required for dynamic subscription sets.

subscription information
All information related to an individual subscription. This information allows
Narrowcast Server to deliver services to individual recipients in the desired
manner.

subscription information object

Retrieves subscription information for a given segment. See also: dynamic
subscription set, information object, segmentation, subscription information.

459 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

Subscription Portal
A feature of Narrowcast Server that allows end users to subscribe to Narrowcast
Server services offered through a web-based portal. This enables end users to
experience personalized and proactive interactions, based on user-defined
permissions and preferences. See also: portal.

subscription set
A collection of addresses that can be subscribed to a service. Subscription sets are
either static or dynamic. A static subscription set is an application object that
retrieves subscription information from the Subscription Book Repository.
Useful when the set of end user addresses that should receive a service does not
change. A dynamic subscription set is an application object containing at least
one piece of subscription information retrieved from an information object
instead of from the Subscription Book Repository. Useful for changing or alert-
driven subscription sets. Dynamic subscription sets can acquire some or all of
their information from the information object. The rest of the subscription
information is acquired from the Subscription Book Repository. See also:
subscription set object.

Subscription Set ID
A numeric value used to identify each subscription set.

subscription set object

Application object that defines how to retrieve or modify a subscription set. Does
not contain the subscription set, but provides instructions for how a Subscription
Book Module should retrieve it. See also: Subscription Book Module,
subscription set.

subtotal
A totaling operation performed for a portion of a result set. See also: drill and
page-by.

summary metric
A shortcut to a subtotal, or a subtotal metric allowing explicit aggregation in
documents. A summary metric allows you to select the function to use to
calculate the subtotal.

system administrator
Narrowcast Administrator user role. This role is designed for a console user who
performs the following tasks: Installs and configures the information delivery
platform, Migrates system objects and application objects, Monitors, analyzes,
and tunes the system to ensure the smooth and balanced operation of the
decision support or business intelligence environment, Performs troubleshooting
and error recovery.

system developer
Narrowcast Administrator user role. This role is designed for a Narrowcast
Server user who employs the SDK and embeds Narrowcast Server technology
into another product or application.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 460

Installation and Configuration Guide

system locale
A language in which all objects are guaranteed to have a name. Since objects can
have names in several locales (languages), it is necessary to have one locale
where a name always exists for all objects. The system locale serves this role,
because the system locale cannot be deleted. See also: locale, display locale,
execution locale, selection locale, user locale, text container See: document
(Narrowcast).

table
The primary physical component of a data warehouse, logically consisting of
columns of data of varying types.

template
A MicroStrategy object that serves as a base on which you can build other objects
of the same type. You can create a template for almost any kind of MicroStrategy
object, such as filters or reports. Also see: Object template and Report template.

text field
A type of control in a document that displays text in the document. These
different types of text content are: Static text, which does not change and serves
as a label. Dynamic text, which is populated by the document or dataset. There
are two types of dynamic text: Data field, which is populated from a dataset with
data that originated in the data warehouse (or an Intelligence Server cache). A
data field is only a reference to an object on a report. Auto text code, which is
populated by the document or dataset, consisting of their settings rather than
data from the data warehouse. A combination of any or all of the above types in
one text field. See also: Data field, Auto text code.

threshold
Used to create conditional formatting for metric values. For example, a threshold
triggers the report that, if dollar sales is greater than $200, format that cell to
have a blue background with bold type.

transformation
A schema object that encapsulates a business rule used to compare results of
different time periods. Transformations are used in the definition of a metric to
alter the behavior of that metric.

Unique Message Identifier

An ID value that is unique for all messages delivered by any Narrowcast Server
system. It can be used for message tracking purposes to determine which
recipients have received and opened messages. This is typically done by creating
a URL containing this ID value that refers to a zero-size image on a Web server
that is configured to track references to this URL.

461 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

user hierarchy
Named sets of attributes and their relationships, arranged in specific sequences
for a logical business organization. They are user-defined and do not need to
follow the logical model.

user ID
A numeric value used to identify individual users.

user information
The collection of information, including first name, last name, address, zip code,
and other personal information, that changes from one subscriber to the next.

user locale
Defines which content the user receives. This is set up by either the subscription
administrator via Narrowcast Administrator or by the user via Subscription
Portal. The user locale must match the selection locale. See also:locale, display
locale, selection locale, system locale.

view filter
The set of criteria that restricts the report data that is currently being viewed. It
may include filtering conditions based on any of the objects on the report.

Visual Insight dashboard

A visually-striking, interactive display that takes a minimal amount of time to set
up and use. You can add text, interactive data visualizations, data filtering, and
multiple layers of organization to your dashboard, then take advantage of Visual
Insight's formatting options to customize your display.

widget
A type of control that presents data in a visual and interactive way; an interactive
Flash-only graph that dynamically updates when a new set of data is selected.
Some types include Gauge, Heat Map, and Stacked Area widgets.

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 462

INDEX

A activation code 118

absolute path for activating installation with 120
microstrategy.xml 251
requesting 118
Access. See Microsoft Access. 390
UNIX 90
accessing
Windows 61
MicroStrategy Connectivity
Wizard 133 adding or removing MicroStrategy
components (Windows) 373
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
admin role, assigning to a user
UNIX 81
JBoss - Windows - Web 247
Windows 53
Oracle 10g - Windows - Web 243
MicroStrategy Readme 131
Oracle Glassfish Server 222
MicroStrategy Web Administrator
page 214 Tomcat - Linux 236

Oracle Glassfish Server 224 Tomcat - Windows - Web 231

Web JSP 202 WebSphere - AIX - Web 214

activating installation 120 Administrative Server 210

activation code 118 AIX

FAQ 121 MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

hardware requirements 25
UNIX 90
patch requirements 32
Windows 61
Amazon Redshift
ODBC Driver for (Linux) 406

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 463

Installation and Configuration Guide

Amazon Redshift Wire Protocol automatic deployment

ODBC Driver for 384 MicroStrategy Mobile Server
JSP 197
Analyst. See MicroStrategy Analyst. 12
Web JSP 197
Analytics Modules. See MicroStrategy
Analytics Modules. 16 WebLogic 197
Apache Hive Wire Protocol
B
ODBC Driver for 383
backup frequency 39
Apache Web server
configuring to serve a static file 207 C
deploying MicroStrategy Mobile cache 37
Server JSP with 194
certified database and ODBC driver for
deploying MicroStrategy Web JSP MicroStrategy Intelligence
with 194 Server 43
proxy request to WebLogic 196 command line mode
starting 215 configuring metadata 355
Architect. See MicroStrategy creating project source 366
Architect. 12
MicroStrategy Configuration
ASP.NET Wizard 354
MicroStrategy Mobile Server and MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
IIS 188, 190 setup 362
MicroStrategy Web and IIS 187 Command Manager. See MicroStrategy
Command Manager. 9
Aster
common setups 19
ODBC driver for (Linux) 403
compatibility between Web JSP and
attribute element 37
Intelligence Server 42
authentication 160
component 1
anonymous 160
MicroStrategy Analytics Modules 16
database 161
MicroStrategy Developer 12
Integrated 161
MicroStrategy Geospatial
LDAP 161 Information System (GIS)
Connector 3
OAuth for Data Import 251
MicroStrategy Health Center 17
standard 160
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server 6
Windows 160
MicroStrategy Mobile 5
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server 11

464 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Office 3 Connectivity Wizard. See MicroStrategy

Connectivity Wizard. 133
MicroStrategy Portlets 3
MicroStrategy SDK 14 D
MicroStrategy System Manager 11 Data Import
MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting 16 Dropbox configuration 251
MicroStrategy Web 2 Facebook configuration 251
MicroStrategy Web Services 5 Google Analytics configuration 251
SequeLink ODBC Socket Server 11 Google BigQuery configuration 251
Configuration Wizard. See Google Drive configuration 251
MicroStrategy Configuration
Wizard. 140 Salesforce configuration 251
configuring Twitter configuration 251
Apache Web server to serve a static data source name 130
file 207
connecting to 142
command line mode (UNIX) 353
connection errors 424
JBoss 246
creating with Connectivity
MicroStrategy command line Wizard 133
mode 354
creating with Microsoft ODBC Data
Oracle JDK Source Administrator 134
JBoss on Windows 245 data warehouse 178
Tomcat on Linux 233 data source, accessing 172
Tomcat on Windows 227 data warehouse 130
Tomcat communicating with 128
Linux 234 connecting to 171
Windows 228 connection setting 172
configuring ODBC DSN 178
UNIX 132 login 182
Windows 131 database authentication 161
connection errors, data source database connection 178
name 424
certified ODBC driver 43
connection mapping 184
database instance 172
connection string 130
creating 177
connectivity 135, 351

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 465

Installation and Configuration Guide

database login 182 deploying MicroStrategy Web 188

creating 182 configuring data sources, Data
Import 251
database management system
(DBMS) 128 deploying MicroStrategy Web JSP
DataDirect Cloud JBoss (Windows) 244
ODBC driver for (Linux) 404 Linux 232, 235
DB Query Tool 136, 351 manually deploying with
WebLogic 197
DB2 for i ODBC driver 385
Oracle 10g 241-242
DB2 for iSeries ODBC driver 385
Oracle Glassfish Server 218-219
DB2 ODBC driver (UNIX/Linux) 384
SAP NetWeaver (Windows) 237-238
DB2 Wire Protocol ODBC driver
(Windows) 384 Tomcat 226, 232
DB2 z/OS ODBC driver 385 Tomcat (Linux) 235
DBMS. See database management Tomcat (Windows) 229
system. 128
WAR file with Oracle Glassfish
deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server Server 221
JSP 197
WebLogic and Apache 194, 196
JBoss (Windows) 244
WebLogic automatic
Oracle 10g 241 deployment 197
Oracle Glassfish Server 218-219 WebSphere 209
SAP NetWeaver (Windows) 238 WebSphere and IBM HTTP
Server 208
Tomcat 226
Windows 229
WAR file with Oracle Glassfish
Server 221 Developer. See MicroStrategy
Developer. 12
WebLogic and Apache 194
direct project source 157
WebLogic manual deployment 197
directory structure for UNIX 96
WebSphere and IBM HTTP
Server 208 Distribution Services. See
MicroStrategy Distribution
deploying MicroStrategy Mobile Server Services. 8
with ASP.NET and IIS 188
document 255
deploying MicroStrategy Operations
Manager with ASP.NET and driver. See ODBC driver. 43
IIS 190
Dropbox
configuring for Data Import 251

466 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

DSN Creator 424 Drive, configuring for Data

Import 251
E Greenplum Wire Protocol
element browsing 37 ODBC Driver for 389
Enterprise Manager. See MicroStrategy
Enterprise Manager. 10 H
example hardware recommendations
microstrategy.xml 251 Web JSP on UNIX/Linux 25
response.ini file for MicroStrategy Windows 22
Configuration Wizard
(Windows) 162 hardware requirements for Intelligence
Server on UNIX/Linux 25
response.ini file for
uninstallation 310 Health Center. See MicroStrategy
Health Center. 17
Excel. See Microsoft Excel. 390
History List

F creating repository 146

Facebook tables 146

configuring for Data Import 251 hotfix

file installation of MicroStrategy

Office 314
install.log 262
silent installation (Windows) 313
preinst.log 311
HP-UX
setup.exe 262
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server
folder structure for WebLogic and hardware requirements 25
Apache 195
HTML document 254-255
Freeform SQL, accessing data
sources 172 setting up document creation 256

Function Plug-in Wizard. See setting up document execution 259

MicroStrategy Function Plug-in
Wizard. 12 I
IBM HTTP Server
G
configuring to serve a static file 218
Google
IIS. See Microsoft IIS. 34
Analytics, configuring for Data
Import 251 Impala Wire Protocol
BigQuery, configuring for Data ODBC Driver for 386
Import 251

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 467

Installation and Configuration Guide

Informix 8 recommended installation

location 19
ODBC driver for (UNIX/Linux) 399
small production deployment 20
Informix Wire Protocol
software recommendations 29
ODBC Driver for 386
software recommendations for SDK
install.log 262 with JSP 33
installation software recommendations for Web
creating response.ini file JSP 33
(Windows) 264 software recommendations for Web
install.log file 262 Services J2EE 33

OEM silent (Windows) 343 software requirements for

Intelligence Server on
plug-in for Apache 196 UNIX/Linux 29
reducing download size 18, 46, 53, installation procedure
82, 335
checklist 48
response.ini file (Windows) 263
Linux 77
silent (UNIX) 317
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
silent (Windows) 311 on Linux 81
silent installation of hotfix MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
(Windows) 313 on UNIX 81
troubleshooting silent MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
(Windows) 312 on Windows 53
installation log file 262 UNIX 77
installation method 44 Windows 52
Command line mode 45 Intelligence Server. See MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server. 6
GUI mode 45
Intelligent Cube size 42
silent installation 45
international support 42
installation prerequisites 18
hardware recommendations for Web J
JSP on UNIX/Linux 25
Java heap size, setting
hardware recommendations for
Windows 22 Tomcat (Web) 229, 234
hardware requirements for WebLogic and Apache (Web) 204
Intelligence Server on
UNIX/Linux 25 WebSphere (Web) 216

large production deployment 21 JBoss (Windows - Web)

configuring 246

468 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

preconfiguration information 245 metadata repository 138, 143, 152, 341

JSP file, precompiling 205, 217 creating 142
methods of automated installation
L (Windows) 262
launching the project on WebLogic and Microsoft Access
Apache 204
connecting as data source
launching WebSphere Administrative (UNIX/Linux) 390
Console on Web 210
preparing database for access 391
LDAP authentication 161
Microsoft Excel
license 47
connecting as data source 413
Linux
connecting as data source
deploying MicroStrategy Web (UNIX/Linux) 390
JSP 232, 235
creating DSN 414
installation procedure 77
preparing as data source 413
MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard 81 preparing file for access 392

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Microsoft IIS 187

hardware requirements 25 ASP.NET and MicroStrategy Mobile
patch requirements 32 Server 188, 190

log ASP.NET and MicroStrategy

Web 187
installation 262
supporting IIS 7 or 7.5 34
statistics 39
Microsoft ODBC Data Source
Administrator 134
M
creating a DSN using 134
manual deployment
Microsoft SQL Azure
MicroStrategy Mobile Server
JSP 197 ODBC driver 387

Web JSP 197 Microsoft SQL Server ODBC

driver 387
MDX cube source
MicroStrategy
accessing a data source 172
MDX Cube Provider 65
installing the MDX Cube
Provider 65 uninstalling (UNIX/Linux) 378

metadata 130 MicroStrategy Analyst 12

table 143 MicroStrategy Analytics Modules 16

MicroStrategy Architect 12

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 469

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Command Manager 9 response.ini file (Windows) 161, 309

MicroStrategy common setups 19 setting up Intelligence server 151
MicroStrategy component 1 upgrading MicroStrategy 142
MicroStrategy Analytics Modules 16 MicroStrategy Connectivity Wizard 133
MicroStrategy Developer 12 accessing 133
MicroStrategy Geospatial creating a DSN 133
Information System (GIS)
Connector 3 MicroStrategy Developer

MicroStrategy Health Center 17 MicroStrategy Analyst 12

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server 6 MicroStrategy Architect 12

MicroStrategy Mobile 5 MicroStrategy Function Plug-in

Wizard 12
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server 11
MicroStrategy Server
MicroStrategy Office 3 Administrator 13
MicroStrategy Portlets 3 subcomponents 12
MicroStrategy SDK 14 MicroStrategy Distribution Services 8
MicroStrategy System Manager 11 MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager 10,
148
MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting 16
MicroStrategy Function Plug-in
MicroStrategy Web 2 Wizard 12
MicroStrategy Web Services 5 MicroStrategy Geospatial Information
re-installing 374 System (GIS) Connector 3

re-installing MicroStrategy Office MicroStrategy Health Center 17

MicroStrategy Office configuring 142

re-installing 375 configuring with a response.ini

file 161
SequeLink ODBC Socket Server 11
MicroStrategy installation
MicroStrategy Configuration prerequisites 18
Wizard 139
MicroStrategy Installation Wizard
accessing on UNIX/Linux 140
Linux 81
accessing on Windows 140
UNIX 81
configuring MicroStrategy Health
Center 142 Windows 53

connecting to a DSN 142 MicroStrategy Intelligence Server 6,

151, 154
creating a metadata repository 142
certified database and ODBC
prerequisites 138 driver 43

470 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

compatibility with Web JSP 42 configuring for WebSphere 214

connecting to Mobile Server 189- controlling access to
190
JBoss Windows 247
connecting to Web 188
Tomcat Linux 236
creating a server definition 153
Tomcat Windows 231
database connection 128
controlling access to (Oracle
hardware requirements Glassfish Server) 222
(UNIX/Linux) 25
MicroStrategy Mobile Server JSP
MicroStrategy Distribution deployment 194
Services 8
JBoss (Windows) 244
MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7
SAP NetWeaver (Windows) 238
MicroStrategy Report Services 7
WebLogic manual deployment 197
MicroStrategy Transaction
Services 9 MicroStrategy Mobile support on IIS 7
or 7.5 34
migrating from Windows to
UNIX/Linux 95 MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server 11

MultiSource Option 9 MicroStrategy Object Manager 14

selecting a project 154 MicroStrategy Office 3

setting up 151 allowing a user to install from a

network location 4
software requirements
(UNIX/Linux) 29 allowing installation from
MicroStrategy Web 56
subcomponents 7
hotfix installation 314
MicroStrategy MDX Cube Provider
silent installation 314
installing 65
MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7
MicroStrategy Mobile 5
sizing guidelines 38
MicroStrategy Mobile Server
MicroStrategy Operations Manager 11
connecting to Intelligence
Server 189-190 deploying with ASP.NET and
IIS 190
deploying with ASP.NET and
IIS 188 MicroStrategy Operations Manager JSP

WAR file location 191 WAR file location 191

MicroStrategy Mobile Server MicroStrategy Portlets 3

Administrator page MicroStrategy Professional Services 39
configuring for Oracle Glassfish MicroStrategy Readme, access to 131
Server 224

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 471

Installation and Configuration Guide

MicroStrategy Report Services 7 MicroStrategy Web JSP

setting up document execution 260 compatibility with Intelligence
Server 42
MicroStrategy Server Administrator 13
connection 249
MicroStrategy System Manager
deploying automatically with
overview 11 WebLogic 197
MicroStrategy Transaction Services 9 deploying manually with
MicroStrategy Tutorial Reporting 16 WebLogic 197

MicroStrategy Usher 17 deploying on Oracle 10g 242

MicroStrategy Web 186 deploying with JBoss

(Windows) 244
allowing a user to install
MicroStrategy Office from 56 deploying with SAP NetWeaver
(Windows) 237
ASP.NET 187
hardware recommendations for
connecting to Intelligence UNIX/Linux 25
Server 188
launching project (JBoss
deploying 188 Windows) 249
supporting on IIS 7 or 7.5 34 launching project (Oracle 10g) 244
versions 2 launching project (Tomcat
Windows) 232
Web Analyst 2
software recommendations 33
Web Professional 2
undeploying 226
Web Reporter 2
WAR file location 191
MicroStrategy Web Administrator
page 249 MicroStrategy Web Universal
accessing (JBoss Windows) 248 Web Reporter 2
accessing (Oracle) 243 microstrategy.xml
accessing (Tomcat Linux) 237 absolute path 251
accessing (Tomcat Windows) 231 example 251
controlling access to (JBoss sample modified 251
Windows) 247
migrating MicroStrategy Intelligence
controlling access to (Oracle Server 95
Glassfish Server) 222
MongoDB
controlling access to (Tomcat
Linux) 236 ODBC Driver for 388

controlling access to (Tomcat MSTRInst.log 311

Windows) 231 MultiSource Option 9, 172

472 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

MySQL Informix 8 (UNIX/Linux) 399

ODBC driver for (Linux) 401 Informix Wire Protocol 386
Microsoft SQL Azure 387
N
Microsoft SQL Server 387
Narrowcast Server. See MicroStrategy
Narrowcast Server. 11 MongoDB 388

Netezza MySQL (Linux) 401

ODBC driver for (UNIX/Linux) 400 Netezza (UNIX/Linux) 400

network bandwidth 41 odbc.ini file (UNIX/Linux) 416

Oracle Wire Protocol 388
O
other relational databases for
Object Manager. See MicroStrategy Windows 412
Object Manager. 14
PostgreSQL Wire Protocol 390
ODBC 128, 130
Red Brick (Linux) 395
default directory (UNIX) 132
Salesforce 394
default directory (Windows) 131
SAP HANA 409
ODBC connectivity 135, 351
SequeLink 390
ODBC driver 130
Sybase Adaptive Server IQ
Amazon Redshift (Linux) 406 (UNIX/Linux) 396

Amazon Redshift Wire Protocol 384 Sybase ASE Wire Protocol 390

Apache Hive Wire Protocol 383 Teradata (UNIX/Linux) 397

Aster (Linux) 403 Teradata (Windows) 412

certified 131 testing connectivity 135, 351

certified database 43 Vertica (Linux) 407

DataDirect Cloud (Linux) 404 odbc.ini 416

DB Query Tool 136, 351 OLAP Services. See MicroStrategy

OLAP Services. 7
DB2 (UNIX/Linux) 384
Open Database Connectivity 128
DB2 (Windows) 384
Operations Manager. See MicroStrategy
DB2 for i 385 Operations Manager. 11
DB2 for iSeries 385 options file 317
DB2 z/OS 385 Oracle 10g
Greenplum Wire Protocol 389 deploying MicroStrategy Mobile
Server JSP 241
Impala Wire Protocol 386

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 473

Installation and Configuration Guide

deploying MicroStrategy Web patch requirements

JSP 241-242
AIX 32
deploying Web JSP with the Oracle
Enterprise Manager 242 Linux 32

preconfiguration information Solaris 32

(Web) 241 performance-based setup
Oracle Glassfish Server MicroStrategy Professional
accessing MicroStrategy Web Services 39
Administrator page 224 WebLogic and Apache (Web) 204
connecting to the Project page 226 permission errors 425
deploying MicroStrategy Mobile plug-in for Apache 196
Server JSP 218-219
plugin-cfg.xml, regenerating 213
deploying MicroStrategy Mobile
Server JSP as a WAR file 221 port number 159
deploying MicroStrategy Web Intelligence Server 154
JSP 218-219
portlets. See MicroStrategy Portlets. 3
deploying MicroStrategy Web JSP as
a WAR file 221 PostgreSQL Wire Protocol

recommended configuration for ODBC driver for 390

UNIX/Linux 218 precompiling
undeploying Mobile Server JSP 226 JSP file in WebLogic 205
undeploying Web JSP 226 JSP file in WebSphere 217
Oracle Glassfish Server (Web) preconfiguration information
preconfiguration information 218 Apache (Web) 195
recommended configuration for JBoss (Windows - Web) 245
UNIX/Linux 218
Oracle 10g (Web) 241
Oracle Glassfish Server Admin Console
Oracle Glassfish Server (Web) 218
launching 220
Tomcat (Linux - Web) 233
Oracle JDK
Tomcat (Windows - Web) 226
configuring 227, 245
WebLogic (Web) 195
Oracle Wire Protocol
WebSphere (Web) 209
ODBC driver for 388
preinst.log 311
P prerequisites for MicroStrategy
Configuration Wizard 138
pageCheckSeconds parameter 206
processor speed 40
password to metadata 152

474 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

production deployment creating through MicroStrategy

Configuration Wizard
large 21 (Windows) 162
small 20 example for uninstall
project 172 (Windows) 310

accessing multiple data sources 172 installation (Windows) 263

project source 141, 157 MicroStrategy Configuration Wizard

(Windows) 161, 309
authentication 160
MicroStrategy Health Center 161
direct 157
parameters and options for
server 157 Configuration Wizard
(Windows) 164
three-tier 158
parameters and options for
two-tier 157 installation (Windows) 264
uninstalling (Windows) 309
Q
upgrade 161
Query Builder, accessing data
sources 172 using for Configuration Wizard
(Windows) 163
R using for installation
(Windows) 308
R (analytics)
using through Configuration Wizard
integrating with MicroStrategy 12 (UNIX) 367
R Integration Pack 12 restarting WebSphere application server
re-deploying Web JSP with Web 213
WebLogic 204
re-installing a MicroStrategy S
component (Windows) 374
Salesforce
control panel 374
configuring for Data Import 251
re-installing MicroStrategy
Office 375 ODBC driver for 394
Red Brick SAP HANA
ODBC driver for 395 ODBC driver for 409
Report Services. See MicroStrategy SAP NetWeaver (Windows)
Report Services. 7
deploying MicroStrategy Web
requesting activation code 118 JSP 238
response.ini file SDK. See MicroStrategy SDK. 14
creating for installation
(Windows) 264

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 475

Installation and Configuration Guide

security sizing guidelines 36

access to MicroStrategy Web caching 37
Administrator page 231, 236,
247 Intelligent Cube size 42

SequeLink MicroStrategy OLAP Services 38

configuring ODBC driver 393 MicroStrategy Professional

Services 39
ODBC driver for 390
network bandwidth 41
SequeLink ODBC Socket Server 11
number of users 37
Server Administrator. See
MicroStrategy Server processor speed 40
Administrator. 13 report complexity 37
server definition 151, 153 Report Services document 38
connectivity setting 172 software recommendations 29
server project source 157 SDK for JSP 33
setting up document creation Web JSP 33
HTML document 256 Web Services J2EE 33
setting up document execution software requirements for Intelligence
HTML document 259 Server on UNIX/Linux 29

Report Services documents 260 Solaris

setup command-line parameter MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

(Windows) 308 hardware requirements 25

setup.exe 262 patch requirements 32

silent installation 311 specifying a port number 154

hotfix (Windows) 313 SQL

introduction (UNIX) 317 query 137, 353

OEM (Windows) 343 script 150

options file (UNIX) 317-318 starting

output (UNIX) 337 Administrative Server 210

output (Windows) 311 Apache Web Server 215

parameters (UNIX) 321 Web module for WebSphere 214

perform on Windows 343 WebSphere Administrative

Console 210
troubleshooting (Windows) 312
WebSphere default application
values for different languages 346 server 211

476 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

static file configuring Oracle JDK 233

configuring Apache Web server Tomcat (Windows - Web)
for 207
preconfiguration information 226
configuring IBM HTTP Server 218
setting Java heap size 229
statistics
Tomcat (Windows)
log 39
deploying MicroStrategy Web
table 148 JSP 229
support Transaction Services. See MicroStrategy
Transaction Services. 9
international 42
troubleshooting
Sybase Adaptive Server IQ
DSN connection errors 423
ODBC driver for (UNIX/Linux) 396
History List creation errors 424
Sybase ASE Wire Protocol
metadata creation errors 424
ODBC driver for 390
permission errors 425
System Manager. See MicroStrategy
System Manager. 11 server port number errors 423
statistics creation errors 424
T
UNIX 422
table, metadata 143
Tutorial Reporting. See MicroStrategy
Teradata Tutorial Reporting. 16
ODBC driver for (UNIX/Linux) 397 Twitter
ODBC driver for (Windows) 412 configuring for Data Import 251
three-tier project source 158 two-tier project source 157
Tomcat
U
deploying MicroStrategy Mobile
Server JSP 226 unattended installation (UNIX) 317
deploying MicroStrategy Web uninstalling
JSP 226, 232
Control Panel (Windows) 376
Tomcat (Linux - Web)
MicroStrategy (UNIX/Linux) 378
deploying MicroStrategy Web
JSP 235 response.ini (Windows) 309

preconfiguration information 233 uninstalling MicroStrategy components

(Windows) 376
setting Java heap size 234
MicroStrategy Health Center
Tomcat (Web) (Windows) 377
configuring 228, 234 MicroStrategy Office (Windows) 377

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 477

Installation and Configuration Guide

UNIX Web module for WebSphere,

starting 214
configuring ODBC 132
Web server OS
installation procedure 77
AIX 33
MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard 81 HP-UX 33
verifying installation 96 Linux 33
user assigned to admin role Windows 33
JBoss - Windows (Web) 247 Web. See MicroStrategy Web. 2
Oracle 10g - Windows (Web) 243 web.xml
Oracle Glassfish Server 222 re-deploying the application 204
Tomcat - Linux 236 WebLogic (Solaris - Web) 194
Tomcat - Windows (Web) 231 WebLogic and Apache
WebSphere - AIX- Web 214 deploying MicroStrategy Mobile
Server JSP 194
user connection mapping. See
connection mapping. 184 production mode 197
Usher. See MicroStrategy Usher. 17 WAR file 201
WebLogic and Apache (Web)
V
deploying MicroStrategy Web
verifying installation JSP 194, 196
UNIX 96 exploding the WAR file 199
Windows 67 folder structure 195
Vertica launching the project 204
ODBC driver for (Linux) 407 pageCheckSeconds parameter 206
performance-based setup 204
W
precompiling JSP file 205
WAR file
preconfiguration information 195
location 191
setting Java heap size 204
WAR file (Web)
WebSphere (Web) 208
exploding for WebLogic and Apache
(Web) 199 application installation 211

unzipping for WebLogic and Apache deploying MicroStrategy Web

(Web) 201 JSP 209

Web JSP. See also MicroStrategy Web launching Administrative

JSP. 2 Console 210

478 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.

 Installation and Configuration Guide

precompiling the JSP file 217

preconfiguration 209
regenerating plugin-cfg.xml 213
restarting application server 213
setting Java heap size 216
starting default application
server 211
WebSphere and IBM HTTP Server
deploying MicroStrategy Web
JSP 208
Windows
authentication 160
configuring ODBC 131
deploying MicroStrategy Web
JSP 229
hardware recommendations 22
installation procedure 52
MicroStrategy Installation
Wizard 53
verifying installation 67
Web server OS 33
Windows INI 263

X
XSL report style 39

© 2016, MicroStrategy Inc. 479

Installation and Configuration Guide

480 © 2016, MicroStrategy Inc.